4.2 MLH - Technical Specifications - Phase 2A-1

TENDER DOCUMENTS FOR:
MILTON LOGISTICS HUB - PHASE 2A

GRADING & DRAINAGE
MI. 36.79 TO 41.00 HALTON SUB
MILTON, ONTARIO
SPEC. NUMBER: WS4169361118
AECOM FILE: 60579933
DATE: September 2023
ISSUED FOR TENDER
The reproduction of these tender documents in whole or in part without the

written permission of the Engineer is strictly prohibited.
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION

CN Eastern Region
CN – DESIGN & INDEX FOR
CONSTRUCTION MILTON LOGISTICS HUB – PHASE 2A SEPTEMBER 2023
GRADING & DRAINAGE PAGE 1 OF 4
SECTION TITLE # OF PAGES
Annex "C" Instructions to Bidders ....................................................................................... 09

Annex "B" Form of Tender .................................................................................................. 24
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
01005 General Requirements ............................................................................................................... 21
01340 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 13
01500 Temporary Facilities ................................................................................................................... 04
01545 Safety Requirements .................................................................................................................. 10
01546 Flagging and Track Protection ................................................................................................... 07
01550 Track Closures ...........................................................................................................................03
01560 Environmental Protection ........................................................................................................... 26
01600 Material and Equipment ............................................................................................................. 02
01610 Setting Out and Measurement ................................................................................................... 02
01620 Quality Control and Assurance .................................................................................................. 03
01800 Project Closeout ......................................................................................................................... 02
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02000 Mobilization and Demobilization................................................................................................. 03
02140 Dewatering .................................................................................................................................. 08
02141 Construction Access Road ......................................................................................................... 03
02143 CN Track Approach Ramp ......................................................................................................... 03
02144 Site Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 03
02150 Temporary Flow Diversion ......................................................................................................... 08
02160 High Flow Contingency Plan ...................................................................................................... 06
02200 Signal and Fibre Optic Cables ................................................................................................... 13
02201 Construction Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 12
02202 Noise and Vibration Monitoring & Control ................................................................................. 09
02203 Conditions Surveys ..................................................................................................................... 06
02225 Site Demolition & Removals ....................................................................................................... 04
02231 Clearing & Grubbing ................................................................................................................... 05
02272 Erosion Control – General .......................................................................................................... 05
02276 Retained Soil Systems, Wall-Slope ........................................................................................... 31
02283 Noise Wall System ..................................................................................................................... 10
02311 Site Grading ................................................................................................................................ 16
02312 Winter Work ................................................................................................................................ 06
02315 Excavating, Trenching & Backfilling ........................................................................................... 13
02316 Structural Excavations ................................................................................................................ 06
02340 Geogrid and Geotextiles ............................................................................................................. 04
02350 Traffic Control ............................................................................................................................. 07
02362 Dust & Mud Control .................................................................................................................... 04
02368 Temporary Railway Shoring ....................................................................................................... 07
02372 Rip Rap ....................................................................................................................................... 06
02383 Steel H-Piles ............................................................................................................................... 08
02384 Concrete Caissons…………………………………………………………………………………. 04
02620 Subdrainage................................................................................................................................ 04
02630 Culverts & Storm Sewers ........................................................................................................... 06
02631 Drainage Structures .................................................................................................................... 05

02632 Clean Storm Pipes & Drainage Structures ................................................................................ 02
02640 Equipment Rental ....................................................................................................................... 02
02701 Granular Materials ...................................................................................................................... 07
02742 Hot Mix Asphalt-Superpave ....................................................................................................... 05
02761 Painted Traffic Lines-Durable..................................................................................................... 03
02825 Fencing and Road Signage........................................................................................................ 07
02844 Steel Beam Guide Rail ............................................................................................................... 03
02910 Seed Sod and Cover .................................................................................................................. 07
02912 Topsoil and Finish Grading ........................................................................................................ 05
02970 Tree and Shrub Planting ............................................................................................................ 07
02972 Livestakes ................................................................................................................................... 03
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK

03200 Concrete Reinforcement ............................................................................................................ 05
03203 Concrete Accessories................................................................................................................. 11
03310 Curb and Gutter .......................................................................................................................... 04
03312 Concrete Work ............................................................................................................................ 26
03320 Wet Cast Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................... 05
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05120 Structural Steel ........................................................................................................................... 08
05121 Metal Railings for Structures ...................................................................................................... 02
DIVISION 7 – MISCELLANEOUS
07100 Waterproofing Bridge Decks ...................................................................................................... 06
07109 Bearings ...................................................................................................................................... 04
07112 High-Performance Waterproofing. ............................................................................................. 09
07113 Ballast Mat System ..................................................................................................................... 06
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL WORK

16010 Common Work Results for Electrical ......................................................................................... 06
16034 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings .................................................................. 05
16043 Installation of Cables in Trenches and Ducts ............................................................................ 04
16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ..................................................................................... 06
16111 Conduits ...................................................................................................................................... 04
DIVISION 20 – MECHANICAL WORK

200500 Mechanical General Requirements ........................................................................................... 07
200517 Pipe Welding ............................................................................................................................... 06
200521 Pressure Gauges ........................................................................................................................ 03
200524 Valves – Pressure Piping ........................................................................................................... 06
200553 Mechanical Identification ............................................................................................................ 10
201112 Pressure Piping .......................................................................................................................... 27
221500 Compressed Air System............................................................................................................. 12
231123 Piping, Valves and Fittings (Gas/Propane) ................................................................................ 09
CN STANDARD DOCUMENTS
CN 3817-B Bid Bond .................................................................................................................. 01
Annex “A” Form of Contract CN 3819 ...................................................................................... 12

CN-8653-B Extra Work Order .................................................................................................... 01
SCP-1005 Instructions to Excavators for the Protection of Underground S&C Cables ........... 26
CN Right of Entry Form for Invitees .............................................................................. 01
CN Right of Entry .......................................................................................................... 10
Annex “D” Safety Guidelines for Contractors ........................................................................... 22
Annex “D” Undertaking by Contractor ...................................................................................... 01
Annex “E” Environmental Guidelines for Contractors .............................................................. 12
CN “Draft” PPE Standard .............................................................................................. 19
CN Safety Guidelines for Contractors ........................................................................... 05
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
1. Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and Proponent Commitments

CN Milton Logistics Hub, Milton, Ontario
Stantec, dated July 17, 2019 ...................................................................................................... 55
2. Final List of Approval Conditions

Issued under Section 54 of the CEAA, dated January 21, 2021 ................................................ 49
3. Water Well Decommissioning Plan

CN Milton Logistics Hub
Stantec File Number 160960844, dated March 1, 2021 ........................................................ 48
4. Draft Archaeological and Cultural Resources Protection Plan

Stantec, dated March 9, 2021 .................................................................................................... 21
5. Draft Wildlife Management and Connectivity Plan

Stantec File Number 160960844, dated May 18, 2021 .............................................................. 49
6. Accident and Malfunction Response Plan Template

(Stantec – Template to be provided upon project award)
7. Draft Environmental Protection Plan

Stantec, dated April 30, 2021 ..................................................................................................... 31
8. Draft Cultural Heritage Documentation: 5269 Tremaine Road, Milton, Ontario

Stantec, 2020.............................................................................................................................. 38
9. AECOM Geotechnical and Hydrogeological Data Report

AECOM Project Number 60579933, dated July 2023 .............................................................. 261
10. Designated Substances and Hazardous Building Materials Assessment Report


AECOM Project Number 60579933, dated May 2021 ...............................................................XX
11. CN Fibre Optic Cable Conduits and Construction Guidelines

CN-IT-IO-3011-00…………………………………………………………………………………………13
*** END OF INDEX***

CN – DESIGN & INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ANNEX “C”
CONSTRUCTION MILTON LOGISTICS HUB – PHASE 2 SEPTEMBER 2023
PROJECT OVERVIEW
.1 Canadian National Railway Company (“CN”) is planning to construct its Milton

Logistics Hub (MLH) to meet the needs of the Greater Toronto and Hamilton
Area – the fastest-growing area in Canada. MLH will be a satellite terminal to the
Brampton Intermodal Terminal (BIT), providing additional capacity and alleviating
growing congestion at BIT. The MLH terminal will be in Milton, Ontario, adjacent
to the CN mainline, on the Halton subdivision between Mile 38.7 and Mile 40.7.
The entire project limits for all construction phases are between Mile 36.86 and
Mile 41.26.
.2 The Project has gone through an extensive federal environmental assessment

and regulatory review. In addition to addressing the 325 Project conditions, CN is
implementing a number of measures to mitigate the potential effects of the
Project and enhance the environment. CN is also launching a pilot program for
the use of electric trucks as part of its intermodal fleet.
.3 Milton Logistics Hub construction is planned to be constructed in multiple

construction phases. Phase 1 and Phase 1A contracts are awarded, and the
construction is ongoing and expected to be completed by quarter 4 of the year
2023. The project limits for this Phase 2A contract are between Mile 36.79 and
Mile 41.00. The contract includes the following works:
.1 Track grading and drainage for the construction of the pocket track.
.2 Track grading and drainage for the mainline between South of Britannia
Road and Derry Road.
.3 Lower Base Line Road grade separation, including rail over road bridge.
.4 Track grading and drainage for the mainline in the vicinity of the Lower
Base Line new bridge (both sides of the bridge)
.5 Britannia access road, including the private overpass bridge (road over
rail).
c SITE VISIT
a) The Contractor must have visited the site before submitting a Tender in order to be
thoroughly acquainted with all local conditions under which the Tenderer will be called
upon to carry out the work coming under this Contract.
b) A mandatory site meeting is scheduled at the following time and location to discuss this
Contract and view the site. This will be the only opportunity for Tenderers to enter CN
property. The Contractor and their employees, while on CN property, will be required
to wear safety hard hats, safety glasses, orange reflective apparel and safety boots
in accordance with Company regulations. Attendance is limited to one person per
invited contractor.
Time: September 21st @ 2PM (E.D.T)
Location: 61 James Snow Parkway, Unit 202, Milton, ON, L9E 0H1
Contact: Please confirm your intent to participate in the site visit by

September 14 (5:00 PM E.D.T).
Please submit your confirmation and personal name, e-mail, and

cellphone number to:
ana.carlotto@cn.ca
d) Before entering Railway property, the Contractor will be required to sign a CN

Release of Liability for Invitees in accordance with Company regulations.
e) The site may also be viewed from public roads and road crossings in the area.
Contractors are prohibited from entering CN property for purposes of viewing the
site.
f) Upon submission of Tender documents, the Contractor acknowledges that they

are satisfied with the nature and location of the work, the general and local
conditions, particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and
storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and
uncertainties of weather, or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation
and conditions of all surface and subsurface materials, including streams and
groundwater to be encountered, as well as the character of equipment and
facilities needed, preliminary to, and during the prosecution of this Contract.
Further, the Contractor has considered all exploratory work, done by or for the
Railway, as well as information presented by the Drawings and Specifications
made a part of this Contract. Any failure of the Contractor to be acquainted with all
the available information will not be cause for any relief of the responsibility for
estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work.
Representations made but not so expressly stated and for which liability is not
expressly assumed by the Railway in the Contract and for information furnished by
or for the Railway or for any understanding, opinions, or representations made or
so expressed by any of its officers or agents during or prior to the execution of this
Contract, must be deemed only for the information of the Contractor and the
Contractor must have no claim against the Railway resulting from such information.
2 WORK SCHEDULE
The Contractor is expected to commence the Work within two (2) weeks of the Notice
to proceed with the work.
a) For the purposes of developing the construction schedule, the Contractor shall develop
the construction schedule to complete the entire project work within the allocated
timeframe. The Contractor shall consider all restricted activity periods indicated in the
Contract drawing in developing the construction schedule. The contractor shall submit
the construction schedule together with the bid document, considering the completion
date for the entire work under the Phase 2A contract by September 30, 2025. The
Contractor shall deploy multiple crews (as much as required) to undertake the contract
work concurrently and complete the major works in accordance with the following
milestones and notes:
1. Milestone 1: Complete the entire work for the pocket track bed and other
associated works by August 01, 2024.
2. Milestone 2: Complete the Lower Base Line bridge construction, including the
wing walls, to be ready to receive the new tracks by October 30, 2024.
3. Milestone 3: Complete the entire track bed, drainage, and utilities on both sides of
the new Lower Base Line Bridge by November 15, 2024.
• Coordinate two (2) months in advance with CN Track and Signal crews to
construct the track on top of the bridge and remove the existing track
diversion through the Lower Base Line.
4. Milestone 4: Complete the entire track bed, drainage, and utilities work between
South of Britannia Road and Derry Road by June 30, 2025.
5. Milestone 5: Complete the entire Lower Base Line grade separation and open it to
the public by May 31, 2025.
• The Lower Base Line grade separation must be open to the public on May
31, 2025, and the date is firm and non-negotiable.
6. Milestone 6: Complete the entire work for Britannia access road, including the
bridge and other associated works, by July 01, 2025.
7. Milestone 7: Demobilization and project closeout by November 30, 2025.
b) The contractor shall deploy the following minimum number of multiple crews to
undertake the contract work concurrently. The contractor has no right to claim delays
in case the following minimum number of working crews is not provided.
No. Description of Work Minimum number of working Crews
1 Pocket track - Track bed Two (2) Grading Crews

2 Overpass structural Two (2) Structural Crews
3 Overpass – Approaches including RSS wall Two (2) Crews
4 Grading between south of Britannia Road to Two (2) Grading Crews
Derry Road
5 Lower Base Line Road grade separation Two (2) structural crews and Two (2)
excavation, grading crews and other
associated works.
The contractor shall review the milestones date and provide a sufficient number of
working crews to meet the entire project completion date.
c) The Contractor must submit, with the Proposal, a detailed schedule or diagram
(in pdf format) showing the dates by which all activities will be commenced and
finished, bearing in mind that the completion date must not be altered. The Contractor
must indicate, in the schedule, expected progress in increments of not more than one
week.
d) Based on the Contractor proposed schedule, Contract must submit with the Proposal a
contract spend estimate by year of construction, i.e., 2024 and 2025.
e) The schedule shall be based on the following restrictions:
i) Confine all work activities between 07:00 and 17:00. When night work or
work outside of the period is required, notice must be provided to the
Engineer with a minimum of seven (7 days’ notice).
ii) Working shift is not to exceed 10 hours per day for activities on-site where
flagging is required. Flagging will not be provided for more than 10 hours
per day on site. The working shift will include the daily job briefing and
mobilization/demobilization from the work location(s). Daily downtime
calculation does not include the daily job briefing and
mobilization/demobilization.
ii) Request for additional work hours and work on Saturday, Sunday, or
Holidays must be approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall not be
entitled to extra payment for working hours beyond 10 hours per day and
for working hours during weekends, public holidays, and night shifts to
meet or expedite the construction schedule.
iii) The contractor shall consider that all culverts shall be installed during track
closures required to complete the work during the night shift and over the
weekends.
iv) The contractor shall consider that sections of the track grading along the
existing mainline will be completed during track closures. The work shall be
undertaken during the night shift and over the weekends.
v) The Contractor must submit, in writing, the proposed hours of work that will
constitute the working day to maximize productivity. The proposed hour of
work must take into account the daily rail traffic, as provided in the General
Staging Notes and/or observed by the Contractor.
vi) The Contractor shall take into consideration downtime to permit the
passage of trains on the adjacent tracks. Downtime calculations do not
include the daily job briefings and mobilization/demobilization. The
Contractor shall have no claims for additional payment for delays.
TENDER CONDITIONS
Tenderer must confirm their intention to submit a proposal no later than 4:00 pm E.D.T.,
September 20, 2023, through Ariba or by email to ana.carlotto@cn.ca
3 BID DEPOSIT
It must be a condition of all Tenders that there be deposited with each Tender, a Bid Bond
in form and to the amount as follows:
a) Bid Bond
The Bid Bond must be in favour of the Canadian National Railway Company in the
amount of ten percent (10%) of the estimated total amount of the Tender, issued
by a Guarantee or Indemnity Company, approved by the Railway, and having an
office in Canada, preferably in the Province in which the work will be performed
and in form and terms satisfactory to the Railway.
b) Upon the opening of Tenders, all Bid Bonds will be immediately taken in charge by
the CN Contract Officer, who must retain them in safekeeping until advised by the
Engineer as to their retention or return.
c) Tenders shall be open for acceptance for a period of 60 days after the Tender
closing date.
d) Bonds so deposited will be returned to unsuccessful Tenderers after the Contract

has been awarded.
e) The Bid Deposit of the successful Tenderer shall be returned to them after they
have furnished the Railway with the security hereinafter referred to.
4 CONSENT OF SURETY
It shall be a condition of all Tenderers that there be deposited with each Tender a letter
from a recognized surety company, licensed to operate in the Province of Ontario, stating
that, if the Tenderer is successful, the surety company will issue the following in Canadian
National Railway Company’s name, and in form acceptable to the Railway:
a) A Performance Bond for fifty percent (50%) of the estimated Contract price.
b) A Labour and Material Payment Bond for fifty percent (50%) of the estimated
Contract price (excluding H.S.T.).
c) CN Rail is working to obtain necessary approvals to ensure that project

commences as per the proposed schedule. In case of any unexpected delays to
the project commencement date, the Contractor shall maintain the Contract bid
price for a period of minimum six months from date the award date.
5 CONTRACT SECURITY
It shall be a condition of the Acceptance of a Tender, whether so expressed in the

Acceptance or not, that the Tenderer must, within eight (8) days from Notification of
Acceptance, and as a guarantee of the due fulfillment of all the provisions of the Contract,
furnish the Railway with security. Such security must be in the following form:
PERFORMANCE BOND and LABOUR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND
a) A Performance Bond of a Guarantee or Indemnity Company, approved by the

Railway Company and having an office in Canada, preferably in the Province in
which the work will be performed, in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the
estimated Contract Price (excluding H.S.T.) and in form and terms satisfactory to
the Railway.
b) The acceptable form of a Performance Bond shall be Document Number CCDC

221 of the Canadian Construction Documents Committee (C.C.D.C.). Any variation
from this form may result in rejection.
c) A Labour and Materials Payment Bond of a Guarantee or Indemnity Company,

approved by the Railway Company and having an office in Canada, preferably in
the Province in which the work will be performed, in an amount equal to fifty
percent (50%) of the estimated Contract Price (excluding G.S.T.) and in form and
terms satisfactory to the Railway.
d) The acceptable form of a Labour and Materials Payment Bond shall be Document
Number CCDC 222 of the Canadian Construction Documents Committee
(C.C.D.C.). Any variation from this form may result in rejection:
i) Tenderers shall note that Certified Cheques, Government of Canada Bonds or

Letters of Guarantee form a Bank are not acceptable as Bid Deposits or
Contract Security on this contract. Failure to provide only the Bonding specified
will involve rejection of the tender.
f) If such security has not been received by the Railway within eight (8) days from
Notification of Acceptance the Railway must have the right to retain the amount of the
Bid Deposit as liquidated damages and to rescind the award.
g) Upon the satisfactory completion of the Contract and the passing of the final estimate,
such security will be returned to the successful Tenderer.
6 FORMAL AGREEMENT
a) The successful Contractor will be required to enter into a formal agreement with the
Railway on its Standard Contract Form No. CN-3819, a copy of which is attached with
these documents.
7 EMPLOYMENT
a) Preference in employment will be given to residents of Canada and preferably to

residents of the district in which the work is being performed.
8 TENDER FORMS
a) Tenders must be submitted on the forms supplied by the Canadian National Railway
Company for this purpose and no Tender or amendment of Tender will be considered
unless submitted on the said forms prior to the time of closing.
b) The enclosed "Instructions to Bidders" must not be detached from the "Form of
Tender" as it constitutes a part of the Contract.
c) The Railway requires that all pages in the Form of Tender be completed in their
entirety prior to Tender closing. Late submissions of tendering information will not be
considered or accepted.
9 SUBSTITUTIONS
Tenderer must submit, on the attached Form of Tender, a complete list of proposed
substitutions together with cost differences. The Tenderer must complete the Form of
Tender by pricing the item listed, not a substitution. The substitution and the associated
cost difference(s) can only be noted under the Substitutions section.
10 TRADES
a) Tenderer must submit, on the attached Form of Tender, a complete list of trades to be
executed together with Contractor's own forces, as well as a completed list of Sub-
Contractors to be employed.
b) Any substitution of Sub-Contractors must be approved in writing by the Engineer.

c) The total value of all work by Sub-Contractors shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of
the Total Contract Price.
11 SOURCE OF MATERIALS
Tenderer must submit, on the attached Form of Tender, a complete list of sources of
materials he/she intends to supply.
12 TENDER EVALUATION
a) CN reserves the right to accept the Bid that it deems in its discretion most
advantageous. The Bid having the lowest cost to CN or any Bid shall not necessarily
be accepted. CN may take into account the following evaluation criteria (not
necessarily in order of importance):
i) Total Contract Price;

ii) The Bidders submitted a schedule, work sequencing & staging plan;
iii) Attendance at the mandatory Site Meeting;
iv) Proper Completion of the Bid Documents;
v) Compliance with the Bid Document Requirements;
vi) The Bidders Safety Performance Record in the Execution of Construction
Work;
vii) CN's relationship with the Bidder;
viii) Scheduling considerations;
ix) Indigenous Engagement Plan;
x) Environmental Policy; and
xi) Compliance with the requirement for use of zero-emission equipment.
b) CN is not obliged to inform the Bidders of the relative weight to be given to any
particular evaluation criteria, to open the Bids publicly, or to provide reasons to any
Bidder with respect to any use of the CN’s discretion.
c) CN and the Engineer may make such investigations as they deem necessary to
evaluate the ability of any Bidder and its named subcontractors to perform the Work,
and CN may utilize the results of such investigation in awarding the Contract.
d) Qualifications of the Bidder may include consideration of the:
i) experience and present workload and capacity of the Bidders, their

proposed project personnel (including their proposed superintendent) and
their nominated Suppliers and Sub-contractors;
ii) adequacy of proposed construction plant and equipment and labour;
iii) financial capability and credit-worthiness of the Bidders and the CN’s
overall assessment of each Bidder’s ability to perform and complete the
Work in accordance with the Bid Documents and in coordination with other
contractors who may be located on the site; and
iv) verification of (i) through (iii) through third-party references and inquiries.
e) The relative weight given to selection criteria shall be determined in the discretion of
the Owner.
f) CN reserves the right, in its discretion, to seek further information from, or clarification
of, any Bid submitted by any Bidder in respect of any of the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents. CN is entitled to utilize the information or clarifications received
in awarding the Contract.
g) Accepted alternates and equivalents may, at CN’s option, be considered in conjunction

with the base bid in determining the price to be used in contract award.
h) The Bidder acknowledges and agrees that it shall have no claim against, or entitlement
to damages from, CN or the Engineer by reason of the CN’s rejection of its Bid or all
Bids.
i) Receipt of an invitation to bid by a Bidder or receipt and evaluation by CN of a Bid

does not imply that any Bidder is qualified.
13 FAXMITTALS
Tenders submitted by faxmittal transmission will not be accepted.
14 TENDER CLOSING
a) All tenders must be submitted by Ariba. No other forms of submissions will be

accepted.
b) Time for receiving Tenders will close at 3:00 PM, E.D.T., October 30, 2023 and no
Tender or amendment of Tender will be accepted or considered if received by the
Railway after that hour.
15 ADDENDA
a) If necessary, written instructions or explanations in the form of Addenda will be sent to

all Tenderers via Ariba.
i) Tenderers must state on the Tender Form in the space provided the numbers of
all Addenda received and included for by them in the preparation of the tender.
16 SAFETY PERFORMANCE RECORD IN THE EXECUTION OF CONSTRUCTION

WORK
a) The Tenderer shall include in their Tender submission an attestation issued by the
Workers' Compensation Board indicating the Contractor's Safety Performance
Rating/Record and all "lost time injuries" during the last five years.
17 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
a) The Tenderer shall include in their Tender submission financial statements for the
past three (3) fiscal years, prepared in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles of the jurisdiction in which the Proponent is located, and
audited by an independent certified public accountant; or a statement from the
Proponent regarding how financial information may be reviewed by CN.
19 ENQUIRIES
a) Any enquiries concerning the Tender Documents must be submitted no later than
September 29, 2023.
b) No questions or requests for clarifications, changes or amendments to the Tender

Documents shall be entertained after this time regardless of reason.
c) All technical enquiries regarding clarification of drawings and specifications must

be sent via Ariba.
*** END OF SECTION ***

CN – DESIGN & FORM OF TENDER FOR ANNEX "B"
The undersigned hereby offers and agrees to furnish all and every kind of supervision, labour, tools, equipment,
machinery, service and materials that may be required and to execute and complete in a satisfactory and
workmanlike manner all the work in accordance with Plans and Specifications attached hereto and exhibited and
such further details as may be furnished from time to time during the progress of the work.
We have examined the Plans, Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, the Site and the existing conditions and
have ascertained all necessary particulars with regard to the work and upon acceptance of this Tender, we
are prepared to enter into a contract in the form exhibited with the said Specification, for the performance of
the work for the Lump Sum and/or Unit Prices shown below.
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SPEC. NO. refers to the specifications listed in the index.

Note: The description of items called for under the “Schedule of Prices” are of a general nature; the
Contractor shall refer to the Specifications and Drawings of the Bid Documents for an all-encompassing
description of the work for each item.
Proponents can submit the schedule of prices in a locked format such as .pdf and in addition please
submit schedule of prices in the excel format provided in Ariba.
The listed Lump Sum and/or Unit Prices in the Schedule of Prices must include all taxes imposed by
competent taxing authorities, including business taxes properly payable by the Contractor. Harmonized Sales
Tax is not included in the above Lump Sum and/or Unit Prices and is to be shown as a separate item.
Unit Price Quantities shown in the Schedule of Prices are estimated only. All payments will be made on the
basis of "As Constructed" quantities.
Lump Sum items will be only eligible for payment only if the material/service is delivered/provided by
Contractor and approved by CN.
The Railway Company reserves the right to delete from the contract any items listed on the Form of Tender.
SCHEDULE OF PRICES by year

Based on the Contractor proposed schedule, Contract must submit with the Proposal a contract spend
estimate by year of construction, i.e., 2024 and 2025.
Project Milestone Projected Spend 2024 Projected Spend 2025
Total projected spend $ $

SUBSTITUTIONS
The tender submitted is based on the plans and specifications. Below, we propose substitutions with cost
differences for your consideration. Bidders are not required to propose any substitutions.
Specified Proposed Substitution Cost Difference
MATERIAL SOURCES
The Tenderer must state below the locations from where he/she intends to obtain all the materials he is to
supply.
Materials Source
Granular Materials
Concrete
Concrete Reinforcement
Precast Concrete Culverts
Drainage Structures
Culverts
Sewer Pipes
Hot Mix Asphalt
NOTE: Acceptance of this tender does not constitute approval of the above material sources.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT
The undersigned, submit a list of equipment will be employed if the Tender is accepted.
Type Year Model Number of Tier 4 equipment
We acknowledge the above equipment will meet zero-emission requirements as specified in Section 01005,
Clause 1.22.5 of the specifications. It is agreed that there will be no substitution of, or any addition of,
equipment without the prior written approval of the Railway.
LIST OF PROJECTS
The undersigned, submit a list of similar project undertaken in the past 5 years.
Year Proponent Value ($) Description of Work

LIST OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
The undersigned, submit a list of Sub-Contractors whose services will be employed if the Tender is accepted.
Scope Sub-Contractor Value ($)
We acknowledge we have investigated the above sub-contractors and confirm they are reliable and
competent to carry out the work satisfactorily. It is agreed that there will be no substitution of, or any addition
of, sub-contractors without the prior written approval of the Railway.
TRADES BY OWN FORCES
The undersigned, submit herewith a list of the trades to be executed by our own forces.
Scope
MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION
Please describe all items included in your pricing under Mobilization and Demobilization lines.
UNIT RATES
Please attach to your proposal your unit rates for Labour and Equipment applied to this RFP scope.
RESOURCE HISTOGRAM
Please provide a resource histogram planned with roles/trades is to be included along the project
schedule/timeline.
SCHEDULE
Please submit your schedule, work sequencing & staging plan binding to the Proposed Milestones dates in
the Instructions to Bidders:
CONTRUCTION METHODOLOGY/WORK PLAN
Please submit a description of the highlights of your construction methodology for this work. The method
statement shall detail the methodology used to develop the contract schedule to meet the scope milestones
considering CN Safety Policies and Standards. Please include your methodology and proposal inclusions
to comply with CN Environmental Plan tied to this scope.
INDIGENOUS PROCUREMENT
Canadian National Railway Company is committed to developing respectful, sustainable and mutually
beneficial relationship with Indigenous communities while ensuring service to our customers. Does your
firm have any initiative or level of effort in engaging and incorporating Indigenous participation as part of
your provided services?
Yes _____ No _____
If yes, please provide a brief description. Also, please provide the following information:
Criteria Description / CN Response (Y/N) Additional details / Link to

Requirement disclosure or policies
POLICY/COMMITMENT:
Is the bidder an Indigenous-owned
business or does the bidder have
Indigenous engagement
commitments to this scope or
policies in place (i.e., ownership*,
hiring opportunities, subcontracting
opportunities, Indigenous
community engagement, etc.)? If
yes, please describe.
Does the bidder participate in the

PAR (Progressive Aboriginal
Relations) program? If so, at what
level (committed, bronze, silver,
gold)?
Does the bidder have an Indigenous

Reconciliation Action Plan (IRAP)?
If yes, please attach a copy.
TARGET:
Does the bidder have targets or
goals pertaining to Indigenous
engagement? If yes, please
describe.
PERFORMANCE:
Does the bidder track and report
any KPIs related to Indigenous
engagement (e.g., % Indigenous
employees, % spend with
Indigenous business, etc.)? If yes,
please describe.
SITE VISIT / MEETING
The mandatory site meeting was attended on the day of 2023.
by being the authorized representative of
the Tenderer and holding the title of or position of .

The undersigned will execute, under authority of Form CN-8653-B, at prices to be established under the
provisions of Clauses 14 to 17 inclusive of Contract Form CN-3819, any and all other items of work required
by the Division Engineer of the Railway Company.
REGISTERED
COMPANY NAME
SIGNATURE
WITNESS PRESIDENT/OWNER
SECRETARY OF
WITNESS COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY/PROVINCE
POSTAL CODE
PHONE NO.
FAX NO.
SIGNED DAY OF 2023
BANK NAME
ADDRESS
PHONE NO.
HST REGISTRATION NO.
INSERT NUMBERS OF ADDENDA INCLUDED WITH THIS
TENDER
NOTE: If the Contractor is an incorporated Company, the Tender must be signed by the President (or other
Officer duly authorized to sign) and the Secretary of the Company.
If the Contractor is not a Corporate body, the Tender must be signed by each individual member of the Firm
and their address given.
There must be a witness to every signature.
***END OF FORM OF TENDER***

CN – DESIGN & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01005
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The general conditions (Annex “A”) of Contract Form No. 3819 and all Sections of Division 1 of
this Specification apply equally to this Section of the Specification.
1.1 CN MILTON LOGISTICS HUB
.1 Canadian National Railway Company (“CN”) is planning to construct its Milton

Logistics Hub (MLH) to meet the needs of the Greater Toronto and Hamilton
Area – the fastest-growing area in Canada. MLH will be a satellite terminal to the
Brampton Intermodal Terminal (BIT), providing additional capacity and alleviating
growing congestion at BIT. The MLH terminal will be in Milton, Ontario, adjacent
to the CN mainline, on the Halton subdivision between Mile 38.7 and Mile 40.7.
The entire project limits are between Mile 36.86 and Mile 41.26.
.2 The Project has gone through an extensive federal environmental assessment

and regulatory review. In addition to addressing the 325 Project conditions, CN is
implementing a number of measures to mitigate the potential effects of the
Project and enhance the environment. CN is also launching a pilot program for
the use of electric trucks as part of its intermodal fleet.
.3 Milton Logistics Hub construction is planned to be constructed in multiple

construction phases. Phase 1 and Phase 1A contracts are awarded and the
construction is ongoing and expected to be completed by quarter four (4) of year
2023. The project limits for this Phase 2A contract are between Mile 36.79 and
Mile 41.00.
1.2 INTERPRETATION
.1 The word "Engineer" or “Consultant”, occurring in Contract Form CN-3819 and in

various clauses of these Specifications, must be construed to mean the Division
Engineer of the Canadian National Railway Company or the duly authorized
agents, limited by the particular duties respectively entrusted to them. (See
Clause 1(b) of the General Conditions of Contract Form CN-3819).
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK PHASE 2A CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
.1 This Contract covers the supply of all labor, material, and equipment required to
carry out the construction of the Milton Logistics Hub – Phase 2A Mile 36.79 to
Mile 41.00 Halton Sub, located in Milton in the Province of Ontario:
.1 Track grading and drainage for the construction of the pocket track.
.2 Track grading and drainage for the mainline between South of Britannia
Road and Derry Road.
.3 Lower Base Line Road grade separation, including rail over road bridge.
.4 Track grading and drainage for the mainline in the vicinity of the Lower
Base Line new bridge (both sides of the bridge)
.5 Britannia access road, including the private overpass bridge (road over
rail).
.2 The work includes but is not limited to the following:
.1 Performance of all requirements of Section 01545 Safety Requirements,

Section 01546 Flagging and Track Protection, and Section 01560
Environmental Protection of these tender documents;
.2 Pre-condition and post-condition surveys for the Works;
.3 Supply and erection of temporary sedimentation and erosion control

measures;
.4 Removal and disposal off-site of drainage structures, culverts, storm

sewers, light poles, Jersey Barriers, fencing, asphalt pavement,
miscellaneous mixed debris, etc.;
.5 Protection of existing infrastructure as outlined in the Contract Drawings;
.6 Excavation of all types of material and on-site disposal of all unsuitable

and surplus materials to the required depth, and the draining and
maintaining of the excavation systems;
.7 Supply and construction of Overpass (new bridge);
.8 Supply and construction of Lower Base Line underpass (new bridge);
.9 Grading and drainage work for the pocket track;
.10 Construction of designed grades, slopes, and ditches;
.11 Supply, placement, and compaction of approved granular materials as

backfill, subbase, base and sub-ballast;
.12 Supply and placement of culverts, storm sewers, drainage structures,

sub-drains and associated works;
.13 Supply and placement of rip rap and other environmental requirements;
.14 Supply and placement of communication conduits;
.15 Supply of equipment and labour on hourly basis (provisional items);

.16 Locate and protect of any existing services, including sewers,

watermains, gas mains, pipelines, power lines, signal and
communications cables, etc.;
.17 All incidental construction requirements necessary to carry out the Work
indicated in the Contract Documents including, but not limited to,
provision of facilities, purpose-made equipment, and environmental
control measures, and licenses and permits procured by the Railway;
.18 Supply of all surveying resources required to set and maintain lines and
levels and to measure quantities; quality control and assurance required
to assure compliance with specifications and all other Work;
.19 Restoration of the site in accordance with approved plans; and
.20 All other work as called for on the Contract Drawings and/or described in
the Specifications.
.3 Work by CN Rail, or Contractors working on behalf of the Railway or others, to be

carried out concurrently with the Work of this Contract comprises of:
.1 Track removal, relocation, and new track construction; and
.2 Relocation of CN signal & fiber optic cables.
.4 Work by the Contractor shall be properly scheduled and communicated such as

to avoid conflicts with work by Others. The Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining time and space separations for their work and shall be the
“Constructor” for this project.
1.4 CODES, STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
.1 Perform work in accordance with Codes, Standards, Specifications and Contract

Drawings as listed below and as specified in other sections of these
Specifications.
.2 Work to meet or exceed requirements of specified standards, codes and

referenced documents.
.3 Only the latest issue of these Codes, Standards and Specifications shall be
followed:
.1 Instructions to Bidders: Annex “C”;
.2 Form of Tender: Annex “B”;
.3 Form of Contract: CN-3819;

.4 Extra Work Order: CN-8653-B;
.5 Instructions to Excavators for the Protection of Underground S&C Cables:

SCP-1005;
.6 General Requirements 01005;
.7 Submittals 01340;
.8 Temporary Facilities 01500;
.9 Safety Requirements 01545;
.10 Flagging and Track Protection 01546;
.11 Environmental Protection 01560;
.12 Material and Equipment 01600;
.13 Setting Out and Measurement 01610;
.14 Quality Control and Assurance 01620; and
.15 Project Closeout 01800.
.4 ASTM Standards:
.1 Compaction D698 70T.
.5 Ontario Provincial Standards:
.1 Volume 1 – General & Construction Specifications;
.2 Volume 2 – Material Specifications;
.3 Volume 3 – Drawings for Roads, Barriers, Drainage, Sanitary Sewers,

Watermains and Structures;
.4 Volume 4 – Drawings for Electrical Work;
.5 Volume 5 – MTO General Conditions of Contract and General &

Construction Specifications (Provincial-Oriented);
.6 Volume 6 – Material Specifications (Provincial-Oriented);
.7 Volume 7 – MTO General Conditions of Contract and General &

Construction Specifications (Municipal-Oriented); and
.8 Volume 8 – Material Specifications (Municipal-Oriented).
.6 Contract Drawings as indicated in the Drawing Index.
1.5 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS
.1 The Engineer may furnish drawings in electronic format, in Adobe Acrobat (PDF)
format, via a project website or via email. These drawings shall have same
meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in Clause 3 of
these Supplementary General Conditions.
.2 The Engineer may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of work.
These drawings will be issued for clarification only. Such drawings shall have
same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in
Clause 3 of these Supplementary General Conditions.
1.6 BASIS OF TENDERING
.1 Payment for the work will be made on the basis of the various Unit and Lump
Sum Prices as submitted on the Form of Tender. Quantities for payment under
Unit Price items will be determined by the Engineer, based on measurement
methods specified subject to actual quantities completed on site. Lump Sum
items will be only eligible for payment if the material/ service is delivered/provided
by Contractor and approved by CN.
.2 Unless otherwise stated in this Section, the Unit and Lump Sum Prices above
referred to shall include all labour, scaffolding, tools, implements, machinery,
service and materials constructed in place, and shall include all overhead, profit
and supervision and the entire cost of all permits, certificates, Provincial Labour
Taxes, Workplace Safety and Insurance, Public Liability and Property Damage,
Surety Bond, Royalties, and any and all other costs of a like nature to which the
work is liable.
.3 Harmonized Sales Tax is not to be included in the Unit and Lump Sum Prices.
This tax is to be shown as a separate item on the Form of Tender.
.4 If it is found that any portion of the work specified or shown on the drawings can
be omitted, the Engineer reserves the right to omit such portions of the work as
he may see fit. Deductions shall be made from the Contract price for any work
omitted at the Unit Price stated in the Contractor's Tender.
.5 The Contractor shall take into consideration all of the precautions, conditions and
limitations of every kind which may affect the work or their operations, and they
must allow for same in the various Unit and Lump Sum Prices submitted.
1.7 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR UNIT PRICES
.1 Measurements under which Unit Prices are to be submitted on the Form of

Tender shall be in accordance with the "Unit of Measurement" as called for in the
"Schedule of Prices" of the Form of Tender.
.2 The manner in which the total number of units of measurement for the various
items of work and/or material will be established for payment is clearly defined in
the various sections of this Section.
1.8 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
.1 All work that may be called for in the Specifications and not shown on the Plans
or shown on the Plans and not called for in the Specifications, shall be executed
by the Contractor as if described in both. Should any work or material be required
which is not denoted in the Specifications or Plans, either directly or indirectly,
but is nevertheless necessary for the proper carrying out of the intent thereof, the
Contractor is to understand the same to be implied and required and shall
perform all such work and furnish all such materials as fully as if they were
particularly delineated or described.
.2 If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancy between the
Plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors or omissions in the
Plans, it shall be their duty to immediately inform the Engineer in writing, and the
Engineer shall promptly verify the same. Any work done after such discovery,
until authorized, will be done at the Contractor's risk.
.3 Specifications shall take precedence over the Contract Drawings. Figures on the
Drawings shall take precedence over scaled measurements; details shall take
precedence over Contract Drawings made to a smaller scale.
.4 The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for further detail
drawings required. Such application must be received by the Railway at least 14
days before they will be required by the Contractor.
.5 The decisions of the Engineer shall govern the interpretation of Drawings and the
Specifications throughout the execution of the work and he shall be the sole
judge of the work, material and plant, whether temporary or permanent, both as
to quality and quantity. The Engineer’s decision on questions of dispute with
regard to work, material and plant, shall be final.
1.9 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
.1 Maintain at the job site, one copy of each of the following:
.1 Contract Drawings;
.2 Specifications;
.3 Addenda;
.4 Reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples;
.5 Change orders;
.6 Other modifications to the Contract;
.7 Field test reports;
.8 Standards listed Clause 1.3;
.9 Ministry of Labour “Notice of Project”;
.10 Site Safety Plans;
.11 Environmental Plans; and
.12 All other documents called for in various sections of the Specifications.
1.10 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
.1 The Contractor must refer to Clause No. 28 of the "General Conditions" of

Contract Form No. 3819-B with reference to progress payments.
.2 Payments will be made on a monthly basis, based on estimated amounts of

quantities certified complete by the Engineer.
.3 CN’s standard payment terms are sixty (60) days from the date on the invoice.
Invoices shall be issued after the Engineer's approval of the progress payment
certificate.CN’s payments will be made via EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer).
Details of the payment are provided to the Contractor by email.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
.1 A fixed Lump Sum amount has been attributed to this contract for the successful
performance of environmental compliance as determined by the Engineer and
CN Environmental Monitor.
.2 Once the Contractor has completely mobilized to the Site, a maximum aggregate
amount as indicated in the Form of Tender shall be attributed conditional to FULL
compliance to the environmental clauses identified in the Tender.
.3 If the Contractor does not willfully comply with these requirements or the direction
of the CN Environmental Monitor in a reasonable time period (as determined by
the Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor) during that given month, then the
full amount for that given month will be canceled from the aggregate amount of
the Form of Tender.
.4 Performance review by the Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor shall be

executed on a monthly basis.
.5 The aggregate amount shown in the Form of Tender shall remain fixed for this
contract and in case of extension of the contract, no additional remuneration will
be awarded.
.6 Incentive Payments are an incentive for Contractor compliance and are not
allocated to fund any portion of the work to be completed to get or remain in
compliance.
1.12 SAFETY INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
performance of safety compliance as determined by the Engineer.
compliance to the safety clauses identified in the Tender.
.3 If the Contractor does not willfully comply with these requirements or the direction
of the Engineer in a reasonable time period (as determined by the Engineer)
during that given week then the full amount for that given week will be cancelled
from the aggregate amount of the Form of Tender.
.4 Performance review by the Engineer shall be executed on a weekly basis.
contract and in case of an extension of contract, no additional remuneration will
be awarded.
.6 Incentive Payments are an incentive for Contractor compliance and are not
compliance.
1.13 CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK
.1 The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in the design of the work or to
omit any such part as the Engineer may see fit. In the case of work or material,
which is added to, or deducted from the work herein specified, a fair and
reasonable valuation of same must be added to or deducted from the Contract as
the case may require.
.2 The Contractor must refer to Clause No. 14 (1) and (2) of the "General
Conditions" of Contract Form No. 3819-B with reference to payment for extra
work.
.3 All Price Fixing and Change Orders must be submitted with detailed material
lists, labour costs and receipted invoices.
.4 For Extra Work not customarily performed by the Contractor’s own personnel, or
for Extra Work so designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain
quotations from a minimum of three (3) subcontractors:
.1 Self-performance by Contractor may be considered as one (1) quotation;
.2 The Engineer may designate specific persons from whom or entities from
which the Contractor shall obtain bids;
.3 The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone whom the
Contractor has reasonable objection;
.4 The Engineer shall determine which quotation will be accepted;
.5 ; The Contractor shall be entitled to up to a maximum of 5% markup on

accepted subcontractor cost for overhead and profit and
.6 Contractual Obligations remain unchanged by any subcontracts entered

into under this arrangement; including the Contractors responsibility for
control of the work, health and safety obligations, payment application
process, etc.
.5 The Contractor shall be entitled to recover only demonstrable direct costs for
extra work, plus mark-up per Contract Form 3819.
.6 For labour and operators, such cost is deemed to be a maximum, wages plus
40% labour burden. The Contractor shall provide proof of labour costs upon
request.
.7 For equipment, standby time caused by CN delays only will be paid at 50% of the
hourly rate included in the Form of Tender or OPSS 127 for that type of
equipment.
.8 Indirect costs, including, but not limited to, as-built drawings, project
management, site superintendence, temporary facilities, office support,
surveying, bonding and insurance shall be covered in general contract and / or
specified mark-up and shall not be allowed in valuation of extra work.
.9 The Contractor shall submit an Extra Work Order to the Engineer for approval
prior to such work.
1.14 IDENTIFICATION OF CORRESPONDENCE AND SUBMITTALS
.1 Clearly identify all submittals and correspondence submitted to the Engineer with
the project title as it appears on the Railway's drawing title block including
Subdivision and mileage.
1.15 CONTRACTOR TO SHOW ABILITY TO DO WORK
.1 Before the award of the Contract, any Tenderer may be required to show to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that he has, or can obtain the necessary and proper
equipment, tools, facilities and means, and that he has the experience, ability
and financial resources to perform the work within the time specified and in a
satisfactory or workmanlike manner.
1.16 EMPLOYMENT
.1 The Contractor shall comply with all existing Laws and Regulations as prescribed
by the Canada Labour Code and/or the Minister of Labour and the Government
of Canada.
.2 Preference in employment shall be given to residents of the District in which the

work is carried out.
.3 Additionally, preference in employment shall be given to First Nation members

and their companies associated with Mississauga of the Credit First Nation, Six
Nation of the Grand River and the Huron Wendat as workers and as Sub-
contractors during the project.
1.17 NOTICES AND PERMITS: AUTHORITIES, LANDOWNERS AND TENANTS
.1 The Railway, before the award of the Contract, will obtain the requisite
permission of authorities, landowners and tenants for:
.1 The location and form of the permanent works; and
.2 Availability of the site for the purposes of the works.
.2 Before entering on or disturbing any land or property for the purposes of the
works or commencing any part of the works, the Contractor shall:
.1 Ascertain from the Engineer and Environmental Monitor what permits are
being sought by the railway and what permits have been obtained by the
Railway and the terms under which these permits have been obtained;
and
.2 CN’s Communication Protocol shall be followed for any notices and

further permissions required for the construction of the works, for the
execution and removal of temporary works, and for the occupation, use,
damage or alteration to, or interference with, lands, property or rights

affected by the Contractor's operations.
.3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remain within the Limits of

Construction as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Additional temporary land
easements with private landowners and tenants for access is not permitted.
.4 The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the terms of the permissions obtained as
above for the carrying out of the works and provide the Railway with
documentation of said permission and the terms thereof.
.5 Without limiting the Contractor's obligations under the subsection, the Contractor
shall, in particular, serve notices in respect of their operations on all other
authorities concerned in the provision of utility or communication services whose
water, gas, sewer, electricity or other service lines and installations may be
affected by the Contractor's operation.
1.18 PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, ETC.
.1 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary non-environmental permits,
licenses, inspections and certificates required for the execution of the work, the
cost of which is to be included in the tender. The Contractor shall deliver all the
required documents to the Railway at no additional cost.
1.19 COOPERATION
.1 The Contractor shall cooperate with all other Contractors, Railway Forces, Utility
companies and Road Authorities carrying out work in the area, allowing free
access to their works at all times, so that all the work to be performed under this
Contract shall be completed not later than the date named in "Instructions to
Bidders - Annex C".
.2 The Contractor shall be prepared to schedule their work so as to cause as little

inconvenience as possible in the operation of the Railway's facilities and
operations in the area. In case of dispute, the Engineer's ruling regarding
respective rights shall be accepted as final.
.3 In the event that all utilities requiring relocation have not been relocated prior to
the time when the “Contractor” commences “Work”, he will be required to co-
operate with the utility owner and “Work” around the utilities such that the existing
services are protected until such time as they can be removed from the line of
construction. No claims for extra payment will be allowed for this requirement.
1.20 VISITING THE SITE
.1 The Contractor shall visit the site before submitting their Tender in order to
thoroughly acquaint themself with all local conditions under which he will be
called upon to carry out the work coming under this Contract. The Contractor
shall not visit the site unescorted. A mandatory site visit is scheduled to occur as
called for in the “Instructions to Bidders” - Annex C of these documents. All those
present at the site visit must wear 6” tall safety boots, hard hats, safety glasses
with side shields, appropriate face masks, and reflectorized vests.
1.21 PROCEDURE OF CONSTRUCTION
.1 Study all Contract Drawings, in particular the Contract Drawings showing the
general layout, and utility plants, so as to become familiar with the conditions
under which the Contract will have to be carried out.
.2 The Contractor must limit construction activities to CN property as per the extents
indicated in Contract Documents. The Contractor shall install fencing at the
design locations as shown on the Contract Drawings.
.3 Strict adherence to the environmental requirements as outlined in the Contract

Drawings, requirements throughout the Tender, any permits and approvals, and
direction as provided by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor is
mandatory.
.4 The Contractor must undertake all work in such a way and sequence outlined in
the Contract Drawings and permits and approvals so that all work covered under
the Contract will be completed by the date named in “Instructions to Bidders” –
Annex “C”.
1.22 TIMING OF WORK
.1 Railway operation will NOT be affected by the Contractor’s operations. Tracks

will be in operation at all times. Expect the movement of trains at any time, on
any track and in any direction:
.1 Co-ordinate work near tracks with the Engineer.
.2 All work along and within the entire length of the site shall be subject to the
following restrictions, and as directed by the Engineer:
.1 Confine all work activities to between 07:00 and 17:00. When night work
or work outside of the period is required, notice must be provided to the
Engineer within a minimum of one (1) month notice;
.2 Working shift is not to exceed ten (10) hours per day for activities on-site
where flagging is required. Flagging will not be provided for more than ten
(10) hours per day on site. The working shift will include the daily job
briefing and mobilization/demobilization from the work location(s). Daily
downtime calculation does not include the daily job briefing and
mobilization/demobilization; and
.3 Request for additional work hours and work on Saturday, Sunday, or

1.23 CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND PROSECUTION OF WORK
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that its actions during all phases of construction are
considered in a careful and precautionary manner, promote sustainable
development, are informed by the best information and knowledge including
community and Indigenous knowledge, available at the time the Contractor takes
action, are based on methods and models that are recognized by standard-
setting bodies, are undertaken by qualified individuals, have applied the best
available economically and technically feasible technologies to achieve
continuous improvement and meet all engineering requirements for safe railway
and facility operation.
.2 As far as it is consistent with the nature of the work and the results to be attained,
the Contractor shall develop the order and methods of prosecuting the work so
that it is consistent with the approvals and permits in place provided safety is not
compromised.
.3 The Contractor shall provide construction equipment properly adapted to execute

the work specified in a safe, efficient and workmanlike manner. Equipment shall
be of sufficient capacity to accomplish the work at the rate stipulated in the
progress schedule.
.4 The measure of the "capacity of equipment" shall be its actual performance of

the work required under the Contract. No reduction in equipment capacity will be
allowed, except by written permission of the Engineer. All equipment shall be
maintained in good working condition and provision shall be made for immediate
emergency repairs.
.5 Preference shall be given to Contractor’s and Sub-Contractors who demonstrate

the use of zero-emission mobile and stationary off-road equipment for any
physical activity undertaken as part of their Emissions Reduction Plan. If zero-
emission equipment is not available or not technically feasible, the Contractor
shall provide justification for the following uses:
.1 Diesel engines operating on diesel or low-carbon diesel fuel that meet

Tier 4 emissions standards where technically feasible or, at a minimum,
Tier 3 emission standards and are equipped with verified diesel
particulate filters and for which both the engines and the filters are
maintained in accordance with maintenance instructions provided by the
manufacturer; or
.2 Low-carbon fuel, which may include natural gas, propane or hydrogen,

while meeting, Tier 4 emissions standards where technically and
economically feasible, at a minimum, Tier 3 emission standards and
being maintained in accordance with maintenance instructions provided
by the manufacturer.
.3 All equipment must have quieter 'shushing' backup alarms instead of the
louder beeping alarm.
.6 Should the Engineer be of the opinion and so state in writing to the Contractor
that the force of men or the quantity of plant supplied for the performance of the
work is not sufficient, or that the character of said plant is not suitable, or that the
methods employed are not such as will ensure that the work will be completed
within the time specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall, at their own
expense, forthwith increase the number of workers employed upon the work
and/or shall make the required additions or revisions to their plant, and shall
employ work methods satisfactory to the Engineer.
.7 The Contractor shall prosecute the work with all skill and diligence and their
delegated representative having jurisdiction shall cooperate with all trades and
the Engineer in every legitimate way to conduct their respective business in an
effective, successful and harmonious manner so as to complete the work in
accordance with the Contract. If the Contractor fails, in the opinion of the
Engineer, to carry on the work with sufficient diligence and skill, or their
delegated representative having jurisdiction, fails to cooperate with all trades and
the Engineer as aforementioned, to ensure completion in accordance with the
Contract, the Engineer may take whatever steps he considers necessary under
Clauses 22 and 23 of Contract Form No. 3819 attached.
1.24 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE
.1 The Limits of Construction of the Contract shall be as shown on the Contract

Drawings. The Contractor is not permitted to arrange any additional access,
laydown or storage to the working areas.
.2 Arrange with the Engineer for the area required for storage of equipment and
material, and the erection of offices and sheds.
.3 The location and layout on the site of the Contractor's office and plant areas,
storage yards, access and transport routes, shall be as detailed in the drawings
and is subject to the direction and approval of the Engineer who will, insofar as it
is in their opinion reasonable to do so, meet the Contractor's wishes in these
respects.
.4 Confine the storage of materials and the operation of workmen to limits indicated
by law, ordinances, permits or direction of the Engineer and in accordance with
Section 01560 Environmental Protection.
.5 Do not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials.
.6 No material or equipment shall be stored closer than five (5) meters from nearest
rail of any operated track.
.7 Cooperate with the Railway, road authorities, utility companies and all other
agencies required to work in that area.
.8 Onsite roads will be defined, delineated and enforced to a 30 km/h speed limit.
.9 Refueling areas will be identified and will not be closer to 30 meters from the
nearest water body, watercourse or floodplain areas.
.10 Hazardous materials for use on site will be stored in areas delineated and
managed as per the MSDS sheets.
1.25 SETTING OUT OF WORK
.1 The Contractor will be responsible for setting benchmarks, baselines, grade

stakes, etc., as per the Drawings and as required to adequately set out the work.
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper laying out of the
works and for the correctness of the position, levels, dimensions and alignment
of all parts of the works, and for the provision of all necessary instruments and
labour in connection therewith. If, at any time during the progress of the works
any error shall appear or arise in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of
any part of the works, the Contractor shall, at their own expense, rectify such
errors to the satisfaction of the Engineer, unless such error is based on incorrect
data supplied by the Engineer.
.3 The checking of the setting out of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of their responsibility for the correctness thereof,
and the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks, stakes
and other items used in setting out of the works.
.4 Where it is necessary to replace stake or instrument points, removed or

destroyed by the Contractor without the consent of the Engineer, the same may
be replaced by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
1.26 EXISTING UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
.1 The Contractor must take into consideration, when submitting their Tender, the
location of any existing utility plant.
.2 Public utilities will be relocated in the working area by others before and during
the work and the Contractor is expected to cooperate to ensure delays are kept
to a minimum.
.3 The Railway will not entertain claims for any inconvenience or delay to the
Contractor caused by the relocating of said utilities.
.4 As a result of damage to the cable or associated equipment by their operation,

the Contractor shall be held responsible for all repairs as well as the loss of all
revenue incurred by CN and for claims the utilities may make for interruption to
service.
.5 No responsibility will be assumed by the Railway for the correctness or

completeness of its information with respect to existing utilities, either below or
above ground, and the Contractor shall have no claim on that account.
.6 The Contractor is directed to carefully examine the location of the work and to
make special enquiry of the companies owning, controlling, or operating any
utilities, pipes, conduits, or other structures and to determine their own
satisfaction the character, size, length and position of such utilities, pipes,
conduits, or other structures. The Contractor shall not make any claims against
the Railway for damages or extra work caused by them relying upon such
records, reports, or information, either as a whole or in part, furnished by any
Civic Government Department or Commission, Utility Company or individual.
.7 The Contractor shall contact the various Utility companies in order to determine
the actual location of all buried live service lines, prior to commencement of their
operation. The Contractor shall also ensure at that time that all buried service
lines, falling within the work area, are dead, and have been abandoned by the
Utility companies involved, and the Contractor shall be responsible for removing
of same within the limits of their excavation.
.8 The Contractor will be responsible for locating and protecting all buried utility
services and will be held liable for any damage to same. Where trenching under
existing water mains, gas mains, and hydro and telephone or cable conduits, the
Contractor will be required to support these mains or conduits in accordance with
the requirements of the Enbridge Gas Company, Hydro One, Rogers, Bell
Canada or the Public Utilities Commission.
.9 In the event that any underground utility must be relocated, the Contractor will be
required to co-operate with the Utility Companies and will be expected to alter
their construction schedule as necessary, to permit relocation of utilities. No extra
payment or extension of completion time will be allowed for these requirements.
1.27 DELAY DUE TO WEATHER CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall subscribe to a meteorological alert service, ensuring that

there is advance warning of weather conditions that may pose an environmental
or safety risk.
.2 The Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor may decide that adverse weather
conditions do not permit certain portions of the work to be completed within the
true meaning and intent of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, and he
may order the Contractor to discontinue work on these portions of the work:
.1 The Contractor shall stop and not continue work on these portions until he
has received permission from the Engineer to proceed;
.2 If the Engineer stops the work or any portion thereof for any period, the
Contractor shall be granted an extension of time equal to that period; and
.3 It shall be clearly understood that if an extension of time is so granted, the

Contractor shall have no claim for further payment for work performed,
and no extra payment shall be made for any delays due to stoppage of
work.
1.28 EMERGENCIES
.1 In the event of any part of the work being in danger from any cause whatsoever,
or if the work cannot be completed by the specified time, the Engineer shall have
the right to call upon the Contractor for continuance of work without interruption.
1.29 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE & WRAP-UP INSURANCE
.1 The Contractor is referred to Clause 36 of Contract Form No. 3819 attached. It is

understood that the amount of liability insurance carried by the Contractor shall
be not less than $10,000,000, per occurrence.
.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance, Automobile Liability Insurance, and “All

risks” Course of Construction Insurance are each required.
.3 The Certificate of Insurance must include both of the following endorsements:
.1 Contractual Clause:
.1 It is understood and agreed that this policy extends to cover the
liability of (name of contracting company) assumed under contract
with the Canadian National Railway Company, for (description of
project).
.2 Additional Named Insured:

.1 Name Canadian National Railway Company as Additional
Insured, showing a CROSS LIABILITY CLAUSE, protecting each
as if separately insured; and
.2 The Certificate of Insurance, which must include both of the above
endorsements, must be filed with the Contract Administrator of the
Railway Company and shall be subject to approval as to
adequacy of protection prior to the Contractor commencing work
on-site. Such Insurance must be maintained until final completion

of all work under this contract.
.3 Project Wrap-Up Liability Insurance:

.1 The Contractor is referred to Section 3.6 of the RFP Cover:
for the full insurance requirements. The amount of
Project Wrap-Up Liability insurance carried by the Contractor shall
be not less than $25,000,000 per occurrence.
1.30 FIRE INSURANCE AND FIRE PRECAUTIONS
.1 The Contractor is referred to Clause 36, Sub (c) of Contract Form No. 3819
attached.
.2 Fire Precautions shall be taken in accordance with Clause 11, of Contract Form
No. 3819 attached.
.3 The Certificate of Insurance shall be filed with the Railway before the Contractor
commences the work under this Contract.
1.31 SUPERINTENDENCE AND NEGLIGENCE
.1 The Contractor shall refer to Clauses 34 and 35, of Contract Form No. 3819 with
reference to superintendence and negligence.
1.32 DAMAGES
.1 The Contractor shall refer to Clause 12 of Contract Form No. 3819 with reference
to damages to persons or property.
1.33 PATENTS
.1 The Contractor shall refer to Clause 5, of Contract Form No. 3819 with reference
to patents.
1.34 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION STATUS AND REGULATIONS
.1 The Contractor shall be registered with the Workplace Safety and Insurance
Board in the Province of Ontario. Upon the award of the Contract, the Contractor
shall provide evidence of such registration.
.2 Upon completion of the Contract and prior to the release of "holdback", a

clearance, in letter form will be required from the Workplace Safety and
Insurance Board.
.3 The Contractor is referred to Clause 9, of Contract Form No. 3819.

1.35 FIRST AID AND SAFETY
.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain readily accessible at the works all first
aid equipment and installations required by the Occupational Health and Safety
Act, and all safety and lifesaving equipment appropriate to the nature of the
works.
1.36 PROJECT MEETINGS
.1 Hold weekly project meetings at times and locations approved by the Engineer.
.2 Notify all parties concerned of meetings, to ensure proper coordination of Work.
.3 Provide an updated schedule at each meeting, based on original schedule

provided, so that interim reviews of work progress can be assessed.
1.37 DIARY
.1 The Contractor or their authorized representative shall maintain in detail a diary

to record the progress of the works, the number of personnel and equipment of
all categories at the site, the materials delivered to the site; climatic conditions,
and all such other items which he deems necessary to record.
1.38 DAILY FORCE REPORT
.1 The Contractor, for each category of work, shall supply the Engineer at the end
of each week, a summary of daily information by hours tabulated as follows:
.1 Personnel by classification;
.2 Equipment working by units;
.3 Equipment idle by units; and
.4 Equipment under repair by units.
1.39 MONTHLY COMPLIANCE REPORT
.1 The Contractor shall prepare a monthly compliance report documenting how

each of the Conditions and Commitments listed in Section 01560 Environmental
Protection has been complied with. If additional mitigation measures, actions or
revisions are required to be implemented to meet the Conditions or
Commitments, this shall be documented. The monthly compliance report shall be
issued to the satisfaction of the Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor.
1.40 NATURAL AND HISTORICAL OBJECTS
.1 All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity and structures and other remains or
things of geological or archaeological interest discovered on the site shall follow
the Archaeological and Cultural Resources Plan. The Contractor shall take all
reasonable precautions and any precautions required by the Engineer to prevent
their workers or other persons from removing or damaging any such article or
thing and shall immediately upon discovery thereof notify the Engineer and
Environmental Monitor in accordance with the Archaeological and Cultural
Resources Plan.
1.41 REMOVAL OF CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
.1 As soon as the necessity for Contractor's equipment has passed, the Contractor
shall promptly remove such equipment and surplus material from the structure
and site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.42 CONTROL OF DEBRIS AND SITE CLEAN-UP
.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the site in a neat and tidy condition.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent debris, including mud and dust, from
drifting from the site. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean up
the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.2 The cost of debris control and final site cleanup shall be borne by the Contractor.
Should the Contractor fail to control debris and clean up the site to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the Railway may undertake the same and the cost
thereof shall be deducted from any money due or that may come due to the
Contractor under this Contract.
.3 The contractor shall provide street sweeping for all adjacent roads that are used
by the construction vehicles.
1.43 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
.1 The Contractor will be held absolutely responsible for the care of the work and
whatever appertains thereto from the commencement of same to its final
completion and acceptance.
.2 All work performed under this Contract, unless otherwise specified, shall be
guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of two (2) years from the date of final
acceptance of work by the Railway. The Contractor shall, immediately on receipt
of notice in writing from the Railway, and at their own expense, make good all
defects of whatever nature that may develop during that period.
.3 In the event of the Contractor refusing or neglecting to do so, the Railway may
employ some other person or persons to make good any such defects, loss or
damage, and the expense of employing such person or persons to make good
any such defects, loss or damage, shall be charged to and paid for by the
Contractor.
1.44 OWNER FIELD REPRESENTATIVES & ENVIRONMENTAL MONITOR
.1 A field representative of the owner and Environmental Monitor may be present at

the site. The role of the Environmental Monitor is outlined in Section 01560
Environmental Protection.
.2 The primary function of the field representative is to act as a liaison between the
Contractor and the Engineer to facilitate the prosecution of the work required
under the Contract. The presence of the field representative does not relieve the
Contractor of its primary responsibility to perform and complete the work required
under the Contract in a safe and workmanlike manner and in compliance with all
specifications but should the field representative become aware of material or
work that is not in conformity with the requirements of the Contract, he/she shall
have the authority to reject such work.
.3 In the event of any dispute between the contractor and field representatives with
respect to the prosecution of work under the Contract, the representative's
decision or rejection shall stand until the questions at issue can be referred to
and decided by the Engineer.
.4 No representative of the Engineer shall have the authority to revoke, alter,

change, relax or release any requirements of the Contract.
.5 The field representative shall not perform any duty or management on behalf of
the Contractor.
1.45 BASIS OF PAYMENT
.1 Payment at the Contract bid price shall include all labour, equipment, and
material to perform the work specified herein.
1.46 INSPECTION
.1 All work and material must be at all times open to the inspection, acceptance or
rejection of the Engineer, their duly authorized representative or Federal
Compliance Officers. The Contractor must give the Engineer reasonable notice
of starting any new work.

CN – DESIGN & SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Submit to the Engineer, for review, design drawings, shop drawings, product data
and samples specified.
.2 Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples as required, pdf submissions
are acceptable.
.3 Clearly identify all shop drawings, product data, and samples with the project title
as it appears on the Railway's drawing title block including subdivision and
mileage.
.4 All shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be reviewed, and comments
shall be provided, stamped, and signed by the Contractor prior to submission to
the Railway.
.5 All such drawings, product data, and samples must be reviewed by the Engineer
before the work involved is started.
.6 Until submission is reviewed, work involving relevant products may not proceed.
.7 Work carried out prior to having shop drawings reviewed shall be at the
Contractor's own risk, and liable for rejection at no cost to the Railway.
.8 The review of shop drawings will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility
should errors occur in them, and further, the review by the Engineer of any
design drawings or shop drawings submitted by the Contractor shall not form, or
be construed as forming, the basis of a claim for any extra, unless such claim is
specifically made by the Contractor at the time of submission of such drawings
for review and has been agreed to in writing by the Engineer.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Drawings shall be originals prepared by the Contractor, Supplier or Distributor,

which illustrate an appropriate portion of work; showing fabrication, layout, setting
or erection details as specified in appropriate sections.
.2 Identify details by reference to the sheet and detail numbers shown on the
Contract Drawings.
.3 Sheet size, same as used on the Contract set of drawings.
.4 All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer

licensed in Ontario.
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1 Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings, catalog sheets, diagrams,

schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data
will only be accepted in lieu of shop drawings when authorized by the Engineer.
.2 Above will only be accepted if they conform to the following:
.1 Delete information that is not applicable to project;
.2 Supplement standard information to provide additional information

applicable to project;
.3 Show dimensions and clearances required; and
.4 Show performance characteristics and capacities.
.3 The Contractor shall complete and submit the following reports/plans and plan
updates within two (2) weeks of the project award date
No. Report / Plan Deliverable Related Specification, including documentation

Submission requirements
1 Environmental Two (2) weeks The Contractor shall provide to CN a copy of the
Policy upon project Contractor’s Environmental Policy, that will be
award. consistent with the requirements outlined in the
Environmental Protection Plan.
2 Emissions Two (2) weeks 01005 – General Requirements

Reduction upon project
Plan award. A redacted plan from Phase 1 is provided with the
document attached to the Contract as outlined in the
Cover Index. This plan will be updated by the
Contractor for Phase 2A.
This plan outlines how the Contractor plans to reduce

emissions through the preferential use of zero
emission equipment. If zero emission equipment is
unavailable (justification why), then which equipment
will meet Tier 4 standards or Tier 3. The document
also includes plans for anti-idling, use of low carbon
fuel or low carbon diesel fuel, use of particulate filters
and maintenance plans to ensure the equipment
remains operating at the appropriate tier levels during
all phases of construction.

3 Waste Control Two (2) weeks 01560 – Environmental Protection

and upon project
Management award. A redacted plan from Phase 1 is provided with the
Plan document attached to the Contract as outlined in the
This plan includes the types of waste anticipated from

construction and the planned handling procedures
including how it will be contained, and frequency of
waste removal from site. Waste collection areas will
be delineated on site for the various types of identified
wastes. This plan is to include a waste audit and
reduction program and source separation program.
4 Air Quality Two (2) weeks 01560 – Environmental Protection

Best upon project
Management award. A redacted plan from Phase 1 is provided with the
Practice Plan document attached to the Contract as outlined in the
This plan includes how the Contractor will manage air

emissions as a result of construction including
monitoring of weather conditions, dust management,
equipment management.
5 Noise Two (2) weeks 01560 – Environmental Protection

Reduction upon project
This plan includes measures for the reduction of

noise during construction, including identification of
noise dampening technologies, maintenance and
inspection, and best practices for noise reduction
during activities occurring within and outside of the
project site (i.e., movements to and from the project
site).
6 Construction Two (2) weeks 02350 – Traffic Control

Traffic upon project
award.

Management
Plan A redacted plan from Phase 1 is provided with the
This plan includes all component areas of the

temporary work zone, including approach routes.
Consists of drawings showing entrance and exit
points to the Limits of Construction with vehicle lanes
and widths in accordance with Ontario Traffic Manual,
Book 7, indicate location and type of temporary
construction signs.
7 Soils Two (2) weeks 01560- Environmental Protection

Management upon project
.4 The Contractor shall provide the following reports/ plans.

1 Accident & 30 days prior 01560 – Environmental Protection

Malfunction to start of
Response Plan construction A redacted plan from Phase 1 is provided with the
Cover Index. This plan will be updated by the Contractor
for Phase 2A.
This plan outlines the procedures, processes and

management practices to handle and respond to spills
for scenarios including land based and water based, fire
prevention and preparedness, and other type events that
have a possibility to occur during construction phase.
More specifically, this plan must include:
- measures, including management and
organizational procedures (including
communication protocols), to be implemented by
the contractor in response to each type of

accident and malfunction identified in the
Environmental Protection Plan under section 5.0
Construction Contingency Plans
- measures to prevent or minimize material spills
from spreading over land surfaces and measures
to recover spilled materials from waterbodies;
- measures to manage the stormwater
management system to prevent contaminated
water from flowing downstream in case of a spill
and, if a spill adversely affects a stormwater
management pond, measures to deter birds from
using the pond until water quality is restored;
- measures to identify any sensitive habitats where
response efforts shall be prioritized;
- measures to reduce fire hazard and enhance fire
preparedness;
- the locations of hazardous materials, bulk
quantities of combustible and flammable
materials and spill containment kits within the
Limits of Construction;
- description of how the Contractor will evacuate
its property and participate in coordinated
evacuation procedures with relevant authorities
in the case of an accident or malfunction
requiring evacuation; and
- communication protocols for notifying CN (and
emergency personnel) in the event of an
accident, malfunction or other emergency.
2 Erosion and 30 days prior Prior to the commencement of any Work that might
Sediment to start of cause erosion and/or sedimentation, the Contractor
Control Plan construction must receive approval from the Engineer for any
proposed revisions to the Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan - General. The proposed revisions shall be outlined
in an Erosion and Sediment Control Implementation
Plan as outlined in 02272- Erosion Control. The Plan
shall include site specific details of when, where and
how the specific erosion control measures will be used.
Changes to the Plan will be consistent with the
requirements outlined in 02272 – Erosion Control and
the Environmental Protection Plan.
3 Accident & Within 15 days 01560 – Environmental Protection

Malfunction of the Update
Response Plan
Update

Includes the requirements outlined in the Accident &

Malfunction Response Plan and any updates required
during construction.
4 Surface Water 15 days prior 01560 – Environmental Protection

Management to start of
Implementation construction of 02271 – Water Management
Plan the component
02272 – Erosion Control (General)
Environmental Protection Plan
Detail the proposed water management methods and

schedule for installing, maintaining and water
management measures. In addition, it shall consider and
reference proposed construction phasing, and include
drawings, work procedure, protection measures,
emergency plans and shall outline the Contractor’s plan
to implement construction stormwater Best Management
Practices, that centrally locates relevant project
information, including site maps, Erosion and Sediment
Control Plans, environmental permits and erosion and
sediment control inspection logs.
The Surface Water Management Implementation Plan

shall include a High Flow Contingency Plan. The
contingency plan shall outline the actions which shall be
taken – whether due to weather, equipment malfunction,
or any other reason – if pump-around operations cannot
divert creek flows and water enters the stream
construction area. Actions shall include, but are not
limited to, the removal of all items from the 100-year
floodplain that would have the capacity to cause an
obstruction to flow or a spill (e.g. Fuel tanks, unfixed
equipment, etc.).
5 Groundwater 15 days prior 01560 – Environmental Protection

Dewatering to start of
Implementation construction 02140 – Dewatering
Plan
Plan shall be consistent with the Final Dewatering Plan
and include the proposed type of dewatering systems.
Arrangement and location of system components.
Description of equipment including back-up/stand-by
pumps. Installation, operation and maintenance
procedures.

Include an estimation of the dewatering requirements.
6 Soil Monthly: by the 01560 – Environmental Protection

Management 5th day post
Monthly Report end of Soils Management Plan
reporting
period
7 Salt 4 weeks prior 01560 – Environmental Protection

Management to winter
Plan construction.
8 Monthly Monthly: by the 01005 – General Requirements

Compliance 5th day post
Report end of 01560 – Environmental Protection
reporting
period Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and
Proponent Commitments and Final List of Approval
Conditions in tender package Attachments.
The monthly report shall include details on the activities

undertaken to meet compliance of each Condition and
Commitment during the work period and the status of
field activities associated with the Conditions and
Commitments under the Contractor’s Responsibility.
Monthly update on the implementation of mitigation

measures (successes and failures) associated with the
Conditions and Commitments under the Contractor’s
Responsibility; and the implementation of any additional
mitigation measures beyond those outlined in the
Conditions and Commitments and rationale for their
implementation.
Administrative activities completed each month,

including education and training meetings and a
description of any issues encountered.

9 Slat 30 days prior 02312 – Winter Works

Management to the start of
Plan Construction
1.4 NON-ENVIRONMENTAL SUBMITTALS, REPORTS AND PLANS
.1 The Contractor shall provide the following submittals.

Submittal Name Deliverable Submission Related Specification
1 Infrastructure 01500 – Temporary Facilities

Management Plan
2 Contractor Safety Prior to commencement of the 01545 – Safety Requirements
Program Work on site
3 Site Specific Safety Plan Prior to commencement of the 01545 – Safety Requirements
Work on site
4 Construction Emergency Prior to commencement of the 01545 – Safety Requirements
Response Plan Work on site
5 Safety Plan for crossing At least 14 days prior to work 01545 – Safety Requirements
tracks commencing within the ROW
6 List of those products Prior to commencement of the 01545 – Safety Requirements
controlled under WHMIS Work on site
and related Material
Safety Data Sheets
7 Quality Assurance Plan Prior to commencement of the 01620 – Quality Control and
Work Assurance
8 Project Record Drawings At completion of the Work and 01800 – Project Closeout
before final inspection
9 Groundwater Dewatering 14 days prior to start of 02140 - Dewatering
Implementation Plan construction
10 Comprehensive Minimum 30 days prior to 02150 - Temporary Flow
Temporary Flow Diversion installation of temporary flow Diversion
Plan diversion system
11 Detailed Working Drawing Minimum 30 days prior to 02150 - Temporary Flow
installation of temporary flow Diversion
diversion system
12 Reports 02150 - Temporary Flow
Diversion
13 Work Plan for 14 days prior to start of 02200 - Signal and Fibre
Underground Utilities construction Optic Cables
14 Product Data 14 days prior to start of 02200 - Signal and Fibre

construction Optic Cables
15 Shop Drawings for 14 days prior to start of 02200 - Signal and Fibre
Underground Utilities construction Optic Cables
16 Work Plan Methodology 14 days prior to start of 02200 - Signal and Fibre
for Utility Conduits by construction Optic Cables
Directional Drilling
for Utility Casing by construction Optic Cables
Trenchless Method
for Casing (or Conduit) construction Optic Cables
Installation by Open Cut
19 Inspection and Test 02200 - Signal and Fibre
Reports Optic Cables
20 As-Builts Drawings At completion of the Work and 02200 - Signal and Fibre
before final inspection Optic Cables
21 Geotechnical 20 Business Days prior to 02201 - Construction
Instrumentation installation Monitoring
Monitoring Plan
22 Monitoring baseline In accordance with Section 02201 - Construction
readings and monitoring 02201 Monitoring
reports
23 Construction Monitoring 28 days prior to the 02202 – Noise and Vibration
Equipment and commencement of construction Monitoring and Control
Calibrating Equipment
Test Reports
24 Noise and Vibration 28 days prior to the 02202 – Noise and Vibration
Monitoring Location Plans commencement of construction Monitoring and Control
25 Baseline Noise and 14 days prior to the 02202 – Noise and Vibration
Vibration Report commencement of construction Monitoring and Control
26 Weekly Noise and Weekly submissions 02202 – Noise and Vibration
Vibration Monitoring Monitoring and Control
Summary Report
27 Final Noise and Vibration At the completion of the work 02202 – Noise and Vibration
Monitoring Summary Monitoring and Control
Report
28 Pre-Condition Survey Minimum 30 days prior to start 02203 - Conditions Surveys
Methodology Plan of work
29 Post-Condition Survey Minimum 30 days prior to start 02203 - Conditions Surveys
Methodology Plan of work
30 Pre-Conditions Survey Minimum 30 days prior to start 02203 - Conditions Surveys
Inspection Schedule of the work
31 Pre-Condition Survey Minimum 30 days prior to start 02203 - Conditions Surveys
Report (individual reports of the work
for each locations as
specified
32 Post-Conditions Survey At the completion of the work 02203 - Conditions Surveys

Inspection Schedule
33 Post-Condition Survey At the completion of the work 02203 - Conditions Surveys
Report (individual reports
for each locations as
specified)
34 Submittals if required for 14 days prior to the 02225 -Site Demolition and
demolition and removals commencement of the work Removals
02227 – Building Demolition
and Removals
35 Product Data and 14 days prior to the 02270 Erosion Control
Samples commencement of construction
36 High Flow Contingency 14 days prior to start of 02272 – Erosion Control
Plan (General) construction
02160 – High Flow
Contingency
37 Shop Drawings as 14 days prior to the 02272 – Erosion Control -
applicable commencement of construction General
38 Product Data and 14 days prior to the 02272 - Erosion Control -
samples commencement of construction General
39 Shop and Erection 28 days prior to the 02276 – Concrete Segmental
Drawings for Concrete commencement of the work Retaining Wall
Segmental Retaining Wall
40 Warranty for Concrete After completion of the Work 02276 – Concrete Segmental
Segmental Retaining Wall Retaining Wall
41 Soil and Excavated 28 days prior to commencing 02311 - Site Grading
Materials Management use
Plan
42 Soil and Excavated Monthly submissions at the end 02311 - Site Grading
Materials Management of the month
Monthly Monitoring
Report
43 Site Grading Quality Plan 28 days prior to 02311 - Site Grading
commencement of construction
44 Borrow Test Results 28 days prior to 02311 – Site Grading
commencement of construction
45 Inspection and Test Monthly submissions at the end 02311 - Site Grading
Reports of the month
46 As-Built Survey for Site Completion of grading works 02311 - Site Grading
Grading
47 Transportation and Monthly submissions at the end 02311 - Site Grading
Manifest Documentation of the month
48 Soil Disposal Reports Monthly submissions at the end 02311 - Site Grading
of the month
49 Source of Materials 28 days prior to the 02315 - Excavating,
Report commencement of construction Trenching and Backfilling
50 Restoration 28 days prior to the 02315 - Excavating,
Implementation Plan commencement of construction Trenching and Backfilling
51 Product Data 14 days prior to the 02315 - Excavating,

commencement of work Trenching and Backfilling
52 Inspection and Test Monthly submissions at the end 02315 - Excavating,
Reports of the month Trenching and Backfilling
53 Geotextile Soil 14 days prior to the 02340 - Geotextiles
Stabilization – Product commencement of work
Data and Test Results
54 Construction Traffic 28 days prior to the 02350 - Traffic Control
Management Plan commencement of work
55 Road Occupancy Permits 28 days prior to the 02350 - Traffic Control
commencement of work
56 Product Data 14 days prior to the 02362 - Duct and Mud
commencement of work Control
57 Product Data and 14 days prior to the 02372 - Rip Rap
Samples commencement of work
58 Product Data 14 days prior to the 02620 - Subdrainage
commencement of work
59 Manufactures Test Data 14 days prior to the 02620 -Subdrainage
and Certification for Sub- commencement of work
drainage
60 Shop Drawings for Culvert 14 days prior to the 02630 - Culvert and Storm
and Sewer commencement of the work Sewers
61 Manufacturers Test Data 14 days prior to the 02630 - Culverts and Storm
and Certification for commencement of the work Sewers
Culverts and Sewers
62 Inspection and Test Monthly submissions at the end 02630 - Culverts and Storm
Reports of the month Sewers
63 Leakage Test Reports for At the completion of the work 02630 - Culverts and Storm
Culverts and Sewers Sewers
64 Pre-Construction and Prior to and at the completion 02630 - Culverts and Storm
Final Inspection Reports of the work Sewers
for Culverts and Sewers
65 Work Plan Methodology 14 days prior to the 02630 - Culverts and Storm
for installation of culverts commencement of the work Sewers
under live tracks by Open
cut
66 Shop Drawings for 14 days prior to the 02631 - Drainage Structures
Maintenance Hole Catch commencement of the work
Basins and Ditch Inlets
67 Manufacturer’s Test Data 14 days prior to the 02631 - Drainage Structures
and Certification for commencement of the work
Drainage Structures
68 Granular Material 21 days prior to the 02701 - Granular Materials
Samples and Test Results commencement of the work
69 Inspection and Test Monthly submissions at the end 02701 - Granular Materials
Reports of the month
70 Concrete Mix Designs, 14 days prior to the 02711 - Concrete Headwalls
sieve analysis and commencement of the work
specific gravity of
aggregates with the report
from Testing Agency
71 Product Data 14 days prior to the 02825 – Fencing and Road
commencement of the work Signage
72 Shop Drawings for 14 days prior to the 02825 – Fencing and Road
Fencing , gates and road commencement of the work Signage
signages
73 As-Builts Drawings for At the completion of the Work 02825 – Fencing and Road
Fencing and before final inspection Signage
74 Shop Drawings for Steel 14 days prior to the 02844 - Steel Beam Guide
Beam Guide Rail commencement of the work Rail
75 Manufacturer’s Test Data 14 days prior to 02844 - Steel Beam Guide
and Certification commencement of the work Rail
76 Topsoil, Seed and Mulch 14 days prior to the 02912 - Topsoil and Finish
Test Reports commencement of the work Grading
77 Top Soil and Finish 14 days prior to the 02912 - Topsoil and Finish
Grading - Topographical commencement of the work Grading
Survey – Pre-construction
78 Top Soil and Finish After completion of the work 02912 - Topsoil and Finish
Grading - Topographical Grading
Survey – Post-
construction
79 Notification of plant A minimum 10 working days 02970 - Tree and Shrub
material supply sources prior to projected delivery to the Planting
site
80 All packing slips for Within 48 hours of the delivery 02970 - Tree and Shrub
delivery of plant material Planting
81 Warranty - Live stakes Upon Completion of work 02972 - Livestakes
82 Mill Test Certificates for 21 days prior to 03200 - Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Bars, commencement of the work Reinforcement
Stainless Steel
Reinforcing Bars, Steel
Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Splice
Bars and Stainless Steel
Splice Bars
83 Welding Details 21 days prior to 03200 - Concrete
commencement of the work Reinforcement
84 Mechanical Connections 21 days prior to 03200 - Concrete
Details commencement of the work Reinforcement
85 Shop Drawings and 21 days prior to 03200 - Concrete
Schedules commencement of the work Reinforcement
86 As-Builts Drawings for the At completion of the Work 03200 - Concrete
Concrete Reinforcement Reinforcement
87 Deck Joint Assembly 21 days prior to 03203 - Concrete
Shop Drawings commencement of the work Accessories
88 Field Dimensions 21 days prior to 03203 - Concrete

Drawings commencement of the work Accessories
89 Cold Weather Protection 21 days prior to 03203 - Concrete
Plan for Epoxy Injection commencement of the work Accessories
90 Manufacturer’s Certificate Upon completion of the 03203 - Concrete
of Conformance and fabrication of the expansion Accessories
Request to Proceed joints and prior to shipping from
the plant
91 Product Data Sheets and 21 days prior to 03203 - Concrete
Samples commencement of the work Accessories
92 Concrete Mix Design 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Report commencement of the work
93 Certification of Ready Mix 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Concrete Facilities commencement of the work
94 Formwork and Falsework 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Shop Drawings commencement of the work
95 Falsework Foundation 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Design Report commencement of the work
96 Certificate of Upon completion of the 03312 - Concrete Work
Conformance – Formwork construction of formwork and
and Falsework falsework and prior to the
placement of concrete
97 Request to Place Prior to each placement of 03312 - Concrete Work
Structural Concrete concrete operation
98 Bridge Deck Placement 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Plan commencement of the work
99 Temperature Control Plan 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
commencement of the work
100 Curing Compound Report 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
commencement of the work
101 Manufacturer’s Certificate 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
of Compliance – commencement of the work
Approach Slab Bearings
and Ballast Wall Bearing
102 Product Data Sheet for 21 days prior to 03312 - Concrete Work
Ethylene Vinyl Acetate commencement of the work
(EVA) Foam
103 Shop Drawings for Metal 21 days prior to 05121 - Metal Railings for
Railings for Structures commencement of the work Structures
104 Test Reports for 21 days prior to 05121 - Metal Railings for
Fasteners and commencement of the work Structures
Anchorages
105 Manufacturer’s Certificate Upon completion of the 05121 - Metal Railings for
of Conformance and fabrication of the railing and Structures
Request to Proceed prior to shipping from the plant

CN – DESIGN & TEMPORARY FACILITIES SECTION 01500
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 ACCESS
.1 The Contractor shall be limited to using access to the site as shown on the
drawings or as directed. Provide and maintain adequate access to the project
site.
.2 Roads constructed between any points in the working area for the convenience
of the Contractor, for the conveyance of material or otherwise, shall be at the
Contractor's own expense and risk.
.3 The Contractor is advised that there will be other Contractors working on CN

property using the same accesses. No claims arising out of this situation will be
considered.
.4 The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal and Provincial Regulations,
Ordinances, Bylaws, etc., pertaining to the usage of Municipal and Provincial
roads, and shall protect the Railway against any and all claims arising out of their
non-compliance with the above Ordinances, Regulations, and Bylaws.
.5 Prior to using any Municipal and/or Provincial roads, the Contractor must provide
the Engineer with documentation that he/she has advised the Municipal and/or
Provincial Authorities of their haul route and has received authority to use the
roads on their haul route for purposes of transporting fill material.
.6 All work shall be contained in Canadian National Railway Project Development

Area (PDA), as directed by the Engineer. Entering areas outside the PDA is not
allowed.
.7 The Contractor shall construct adequate access roads for the conveyance of
equipment, material, disposal, etc. that they deem necessary for their operations.
On completion of the work, CN and private property shall be restored to their
original condition as approved by CN and private landowners.
.8 The Contractor is not permitted to enter into an agreement with local landowners
for any additional access to property that they deem necessary for their
operations.
.9 On completion of the work, provide a signed clearance from the landowner that
the areas used have been cleaned up to the landowner’s satisfaction. A copy of
the clearance must be provided to CN prior to final payment.
.10 In cases of dispute between the Contractor and the landowner, it will be expected
that the Contractor shall reach a favorable settlement with the landowner.
.11 If the Contractor cannot reach a settlement with the landowner, then CN shall
arbitrate an agreement binding on the Contractor to the satisfaction of and at no
cost to CN.
.12 Secure the site with fencing and gates to prevent public access to the site.
Maintain access to all driveways in the vicinity of construction.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICE
.1 The Contractor shall provide for the use of their employees, the necessary
sheltered, heated facilities. This Site Office shall be included in the Infrastructure
Management Plan as outlined in 01340 Submittals.
1.3 ENGINEER'S SITE OFFICE
.1 The Contractor shall provide, for the sole use of the Engineer, a weatherproof
temporary modular field office which shall be at least 7.3m x 18.3m with five
compartments (four offices and one meeting room) and furnished with the
following:
.1 4 double pedestal lockable desks & swivel chairs;
.2 4-2 drawer filing cabinets;
.3 1 plan table and drafting stool;
.4 1 plan rack;
.5 1 table large enough for site meetings with stackable chairs;
.6 1 water cooler/dispenser and supply of bottled water;
.7 1 fire extinguisher – 5 lb. minimum;
.8 1 first aid kit – up-to-date supplies;
.9 2 bulletin boards; and
.10 Indoor washroom facility including toilet and sink, c/w separate water and
wastewater tanks to be regularly maintained by the Contractor.
.11 4 X 4 pickup truck with four seats for the use of CN’s site representatives
on site within the construction limits. The vehicle shall be parked on-site
daily for the use of CN’s site representative.
.2 All furniture and equipment supplied shall be in a new or near new condition,
acceptable to the Engineer.
.3 The office shall be supplied with adequate air conditioning, heat, light, weekly
cleaning, winter snow removal, and clearing/salting of stairs and walkways, care
and cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor.
.4 Prior to any pre-construction meetings being attended by CN and prior to the
start of work, the office shall be set up on-site, at a location agreeable to the
Engineer, with all appropriate furniture in place. The office must be complete with
temporary power (if not fully hooked up). No work on-site will be authorized until
this is completed.
.5 The Engineer’s Office shall be included in the Infrastructure Management Plan as

outlined in 01340 Submittals.
1.4 COMMUNICATIONS
.1 The Contractor shall install in the Engineer’s site office a colour printer/scanner /
fax machine capable of handling letters, legal and ledger-size paper. The
machine must be installed immediately after the work is commenced. The
Contractor shall pay all charges for the machine, including paper and toner
supply, except for long-distance charges incurred by the Engineer.
.2 The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a high-speed internet

connection complete with a wireless router (wifi hotspot), for the transmission
of E-mail and data. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the network
connection, except for long-distance charges incurred by the Engineer.
.3 The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a two-way radio for their sole use
during the contract for communicating instructions to the Contractor and their
workforce. The foreman as well as the superintendent shall also be equipped
with a two-way radio so that the Engineer can be in communication with them at
all times.
1.5 STORAGE SHEDS
.1 Provide adequate weathertight sheds with raised floors, for storage of materials,
tools, and equipment that are subject to damage by weather.
1.6 SANITARY FACILITIES
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing washroom/sanitary facilities

and hand washing facilities on site including all hand sanitizer, gloves, masks,
etc. required, for their workforce and any Sub-contractors utilized
.2 Washroom/sanitary facilities are to utilize water and sewage tanks; the

Contractor is responsible for making arrangements and paying all costs
associated with emptying/replenishing these tanks as required.
.3 All sanitary facilities for the workforce shall be in accordance with governing
regulations and ordinances.
.4 Provide a separate sanitary facility within the Engineer’s office for the sole use of
Railway representatives.
.5 Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities,
especially regarding COVID-19. Keep the area and premises in a sanitary
condition.
.6 Facilities shall be cleaned at regular intervals as arranged by the Contractor.
1.7 WATER AND POWER
.1 The Contractor must make all arrangements with the local Utility company for the
supply and installation of temporary light and power required in carrying out the
Contract, and pay all costs involved in connection therewith:
.1 If local power is not available, use generators to supply continuous 24/7

regulated power, including supply of fuel and all maintenance.
.2 The generator must be a quiet type with a noise level at the rated output
not exceeding 60 dBA. The noise level at ¼ of the rated output must be
less than 55 dBA; and
.3 The Generator shall be CSA approved and shall bear CSA labels.
.2 The Contractor must make all arrangements and pay for all water required for
construction and drinking purposes, and supply and install all necessary piping
and connections.

CN – DESIGN & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01545
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEASURES
.1 Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by the Canada

Labour Code, Canadian Construction Safety Code, Provincial Government,
Workers’ Compensation Board, CN Annex “D” “Safety Guidelines for
Contractors” (available on CN website: www.contractororientation.com) and all
other appropriate laws and regulations governing worker health and safety.
.2 In the event of a conflict between any provisions of the above authorities, the
most stringent provision will apply.
.3 The Contractor’s personnel, while on CN property, will be required to wear safety

protective equipment at all times at the site. Such equipment shall include a hard
hat, safety glasses, blaze or international orange reflective apparel, and steel-
toed safety boots in accordance with Company regulations:
.1 Persons wearing prescription glasses will be governed by the following

requirements:
.1 Glasses shall meet the standards set out in CSA Z94.3 or as

required in applicable legislation;
.2 Lenses shall be plastic or polycarbonate; and
.3 Glasses shall be equipped with properly fitting side shields

conforming to the size and shape of lenses and must be worn at
all times on Railway property.
.2 The Contractors shall ensure that all employees, sub-contractors and

visitors must, at all times, clearly display their given and family names on
their safety hard hat; and
.3 Reflective apparel must be properly fastened and closed around the body
to minimize the possibility of catching on equipment and causing injury.
1.2 IMPLEMENTATION AND COMPLIANCE TO “SAFETY” GUIDELINES
.1 A fixed Lump Sum amount has been attributed to this contract for the
performance of safety compliance as determined by the Engineer.
compliance to the safety clauses identified in the Tender.
.3 If the Contractor does not fully comply with the requirements or the direction of
the Engineer in a reasonable time period (as determined by the Engineer) during
the given week then the full amount for that given week will be cancelled from the
aggregate amount of the Form of Tender.
.4 Performance review by CN shall be executed on a weekly basis.
contract and in case of extension of contract no additional remuneration will be
awarded.
.6 Incentive payments are an incentive for Contractor compliance and are not
compliance.
.7 Where any individual(s) in the employment or under the responsibility of the

Contractor, or Sub-Contractor, is in violation of CN’s safety rules, policies,
standards, or procedures, or instructions/direction given by CN personnel, the
Contractor shall be assessed a $5,000 penalty, per incident. This shall result in
the immediate removal of the Contractor, and/or the offending personnel from CN
property, stoppage of all work within the Limits of Construction, and closure of
the site until the situation is corrected. Repeat offences may result in the
Contractor being prohibited from continuing all contract work within the Limits of
Construction and from working on CN property in the future.
.8 All accidents/incidents that occur on CN property or adjacent to CN property with

injuries, property damage or risk to rail operations, shall be reported to the CN
flagman, Engineer and CN Contact person immediately. All such incidents shall
be fully investigated by the Contractor, with a written report sent to CN within
seven (7) days detailing the nature of the incident, the cause(s), regulatory
authorities notified, and a specific action plan to prevent recurrence.
1.3 FIRST AID AND SAFETY
.1 At the work site, provide and maintain readily accessible first aid equipment and
installations required by the Workers’ Compensation Act, and all safety and
lifesaving equipment appropriate to the nature of the works.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM
.1 The Contractor shall comply with CN Annex “D” – “Safety Guidelines for
Contractors”, Clauses 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 before they begin any construction activity
on the site. Authority to commence construction will be authorized only after this
is completed.
.2 The Contractor shall designate a full time safety officer responsible for enforcing
the safety program at the site for the duration of the work and shall indicate to CN
in writing the name of that person as well as their alternate.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all employees and all persons admitted to the
work site attend a daily briefing session as outlined in CN Appendix “D” – “Safety
Guidelines for Contractors”, Clause 4.2.3 and 4.2.4, and that they comply with
the safety program and all applicable laws, regulations and codes.
.4 Employees attending daily briefing sessions shall be required to have in their

possession up to date completed CN “Job Briefing and Near Miss Log”. Books
will be supplied by the Railway.
.5 The Contractor shall ensure that all contractors and sub-contractors working on
CN property, arrange to have their companies and their employees who will be
entering upon CN property registered as to having eRailsafe Canada registration,
background check, training and testing available at www.erailsafecanada.com,
maintain an up-to-date list of all such trained employees on site and ensure all
employees carry the identification card provided in a readily available location for
presentation when requested. The Contractor shall pay all costs ($120.00 US
one time company set up and $105.00 US per person) associated with having all
participants have the background check and take the web-based training and
registration. Authority to commence construction will be authorized only after this
is completed:
.1 ALL truck drivers, material supply drivers, visitors and service providers
who will be accessing the Limits of Construction more than once shall
complete the on-line “Contractor Orientation for Railroads” course found
at www.contractororientation.com prior to entering the Limits of
Construction. The Contractor shall pay all costs ($15 USD per person)
associated with having all participants take the web-based training and
registration. Upon request by CN or its designated representative, the
Contractor shall supply a list of qualified personnel to CN confirming its
compliance with the above; and
.2 Truck drivers, material supply drivers, visitors and service providers who
shall enter the Limits of Construction only once and shall utilize the
temporary track crossing, or traverse the Limits of Construction, but do
not have Contractor Safety Orientation qualification, shall be escorted by
the General Contractor while on the Limits of Construction.
.6 In addition to the above requirements, CN will arrange to be present at Start-up

Meetings as outlined in CN Annex “D” – “Safety Guidelines For Contractors”,
Clause 4.2.2, to ensure that all contractors personnel, sub-contractors personnel
and visitors working on CN property, have received the required training and are
aware of all safety policies and requirements for working on CN property.
Authority to commence construction will be authorized only after this is
completed.
.7 The Contractor shall provide the location and meeting room for Start-up Meetings
along with any audio and video equipment required by CN.
.8 Ensure that all workers on the site be qualified to perform the work in a safe
manner.
.9 Carry out frequent work site inspections to ensure compliance with the required
safety measures.
.10 Conduct weekly Safety Meetings and provide minutes of those meetings to the
Engineer.
.11 Send the notice of job start and completion, as required by the MOL and / or
WSIB.
1.5 CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEE QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Contractors working for CN must comply with the requirements below.

Exemptions may only be granted by the Engineer or their representative in the
case of emergencies:
.1 Contractor’s Obligations:
.1 Identify a safety officer who will be a point of contact for CN on:
.1 Safety-related matters such as action plans;
.2 Employee qualifications;
.3 Employee training; and
.4 Exchanging documentation on policy and procedure

changes, etc.
.2 Provide CN with a list of the employees working on CN property and their

qualifications. This includes the employee’s full name, as well as:
.1 Training completion dates;
.2 Refresher and re-certification due dates;
.3 Proof of training provider (i.e. CN, other railroad, outside college,

etc.);
.4 CN will only accept CROR and USOR qualifications that are

provided by an approved training supplier;
.5 Employees who are not on the above list and whose proof of
qualifications are not provided will not be allowed on CN property;
.6 Employees must carry documented proof of training in their

possession while on CN property; and
.7 Contractors must ensure that their employees are briefed and are
provided current copies of CN’s standards and policies including
the most recent updates.
.3 In order to allow new employees access to a CN work site, the following
process must be followed:
.1 Contractor must provide their names and qualifications to the

Engineer prior to these employees gaining access to CN property;
and
.2 Contractor must receive CN’s acceptance of the qualifications

prior to new employees entering CN property.
.4 Provide a Site Specific Safety Plan to the Engineer including the

following, but not limited to:
.1 An injury prevention program;
.2 Safe track unit operation;
.3 Staying within their track authority limits;
.4 Specify method of ensuring compliance and an auditing process;

and
.5 Field level risk assessments.
.2 Job Specific Training Requirements:
.1 This does not preclude other training requirements specific to the position
such as crane, welder, machine operation or other trade skills as the job
may require; and
Job Title / Role Contractor CROR GEI’s Track Track Unit

Orientation Inspection Operations
(eRailsafe) Guidelines
Foreman / Asst. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Foreman
Machine Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes
Operator – On
Track
Machine Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Operator –
Tamper
Machine Yes N/A Yes N/A N/A
Operator – Off
Track
Flagman Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Flagman – Other Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A
Trackman / Yes N/A Yes N/A N/A
Welder /Labourer
.2 Environmental training requirements for all employees accessing the CN
work site, outlined in 01560 Environmental Protection, shall include:
.1 Environmental Orientation Training;
.2 Construction Emergency Response Plan;
.3 Use of emergency spill kits; and
.4 Fire Response Action Plan.
1.6 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Construction Emergency Response Plan, that is

consistent with CN’s Accident and Malfunction Response Plan as outlined in
01560 Environmental Protection. The Plan shall include a Fire Response Action
Plan section as a requirement outlined in the Environmental Protection Plan.
.2 The Contractor shall post this plan in a conspicuous place and ensure that all
persons having access to the job site are trained on implementation of the plan
prior to having access to the site.
.3 The emergency procedure response plan shall include information as outlined in

01340 Submittals, and include the following information:
.1 Emergency phone numbers for police, fire, ambulance, hospital and utility
companies;
.2 Emergency phone number for CN;
.3 Phone numbers of the Contractor’s Project Manager/Superintendent, Site

Supervisor/Foreman and Safety Officer;
.4 Phone numbers of the Engineer and/or their Site Representative;
.5 Map showing the route and location of the nearest hospital;
.6 List of onsite first aid attendants;
.7 All material safety data sheets for materials used on site; and
.8 Phone number of Contractor’s 24 hour emergency contact person.
.4 The Construction Emergency Response Plan shall also include spill response
procedures as outlined in the EPP and 01560 Environmental Protection, related
to training, handling and safe storage and disposal of materials that may be
harmful to employees, the public and the environment.
.5 As part of the spill response procedures, the Contractor shall:

.1 Prior to the commencement of work provide, to the Engineer, a list of
those products controlled under WHMIS which he expects to use on the
contract. Related Material Safety Data Sheets shall accompany the
submission. All containers used in the application of products controlled
under WHMIS shall be labeled;
.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of changes to the list, in writing,
and provide relevant Material Safety Data Sheets; and
.3 Train all supervisory personnel in the requirements of the WHMIS

program.
1.7 VEHICLE TRAFFIC PROTECTION
.1 Provide flag persons to protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic during the
operations, at any time when workers or equipment could endanger such traffic,
all to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and any other authority having
jurisdiction at this location.
.2 Accept responsibility for any damage to vehicles and damage and injury to
pedestrians’ occupants of vehicles resulting from the operations or the operating
of equipment by others. Provide adequate protection to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.3 Wherever the work is intersected by public or private roads, provide convenient

openings to pass and maintain all crossings in a condition so they can be used
safely and without any just grounds for complaint during the progress of the work;
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer and respective Road Authority.
.4 Supply, erect and maintain the traffic control measures (signs, cones,
delineators, barriers) when construction operations may affect vehicular or
pedestrian traffic.
1.8 CROSSING TRACKS
.1 The Contractor shall not be permitted to cross the track(s) with vehicles or
equipment, except on a CN approved temporary construction crossing.
.2 If crossing the tracks is deemed necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
obtain a License for Temporary Crossing from CN and would only be permitted to
use the crossing when a CN flagman is onsite and a crossing safety plan is
agreed to by CN and the Contractor. CN would be responsible for building the
temporary crossing. All costs associated with the construction and removal of the
crossing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor:
.1 Access to the CN right of way (ROW) must be protected, using chains,

gates or by other means acceptable to CN, at all times when the CN flag
person is not present. Chains and gates shall be secured with a CN lock
only; and
.2 A safety plan which governs the use of the temporary construction
crossing shall be developed with CN and documented in writing. The
Contractor shall designate a responsible person to ensure safe passage
of traffic over the crossing. A highly visible sign shall be used when
flagging vehicles over the crossing. A physical barricade shall be moved
into position where it blocks vehicular, truck and equipment access to the
crossing when not in use and upon notification of an approaching train
from the CN flag person. The barricade shall only be removed with
permission of the CN flag person.
.3 The crossing shall be constructed at a location and to a standard acceptable to

CN. The Contractor shall submit details for the crossing to CN for approval at
least two (2) weeks prior to work commencing within the ROW.
.4 The crossing shall:
.1 Have a level gradient on either side for a distance of 8m from nearest rail.
or not less than the maximum length of vehicle using it;
.2 Have approach grades not greater than 5%;
.3 Have a crossing surface of suitable material extending at least 0.5m

beyond the travelled width on both sides measured at right angles to the
roadway; and
.4 Be of an overall safe width suitable for the use intended.
.5 The Contractor shall:
.1 Supply and install gates and stop signs at 12 feet from the gauge side of
rail on each side of the tracks;
.2 Supply and install temporary fencing as required by CN;
.3 Supply filter fabric, Terrafix 360R or approved equivalent, crossing planks,

7” x 10” Spruce/Eastern Hemlock (7 planks per track), lag screws and
washers (12” x ½”, 3 per 20’ plank), required plywood shims and 4”x4”
timbers;
.4 Supply, place and compact granular material or clear stone (as directed
by CN) within the 8 foot space between the mainline tracks (for 2 or more
tracks). Granular material/clear stone shall be placed on top of filter fabric
in order to prevent ballast contamination;
.5 Construct and maintain the crossing approaches, culverts and ditches as

required; and
.6 Maintain the crossing surface and keep the flangeways clear at all times.
.6 The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and install any required protection
of CN’s and Bell Canada (360 Networks) underground cables at the approaches
to the crossing, as directed and supervised by CN and Bell Canada. Refer to
Section 02200 Signal & Optic Cables for specific requirements for work near and
protection of cables.
.7 Use of the crossing shall be done only in the presence of a CN flag person. The
crossing gates shall be secured, with a CN lock, at the end of each working day.
.8 Steel tracked equipment shall not come into contact with the rails at any time
when traversing the crossing, as this could result in a malfunction of CN’s train
signal system. The Contractor shall supply and place rubber matting/wood planks
to protect the rails during the use of the crossing by steel-tracked equipment.
.9 The Contractor shall make all attempts to ensure that the track ballast remains
free of contamination from the deposit of mud, soil,s and other fines from
construction operations. The presence of fines in the track ballast traps water,
which results in poor track surface and necessary train speed reductions, which
will not be tolerated by CN. Should ballast contamination be evident upon
removal of the temporary track crossing, the Contractor shall be responsible for
all costs for CN to repair the track structure.
.10 Upon notice from CN, the Contractor, at their cost, may be required to remove
and reinstall the temporary crossing to allow CN track maintenance.
.11 On completion of the work, the Contractor shall restore the track to its original
condition, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.9 DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES
.1 The Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA) imposes a duty on CN to inform
the Contractor of any Designated Substances present at the Work Site, where it
is reasonable for CN to have known about the substance.
.2 The following are currently Designated Substances. These are subject to special
regulations under OHSA:
.1 Asbestos;
.2 Lead;
.3 Ethylene oxide;
.4 Mercury;
.5 Silica (free crystalline silica);
.6 Vinyl chloride monomer (not PVC);
.7 Benzene;
.8 Arsenic;
.9 Coke oven emissions;
.10 Acrylonitrile; and
.11 Isocyanates.
.3 The Contractor shall take appropriate health and safety precautions to protect
human health and the environment, including recommending additional
investigations or sampling if deemed appropriate. Such recommendations are
subject to acceptance by CN.
.4 Asbestos:
.1 The Contractor shall notify CN immediately if any material that is

suspected to contain asbestos is discovered during demolition or
construction;
.2 The Contractor shall cease Work in the area and barricade the area to
prevent entry until such time as CN confirms the presence or absence of
asbestos; and
.3 The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the ‘Occupational

Health and Safety Act’ and the ‘Regulations respecting Asbestos on
Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations.
.5 Mould:
.1 The Contractor shall notify CN immediately if any material that is

suspected to contain mould is discovered during demolition or
construction;
.2 The Contractor shall cease Work in the area and barricade the area to
prevent entry until such time as CN confirms the presence or absence of
mould; and
.3 The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the ‘Occupational

Health and Safety Act’ and ‘CN Health and Safety Guidelines’.

CN – DESIGN & FLAGGING AND TRACK PROTECTION SECTION 01546
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Project requires CN protection when construction work is performed within

the CN ROW. The rules and procedures to be complied with are set out in the
current Canadian Rail Operating Rules (CROR) under Rule 42: Planned
Protection.
.2 The Contractor shall note that the presence of CN Personnel on site is for the
protection of the Railway’s operations and interests.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 Working Area: A portion of track within the limits of exclusive track occupancy
(working limits) in which movement authority of trains and other equipment is
restricted by the Protecting Foreman. Working limits are established using Mile
posts and will be expressed in whole miles and must be established by 16:00 the
previous day as agreed to between the Protecting Foreman and Contractor.
.2 Protecting Foreman (42 Foreman): The CN Foreman named in the track

protection authority who has control of railway traffic entering into and within the
working limits.
.3 Flag Person or Employee in Charge (EIC): The CN employee responsible for the
safety, instruction, performance and protection of all employees under their
supervision, when the nature or size of the work is such that the 42 Foreman
cannot personally observe, advise and supervise all persons engaged in the
work.
.4 Contractor’s Responsible Person: The Contractor’s employee who is in charge of

the work.
1.3 FLAGGING AND TRACK PROTECTION UNDER RULE 42
.1 The 42 Foreman must receive written confirmation from the Rail Traffic Controller
that the appropriate orders stating time and work limits have been given to all
trains that may enter the limits. Until such confirmation is received, flags may not
be placed, and no work is able to take place on site.
.2 Once confirmation is received, under Rule 42 protection, the approved track

limits are marked by placing red flags at each location and yellow over red flags
at least two miles outside the track limits defined by the red flags. These flags
cannot be in place more than 30 minutes prior to or after the approved Rule 42
time limits.
.3 No work or equipment movement can be undertaken until the above prescribed

signals are in place in all directions.
.4 Prior to commencing work or moving equipment for each shift of duty and as
conditions or circumstances change during the day, the 42 Foreman will hold a
detailed job briefing session for all persons engaged in the work. All Contractors’
employees are required to participate. Additional briefings must be held with any
new sub-contractors, truck drivers or equipment operators who arrive on site
after the initial job briefing and prior to their start of work on CN property:
.1 All employees, subcontractors, truck drivers, material supply drivers and

service providers shall attend, record and acknowledge understanding of
the daily briefing session with the CN flag person prior to the
commencement of any work within the ROW. A subsequent briefing shall
be required for new conditions or personnel within the ROW, not identified
in the original briefing.
.5 Separated work groups are required when flagman cannot visually observe or
maintain effective communication. When Separated Work Groups are required
(no more than four individual groups are permitted under one 42 Foreman
control), each group shall have assigned a Flag Person.
.6 The 42 Foreman, Flagmen and Contractors’ Responsible Person must ensure

that there is a clear understanding of the train clearing procedure, track
protection authority which is in effect and that all workers are aware of the
identity of their respective Flag Person.
.7 Track limits shall be kept as short as practicable. Although no construction

staging is provided, the Contractor is encouraged to minimize the working area
limits by optimizing the work sequences and consequently reducing the stand-by
time due to train clearing procedures. When submitting the change of working
limits request to CN, the Contractor shall consider that operations and working
limits must be kept 200 yards inside the red flags.
.8 The Contractor shall expect to be sharing Rule 42 limits and flagging protection
with CN work groups.
.9 Each separated work group shall have a responsible person equipped with
portable two-way radio(s) to communicate with the CN Flag Person. The
Contractor’s responsible person will be charged with ensuring that the separated
work group and all associated trucks/deliveries comply with the track-clearing
requirements described in this section.
.10 Portable two-way radios shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be
Kenwood TK3302 or approved equivalent. The Contractor shall provide each CN
Flag Person with a portable two-way radio for communication with the
responsible person(s). The Contractor must ensure that all two-way portable
radios communicate on the same frequency and that adequate supply of
batteries are on hand to ensure no interruption in communications.
.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for staffing the project with gate keepers and
truck/delivery escorts at all access points to the CN ROW. Each gate keeper and
truck/delivery escort must be equipped with a portable two-way radio capable of
communication with the CN Flag Person.
1.4 TRACK CLEARING PROCEDURE
.1 Trains approaching a red flag will contact the 42 Foreman, to request instructions
for entering and passing through the working limits protected by the Rule 42.
.2 Before permitting the train to enter the working limits, the 42 Foreman will:
.1 Advise all Flagmen of the separated work groups (again, no more than
four) that a train will be passing through the working limits;
.2 The 42 Foreman must receive confirmation from all Flagmen of the

separated work groups that all work has been stopped and all employees
and machines are clear of the track before authorizing a train to pass
through the work limits;
.3 ALL workers, truck drivers and equipment operators working on the

property must be notified that a train will be passing. This may be
communicated in person, by radio, or by agreed signal (horn, hand signal,
etc.) as discussed and established at the job briefing;
.4 Equipment which is stopped must remain stopped until the full train has
passed the entire Rule 42 limits and authority from the Flag Person to
resume work has been received:
.1 Buckets for excavators or other equipment that has a boom must
remain on the ground in parallel position to the nearest track and
at distance at least 19 ft from the nearest rail until the entire train
has passed the entire Rule 42 limits and advised by Flag Person;
and
.2 To eliminate the possibility of unexpected movements after a train
has been cleared through the Rule 42 limits, all equipment and
trucks must be turned off/ locked out, or the operator/driver must
exit the piece of equipment/truck.
.5 Before canceling the authority of before the time limits have expired on a
Rule 42, the Foreman will contact the Flagmen of separated work groups
and receive confirmation that all work has been stopped and all
employees and machines are clear of the track;
.6 If comfortable with the rail traffic and work conditions, the 42 Foreman
may also act as a Flagman, solely at their discretion;
.7 This Track Clearing Procedure applies whether the train is passing on the
adjacent track or other track; and
.8 As the work progresses and the Engineer gains familiarity and confidence
in the Contractor’s safety and train clearing performance, written
provisions may be made modifying this requirement by allowing some
equipment that cannot foul an adjacent track, to continue working or
traveling.
.3 The Contractor is advised that non-work related radio communications will not be
tolerated, as it may interfere with the train clearing communications.
1.5 RAIL TRAFFIC PROTECTION
.1 Note that the works shall be carried out adjacent to the Railway's operating
tracks. CN Flag Persons must be present at all times when work progresses
within the CN ROW. The presence of CN Flag Persons in no way relieves the
Contractor from liability for damage or disruption to CN property, infrastructure or
rail traffic caused by their operations.
.2 All work executed by the Contractor shall not interfere with the continued, safe
movement of rail traffic. Any object waved violently by anyone on or near the
tracks is a signal for trains to stop. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs,
direct and indirect, incurred by CN as a result of damage, disruption or
inconvenience to CN’s operations, property or infrastructure, caused by the
Contractor’s operations.
.3 The Railway will provide a maximum of four (4) Flag Persons, at no cost to
the Contractor, up to the Contract Completion date specified in Annex “C”. After
this date, or if the Contractor requires additional Flag Persons for their
operations, these extra Flag Persons will be provided, if available, at a rate of
$205/hour, minimum 8 hours on site and 2 hours travel/set up per Flag Person
per day, maximum 12 hours per person, per day, the cost of which will be
automatically deducted from the amounts due the Contractor in progress
payments.
.4 The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that construction operations are
carried out without interfering with the continued safe movement of rail traffic.
The Contractor will be liable for the cost of train delays and for the cost of repairs
to any rail, ties, ballast and signal appliances required as a result of damage
caused by their operation.
.5 Give the Engineer at least five (5) working days’ notice of the hours within which
work is to be carried out in order that protection may be provided. Time wasted
unnecessarily by the Railway personnel due to the Contractor will be charged
against the Contractor.
.6 Ensure that a responsible person is present at all times to whom the Railway
personnel will issue orders regarding work near the tracks. Comply immediately
with such orders and instructions.
.7 The Contractor shall take into consideration downtime to permit the passage of
trains on the adjacent tracks during construction of all work under this Contract.
Downtime calculations do not include the daily job briefings and
mobilization/demobilization. The Contractor shall have no claims for additional
payment for delays.
.8 The Contractor shall expect that 25 to 30 trains may be operated during any 24-
hour period; and
.9 The Contractor shall expect an average work stoppage of approximately 20 – 30

minutes for each passing train when work is being performed within 9.2m (30’) of
the nearest rail of any railroad track, or is using machinery that can encroach
within 9.2m (30’) of the nearest rail of any railroad track, as per Clause 5.2.5 of
CN Annex “D” Safety Guidelines for Contractors.
.10 Red colour shall not be used for safety helmets, safety vests or survey markers
on the CN ROW in order to avoid conflict with CN Operational Practice. Other
highly visible colours such as orange are acceptable.
.11 At no time shall idling equipment be left unattended by the operator.
.12 Metal measuring tapes or other metal appliances are not to come into contact
with the rail of any track. Walking or stepping on a rail, switch, interlocking
machinery or connection is prohibited.
.13 The CN Flag Person may be required to leave the job site at any time, without
notice, to provide emergency services at other locations. In this event, the
Contractor shall cease all work within the ROW and immediately exit CN property
prior to the CN Flag Person leaving the site. The Contractor shall not enter onto
CN’s property until such time a Flag Person is present.
1.6 TRACK PROTECTION
.1 At all locations where there is a possibility of trees, rock or other debris falling on
the tracks, provide track protection such as timber mats or an approved
equivalent in order to prevent possible damage to rail, ties and ballast.
.2 Prevent excavated material from fouling ballast and sub-ballast.
.3 The Contractor shall be liable for all costs, direct and indirect, incurred by CN due
to the settlement of track(s) or any other problems related to CN’s operations,
property or infrastructure, that occur as result of the Contractor’s operations, for a
period of two (2) years from the date of completion of the work.
.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with delays or
inconvenience to the Contractor’s operations as a result of:
.1 CN’s requirements;
.2 Failure by the Contractor to provide sufficient notification to CN as

outlined in this specification;
.3 CN’s inability to provide CN Flag Person, or other CN resources,

notwithstanding the Contractor providing sufficient notification as outlined
in this specification;
.4 Stoppage of work within the ROW, by CN; and

.5 Cancellation, delay or reduced hours of track protection, by CN, or stand-
by time during the work to allow train passage.
1.7 RESTRICTIONS ON CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
.1 In order to ensure the continued safe movement of rail traffic, certain restrictions
shall be imposed on the construction operations. Without in any way limiting the
generality of the foregoing statement, the following are some of the limitations or
restrictions that shall be imposed.
.2 Confine all work activities to daylight and evening hours, except where noted
otherwise, or as directed by the Engineer, and the following restrictions:
.1 Confine all work activities to between 07:00 and 17:00. When night work
or work outside of the period is required, notice must be provided to the
Engineer with a minimum of one (1) month notice;
.2 Working shift is not to exceed 10 hours per day for activities on site were
flagging is required. Flagging will not be provided for more than 10 hours
per day on site. The working shift will include the daily job briefing and
mobilization/demobilization from the work location(s). Daily downtime
calculation does not include the daily job briefing and
mobilization/demobilization; and
.3 Request for additional work hours and work on Saturday, Sunday, or

.3 All men and equipment must stop working at the direction of the CN Flag person
and remain stopped until the entire train has passed through the Rule 42 limits.
1.8 DO NOT WORK ON THE CN RIGHT-OF -WAY WITHOUT THE PRIOR

CONSENT OF THE ENGINEER AND ONLY DURING SUCH TIMES AS THERE
IS RAIL TRAFFIC PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE RAILWAY.
BARRICADES – SITE ACCESS
.1 Observe all necessary precautions and provide, erect, and maintain suitable
signs, barricades, and lights to protect all persons from injury and all vehicles
from damage during the progress of the work, all to the approval of the Engineer
or any authority having jurisdiction at this location.
.2 Provide all means necessary to prevent the entrance of unauthorized personnel

onto the work site and from using access roads.
.3 Install temporary gates, approved by the Engineer, to prevent use of the access
points by unauthorized personnel and keep gates locked, with Contractor’s lock
and lock provided by the Engineer, when access points are not in use.
.4 Site access points shall only be used by equipment when flagging protection has
been provided by Railway personnel and the Contractor shall provide a full-time
gate keeper at each access point while being used.
.5 The gate keepers shall be in possession of a two-way radio for immediate

contact with the Contractor’s Responsible Person for information on train
movements.
.6 On notification that a train is approaching, the gate keeper shall block off the
access point and not allow any further entrance to the site and report to the
Contractor’s Responsible Person that the access point is closed, and must
remain closed until notified that it is safe to re-open the gate.
.7 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all gates are closed and
locked at the end of each shift.
1.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
.1 No measurement will be made for the work of this Section.
.2 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be deemed incidental to and included
in the various lump sum and unit prices included in the Form of Tender.

CN – DESIGN & TRACK CLOSURES SECTION 01550
MI. 38.72 TO MI. 41.00 HALTON SUB
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions (Annex “A”) of Contract Form No. 3819 and all Sections of Division 1 of
1.1 TRACK CLOSURES
.1 Except for the work to be executed under scheduled track closures, all other work
executed by the Contractor shall be carried out without interfering with the
continued safe movement of rail traffic. The Contractor shall be liable for the cost
of train delays and for the cost of repairs to the track required as a result of
damage caused by their operation.
.2 CN cannot guarantee that the scheduled start or finish times of the track closures
can be provided due to train schedules; the Contractor shall have no claims for
additional payments for delays or standby time.
.3 The Contractor shall note that track closures may be scheduled on holidays,
weekends, and during the night. Confirmation of the dates and times of the track
closures by CN will be supplied to the Contractor one (1) week prior to the work
but may be subject to cancellation or re-scheduling by the Railway at any time
prior to the track closure.
.4 For night work activities, the Contractor shall supply and maintain adequate
temporary lighting and associated generators in the Contract area such that all the
work in these areas can be carried out safely manner. Generators used shall be
the quietest available. At no time shall lights be directed towards the railway tracks.
No separate payment will be made for temporary lighting.
.5 At least twenty-four (24) hours prior to the scheduled track closures, the Contractor
shall have all resources and equipment in place to carry out the work for that
particular closure. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the above is
unsatisfactory, the Engineer will cancel and reschedule the temporary track
closure, and the Contractor will pay all costs associated with the cancellation and
rescheduling.
.6 The Contractor shall note that, from time to time, CN or other work in the area may
impact on the scheduled closures and may cause cancellation of the closure or
reduction of the hours allowed. The Contractor shall have no claims for additional
payment for delays.
1.2 MINOR TRACK CLOSURES – UP TO EIGHT (8) HOURS
.1 The Contractor shall provide at least one (1) month written notice to CN prior to
the works requiring Track Closures.
.2 The Contractor shall provide a detailed Work Plan Method complete with an
hour-by-hour schedule for each location to include the following information:
.1 Labour and site supervision details.
.2 Equipment, including lighting
.3 Materials to be used
.4 Staging of equipment and materials
.5 Back up equipment
.3 Track closures will be allowed for the following activities:
.1 Installation of new culvert sections under the existing main track at the
following locations:
.1 Mile 37.00
.2 Mile 37.20
.3 Mile 37.63
.4 Mile 37.98
.4 The Contractor is referred to Clause 3.1 Liquidated Damages of this Section with
regards to overrunning and any additional track closures required to complete the
works.
.5 All work requiring track closures will be allowed between the following times: from
approximately 22:00 to 06:00 only.
.6 The Contractor will have up to eight (8) hours to complete the work, including one
(1) hour at the beginning and one (1) hour at the end for CN to facilitate track work,
and all work must be completed by the end of the track closure.
1.3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR TRACK CLOSURES
.1 It is agreed by the parties to the contract that in case all the work called for under
each track closure is not finished or completed within the allotted time specified,
a loss or damage will be sustained by the Railway. Since it is and will be
impracticable and extremely difficult to ascertain and determine the actual loss or
damage which the Railway will suffer in the event of and by reason of such delay,
the parties hereto agree that the Contractor will pay to the Railway the following:
.1 For Minor Track Closures – Up to (8) Hours

.1 The sum of $1,000.00 as liquidated damages for overrunning the

minor track closure and;
.2 The sum of $1,000.00 per each 10-minute overrun of the track

closure.
.2 These liquidated damages will be automatically deducted from the amounts due
to the Contractor in the progress payments.
.3 It is also agreed that this amount is an estimate of the actual loss or damage to
the Railways which will accrue during the period in excess of the prescribed track
closure termination and that this is without prejudice to CN's other recourse
relative to failing to complete the work and returning the tracks back into service.

CN – DESIGN & ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SECTION 01560
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ABORIGINAL PARTICIPATION AND ENGAGEMENT
The Milton Logistics Hub Project is situated within the treaty lands and traditional territory of the
Mississaugas of the Credit First Nation (also referred to below as the “Treaty Holder”). The Six
Nations of the Grand River and the Huron Wendat First Nation also have interest in the area (all
three Aboriginal groups collectively referred to hereinafter as the “Identified Nations”). CN is
committed to ensuring and facilitating meaningful economic opportunities and participation in
the Project by these Nations, as a means of reconciliation and in recognition of the location of
the Project within these lands. Lead contractors should embrace and have specific plans to
fulfill CN’s commitment to such meaningful participation.
Consistent with our commitments, CN expects lead contractors to engage directly with the
Mississaugas of the Credit First Nation, as the Treaty Holders, to discuss opportunities for
meaningful economic involvement in the Project as described below. This is not meant to
exclude participation from either the Huron-Wendat or the Six Nations of the Grand River.
Lead contractors are required to demonstrate in their submissions how they will incorporate
meaningful Indigenous participation in the following areas:
i. Partnership or sub-contracting opportunities

This could include a joint venture partnership with or direct subcontracting opportunities to
Indigenous-owned businesses.
ii. Employment and training opportunities

This could include direct employment or training opportunities including apprenticeships and
skills development for members of the Identified Nations. Lead contactors are encouraged to
share how they intend to track and report on employment and training outcomes. In addition,
bidders can describe internal efforts to ensure cultural safety and Indigenous awareness
programming.
Lead contractors are also required to demonstrate in their submissions how they will
meaningfully engage with the Identified Nations.
Submissions will be evaluated using weighted criteria. Lead contractor’s Indigenous

engagement plans will be considered when determining the preferred bid.
In order to advance your efforts clearly in the RFP submissions, we have provided the contact
information so you are able to reach out directly to the MCFN to discuss how
they can participate in your submission.
Mississaugas of the Credit First Nation:

Neil Freeman - Business Development Manager
647-225-5775
nfreeman@mncbc.ca
Huron-Wendat:
Maxime Picard
Manager economic development and major projects
maxime.picard@cnhw.qc.ca
1-418-843-3767
Six Nations of the Grand River:
Robinn Vanstone
Lands and Resources, Six Nations of the Grand River
rvanstone@sixnations.ca
Work: 519-753-0665 ext. 5433
Cell: 226-388-0284
1.1 GLOSSARY
.1 The following definitions are utilized within the Environmental Protection

specification:
.1 “Archaeologist” is an individual with a license to practice archaeology in

the Province of Ontario in accordance with the Ontario Heritage Act
(Ontario);
.2 “Canadian Environmental Assessment Act, 2012” means the Canadian

Environmental Assessment Act, 2012 (S.C. 2012, c. 19, s. 52);
.3 “Canadian National Railway Inc: Ontario Excess Soil Management

Procedure” means Canadian National Railway Inc: Ontario Excess Soil
Management Procedure, Revision 1, August 5, 2015;
.4 “Certified Arborist” is an arborist with a certified membership in good

standing with the International Society of Arboriculture;
.5 “Communication Protocol” has the meaning given in Section 1.6.2;
.6 “DFO” means Fisheries and Oceans Canada;
.7 “Environmental Monitor” is independent of the Contractor and staff

structure and is ultimately responsible to CN. The Environmental Monitor
has the authority to direct the Construction Manager or Contractor to
satisfy or meet the standards outlined in the Environmental Protection
Plan;
.8 “Environmental Orientation” has meaning given in Sections 1.5.7 and

1.5.8;
.9 “Environmental Policy” has meaning given in Section 1.3.2;

.10 “Environmental Protection Act (Ontario)” means the Environmental
Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E. 19, as amended from time to time;
.11 “Environmental Protection Plan” is the Plan to facilitate the environmental

mitigation measures and commitments to be carried out by CN, its
contractor(s) and subcontractor(s) during construction of the Milton
Logistics Hub (MLH) Project;
.12 “Environmental Site Inspector” has the meaning given in Sections 1.5.2
and 1.5.3;
.13 “Final List of Approval Conditions (January 21, 2021), form the Decision
Statement issued under Section 54 of the Canadian Environmental
Assessment Act, 2012 (January 21, 2021) issued to Canadian National
Railway Company for the Milton Logistic Hub Project by the Impact
Assessment Agency of Canada;
.14 “Fisheries Act” means Fisheries Act (R.S.C., 1985, c. F-14), as amended
from time to time;
.15 “Impact Assessment Act” means the Impact Assessment Act (S.C. 2019,
c. 28, s. 1), as amended from time to time;
.16 “Impact Assessment Agency of Canada” leads all impact assessments for
major Federal projects under the Impact Assessment Act;
.17 “Indigenous Communities” means, collectively, the original peoples of

North America, including First Nations (Indians), Métis and Inuit;
.18 “Indigenous” means an individual or group that is part of an Indigenous

Community;
.19 “Migratory Birds Convention Act (1994)” means the Migratory Birds
Convention Act, 1994 (S.C. 1994, c. 22), as amended from time to time;
.20 “Monthly Compliance Report” has the meaning given in Section 1.5.4;
.21 “No-go zone or area” means Protected Sensitive Natural Area and
Temporarily Protected Area as identified on Contract Drawings;
.22 “Clean Equipment Protocol for Industry” means the Ontario Invasive
Plant Council’s Clean Equipment Protocol for Industry (June 2016);
.23 “Ontario Regulation 406/19, as amended” means the O. Reg. 406/19: On-
Site and Excess Soil Management filed December 4, 2019 under
Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19;
.24 “Professional Engineer of Ontario” means a person with a license to

practice in the Province of Ontario;
.25 “Professional Geoscientist” means a practicing member of the Association
of Professional Geoscientists of Ontario;
.26 “Qualified aquatic biologist” means a biologist who has demonstrated

experience in aquatic ecology, identification, and impact assessments, or
a field staff with demonstrated skills in identification of fish and aquatic
habitat;
.27 “Qualified biologist” means a biologist who has demonstrated experience

in avian, reptile, amphibian, aquatic, mammal or plant ecology,
identification, and impact assessments, or a field staff with demonstrated
skills in visual and auditory identification of birds, bats, fish and aquatic
habitat, reptiles or amphibians;
.28 “Qualified Person” has the meanings given in section 5 of Ontario

Regulation 153/04, made under the Environmental Protection Act
(Ontario);
.29 “Species at Risk Act (Canada)”, means the Species at Risk Act, S.C.
2002, c. 29, as amended from time to time;
.30 “Subsoil” is defined in the Soil Management Plan;
.31 “Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations” (TDG) means

Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (1992, c. 34), as amended
from time to time;
.32 “Top Soil” is defined in the Soil Management Plan; and
.33 “Waste Audit and Reduction Program and Source Separation Program”
has the meanings given in Ontario Regulations 102/94 and 103/94, made
under the Environmental Protection Act (Ontario).
1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, REGULATION, GUIDELINES AND POLICY
.1 The Contractor shall comply with any applicable laws, rules or regulation of any
public authority, orders of a Court of competent jurisdiction and CN directive with
respect to the contracted Work. The Contractor shall also indemnify and hold
harmless CN or CN’s designated Environmental Monitor from all damages and
liabilities assessed against CN as a result of Contractor non-compliance therewith.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure and warrant that all employees possess and maintain
in effect all licenses, permits, authorizations, insurance and any other documents
that the acts and/or regulations pertaining to environmental protection require it to
have for the performance and the duration of contracted Work.
.3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the cost of all Work carried out to
correct any environmental contamination or non - compliance caused by the
Contractor, their subcontractors or employees on CN property. If the Contractor
fails to correct any environmental contamination resulting from the contracted Work,
CN may perform such work by its employees or agent. CN may charge the
Contractor for all cost incurred by CN in correcting such environmental
contamination, plus thirty percent (30%) for overhead, and the Contractor shall pay
CN’s invoice or invoices for such cost under the same terms and condition as would
otherwise apply in the contracted Works for Contractor invoices to CN. In the event
such remedial work is carried out by any public authority, the cost shall be borne by
the Contractor.
.4 Failure by the Contractor, subcontractors or employees to respect the established

Environmental Protection Plan may lead to temporary stoppage of Work,
suspension of an employee from working on CN property, closure of the Site until
the situation is corrected or removal of the Contractor from the Site. Delays
resulting from such closings and any resulting penalties shall be charged to the
Contractor. The Contractor will not issue any claims against CN for these delays.
No extension of contractual Work completion date will be granted as a result of any
Work stoppage associated with environmental spills, non-compliance and/or
incidents.
1.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1 The Contractor shall be fully familiar with and comply with all applicable laws.
.2 The Contractor shall provide to CN a copy of the Contractor’s Environmental Policy,

that will be consistent with the requirements outlined in the Environmental
Protection Plan and in accordance with 01340 - Submittals.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that its actions during all phases of construction are
considered in a careful and precautionary manner, promote sustainable
development, are informed by the best information and knowledge including
community and Indigenous knowledge, available at the time the Proponent takes
action, are based on methods and models that are recognized by standard-setting
bodies, are undertaken by qualified individuals, have applied the best available
economically and technically feasible technologies to achieve continuous
improvement and meet all engineering requirements for safe railway and facility
operation.
.4 The Contractor shall complete the Work in a manner that:

.1 Protects health and the environment;
.2 Complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents as outlined in
the Cover Index, Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and
Proponent Commitments and Final List of Approval Conditions as detailed
in the Attachments of the Tender Package;
.3 Adequately anticipates, protects and plans for impacts to the
environment, including spills, erosion and sedimentation, waste disposal
and the use, storage and disposal of Hazardous Materials;
.4 Works with CN’s Environmental Monitor to address non-compliance and
implement alternative mitigation measures or construction techniques to
avoid or reduce environmental effects during construction in accordance
with the Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and
Proponent Commitments and Final List of Approval Conditions (January
21, 2021);
.5 Ensures that its actions in meeting the Updated Consolidated Table of

Mitigation Measures and Proponent Commitments and Final List of
Approval Conditions are taken in a way that is consistent with any
applicable recovery strategy and action plans for listed species at risk;
and
.6 To the extent that is not inconsistent with the Contract Documents, uses
all commercially reasonable efforts to reduce, reuse or recycle non-
hazardous and non-radioactive waste.
.5 The Contractor shall review and be fully familiar with the documents attached to the
Contract as outlined in the Cover Index. Final documents will be provided to the
successful bidder. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements included in
the attached documents:
.1 Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and Proponent

Commitments
.2 Final List of Approval Conditions (January 21, 2021)
.3 Canadian Transportation Agency Decision (To be provided by

Addendum)
.4 Preliminary Dewatering Plan (Stantec, 2021)
.5 Water Well Decommissioning Plan (Stantec, 2021)
.6 Soil Management Plan (AECOM, 2023)
.7 Archaeological and Cultural Resources Protection Plan (Stantec, 2021)
.8 Wildlife Management and Connectivity Plan (Stantec, 2021)
.9 Accident and Malfunction Response Plan Phase 1 (Stantec, 2021)
.10 Environmental Protection Plan (Stantec, 2021)
.11 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan/Drawings (General)
.12 Cultural Heritage Documentation: 5269 Tremaine Road, Milton, Ontario

(Stantec, 2020)
.6 If upon review of environmental documents there is a conflict, the Final List of

Approval Conditions outlined in 1.3.5.2 shall take precedence.
.7 The Contractor shall prepare all plans, reports and other documents identified
herein, in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals.
.1 Accident & Malfunction Response Plan, to be updated by the Contractor

from the version that will be provided by CN upon project award;
.2 Waste Control and Management Plan, including:

.1 a Waste Audit and Reduction Program and Source Separation
Program, as required by O.Reg. 102/94 and O.Reg. 103/94, which
shall be implemented throughout the Work;
.3 Air Quality Best Management Practice Plan;
.4 Final Infrastructure Management Plan;
.5 Surface Water Management Implementation Plan including a High Flow

Contingency Plan;
.6 Groundwater Dewatering Implementation Plan (for dewatering of site

excavations), including areas such as Lower Base Line or any
underground terminal infrastructure, as appropriate;
.7 Noise Reduction Plan;
.8 Soil Management Monthly Report;
.9 Construction Traffic Management Plan; and,
1.4 MONTHLY COMPLIANCE REPORTS ENVIRONMENTAL INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
performance of environmental compliance as determined by the Engineer and CN
Environmental Monitor.
compliance to the Clauses of this Section.
.3 If the Contractor does not willfully comply with these requirements or the direction of
the CN Environmental Monitor in a reasonable time period (as determined by the
Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor) during the given month, then the full
amount for that given month will be cancelled from the aggregate amount of the
Form of Tender.
.4 Performance review by the Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor shall be

executed on a monthly basis.
contract and in case of extension of contract no additional remuneration will be
awarded.
.6 Incentive payments are an incentive for Contractor compliance and are not
compliance.
1.5 CONTRACTOR’S REQUIREMENTS UNDER THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

PLAN
.1 The Contractor shall review and adhere to all of the requirements outlined in the
Environmental Protection Plan, Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures
and Proponent Commitments and Final List of Approval Conditions and other
documents outlined in Section 1.3.
.2 An Environmental Monitor will be retained by CN for the duration of construction as

outlined in the Environmental Protection Plan. It will be the responsibility of the
Contractor to identify a Environmental Site Inspector who will work with the
Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor when completing all Works during pre-
construction, construction, and any post-construction monitoring/inspections as
identified. The Environmental Site Inspector shall have a minimum of ten (10) years
of demonstrated working experience in all aspects of environmental
monitoring/mitigation during roadway and/or rail construction, specifically with
respect to work in and around watercourses and in the application and correction of
erosion and sedimentation control measures, reporting spills and the containment of
effluent and dust during construction, and with projects in Canada of a similar scope
and complexity to this Project. The Environmental Site Inspector shall also hold
certification as a Canadian Certified Inspector of Sediment and Erosion Control
(CAN-CISEC), and have proven proficiency in observing, inspecting and reporting
on the implementation of erosion and sediment control plans.
.1 The Environmental Site Inspector shall be a full-time person dedicated to

the project and be present on site when completing all Works with respect
to this Tender Package.
.2 The Contractor shall submit sufficient documentation to the Engineer, to

demonstrate that the qualifications of the Environmental Site Inspector
are sufficient to carry out the responsibilities described in this Section.
.3 The responsibilities of the Environmental Site Inspector shall include daily start-up
meetings to coordinate project construction activities, including:
.1 Tracking of construction phase modifications;
.2 Updating the project schedule;
.3 Coordinating with CN’s Environmental Monitor;
.4 Reviewing and providing direction to contractor employees regarding

environmental compliance;
.5 Reviewing of compliance monitoring results;

.6 Documenting compliance with the Updated Consolidated Table of
Mitigation Measures and Proponent Commitments and Final List of
Approval Conditions in a Monthly Compliance Report (see 1.3.5 and
1.5.4).
.4 The Contractor shall document, on a monthly basis, compliance with the Final List
of Approval Conditions and the Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures
and Proponent Commitments in accordance with 01340 - Submittals. The Monthly
Compliance Report shall document:
.1 Activities undertaken to meet compliance of each Condition and

Commitment during the work period;
.2 Status of field activities associated with the Conditions and Commitments

under the Contractor’s Responsibility;
.3 Implementation of mitigation measures (successes and failures)

associated with the Conditions and Commitments under the Contractor’s
Responsibility;
.4 Implementation of any additional mitigation measures beyond those

outlined in the Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and
Proponent Commitments and Final List of Approval Conditions and
rationale for their implementation;
.5 Administrative activities, including education and training meetings;
.6 Description of any issues encountered, including:

.1 Non-Conformance, incidents, preventative and corrective actions;
.2 Outcomes;
.3 Follow-up actions; and
.4 Expected timelines.
.5 Upon the Engineer’s and CN Environmental Monitor’s review of the Monthly

Compliance Report, the implementation of additional mitigation may be requested of
the Contractor.
.6 The Contractor shall keep on-site a list of hazardous materials, toxic products, Work
procedures and contaminants used in the Work and clearly display at the Site the
lists and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and provide to the CN Environmental
Monitor.
.7 Prior to any on-site activities, the Contractor and any sub-contractors shall attend
an Environmental Orientation, to be developed by the Engineer and the CN
Environmental Monitor. The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring all personnel
on the Site are informed on the contents of the Plans outlined in 1.3.5 and the
Environmental Orientation program. The Contractor must ensure that all new
employees and/or subcontractors receive the Environmental Orientation training
prior to them conducting any activity on site.
.8 Environmental Orientation will include but not be limited to Site Specific Training for:
.1 Archaeology and Cultural Heritage
.2 Indigenous Peoples Awareness Training
.3 Species at Risk, including:

.1 Snapping Turtle (special concern)
.2 Bobolink (threatened)
.3 Eastern Meadowlark (threatened)
.4 Bank Swallow (threatened)
.5 Barn Swallow (threatened)
.6 Little Brown Myotis (endangered)
.7 Monarch (endangered)
.8 Western Chorus Frog (threatened)
.9 Eastern Milksnake (special concern)
Black Ash (expected to become a protected Species at Risk during the contract period)
1.6 STATUTORY APPROVALS
.1 Communication with regulators and Indigenous Communities will be the

responsibility of the Engineer. The Contractor will receive all relevant environmental
regulatory correspondence required. Any communication or correspondence with
agency staff, government regulators, Indigenous representatives or the public
should be directed to the Engineer.
.2 A Communication Protocol will be developed by the Engineer and provided to the

Contractor. The Contractor will be required to follow the Communication Protocol,
including any notification requirements. The Protocol will include but not be limited
to the following:
.1 Schedule of construction activities, including construction activities
that generate noise, light trespass or dust;
.2 Process for notification in the event of any accidents and
malfunctions;
.3 Process for notifying the public of any night-time construction
activities;
.4 Details for receiving complaints related to noise, light, dust, fumes
or any other complaint; and
.5 Process for how a member of the public can record a complaint.
.3 The Engineer and/or CN’s Environmental Monitor will notify the Contractor of any
complaints received. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify or develop a
plan with the Engineer and/or CN’s Environmental Monitor to rectify the complaint
within 24 hours of receiving the complaint.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
.1 All construction activities will be restricted to the Limits of Construction (e.g.,

grade areas, roads, etc) as shown in the Contract Drawings. Construction traffic
will be restricted to approved access roads within the road allowance and follow
requirements outlined in 02350 – Traffic Control. All construction traffic will
adhere to safety and road restrictions (e.g., seasonal load limits).
.2 The Contractor shall implement and maintain stabilized construction access and
roadways to reduce tracking of construction sediment (mud and dirt) onto public
roads by construction equipment. A sweeper needs to be kept onsite to routinely
clean public roads, as necessary.
.3 Unauthorized public access during construction will be prohibited. The Contractor

shall erect and maintain appropriate signage and other measures to restrict
access (e.g., gates), as required.
.4 The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to prevent accidents and
malfunctions that may result in adverse environmental effects and mitigate any
adverse environmental effect from accidents and malfunctions that does occur.
.5 The contractor shall comply with and maintain the Accident & Malfunction
Response Plan during all phases of the construction. The Contractor shall submit
any updates to the Accident & Malfunction Response Plan to the CN
Environmental Monitor and the Engineer in accordance with 01340-Submittals.
.6 The Contractor shall not use salt for de-icing or traction control purposes during
construction. Except for the use of sand, any other non-salt de-icing methods for
traction control must be approved to the satisfaction of the Engineer and CN’s
Environmental Monitor. If salts such as calcium chloride are deemed necessary,
the Contractor must develop a Salt Management Plan to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor. Once approved internally, the
document will be circulated by CN to regulatory agencies before approval is
permitted for use of the material on the site. This process will take a minimum of
4 weeks.
1.8 EMERGENCY AND SPILL RESPONSE PROCEDURE
.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible and liable for, without being limited to, all
testing documentation, clean up, reporting, repairs, removal, damages and
associated costs, and any other actions arising from any spill or incident that results
in release of a contaminant.
.2 The Contractor, within 15 days of project award, shall provide the Engineer with an
updated Accident & Malfunction Response Plan based on the version from Phase 1.
This Phase 1 version will be provided by CN to the Contractor upon project award.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure all staff are trained on the Accident & Malfunction
Response Plan through an employee education and orientation program. Copies of
training records shall also be provided to the Engineer.
.4 All supervisory personnel will be trained in and aware of the requirements of the
WHMIS program. All machine operators will be provided with and trained in the use
of emergency spill kits.
.5 Storage of hazardous materials will be restricted to designated areas with proper

containment and in accordance with appropriate safety procedures and
requirements.
.6 The Contractor shall store bulk quantities of combustible and flammable materials in
designated containment areas at least six meters away from the property limits.
.7 Machinery should arrive onsite in clean and good working conditions and be free of
fluid leaks.
.8 The Contractor shall conduct and record daily inspections on all equipment for
review by CN’s Environmental Monitor and the Engineer. Issues arising from the
inspection will be resolved immediately.
.9 The Contractor will not be permitted to perform any major equipment repair onsite.
Minor repairs (e.g., hydraulic hose repair) will be permitted onsite within the
approved temporary workspace.
.10 Oil changes, lubricating and fueling of mobile construction equipment will only be
completed at designated, contained locations approved by CN’s Environmental
Monitor.
.11 Fuel tanks stored on the property for equipment fueling purposes must be double
walled tanks, appropriately labeled and protected with vehicle impact barriers.
Designated fueling locations must be located 30 metres from the top of bank of the
closest waterbody, at least six meters away from the property limits and at a
contained location approved by the Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor. The
Contractor shall use ultra-low Sulphur fuel.
.12 Spent oils, lubricants and filters will be collected in covered bins located onsite and
disposed of at licensed disposal facilities.
.13 All fuel and service vehicles will carry a minimum of 25 kilograms (kg) of suitable
absorbent and spill contingency materials.
.14 The Contractor will have strategically placed, readily accessible, spill response
equipment, in addition to those listed in 1.8.13. as a minimum and to be replaced as
used:
No. Description Unit Quantity Notes
1 65 gallon spill control Grainger-product code: 2

drum kit (yellow) EPC1360YE
2 6-include float/12-inch Quartrex: product 100 ft

skirt containment code: ESTACADE 6-
boom 12+P
3 8 inch by 10 inch Quatrex: product code: 1 skid

hydrophobe 02Q8100S
4 15 inch by 19 inch Quatrex: product code: 1 skid

heavy hydrophobe 02Q8100S
5 Heavy-Duty Silt Fence OPSD 219.130 30 Avoid nylon mesh

Barrier metres backing in accordance
with Ontario’s Reptile
and Amphibian
Exclusion Fencing: Best
Practices. Version 1.0
Species Technical Note
6 Orange Poly 50
Construction Fencing metres
or similar required for
Tree Protection
Fencing
.15 The Contractor shall treat wastewater and wash waters to Protection of Aquatic Life
(PAL) criteria (between pH 6.5 and 9.0) and the turbidity will be less than 25 NTU
above background when it is discharged.
.16 All spills shall immediately be reported to the Engineer and CN’s Environmental
Monitor. The Engineer will report the spill to the regulatory authorities in accordance
with the Accident & Malfunction Response Plan.
.17 In the event of a spill, the Contractor shall carry out the steps outlined in the
Accident & Malfunction Response Plan (at a minimum).
1.9 FIRES
.1 A Fire Response Action Plan will be prepared by the Contractor as part of the
Accident & Malfunction Response Plan. Requirements of this plan are outlined in
the template for the Accident & Malfunction Response Plan and Environmental
Protection Plan.
.2 In advance of construction on the Site, the Contractor shall identify a Fire Boss. The
Fire Boss shall be trained in the use of on-site fire-fighting equipment.
.3 Locations of fire-fighting equipment shall be clearly posted on-site.
.4 Smoking shall not be permitted on the Site except in specifically designated areas.
.5 All flammable waste will be removed or disposed of on a regular basis.
1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTES AND EXCESS MATERIALS
.1 The Contractor shall collect domestic wastewater daily and store in closed
containers until disposed of at an approved waste disposal site.
.2 The Contractor shall collect food waste daily and store in closed animal proof
containers until disposed of at an approved waste disposal site.
.3 All other waste materials will be collected separately and recycled, where
appropriate. Any materials surplus for recycling will be disposed of at an appropriate
and approved waste disposal site.
.4 The Contractor shall not bury or burn rubbish, waste, debris or any form of material
on the Site.
.5 Chemical or portable toilets will be provided on the Site and maintained on a regular
basis by the Contractor.
.6 All sewage will be disposed of off-site at an approved sewage disposal facility on an

as-needed basis.
.7 The Contractor shall not dispose of chemicals, liquid waste, volatile materials, etc.,
on the ground surface, in excavations, into waterways, surface drainage features,
sanitary or storm sewers.
.8 The Contractor will protect concrete pours from rainfall with an impermeable cover
for a minimum of 48 hours, or until the concrete cures, in order to prevent high pH
run-off.
.9 The Contractor shall designate a concrete washout area on site and provide details
in the Erosion and Sediment Control Implementation Plan. The Contractor shall
implement measures during construction to prevent wet concrete or cement-laden
water, including high pH run-off occurring during concrete work, from entering any
wetland or waterbody.
.10 The Contractor shall collect and treat all wastewaters and wash waters, if produced,
taking into account the Council of Canadian Ministers of the Environment’s
Canadian Water Quality Guidelines for the PAL.
.11 Hazardous materials shall be handled, managed and disposed of in accordance

with all applicable law, including Ontario Regulation 374, TDG and Waste Control
and Management Plan.
1.11 SOIL MANAGEMENT PLAN
.1 The Contractor shall review the Soil Management Plan prepared for the Project and
incorporate all pertinent details, background information, recommendations,
mitigation and monitoring measures presented therein. The implementation of the
Soil Management Plan shall be overseen by the Contractor’s Qualified Person (as
defined by O. Reg. 153/04, as amended) and all records of soil management
activities shall be consolidated in a monthly report prepared by the Contractor’s
Qualified Person and provided to the Consultant. All records shall also be made
available for review by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.2 The Soil Management Plan will be followed to prevent admixing, compaction, rutting
and soil loss.
.3 The Contractor shall handle and store soils during construction in a manner that
protects soil quality for re-use. Potentially contaminated soils that are observed
during construction will be sent for analysis to characterize and determine suitability
for re-use on the Site.
.4 Contaminated soils not suitable for re-use on the Site shall be managed in
accordance with all applicable law, industry standards and best management
practices, including but not limited to:
.1 Environmental Protection Act
.2 Ontario Regulation 406/19, as amended
.3 Canadian National Railway Inc: Ontario Excess Soil Management

Procedure, Revision 1, August 5, 2015
.4 OPSS.PROV 180 General Specification for the Management of Excess

Materials
.5 Management of Excess Soil – A Guide for Best Management Practices

(Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks [MECP], Updated: April
4, 2019, Published: April 5, 2016, as updated)
.5 Soil piles of any type must be stored with slopes 70 degrees or less from May 15 to
August 3. If not permittable, the Contractor shall implement exclusion techniques
such as tarping of slopes to prevent bird nesting, wildlife use, mobilization of dust,
etc.
.6 Topsoil will be stripped and stockpiled in accordance with the Grading Plan and Soil
Management Plan for all permanent and temporary construction areas. Topsoil piles
shall be marked with appropriate signage to prevent accidental admixing. Topsoil
shall not be imported to or exported from the Site.
.7 Subsoil will be stored separately from topsoil with a minimum of 1 metre separation
of the piles. Topsoil from the natural areas (i.e., Indian Creek) will be separated from
other topsoil so that it may be used for restoration.
.8 Silt fencing shall be installed around soil stockpiles in accordance with the Erosion
and Sediment Control Plan and Soil Management Plan and at the instruction of
CN’s Environmental Monitor. The Contractor is responsible for correcting any
identified deficiencies within 24 hours, following an inspection.
.9 The Contractor will be responsible for the re-use of soils on site as no off-site soil
transportation or disposal is planned. The Contractor is expected to make all
reasonable efforts to find suitable locations within the Construction Limits to dispose
of excess soil. However, in the event that excess soils cannot be re-used or
stockpiled on site and/or if contaminated soils are encountered that cannot be re-
used or disposed of on site, off-site transportation and disposal may be considered.
Any off-site transportation and disposal of soils from within the Construction Limits
must be approved by the QP, Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor prior to
commencing any off-site soil management activity. Off-site transportation and
disposal of contaminated or excess soils would be subject to provincial and local
legislation. Compliance with applicable legislation and regulation, including
obtaining all necessary permits, approvals, certificates, or other authorizations,
including payment of any associated fees, will be the responsibility of the Contractor
for any and all off-site soil management activity outside the Construction Limits.
.10 Hazardous soil/materials shall be handled, managed and disposed of in accordance

with all applicable law, including O.Reg. 347, as amended and TDG. Copies of all
agreements, bills of lading, weigh bills and analytical results shall be forwarded to
the Engineer and/or Contract Administrator.
.11 The Contractor must notify the Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor of any
suspected hazardous materials including contaminated soil, defined below, in
excavation.
.12 The Contractor must notify the Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor of any
suspected hazardous materials in excavation within 24 hours.
1.12 DEWATERING
.1 Dewatering activities associated with construction of the terminal infrastructure (i.e.,

footings, foundations, utilities) shall be conducted to minimize potential erosion and
sedimentation using appropriate mitigation measures, as outlined in the Final
Dewatering Plan. The Contractor shall prepare a Groundwater Dewatering
Implementation Plan for Lower Baseline that will be consistent with the Dewatering
Plan and shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer of Ontario or a qualified
Professional Geoscientist (PGO) in accordance with section 02140 Dewatering.
.2 The Contractor is to provide notice to CN’s Environmental Monitor for any

complaints received as outlined in the Communication Protocol.
.3 The Contractor shall comply with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and notify
CN’s Environmental Monitor of any changes resulting from site conditions.
.4 The Contractor must provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to

keep excavations and the Site free from water. Outfall from pumping operations
must be directed away from creeks onto approved splash pads, retention areas or
stormwater management ponds, with the exception of areas outlined in 02140 -
Dewatering.
.5 The Contractor must not pump water containing suspended materials into
waterways, stormwater management ponds, sewers or drainage systems, with the
exception of areas outlined in 02140 - Dewatering.
.6 The Contractor must control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended

materials or other harmful substances in accordance with the Water Quality
Guidelines for PAL.
.7 The Contractor will establish an appropriate dewatering system that will dissipate
the energy and reduce the sediment content of discharging water for the purpose of
limiting potential erosion effects.
.8 The Contractor must make provisions to contain any oil or chemical spill that may
occur on the Site as outlined in the Accident & Malfunction Response Plan.
1.13 TIMING WINDOWS
.1 The Contractor shall schedule construction and staging activities to be consistent

with the Wildlife Management Plan and coordinate with CN`s Environmental Monitor
to ensure the completion of pre-construction surveys and/or relocations in advance
of the installation of mitigation measures. The following timing windows and
Contractor requirements apply for this project.
Activity Restricted Activity Contractor Requirements

Period (No Work) *
Vegetation clearing April 1 to August 31 Areas under active farming may be excluded from the
(nesting birds / migratory vegetation clearing timing restriction, pending verification
bird habitat) by the CN Environmental Monitor.
CN’s Environmental Monitor shall confirm the vegetation
clearing timing window with relevant authorities of any
given year.
Removal of vegetation/trees during the restricted period
should only occur under very limited circumstances. A
qualified biologist hired by the Engineer shall be retained
to conduct a wildlife sweep to document the absence of
migratory birds and/or nests at those sites (including
both vegetation and structures) at the time of clearing. If
the area is cleared by the qualified biologist, vegetation
removal should occur within 24 hours of the completion
of the avian survey; otherwise an additional survey will
be required.
Vegetation Clearing (bat April 1 to August 31 Vegetation and tree clearing shall be restricted by the
species at risk) Contractor during the active bat roosting season.
Use of flood lighting April 1 to May 31; August The Contractor shall restrict the use of flood lighting
15 to October 31 during the migratory bird breeding window.
Activity Restricted Activity Contractor Requirements
Period (No Work) *
Earth moving in proximity May 12 to August 22 Avoid grading or heavy earth moving from May 1st to
to the Heritage Barn June 30th within 100m to the south of the Barn Swallow
colony in the existing barn (as identified in Contract
Drawings).
Construction works April 1 to September 30 The Contractor shall install wildlife exclusion fencing as
outlined in the Contract Drawings in advance of the start
of construction and prior to September 30.
Prior to September 30, CN’s Environmental Monitor must
provide confirmation to the Contractor that snake
surveys/relocation has occurred. Snake
surveys/relocation must occur prior to construction, but
can be targeted in areas where construction activity is
anticipated to start. This is to be coordinated with the
Contractor.
Mainline work north of Mid-March to mid-April No work along the mainline in this area unless the CN
Britannia Road to Louis Environmental Monitor has confirmed that the Western
St. Laurent Blvd. (Western Chorus frogs have left their upland / overwintering
Chorus Frog) habitat and exclusionary fencing has been installed as
outlined in the Contract Drawings before proceeding with
any work in this area. The exclusionary fencing will be
installed during Phase 1 of the project but will be
maintained during Phase 2 construction. Contractor must
verify with the Environmental Monitor prior to work in this
area.
.2 Any exceptions to the above timing window restrictions shall be identified by the
Contractor and communicated to the Engineer and CN Environmental Monitor with
sufficient time to allow CN to consult with applicable regulatory agencies to confirm
acceptance. Exceptions will not be granted without prior approval of CN following
confirmation from the applicable regulatory agency.
1.14 SITE CLEARING AND VEGETATION PROTECTION
.1 Before entering on or disturbing any land or property for the purposes of the works
or commencing any part of the works, the Contractor shall verify with the Engineer
that all permits have been obtained and the terms under which these permits have
been obtained.
.2 The Contractor shall delineate the Limit of Construction as identified on the Contract
Drawings to demarcate the areas within which all construction activities will occur.
Absolutely no Work shall occur outside of the Limits of Construction.
.3 The Contractor must limit vegetation disturbance, tree removal and all aspects of
construction activity to the Site as indicated in Contract Drawings.
.4 The Contractor shall implement measures, during construction, to avoid the

introduction or spread of invasive vegetation within the Site, including from
equipment brought on-site from other worksites and from imported fill and shall
follow Ontario Invasive Plant Council’s Clean Equipment Protocol for Industry.
.5 Management of invasive plant species and weeds will be implemented in
accordance with the Restoration and Enhancement Plan.
.6 The Contractor must adhere to the requirements of the Environmental Protection

Plan, including mitigation, preservation, restoration, and removal requirements.
.7 Silt fencing and/or tree protection fencing shall be installed prior to grubbing and
excavation where appropriate to protect existing vegetation, and no closer than the
dripline. Taller tree protection fencing (i.e., hoarding around trees) shall be installed
in these areas to protect tree limbs from equipment in adjacent areas. Root/tree
pruning is required as a tree protection/preservation measure and should be
conducted by a Certified Arborist or under the supervision of a Certified Arborist
employed by the Contractor.
.8 The Contractor shall not place temporary worksites within the boundaries of
wetlands, unless pre-approved by CN’s Environmental Monitor and in accordance
with the Limits of Construction identified on the construction drawings.
.9 If temporary worksites are required, and approved by CN’s Environmental Monitor,

within the boundaries of a wetland, the Contractor shall install a protective layer
such as matting between the wetland root/seed bed and construction equipment.
Restoration of the wetland shall follow the requirements outlined in the Restoration
and Enhancement Plan.
.10 If barn swallow or bank swallow nests are encountered during the removal of a
culvert, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor
who will implement a ‘no-go’ zone that shall be adhered to by the Contractor. Once
the nest is empty, CN’s Environmental Monitor will notify the Contractor that the
area is clear for construction.
1.15 WILDLIFE PROTECTION
.1 The Contractor shall follow the requirements outlined in the Wildlife Management
Plan.
.2 The Contractor must limit vegetation disturbance and tree removal to CN property
as per extents indicated in Contract Documents. The Contractor shall install wildlife
exclusion fencing in sensitive areas adjacent to active construction areas in
accordance with the Tender Package Drawings.
.3 Wildlife exclusion fence shall be installed by the Contractor as specified in the

Contract Drawings with guidance per Ontario’s Reptile and Amphibian Exclusion
Fencing: Best Practices. Version 1.0. Species Technical Note at the direction of the
CN Environmental Monitor, who should also be a Qualified Biologist. When
installing exclusionary measures per the Contract Drawings, CN’s Environmental
Monitor shall inspect prior to installation as well as daily to ensure wildlife are not
trapped.
.4 The Contractor shall inspect all wildlife exclusion fence at least daily and before and
after rainfall events (10 mm / 24 hours) and significant snow melts. Cleanout shall
be completed when sediment accumulation reaches approximately 30%. The
Contractor is responsible for correcting any identified deficiencies within one
working day, following an inspection. The Contractor shall report to CN’s
Environmental Monitor any major repairs within 24 hours and document in the
Monthly Compliance Report.
.5 If snapping turtle, western chorus frog or milksnake are discovered in the

construction area of the Site, the Contractor must protect the turtle or snake from
harm and report the turtle or snake to CN’s Environmental Monitor for immediate
and safe relocation.
.6 The Contractor shall install and maintain signs to notify drivers of the risk of turtle
collisions along any temporary and permanent road, taking into account Ontario's
Best Management Practices for Mitigating the Effects of Roads on Amphibians and
Reptile Species at Risk in Ontario when installing the signs.
.7 The Contractor shall carry out the Works in a manner that protects migratory birds
and avoid harming, killing or disturbing migratory birds or destroying, disturbing or
taking their nests or eggs and shall account for Environment and Climate Change
Canada’s Avoidance Guidelines to reduce risk to migratory birds. The Contractor
shall also be in compliance with the Migratory Birds Convention Act (1994), the
Migratory Birds Regulations and with the Species at Risk Act.
.8 Grading and heavy earth movement shall be avoided by the Contractor from May
12 to August 22 within 100 metres of the existing barn (barn swallow colony)
outlined in the Contract Drawings. The barn shall be fenced to prevent
encroachment by equipment or personnel during construction - no access to the
barn by Contractor is permitted.
.9 If wildlife is discovered on the Site, the Contractor shall report the siting to CN’s
Environmental Monitor. Appropriate mitigation to protect and/or relocate the
species will be developed by the CN’s Environmental Monitor for implementation.
.10 Sighting of species of management concern or species at risk as outlined during the
Environmental Orientation Training will be reported to CN’s Environmental Monitor
and the sighting will be recorded in daily reports. Specific protection measures will
be implemented by the Contractor at the direction of CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.11 The Contractor shall not harass, harm or kill any wildlife encountered during
construction.
.12 The Contractor shall not block or prohibit wildlife access to culverts. Passage for
wildlife or fish through culverts must be maintained throughout construction.
.13 All construction equipment and vehicles shall give right-of-way to wildlife, allowing
wildlife to pass and proceed to a safe distance prior to construction
equipment/vehicles commencing construction activities.
.14 In the event wildlife is injured or killed during construction activities, the Contractor
shall immediately cease Work activities in the immediate vicinity and notify CN’s
.15 No hunting or fishing is permitted on-site or surrounding areas. Recreational use of
all-terrain vehicles or snowmobiles is also prohibited on the Site.
.16 If the Contractor encounters any Beaver dams while on site, CN’s Environmental
Monitor shall be notified and a means for removal/relocation shall be developed by
the Contractor.
.17 No additional compensation shall be made for work delays as a result of encounters
with wildlife.
1.16 IN-WATER WORKS
.1 The Contractor shall carry out construction activities near water following DFO
Measures to Avoid Causing Harm to Fish and Fish Habitat and in accordance with
the DFO Authorization.
.2 The Contractor will provide an updated schedule identifying when in-water work is
proposed in accordance with 01340 - Submittals. All in-water work will be scheduled
with CN’s Environmental Monitor in advance to accommodate coordination with fish
rescue activities if necessary.
.3 Before the commencement of in-water activity, the Contractor shall ensure that all
necessary equipment and materials are available and are on-site, including
contingency (back-up/extra) equipment and materials.
.4 Downstream flows will be maintained at all times during construction.
.5 Specific fish in-water timing windows, as well as Snapping Turtle and Western
Chorus Frog timing windows, shall be followed as applicable as outlined in Section
1.13.
.6 The Contractor shall isolate in-stream culvert installations, if required, from fish-
bearing waters in accordance with the Contract Drawings and associated plans.
1.17 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS
.1 The Contractor shall restrict grubbing, stripping and grading on approach slopes to
watercourses and water bodies to the amount required to allow safe passage of
equipment and completion of the Work.
.2 The Contractor shall control operations to prevent the entry of deleterious materials
into watercourses.
.3 Trees shall be felled away from the watercourses and waterbodies.
.4 The Contractor shall remove any felled trees, debris or soil inadvertently deposited
below the high watermark of a watercourse within 1 working day.
.5 For low risk activities, erosion and sediment control measures shall be inspected on
a weekly basis as well as prior to and following heavy precipitation events (i.e.
10mm in 24 hours) and significant snow melts to ensure the measures are
functioning properly, maintained and upgraded as required. If erosion and sediment
control measures are not functioning properly, the Contractor shall make repairs
immediately. Low risk activities include those occurring away from sensitive natural
areas as identified. High risk activities shall be monitored daily. High risk activities
include those that occur in close proximity to sensitive natural areas, in-or near
water works, concrete works, dewatering, vegetation clearing and grubbing, and
those where should erosion and sediment control measures fail, there is likely
impact to sensitive natural areas. Cleanout shall be completed when sediment
accumulation reaches approximately 30%. The Contractor is responsible for
correcting any identified deficiencies within one working day, following an
inspection. The Contractor shall report to CN’s Environmental Monitor any major
repairs within 24 hours and document in the Monthly Compliance Report.
.6 The Contractor shall undertake fueling and equipment maintenance, store

substances with the potential to cause harmful effects to the receiving environment,
such as fuel, lubricants, cement, construction material, excess material, construction
debris, and empty containers at least 30 metres away from watercourses and
watercourse banks.
1.18 AIR QUALITY
.1 The Contractor must prevent dust nuisance resulting from their operations. The
Contractor is to prepare an Air Quality Best Management Practice Plan.
.2 The Air Quality Best Management Practice Plan for construction air emissions
control shall be drawn up by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
approval in accordance with 01340 – Submittals and 02362 – Dust and Mud
Control. This Plan shall identify the procedures to be implemented by the Contractor
to reduce the potential generation of dust (specifically PM10) and other fugitive air
emissions during construction, with the least potential for adverse environmental
effects. This Plan will include a description of the measures to be implemented by
the Contractor to reduce the potential for offsite migration of construction dust,
which shall include a combination of visual observations and on-site dust monitoring
where action levels of daily dust generation will trigger localized dust suppression or
surface wetting, and reaching threshold values will necessitate cessation of
activities up to and possibly including a construction activity pause until such time
that the surface or meteorological conditions change to reduce offsite dust
migration.
.3 The Contractor shall implement a no idling policy for all construction equipment and
vehicle emissions during construction. The policy will be reviewed and approved by
the Engineer prior to construction.
.4 The cost of all such preventative measures will be borne by the Contractor.
.5 The Contractor will have a CO2 tank with regulator, hose and diffuser available on-
site during concrete work to neutralize pH levels as needed.
.6 The Contractor will use accelerants as appropriate to shorten curing times, as

necessary.
.7 Temporary access routes and parking lots during construction will be graveled to
reduce dust emissions relative to travelling over soil.
.8 The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring all dirt and mud that is tracked onto
the roadways from vehicles entering or leaving the Site is regularly cleaned from the
roadways. The Contractor must, upon request from the Engineer, CN’s
Environmental Monitor, CN complaint process or their consultant, immediately
proceed with clean-up operation at their expense using street sweepers or similar
equipment, or if in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has not removed or
cannot sufficiently remove the mud from the road, the Engineer will proceed with the
necessary clean up with all costs being charged to the Contractor.
1.19 NOISE CONTROL MEASURES
.1 The Contractor shall follow the noise control requirements outlined in 02202- Noise
Control.
.2 The Contractor shall prepare a Noise Reduction Plan as outlined in 02202 – Noise
Control in accordance with 01340 – Submittals. Construction activities shall
generally occur between the hours of 7:00 am and 10:00 pm with the following
exceptions:
.1 Activities associated with the pouring of workpads (i.e., concrete
plant operation and continuous pour requirements)
.2 Isolated night-time activities associated with Lower Base Line
.3 In circumstances where work is not technically feasible before
10:00 pm
.4 Other limited activities subject to approval by the Engineer.
.3 If night-time Work is required, the Contractor is to provide advanced notice to the

Engineer in accordance with the CN Communication Protocol (i.e., 7 days),
including an explanation for why such work is not technically feasible to complete
during daytime hours.
.4 On-site speed limits will be enforced, and vehicle traffic will be restricted to routes
outlined in the Construction Traffic Management Plan to reduce the intensity of
travel noise.
.5 Where significant noise is generated by warning devices when equipment is

operating in reverse, the Contractor shall minimize reverse operations by arranging
equipment to enter and leave the Site in the same direction where possible. Where
feasible, the Contractor shall use bidirectional equipment in order to avoid the need
to reverse. All mobile equipment and vehicles on the Site that have quiet backup
alarms are equipped with broadband quiet backup alarms only. The quiet alarms
shall continue to meet all applicable safety standards.
.6 CN will develop a Communication Protocol for the receiving of complaints from the
public. The Contractor shall implement any corrective action deemed appropriate,
based on direction from the Engineer, as outlined in Section 1.6.2.
1.20 VIBRATION CONTROL MEASURES (CULTURAL HERITAGE RESOURCES)
.1 The Contractor shall conform to construction vibration mitigation identified in Section

02383 Steel H-Piles.
.2 Consideration should be given to the use of alternative construction equipment,

where practical, that would generate lower vibration levels than typical methods or
equipment.
.3 Construction activities, including construction, grading, access or other activities that

may cause vibrations, are not be permitted within 50 metres of an identified cultural
heritage resource as shown in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall delineate a zone of 50 metres from the barn
structures and existing residences that are to be protected as cultural heritage
resources, as shown in the Contract Documents. Where construction activities must
occur within 50 metres of a cultural heritage resource, CN’s Environmental Monitor
is to be notified a minimum of 72 hours prior to such activities occurring so that
arrangements can be made for vibration monitors to be installed during such
activities. Where vibration limits are exceeded, CN’s Environmental Monitor will
direct the Contractor to stop work in these areas until alternate construction
methods and/or mitigation are established to their satisfaction. The Contractor will
provide written documentation of the alternative measures implemented to reduce
vibration levels below acceptable vibration limits, which may include, but are not
limited to, temporarily ceasing any construction activity causing vibration for any
given cultural heritage resource until modified or additional mitigation measures are
implemented. These alternative measures shall also be documented in the Monthly
Compliance Report.
1.21 LIGHTING
.1 The Contractor shall schedule construction activities during daylight hours

whenever practicable to minimize the need for staging lights.
.2 Construction lighting will be directed at the specific construction location (night-time

construction). Lighting will be reduced in areas not being actively used for
construction activities. Additional mitigation measures will include:
.1 Using of down-cast light fixtures;
.2 Installing of glare reduction technologies on individual light fixtures;
.3 Positioning lights to illuminate the immediate work area and avoid

directing lights off CN property, onto a public roadway that is open for
public use or towards a private residence.
.4 Requiring for all motor vehicles to use low-beam headlights within the
Site.
.3 CN will develop a Communication Protocol for the receiving of complaints from the
public. The Contractor shall implement any corrective action deemed appropriate,
based on direction from the Engineer, as outlined in Section 1.6.2.
1.22 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
.1 The Contractor shall install, inspect, and maintain erosion and sediment control
measures as per the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (General) outlined in the
Contract Drawings.
.2 Prior to the commencement of any Work that might cause erosion and/or
sedimentation, the Contractor must receive approval from the Engineer for any
proposed revisions to the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan - General. The
proposed revisions shall be outlined in an Erosion and Sediment Control
Implementation Plan as outlined in 02271- Erosion Control and 01340 - Submittals.
The Plan shall include site specific details of when, where and how the specific
erosion control measures will be used. Changes to the Plan will be consistent with
the requirements outlined in 02271 – Erosion Control and the Environmental
Protection Plan.
.3 The Contractor shall install, inspect, and maintain erosion and sediment control
measures as per the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan – General. This will
include appropriate locations adjacent to all watercourses and/or water bodies, or
as directed by CN’s Environmental Monitor. The Contractor will be responsible for
inspection.
.4 The Contractor shall subscribe to a meteorological alert service, ensuring that there
is advance warning of flood-producing severe rainfall events (those producing more
than 10mm of rainfall precipitation in a 24-hour period). The warning area is to be
focused on the Indian Creek Watershed (and its tributaries).
1.23 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND CULTURAL HERITAGE RESOURCES
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate and comply with CN's Environmental Monitor during
all site grading and ground disturbance activities in accordance with the
Archaeological and Cultural Resources Protection Plan.
.2 In the event that previously unidentified structures, sites or things of historical,

archaeological, paleontological or architectural significance are encountered,
construction activity in proximity to these remains will be stopped immediately and
mitigation measures will be implemented by CN’s Environmental Monitor and on-
site Archaeologist in accordance with the Archaeological and Cultural Resources
Protection Plan.
.3 Any human remains or ossuaries encountered during construction will be treated

with respect; the Police or Coroner, Registrar or Deputy Registrar of the Cemeteries
Regulations Section of the Ontario Ministry of Government and Consumer Services,
and the Archaeology Programs Unit will be coordinated through CN. Work will not
resume at the location of the find until the Engineer has confirmed that all relevant
parties have cleared the site.
.4 The contractor shall attend the Environmental Orientation which will include cultural
and indigenous awareness training for all employees working on the site in
recognition of the indigenous traditional lands and archaeological artifacts and
cultural heritage structures found and existing at this site.
1.24 RESTORATION
.1 At the completion of construction and post construction restoration, all construction

area flagging and demarcation materials will be removed from the Site’s disturbance
area and disposed of at an approved facility by the Contractor.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure any special environmental concerns identified by CN’s
Environmental Monitor are addressed before site restoration.
.3 The Contractor shall avoid clean-up activities on wet ground.
.4 Replanting of sick or dead vegetation may be required following construction

completion (for a 2-year warranty period) based on the results of post-construction
monitoring completed by the Engineer.
.5 The Contractor shall use native Ontario species and non-invasive grass species
and nurse crops for restoration in areas not covered by regulatory permit conditions.
1.25 WILDLIFE EXCLUSIONARY FENCING
.1 Exclusionary fencing per the Contract Drawings, shall be installed by the Contractor.
.2 Temporary Fencing shall consist of Heavy Duty Silt Fence and be installed and
maintained in good repair under supervision of CN’s Environmental Monitor.
Exclusion fencing installed during Phase 1 will also be maintained. Permanent
fence installation for operation shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings.
.3 The timing of exclusionary fence installation should align with the timing windows
outlined in Section 1.13. CN’s Environmental Monitor will indicate to the Contractor
when fence installation can occur.
.4 The location of the fencing shall be coordinated and determined with CN’s
Environmental Monitor prior to anticipated installation timing.
1.26 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the work of this Section shall be deemed incidental to Item A3
submitted in the Form of Tender, and no separate payment will be made.

CN – DESIGN & MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 TRANSPORTATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
.1 The Contractor shall handle all material at their own expense, including the
loading and unloading of Railway cars, and shall unload all material from cars
promptly on their arrival or will be liable to the regular demurrage charges at the
destination provided for in the current car service regulations.
.2 All equipment, plant, and materials used on the job site by the Contractor if
shipped via the Railway, are to be at the Contractor's expense under full tariff
rates currently enforced.
.3 The Contractor shall include in their tender the entire cost of transportation,
handling, and placing of all materials and all overhead, office, insurance, and
supervision costs connected therewith.
1.2 APPROVAL OF MATERIAL
.1 All material subject to the approval of the Underwriter's Laboratories or Canadian

Standards Association must be of makes passed and listed in the list of
"Approved Materials," and materials subject to factory inspection must bear the
Underwriter's or Canadian Standards Association's labels.
.2 The Contractor must furnish, for approval, a complete list of all materials the
Contractor proposes to use on the work, and any purchase of material that they
may make before this approval is given must be at their own risk.
.3 All material specified in the documents shall be “new” material.
1.3 OVERHAUL
.1 No payment will be made for the overhaul of any material.
1.4 TESTS
.1 All inspection tests, etc., outlined in the various specifications covering the
different materials entering into this work, will be carried out and rigidly enforced
by the Railway.
.2 The Contractor, in submitting Unit and Lump Sum Prices, is therefore to

understand distinctly that each and every clause of these specifications will be
rigidly enforced.
.3 The Contractor shall be responsible to conduct their own quality assurance

program to ensure all materials, compaction, etc. meet the requirements of the
CN – DESIGN & MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600
specifications, as per Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance of these
Specifications.
1.5 SPECIAL MATERIALS AND SAMPLES
.1 Special materials are specified for the purpose of establishing a standard or

criterion of quality, and the Contractor shall bid on the basis of the materials
specified.
.2 Other materials of similar and equal quality may be substituted, but in such
cases, only with the written consent of the Engineer.
.3 Application for the substitution of materials will not be considered by the Engineer
until after the Contract has been awarded.
.4 Application for the substitution of material shall be made in writing, setting forth
clearly the description and function of the article for which substitution is desired
and the difference in cost, if any.
.5 The acceptance of any substitution does not relieve the Contractor of liability
should the article substituted not fully perform the function claimed for it.
.6 Where required, samples of materials provided for use in the work shall be
submitted to the Engineer, in duplicate, for their approval before being used.
.7 The sample shall be retained by the Engineer in their office and referred to as
standards.

CN – DESIGN & SETTING OUT AND MEASUREMENT SECTION 01610
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 SETTING OUT OF WORKS
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper laying out of the
works and for the correctness of the position, levels, dimensions, and alignment
of all parts of the works, and for the provision of all necessary instruments and
labour in connection therewith. In case at any time during the progress of the
works any error shall appear or arise in the position, levels, dimensions or
alignment of any part of the works, the Contractor shall, at their own expense,
rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the Engineer, unless such error is based
on incorrect data supplied by the Engineer.
.2 The Engineer will provide a minimum of two benchmarks and three horizontal
control monuments to assist the Contractor in the laying out of the work. The
Contractor shall satisfy themself with the suitability and accuracy of these points
prior to the commencement of the Work.
.3 After the Contractor has verified the accuracy of the control points established by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall set and maintain horizontal or vertical controls
necessary for complete and accurate layout and construction of the work
including, but not necessarily limited to station stakes, centerline stakes, offset,
grade stakes, stakes for pipelines, subdrains, batter boards, control points for
footings as well as all other.
.4 The Contractor shall furnish all assistance and co-operation, to the Engineer’s
survey crew as necessary for them to provide these points.
.5 The checking of the setting out of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of their responsibility for the correctness thereof,
and the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks, control
points, stakes, legal monuments and other items used in setting out of the works.
.6 Where it is necessary to replace a stake or control point, removed or destroyed

by the Contractor without the consent of the Engineer, they may be replaced by
the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
1.2 MEASUREMENT
.1 The Contractor will carry out all measuring and surveying necessary to confirm
the quantity of Work performed for payment of each item in the Contract, and any
other items subsequently appended to the Contract.
.2 The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with sets of original and final cross-
sections, in digital format acceptable to the Engineer, after all stages of
construction, for calculation purposes.
CN – DESIGN & SETTING OUT AND MEASUREMENT SECTION 01610
.3 If for any reason the Contractor is unable to provide data acceptable to the
Engineer, as listed above, quantity calculations will be based on design volumes
or plan quantities.
.4 The Engineer may perform periodic checks on the Contractors’ measurements to

ensure that the work is being constructed as specified.
1.3 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the work of the Section shall be deemed incidental to the various
prices submitted in the Form of Tender, and no separate payment will be made.

CN – DESIGN & QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE SECTION 01620
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE

Specifications.
.2 The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control/Quality Assurance plan outlining

methods and frequency of tests, to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of
the works, based on the following minimum requirements:
Lift (m)
Item OMC SPMDD Test Type
depth
Earth Cut
Disturbed areas & Sub-
± 2% 95% Proof-roll
grade
Earth Fill & Borrow
Standard Proctor & OMC
Each material type or borrow
Soil Test Analysis &
source
Characterization
Sub-grade Proof-roll
Top 0 – 2 m 0.20 ± 2% 98% ± 2% Compaction, 25m grid
Bottom 2 – 10 m 0.30 ± 2% 95% Proof-roll each lift
Granular Materials
Prior to Ordering 2 samples, sieve, Proctor
Production 1 sample per 5,000t
Placing 0.15 ± 2% 98% Compaction, 25m grid, per lift
Drainage Structures,
Trench Base & Backfill,
Foundation Base,
Retaining Walls & Backfill,
Pipe Bedding & Backfill
Base (Foundation) Verify load bearing capacity
Bedding 0.15 ± 2% 98% ± 2% Compaction, every 5m, per lift
Backfill 0.30 ± 2% 98% ± 2% Compaction, every 5m, per lift
Concrete
Mix Design Verify meets specification
Daily or per 38 m3 or element 2 tests for air content
Daily or per 38 m3 or element 2 tests for slump
Daily or per 38 m3 or element set of 4 cylinders
Mechanical
To be addressed in each of All ITPs to be submitted to the
the Inspection and Testing Engineer for review and
Plans (ITP) as follows: acceptance)
Non-Destructive Testing
(NDE)
Welding
Coating (Pipeline and
Bends)
Corrosion and Protection
Hydrostatic Testing
Pipe Bending
Horizontal Directional Drilling
(HDD)
ITP Checklist
CN Track settlement
monitoring
.3 The Contractor shall conduct all required tests and provide copies of all results,
including re-test of failed areas, to the Engineer on a daily basis.
.4 Where tests or inspections by the Contractor’s testing laboratory reveal work not
in accordance with the contract requirements, the Contractor shall pay costs for
additional tests or inspections required by the Engineer to verify the acceptability
of corrected work.
.5 The Engineer may carry out their own Quality Assurance activities. The Quality
Assurance effort undertaken by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor in any
way with respect to the accuracy
.6 The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours’ notice for testing
to be permitted.
.7 Where tests or inspections are called for prematurely or the testing laboratory is
delayed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay all additional costs incurred.
.8 The Contractor shall furnish all labor and facilities to:
.1 Provide access to work to be inspected and tested;
.2 Facilitate inspections and tests;
.3 Make good work disturbed by inspection and test;
.4 Provide storage on site for laboratory’s exclusive use to store equipment

and cure test samples;
.5 Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative

samples in required quantity for laboratory testing; and
.6 Pay costs for uncovering and making good work that is covered before
required inspection or testing is completed and approved by the Engineer.
.9 The Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays to the Contractor’s
operations where the Contractor fails to give sufficient advance notice to the
Engineer to carry out the required inspection, sampling and testing.
.10 As the work progresses and as the Engineer and Contractor gain familiarity and
confidence in the quality control regime, the Engineer may permit the Contractor
to proceed with less testing than specified, but this will in no way relieve the
Contractor from any responsibilities with respect to quality or warranties for the
Works.
1.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the work of this Section shall be deemed incidental to the various
prices submitted in the Form of Tender, and no separate payment will be made.

CN – DESIGN & PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01800
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 The Contractor shall prepare and maintain project “as-constructed" record

drawings and record accurately significant deviations from Contract documents
caused by site conditions and changes ordered by the Engineer and approved
by the Owner. Mark changes in red.
.2 The information shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Section

01340 Submittals, in the following forms:
.1 Tables;
.2 CAD drawings: 2-D, 3-D and Points File where applicable;
.3 PDF drawings; and
.4 2 Binders and 2 Hard Drives containing the above and shall include the
following as a minimum (workplans, submittals, reports, testing, letters,
final surveys, MTRs, Weld Matrix, NDE reports, etc). The Contractor
shall provide a Table of Contents indicating the list of items for review
and acceptance 3 weeks prior to project closeout.
.3 Record the following information:
.1 Location of underground or internal utilities and appurtenances

concealed in the construction, referenced with dimensions to visible and
accessible features of the structure. This shall include existing utilities
encountered during construction;
.2 Field changes of dimension and details;
.3 Changes made by Change Orders; and
.4 Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
.4 At each project meeting "as-constructed" record drawings shall be reviewed for

completeness.
.5 At the completion of the project and prior to the final inspection, submit "as-
constructed" drawings to the Engineer.
1.2 FINAL INSPECTION & ACCEPTANCE
.1 A joint inspection will be carried out between the Engineer and Contractor prior
to the Engineer accepting any portion of the works.
CN – DESIGN & PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01800
.2 Deficiencies shall be noted during this inspection and any such deficiencies
must be corrected within five (5) working days and before final acceptance for
use by the Engineer.

CN – DESIGN & MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION SECTION 02000
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
.1 Submittals Section 01340
.2 Temporary Facilities Section 01500
.3 Safety Requirements Section 01545
.4 Flagging and Track Protection Section 01546
.5 Environmental Protection Section 01560
.6 Materials and Equipment Section 01600
.7 Setting Out and Measurement Section 01610
.8 Quality Control and Assurance Section 01620
.9 Project Closeout Section 01800
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
.1 All preparatory work within and outside the work areas.
.2 All costs associated with the execution of pre-condition and post-condition

surveys of surrounding properties, roads, pavements, including the mitigation of
any claims arising from the Contractor’s operations.
.3 Supply, installation and maintenance of temporary facilities including signs,

lighting for night shift work, crossings, site and access roadway grading and
drainage, maintenance of site roadways, dust control, roadway barricades, signs,
and site access gates.
.4 Supply, installation and maintenance of traffic control measures for the

Contractor’s operations at the construction gate locations to meet local and
provincial requirements. Included in traffic control measures are flagging
personnel, temporary conditions signage, dust control and cleaning of mud and
debris on roadways off of Railway property.
.5 Provision of attendants (gate keepers) at construction gates and at temporary

track crossings for the purpose of enforcing track protection requirements. Refer
to Section 01546 Flagging and Track Protection for details of specific
requirements.
.6 All costs related with maintaining access to the site for the duration of the
construction.
.7 All costs related to establishing construction offices for the Engineer, Contractor
and all subcontractors.
.8 Communication and other temporary utilities which may be required.
.9 Security on site to guard the materials, tools, equipment, offices, vehicles, and
fencing, as necessary, etc.
.10 The supply and transportation to the site of construction equipment, cranes, and
workforce as required for the performance of the Work.
.11 Upon completion of the work, restoration of the site in accordance with the Final
Restoration and Enhancement Plans, all to the approval of the Engineer and CN
.12 Payment for permits including Road Occupancy Permits from the applicable
municipalities.
.13 All cost associated with supplying bonds and insurance coverage.
.14 All cost associated with management of the work.
.15 All costs associated with the implementation of the Section 01340 Submittals,
Section 01500 Temporary Facilities, Section 01545 Safety Requirements,
Section 01546 Flagging and Track Protection, Section 01560 Environmental
Protection, Section 01570 Traffic Control, Section 01600 Materials and
Equipment, Section 01610 Setting Out and Measurement, Section 01620 Quality
Control and Assurance, Section 01800 Project Closeout and Railway
Requirements as included within these tender documents.
.16 All other costs, including administrative costs, which are not directly associated
with the execution of items specified in the Form of Tender.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Not applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 Conform to Section 01560 Environmental Protection.
3.2 GENERAL
.1 Liaise with Engineer and all other applicable stakeholders in a timely manner to
ensure that a safe quality product is delivered within the timeframe specified
herein.
3.3 ACCESS AGREEMENTS
.1 Coordinate with adjacent construction projects to establish Construction Access

agreements as required.
.2 Access Agreements should be made to ensure Time/Space separations between

construction projects at all times. Provisions for multiple gates, check ins, gate
men etc. shall be coordinated between the various contractors as required.
.3 The Contractor shall make appropriate arrangements and implement measures

such that they are “Constructor” for this works at all times throughout
construction.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 The Contractor will be paid 60% of the Contract Bid Price for Mobilization and
Demobilization item upon completion of the mobilization operation. The
remainder of the Contract Bid Price for this item will be paid when the Contractor
demobilizes from the site and restores the site to a condition acceptable to the
Engineer.
.2 The Lump Sum price A1 for "Mobilization and Demobilization" items in the Form
of Tender shall not exceed ten (10%) percent of the Total Estimated Contract
Item Price.

CN – DESIGN & DEWATERING SECTION 02140
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
1. This Section specifies the dewatering requirements for the Work.
2. This Section pertains to the removal of groundwater and surface water from all
construction operations, including all types of foundations.
3. This Section specifies the requirements to complete a water well survey and to
identify the location of the wells prior to the Works commencing.
4. The Contractor shall undertake supplemental field geotechnical and

hydrogeological investigations as required to obtain the necessary geotechnical
and hydrogeology recommendation for dewatering requirements for this Project.
.1 General Requirements Section 01005
.5 Temporary Flow Diversions Section 02150
.6 High Flow Contingency Plan Section 02160
.7 Erosion Control - General Section 02272
.8 Site Grading Section 02311
.9 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02315
.10 Sub-drainage Section 02620
.11 Culverts & Storm Sewers Section 02630
.12 Drainage Structures Section 02631
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Water Resources Act, R.S.O. 1990, Regulations 387/04 and 903.
.2 Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, Regulation 63/16Ontario Provincial
Standard Specification:
.1 OPSS.PROV 517Construction Specification for Dewatering; and
.2 OPSS 518, Construction Specification for Control of Water from

Dewatering Operations.
.3 Final Dewatering Plan (Stantec, 2021).
.4 Geotechnical Investigation and Hydrogeological Investigation Report for the

Project
.1 The Contractor is responsible for conducting its own quality assurance program
to ensure that all dewatering for the Project meets the requirements of this
Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 The Contractor shall engage the services of a Professional Geoscientist (PGO)

and dewatering system installer and operator to design and direct installation,
maintenance, and operation of the dewatering system in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01560 Environmental Protection.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that Professional Geoscientist (PGO) checks and
seals the design calculations and drawings of the dewatering system; and
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Professional Geoscientist (PGO) inspects
the installation of the system and certifies that the installation and operation are
in accordance with the design.
.5 The Contractor shall ensure that, as part of its scope under Section 01620
Quality Control and Assurance, Contractor performs:
.1 Field quality control operations required for dewatering work; and
.2 Material testing in the laboratory and prepare test reports and submittals
for dewatering work as required.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Contractor shall submit the following submittals for review in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01340 Submittals prior to commencing the Work:
.1 Groundwater Dewatering Implementation Plan, that will be consistent with

the Final Dewatering Plan, before commencing with the Work, Shop
Drawings and design data. The Contractor shall ensure that the
Groundwater Dewatering Implementation Plan indicates the following and
other requirements Specified in this Section:
.1 Proposed type of dewatering systems;

.2 Arrangement and location of system components;
.3 Description of equipment including back-up/stand-by pumps; and
.4 Installation, operation and maintenance procedures.
1.6 PERMITS
.1 The Contractor shall review with the CN Environmental Monitor if permits and
approvals are required. Should they be required, the Contractor shall obtain the
appropriate permits and approvals to discharge where dewatering occurs. The
Groundwater Dewatering Implementation Plan shall identify the Contractor’s
selected treatment systems, discharge systems and discharge location(s) for
each discharge location within the Limits of Construction.
.2 The Contractor’s Professional Geoscientist (PGO) shall review the site conditions
and boreholes information provided in the Geotechnical Reports and additional
supplemental geotechnical investigation reports, the proposed method of
construction by the Contractor to verify the amount of the water taking.
.3 The Contractor shall submit detailed means and methods required to undertake
the dewatering (and disposal of the pumped water) to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals in accordance with
Contract Documents.
1.7 WATERCOURSE/FISHERIES PROTECTION
.1 The Contractor shall provide watercourse/fisheries protection in accordance with

.2 The Contractor shall ensure that a copy of the Fisheries and Oceans Canada
(“DFO”) request for review documentation for each watercourse and all DFO
Determination Letters, including response letters/emails are kept on Site while
any works at or near water crossings are in progress in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01560 Environmental Protection. The Contractor shall
ensure that the detailed mitigation within the letter shall be followed for all in-
water Works.
.3 The Contractor shall control operations to prevent the entry of deleterious

materials into watercourses.
.4 The Contractor acknowledges that in-water work is permitted from July 1 to

March 31 of any given year to avoid the most sensitive periods for fish spawning,
rearing and migration life processes.
.5 The Contractor shall provide erosion and sedimentation controls and protection
of environmentally sensitive areas downstream.
.6 Where the Project requires work in watercourses or on watercourse banks, the

Contractor shall:
.1 Keep the operation of equipment within such areas to the minimum
necessary to perform the specified work;
.2 Comply with operational constraints specified in the Contract Documents;

and
.3 Otherwise proceed in a continuous fashion to minimize the duration of

such work.
.7 The Contractor shall store construction materials, excess materials, construction

debris, and empty containers at least 30m away from watercourses and
watercourse banks;
.8 Where an area enclosed by cofferdams is being dewatered, the Contractor shall:
.1 Discharge dewatering effluent to prevent the entry of sediment to the

watercourse and comply with the Ontario Water Resources Act R.R.O.
1990, Regulation 903;
.2 Ensure that fish salvage is undertaken by a qualified fisheries Biologist

within the isolated areas prior to any in-water works and dewatering
activities;
.3 Stage work such that there is no permanent interference with fish

passage, no permanent constriction of the channel width, and no
reduction of flows;
.4 Ensure that by-pass pumps are properly sized to manage expected flows
and can pump a 5-year return storm event. The Contractor shall ensure
that all by-pass pumps have a fish screen that meets DFO’s freshwater
intake end-of-pipe fish screen guideline to prevent entrainment or
impingement of fish. Project Co shall ensure that there are extra pumps
onsite and in position in the event of pump malfunction;
.5 Ensure that the raw concrete poured at the culvert inlets/outlets is always
securely isolated from the stream flows until the concrete has set. In
addition, Contractor shall ensure that the isolated containment area is of
sufficient size to hold all of the concrete used during this Project in the
event of a leak; and
.6 Contractor shall ensure that applicable permits for relocating fish are
obtained and provide a copy of the fish salvage results and any other
environmental monitoring reports to DFO or local Environmental Agency
office at the completion of the Project.
.9 In the event deleterious materials enter watercourses by virtue of the Contractor

operations, the Contractor shall suspend such operations until it implements such
control measures that are accepted by an Environmental Specialist in writing.
.10 The Contractor shall not stockpile fill materials within a minimum of 30m to the
watercourse.
.11 The Contractor shall remove all excess materials to disposal sites outside of site,
including earth, stones, boulders, topsoil and organic materials.
1.8 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS
.1 The Contractor shall perform Works adjacent to waterways in accordance with

.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all dewatering is completed in accordance with
the O.Reg. 387/04: Water Taking and Transfer and shall be responsible for any
Environmental Activity and Sector Registry requirements and/or Permits to Take
Water. The Contractor shall ensure that the water is pumped into a filter bag or
sedimentation pond or diffused onto vegetative areas a minimum of 30m from the
watercourse. The Contractor shall ensure that the water is not pumped directly
into the watercourse:
.1 For isolation areas that require pumping to maintain work-in the dry
conditions, The Contractor shall ensure that contingency planning (all
requirements including extra pumps and fuel) is in place;
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all pumps have a fish screen that meets
DFO’s Freshwater Intake End-of-Pipe Fish Screen guideline to prevent
entrainment or impingement of fish. The Contractor shall ensure that
there are extra pumps onsite and in position in the event of pump
malfunction; and
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that during dewatering activities, fish salvage
is undertaken by Environmental Specialist within the isolated areas prior
to any in-water works and dewatering activities in accordance with section
01560. The Contractor shall ensure that any fish located within the Site
are removed and relocated to appropriate habitat downstream of the Site.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall provide Erosion and Sediment Control in accordance with
Section 01560 Environmental Protection and Section 02270 Erosion Control
General.
.2 Geotechnical:
.1 The Contractor shall refer to Geotechnical Reports for the Project.
.3 Water Wells: The Contractor shall complete a water well survey and identify the
location of any wells within the Limits of Construction prior to the commencement
of Work.

.2 Environmental Plans outlined in Section 01560 Environmental Protection must be
strictly adhered to and no deviations will be tolerated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Contractor shall be responsible for providing all materials, tools, equipment,

labour and services necessary to complete the work.
.2 Provide complete standby equipment, installed and available for immediate

operation in the event of partial or complete failure of the primary system.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all of the equipment including standby power
equipment, is operated in accordance with requirements of Section 01560
Environmental Protection in order to minimize noise impact on adjacent
properties.
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the dewatering system is in good working order
and regularly maintained in accordance with manufacturer requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Excavation work shall not commence prior to the installation of all erosion and
sedimentation control measures in accordance with Section 02270 Erosion
Control General.
.2 The Contractor shall operate the dewatering system continuously 24 hours a day,
7 days a week until installation and backfill is completed.
.3 Provide and maintain perimeter and diversion ditches to prevent surface water
from entering any excavation.
.4 Perform dewatering in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and

Groundwater Dewatering Implementation Plan. Advise the Engineer of any
changes made to accommodate field conditions and confirm with the Engineer if
agency approval is required in advance of implementation. Revise and resubmit
Shop Drawings as necessary to reflect current installation.
.5 Measure and record the volume of water removed by the system(s) on a daily
basis.
.6 Maintain stability of side slopes and bottom of excavation.
.7 The dewatering system(s) shall be maintained, and the surrounding area

monitored by the Contractor for impacts to items such as, but not limited to,
settlement, basal, heave, ecological features, and groundwater usage. The
Engineer shall be advised immediately of any impacts.
.8 The Engineer and/or CN’s Environmental Monitor will notify the Contractor of any
complaints received. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify or develop
a plan with the Engineer and/or CN’s Environmental Monitor to rectify the
complaint within 24 hours of receiving the complaint.
.9 The Contractor must inspect the operation of the dewatering system at a

minimum frequency of 24 hours (or shorter), whenever the dewatering systems
are in place, and including weekends and holidays.
.10 The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling and disposing of all water in
accordance with the Final Dewatering Plan and any necessary permits obtained
by CN.
.11 The dewatering system shall control groundwater using filtered sumps within the
excavated areas as outlined in the Final Dewatering Plan. Dewatering effluent
shall be diverted to an appropriate approved location. At the discharge point, an
energy dissipation and erosion control measure must be established (i.e., no
direct discharge to a waterbody or wetland is permitted). If deemed necessary, a
treatment and filtration system shall be installed at the downstream end of the
weir tank to treat the dewatering effluent in order to comply with Provincial Water
Quality Objectives.
.12 During dewatering, the pumping rate should be monitored and recorded by the
Contractor based on pump size/rating curves with field measurements of flow
rate be taken on a daily basis. The digital flowmeter shall be calibrated as per the
manufacturers recommendation and installed on the outflow of the weir tank to
monitor the instantaneous and cumulative rate of dewatering effluent discharge.
.13 The Contractor shall complete the following on a daily basis during dewatering:
.1 check the geotextile filter bag or equivalent and replace as needed;
.2 inspect the discharge location daily to verify that no significant erosion or

sedimentation is occurring; and
.3 complete visual and olfactory inspections of the discharge location.
.14 Construction of culverts and retaining walls must be carried out in dry conditions.
.15 The Contractor must provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to
keep excavations and the Site free from water. The outfall from pumping
operations must be directed away from creeks onto approved splash pads,
retention areas, or stormwater management ponds.
.16 Dewatering effluent shall not be discharged directly into a waterbody or wetland.
.17 The Contractor shall not discharge water containing suspended materials into
waterways, sewers, or drainage systems.
.18 The Contractor must control the disposal or runoff of water containing suspended
materials or other harmful substances in accordance with PAL requirements.
.19 The Contractor must make provisions to contain any oil or chemical spill that may
occur on the Site as outlined in the Construction Emergency Response Plan.
.20 Prior to discontinuing operation and removal of the dewatering system, the
Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 No measurement will be made for work of this Section.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices included
in the Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for design, all
materials, labour, use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION ACCESS ROAD SECTION 02141
GRADING AND DRAINAGE PAGE 1 OF 3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements of design, supply and install and removal
of construction access road for the Works.
.2 Approach Ramp Section 02143
.3 Site Entrance Section 02144
.4 Clearing & Grubbing Section 02231
.5 Erosion Control/ General Section 02272
.7 Traffic Control Section 02350
.8 Dust & Mud Control Section 02362
.9 Culvert & Storm Sewers Section 02630
.10 Granular Materials Section 02701
.1 The Contractor shall conduct their own quality assurance program to ensure
Access Road construction meets the requirements of the specifications, as per
Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not applicable.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
.1 Not applicable.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall design and install the temporary access road in accordance
with the proposed alignment as shown in the Contract Drawings.
.2 The Contractor shall install erosion control measures prior to commencing the
construction of the access road.
.3 The Contractor shall remove the topsoil along the proposed access road and
supply and install a minimum of 300 mm of granular B Type II as road base.
.4 The Contractor shall improve the existing construction access by widening the
access to a minimum of 6 m wide with 300 mm of Granular B Type II road base.
.5 The Contractor shall ensure positive drainage along the access road and install
the necessary culverts and pipes to avoid blocking the drainage along the access
and entrances.
.6 The Contractor shall comply with the requirement of Section 02350 Traffic
Control regarding the traffic control.
.7 The Contractor shall include wooden matts at the staging areas as needed in
order to complete the work and store materials and equipment.
.8 The existing utilities/ pipeline shall be identified in the field using the hydro-vac
truck or by hand digging, and the silt fence will be placed 3 m from the utilities.
.9 The Contractor is not allowed to perform any work beyond the silt fence area
except during the connection work.
2.2 ACCESS ROAD CONSTRUCTION
.1 Install Heavy Duty Silt Fence barriers to control erosion and siltation as well as to
delineate the working areas, setback areas, and environmentally sensitive areas
as identified on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
.2 Install Orange Construction Fence between staging areas to identify the limit of
construction shown in the Contract Drawings and as required by the Engineer.
.3 Ensure that all grades, turns, and curves of the Access Road meet the
requirement for all equipment transportation vehicles for the project.
.4 Remove and restore the access road upon completion of work.

3.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for Access Road shall be by each as measured in the field.
3.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices in the
Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour,
culvert pipes, use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & CN TRACK APPROACH RAMP SECTION 02143
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the approach ramp requirements for the temporary track
crossing works.
.3 Access Road Section 02141
.5 Erosion Control Section 02270
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting their own quality assurance
program to ensure Access Road construction meet the requirements of the
specifications, as per Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance of this
Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not applicable.
.1 Not applicable.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 APPROACH RAMP CONSTRUCTION
.1 The Approach Ramp shall be constructed at a location and to a standard

acceptable to CN. The Contractor shall submit details for the crossing to CN for
approval at least four (4) weeks prior to work commencing within the ROW.
.2 The Contractor shall not be permitted to cross the track(s) with vehicles or
equipment except on a CN-approved temporary construction crossing.
.3 The ramp shall:
.1 Have a level gradient on either side for a distance of 8m as shown in the

Contract Drawing or not less than the maximum length of the vehicle
using it;
.2 Have approach grades not greater than 5%;
.3 Have a crossing surface of suitable material extending at least 0.5 m

beyond the travelled width on both sides measured at right angles to the
access road;
.4 Granular materials on the ramp shall extend up and level with the
crossing planks and be wrapped with Terrafix to avoid contamination; and
.5 Be of an overall safe width suitable for the intended use.
.1 Supply and install gates and stop signs at 12 feet from the gauge side of
rail on each side of the tracks;
.2 Supply and install temporary fencing as required by CN;
.3 Construct and maintain the crossing approaches, culverts and ditches as

required and at a minimum as shown in the Contract Drawing;
.4 Perform clearing and grubbing prior to installing Geotextile fabric; and
.5 Supply and install siltsoxx and strawbales upstream and downstream of

the ditch/ culvert.
.5 Remove and restore the Approach Ramp upon completion of work.

3.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for the approach ramp shall be made by each as measured in the
field.
3.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices in the
Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour,
culvert pipes, use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the

CN – DESIGN & SITE ENTRANCE SECTION 02144
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the site entrance requirements for the Works.
.2 Material and Equipment Section 01600
.3 Setting Out and Measurements Section 01610
.4 Mobilization and Demobilization Section 02000
.8 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02315
.9 Dust & Mud Control Section 02362
.10 Traffic Control Section 02350
program to ensure Site Entrance construction meet the requirements of the
specifications, as per Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance and of this
Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not applicable.
.1 Not applicable.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Install all erosion and siltation control devices prior to the commencement of
clearing, grubbing and grading works.
.2 Equipment and vehicles are not allowed to park on City Road/Streets during
construction except at mobilization and delivery of materials.
.3 Traffic control measures are to be in place, including flag persons for all
movement of vehicles to and from the job site.
.4 All Traffic Control measures are to follow MTO Book 7 and City of Milton/Halton
Region Standards.
.5 No work will be permitted on site until all such erosion and siltation control
devices are properly installed.
.6 The Contractor’s work must in no way impact the environmentally sensitive

areas, or any other areas, as delineated by the Engineer.
.7 After heavy rainfall and high winds, the contractor shall inspect and correct all
items under erosion control.
2.2 ENTRANCE CONSTRUCTION
.1 Install Heavy Duty Silt Fence barriers to control erosion and siltation as well as to
delineate the pipeline setback areas, environmentally sensitive areas as
identified on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
.2 Ensure that Site Entrance width meets the requirement for all equipment
transportation vehicles entering the project site. Extend the entrance width as
needed.
.3 The Contractor shall install and remove mud mats at all construction access:
• The Contractor shall place a gravel pad at the planned entrance to

worksite;
• The Contractor shall construct the gravel pad in accordance with Section
02362 Dust & Mud Control;
• The Contractor shall incorporate a water supply with a pump system to

wash vehicle undercarriages and wheels;
• The Contractor shall install a temporary sediment control (such as silt

fibre rolls or silt fences) to control washed-off sediment from the gravel
pad;
• The Contractor shall ensure that positive drainage is provided at the mud
mat locations; and
• The Contractor shall remove the mud matt upon completion of the Work,
and clean drains, and existing culvert of debris and unwanted granular
materials from road construction.
.4 Ensure that Site Entrance is properly sloped and graded to meet the requirement
for all equipment and transportation vehicles for the project. Protect the existing
culvert and both sides of the ditches with a silt fence and silt sox.
.5 Maintain dust and mud control measures during the full project construction
period.
.6 Remove and restore the site entrance upon completion of the Work.
2.3 SITE RESTORATION
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that site restoration is carried out upon completion of
Works in accordance with Section 02315 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
3.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 No measurement shall be made for the work of this Section. Payment shall be
included in the unit price in the form of tender under new and existing
Construction Accesses.
3.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit price in the
Form of Tender under new and existing Construction Accesses. Payment will be
full compensation for all materials, labour, use of equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & TEMPORARY FLOW DIVERSION SECTION 02150
CONSTRUCTION MILTON LOGISTICS HUB -PHASE 2A SEPTEMBER 2023
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for the design, supply, and install
temporary flow diversion for the culvert’s construction and extension on the Site,
including temporary flow diversion requirements for the construction of culverts
and instream work.
.2 The work under this Section includes the design, supply, installation, operation,
maintenance, and removal of temporary flow diversion systems at each site and
for each phase to isolate a working area for the extension of existing transverse
culverts and other works and permit the Contractor to complete this work in the
dry while maintaining watercourse flows during the Work.
.3 The provision of any dewatering systems necessary to control, collect and

remove any water entering the excavations and/or work areas from other sources
(e.g. water seeping from the temporary cofferdams, groundwater, rainfall, etc.)
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. It shall be estimated under the
appropriate tender Section 02140 Dewatering.
.5 Dewatering Section 02140
.10 Rip Rap Section 02372
.11 Culverts and Sewers Section 02630

.13 Precast Concrete Structures Section 02634
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990, Reg 903.
.2 Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS):
.1 OPSS.PROV 185, General Specification for Temporary Flow Control for

Construction in Waterbodies; and
.2 OPSS 518, Construction Specification for Control of Water from

Dewatering Operation.
.3 Geotechnical Reports for the Project.
.1 The Contractor is responsible for conducting their own quality assurance

program to ensure that temporary flow diversion meets the requirements of this
.2 Adhere to provincial and federal requirements relating to the protection of the

environment, safety of construction and the protection of workers.
.3 The Contractor shall, at all times, ensure the safety of the construction Site and
the protection of all workers on Site.
.4 The Contractor shall engage the services of a Hydrogeologist with experience

and expertise in hydraulics, hydrology and/or hydrogeology to design and direct
installation, operation and maintenance of temporary flow diversion system and
emergency flood response measures and prepare Comprehensive Temporary
Flow Diversion Plan(s) in accordance with this Section.
.5 The Contractor shall ensure that the Hydrogeologist inspects the installation of
the system and certifies that the installation and operation are in accordance with
the design.
.1 Field quality control operations required for temporary flow diversion

Works; and
.2 Material testing in the laboratory and prepare test reports and submittals
for temporary flow diversion Works.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals prior to commencing
the Work:
.1 Submit for review and approval the qualifications of Hydrogeologist, flow

diversion system installer and operator;
.2 Submit a Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion Plan (CTFDP) for all

disciplines identified in this Section covering the detailed requirements
and monitoring requirements in the Contract and the Geotechnical Data
Report. The Contractor shall make appropriate changes to the plans as
requested by the Engineer and resubmit;
.3 Detailed Working Drawings:
.1 Submit Detailed Working Drawings in accordance with the

requirements of construction staging and other Sections: Minimum
30 days prior to installation of temporary flow diversion system,
submit to Engineer for review and approval drawings, details and
calculations of proposed type of flow diversion system, showing
arrangement, location and depths of components of the system, a
complete description of equipment and materials to be used and
procedure to be followed; and
.2 The following information shall be shown on the drawings:
.1 Location and extent of the temporary flow diversion system

and location and elevation of all elements that form the
temporary flow diversion system;
.2 The design flow return period on which the design is

based; and
.3 The number, type, and capacity of any pumps used in the

temporary flow diversion system.
.4 Reports: Procedures that fully describe the sequence and timing of the
work, the associated waterbody and fish habitat protection measures, and
the related contingency measures associated with each phase of the
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC):
.1 Refer to the proposed Erosion and Sediment Control Plans in the

Contract Documents.
.2 Geotechnical:
.1 Refer to the Geotechnical and Data Report (GDR) for the Project.
1.8 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Contractor shall design the temporary flow diversion at each location
considering the flows and corresponding water surface elevations required for
the work. The contractor acknowledges that the actual headwater elevations
could be significantly higher in the presence of flow constrictions and should be
confirmed by the Contractor’s Hydrogeologist.
.2 Undisturbed flows and corresponding water surface elevations at the various

sites are provided in Table 1, for information purposes only. The water elevations
shown correspond to normal headwater (upstream of culvert) elevations,
unobstructed by flume pipes, cofferdam or any flow diversion system. The actual
headwater elevations could be significantly higher in the presence of flow
constrictions and should be confirmed by hydrological design.
Table 1: Normal headwater at upstream of culvert
Culvert Invert Return Period

Proposed Elevations
Site Bypass Pipe 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year
Size/Material Flow Elevation Flow Elevation Flow Elevation
U/S D/S
(m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m)
Mile 37.00 1 x 1250
(59+544.25) mm CSP 195.98 195.79 0.09 196.50 0.12 196.52 0.13 196.52
(Culvert 13)
Mile 37.20 1 x 900 mm
(59+869.25 CSP 194.98 194.77 0.14 195.37 0.18 195.41 0.20 195.42
(Culvert 12)
Mile 37.63 1 x 900 mm
(60+567.18 CSP 192.59 192.51 0.04 193.02 0.05 193.03 0.06 193.03
(Culvert 11)
Mile 38.02 2 x 900 mm
to 37.98 CSP
(61+125) 189.32 189.09 0.28 189.66 0.36 189.71 0.41 189.73
(Culverts
10)
Mile 38.31 1 x 900 mm
(61+756) CSP 186.28 185.79 0.16 186.66 0.20 186.71 0.23 186.71
(Culvert 9)
Mile 38.52 1 x 900 mm
(61+993) CSP 185.42 185.30 0.04 185.60 0.06 185.83 0.07 185.84
(Culvert 8)
.3 Flows and corresponding water surface elevations at various sites during
temporary works are provided in Table 2, for information purposes only. The
water elevations shown correspond to normal headwater (culvert inlet) elevations
considering the installation of a temporary flow diversion system (cofferdam or
culvert or another suitable alternative) during a given phase (one barrel
obstructed by a cofferdam for the maintaining of the dry working area). The
actual headwater elevations could be significantly different depending on the flow
diversion system chosen and installed by the Contractor and should be
confirmed by hydrological design. The elevations of temporary cofferdams should
not be less than 0.30m higher than the headwater corresponding to the return
period being considered (taking into account the effect of any flumes) and are
given for information purposes only.
Table 2: Culvert inlet normal headwater with Temporary Flow Diversion System
Return Period
Number 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year
Bypass Pipe
Site of
barrels
(m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m)
Mile 37.00
450 mm /
(59+544.25) 1 0.09 196.32 0.12 196.39 0.13 196.42
CSP
(Culvert 13)
Mile 37.20
525 mm /
(59+869.25 1 0.14 195.39 0.18 195.46 0.20 195.49
CSP
(Culvert 12)
Mile 37.63
375 mm /
(60+567.18 1 0.04 192.84 0.05 192.87 0.06 192.91
CSP
(Culvert 11)
Mile 38.02
moved to
750 mm /
37.98 1 0.28 189.87 0.36 189.95 0.41 190.00
CSP
(61+125)
(Culverts 10)
Mile 38.31
600 mm /
(61+756) 1 0.16 186.72 0.20 186.78 0.23 186.82
CSP
(Culvert 9)
Mile 38.52
375 mm /
(61+993) 1 0.04 185.74 0.06 185.74 0.07 185.77
CSP
(Culvert 8)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all materials, tools, equipment,
labor and services necessary to complete the work.
.2 Provide a complete temporary cofferdam solution that best suits specific
conditions at each site requiring temporary flow diversion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND RESTORATION
.1 The Contractor shall provide a continuous temporary flow diversion system to

keep the working area stable and well-drained for the duration of construction in
the watercourse. The Contractor acknowledges that the information provided in
erosion and sediment control Drawings is for reference only and that the
Contractor must prepare a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) per
Section 02272 Erosion Control. The Contractor shall develop its own flow
diversion system to provide the functional requirements permitting construction.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that work on the temporary flow diversion system
does not commence before installing all other erosion and sedimentation control
measures.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all work undertaken is in accordance with the
timing constraints specified in Section 01560 Environmental Protection.
.4 The Contractor shall build a temporary flow diversion system in accordance with
reviewed Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion Plan and drawings. The
contractor shall advise the Engineer of any changes made to accommodate field
conditions. The Contractor shall resubmit Comprehensive Temporary Flow
Diversion Plan and drawings as necessary to reflect the field conditions for
review and approval.
.5 The Contractor shall maintain and monitor the temporary flow diversion system
for impacts to items, including settlement and groundwater usage. The
Contractor shall advise the Engineer and CN’s Environmental Monitor
immediately of any impacts.
.6 The Contractor shall demonstrate that the temporary flow diversion system is
functioning in accordance with design requirements and Contract Documents.
.7 The Contractor shall inspect the operation of the temporary flow diversion system
at a minimum frequency of 24 hours, whenever the temporary flow diversion
systems are in place, including weekends and holidays.
.8 The Contractor shall maintain the temporary flow diversion system until it is
required and obtain written approval from the Hydrogeologist prior to the removal
of the temporary flow diversion system.
3.2 COMPREHENSIVE TEMPORARY FLOW DIVERSION PLAN(S)
.1 The Contractor shall submit for review the qualifications of the Hydrogeologist,
installer, operator and Independent Laboratory and Sampling and Testing
Company in accordance with Contract Documents.
.2 Design drawings for Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion Plan(s):
.1 The Contractor shall prepare design drawings in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall ensure
that the design drawings include all details and calculations of the
proposed type of flow diversion system. The Contractor shall show the
arrangement, location and depths of system components, including a
complete description of the equipment and materials to be used and the
procedure to be followed; and
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the following information is shown on the
Contract Drawings:
.1 The location and extent of the temporary flow diversion system

and the location and elevation of all elements that form the
temporary flow diversion system;
.2 The design flow return period on which the design is based; and
.3 The number, type, and capacity of any pumps used in the

.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion
Plan(s) contains the procedures that fully describe the sequencing and timing of
the work, the associated waterbody and fish habitat protection measures, and the
related contingency measures associated with each phase of the temporary flow
diversion system.
3.3 PREPARATION
.1 The Contractor shall use methods, in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents, to intercept and direct surface water away from excavations and
monitoring equipment by use of appropriate means, including dikes, curb walls,
ditches, pipes, sumps to the existing creek, storm or sanitary drainage system.
.2 The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and operation of the temporary
flow diversion system with other contractors, where applicable. The Contractor
shall coordinate with other contractors regarding access to the Site for
installation, operation and maintenance of Works as required and in accordance
with Contract Documents.
3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 The Contractor shall install temporary flow diversion systems in accordance with
reviewed Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion Plan(s).
.2 The Contractor shall ensure to maintain temporary flow diversion systems to

prevent hazards to the public and in accordance with regulations.
.3 The Contractor shall minimize obstruction to pedestrian and vehicular traffic both
during the installation of the temporary flow diversion system and during the
subsequent operation of the system.
3.5 OPERATION
.1 The Contractor shall operate a temporary flow diversion system in accordance

with reviewed Comprehensive Temporary Flow Diversion Plan(s).
.2 The Contractor shall maintain continuous operation of the installation at all times
during the work.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the Section 02160 High Flow
Contingency Plan (General) in order to maintain a safe working area for workers
and equipment, as well as prevent potential impact upstream of working sites.
3.6 RESTORATION
.1 The Contractor shall remove all equipment and materials that are in the right-of-
way upon completion of the Works and shall ensure that all areas disturbed as
part of this work are restored to their preconstruction conditions in accordance
with the Restoration and Enhancement Plans and Contract Documents.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all work is completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the appropriate item in
the Form of Tender, including but not limited to the design, supply, installation
and removal of the dewatering system, temporary flow diversion, flood
emergency response plan and erosion and sediment control plan as necessary
to complete the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & HIGH FLOW CONTINGENCY PLAN SECTION 02160
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the requirements of high flow contingencies for the flow
diversion for construction of the new culverts and existing culverts extension
throughout the entire project Limits of Construction, including the special
procedures for Culvert at Mile 37.00, Mile 37.20, Mile 37.63, Mile 38.02, Mile
38.31, and Mile 38.52.
.6 Temporary Flow Diversion Section 02150
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 903.

OPSS.PROV 185, General Specification for Temporary Flow Control for
Construction in Waterbodies (November 2012); and
OPSS. PROV 518, Construction Specification for Control of Water from

Dewatering Operations" (April 2017).
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
.1 The Contractor is responsible for conducting their own quality assurance

program to ensure all high contingency flow measures meet the requirements of
this Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 Adhere to provincial and federal requirements relating to protection of

environment and safety of construction and protection of workers.
.3 The Contractor shall engage the services of a Hydrogeologist or Water

Resources Engineer, with experience and expertise in hydraulics, hydrology
and/or hydrogeology to design and direct installation, operation and maintenance
of temporary flow diversion system and high contingency flow measures.
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Hydrogeologist or Water Resources

Engineer inspects the installation of the system and certifies that the installation
and operation is in accordance with design.
Field quality control operations required for temporary flow diversion

Works; and
Material testing in the laboratory and prepare test reports and submittals
for temporary flow diversion Works.
.6 Requirements for Hydrogeologist/Water Resources Engineer shall include:
Ensuring regulatory compliance to applicable environmental legislation;

and
Experience with the design and direct installation, operation and

maintenance of temporary flow diversion system and high flow
contingency plans.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following submittals for review and approval in
accordance with this Section and Section 01340 Submittals:
High Flow Contingency Plan; and
Provide all submittals as indicated in Section 01560 Environmental

Protection.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall provide Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) drawings in
accordance with Section 01560 Environmental Protection and Section 02272
Erosion Control:
The Contractor shall refer to the Erosion and Sediment Control

Plan/Drawings (General) provided in the tender documents.
.2 Geotechnical and water wells:
The contractor shall refer to Geotechnical Reports for the Project.
1.7 DEWATERING REQUIREMENTS
.1 Conform to Section 02140 Dewatering.
1.8 FLOW DIVERSION REQUIREMENTS
.1 Conform to Section 02150 Temporary Flow Diversion.
PART 2 - HIGH FLOW CONTINGENCY PLANS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Special procedures for Tributary A and C of Indian Creek Culvert Extensions at

Mi. 39.70 and Mi. 40.70 are proposed and shall be coordinated with the
Contractor’s Surface Water Management Implementation Plan for the Stream
Realignment work. Some restrictions in the hydraulic opening of the structures
along the CN Rail for these Tributaries will be required during construction in
order to divert water and keep construction zones dry. Since the time delay
between start of rainfall and rise to peak of the resulting flood wave is relatively
short for Tributary A and C, provision must be made for removal of personnel and
equipment from within the river channel during in-water works.
.2 In case of a flood-producing rainfall, evacuation of personnel and equipment

must be completed within a two (2) hour time frame after the trigger.
Table 2 extracted from the Temporary Flow Diversion Section 02150 Temporary
Flow Diversion presents. Culverts would require a CSP bypass pipe to ensure
working dry zones for each return period:
Table 2: Culvert inlet normal headwater with Temporary Flow Diversion System
Return Period
Number 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year
Bypass Pipe
Site of
barrels
(m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) (m)
Mile 37.00
450 mm /
(59+544.25) 1 0.09 196.32 0.12 196.39 0.13 196.42
CSP
(Culvert 13)
Mile 37.20
525 mm /
(59+869.25 1 0.14 195.39 0.18 195.46 0.20 195.49
CSP
(Culvert 12)
Mile 37.63
375 mm /
(60+567.18 1 0.04 192.84 0.05 192.87 0.06 192.91
CSP
(Culvert 11)
Mile 38.02
moved to
750 mm /
37.98 1 0.28 189.87 0.36 189.95 0.41 190.00
CSP
(61+125)
(Culverts 10)
Mile 38.31
600 mm /
(61+756) 1 0.16 186.72 0.20 186.78 0.23 186.82
CSP
(Culvert 9)
Mile 38.52
375 mm /
(61+993) 1 0.04 185.74 0.06 185.74 0.07 185.77
CSP
(Culvert 8)
As shown, the 10-year return period flow is safely accommodated at all culverts
under partial blockage of the culvert openings. The protected working zone is
then expected to be wetted.
2.2 METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE
.1 The Contractor shall subscribe to a meteorological alert service, ensuring that

there is advance warning of flood-producing severe rainfall events; those
producing more than 10 mm of rainfall precipitation in a 24-hour period. Warning
area to be focused on the Indian Creek Watershed (and its tributaries).
2.3 WORKING AREAS PLAN
.1 Contractor shall provide a plan of working areas within the 2-year flood elevation
limits at a given location, based upon the planned restrictions to full stream flow
by cofferdam arrangements. The plan shall provide equipment types that may
work in those limits.
.2 The same plan shall show working areas above the regulated flood limits.
2.4 HIGH FLOW CONTINGENCY PLAN
.1 The Contractor shall provide a High Flow Contingency Plan that provides the
following basic information:
Triggers:
.1 How warning is communicated, positive nature of communications

as well as estimated advance warning time, etc.
Priorities:
.1 Personnel evacuation;
.2 Fuel and chemical removals; lifting and moving procedures must

not put persons at risk, in the event that flood wave occurs more
rapidly than predicted;
.3 Securing or removal of powered tools and equipment; and
.4 Removal of inert construction material.
Assembly Areas:
.1 Determine assembly areas clear of regulated flood limits for

equipment and for persons.
All Clear Declaration:
.1 Completed by a designated person, following advice from weather

service, and observation of passage of flood wave.
2.5 EQUIPMENT
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all materials, tools, equipment,
labour and services necessary to complete the work.
2.6 RESTORATION
.1 Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and materials are removed from the
Limits of Construction upon completion of the Work and that all areas disturbed
as part of the Work are restored to their preconstruction conditions in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
.2 Contractor shall ensure that the Work is completed in accordance with the
environmental and operational constraints specified in the Contract Documents.
.3 Contractor shall restore the area in accordance with the requirements of Section
02315 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
3.1 MEASUREMENT
3.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be deemed included in the applicable
item in the Form of Tender, including but not limited to design, supply, install and
removal of dewatering system, temporary flow diversion, flood emergency
response plan and erosion and sediment control plan as necessary to complete

CN – DESIGN & SIGNAL AND FIBRE OPTIC CABLES SECTION 02200
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for the existing signal and fiber optic
cable and the new conduits for the future signal and fiber optic cable for the
Work.
.7 Construction Monitoring Section 02201
.8 Erosion Control – General Section 02272
.10 Winter Grading Section 02312
1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
.1 CN Fiber Optic OSP Infrastructure Construction Abridged Guidelines CN-IT-IO-

3011-00
.2 FP 1-1/4 SDR 11 x4 with 0.070" Sheath drawing by Ddura.line.

.1 OPSS.MUNI 450, Construction Specification for Pipeline and Utility
Installation in Soil by Horizontal Directional Drilling;
.2 OPSS.PROV 602, Construction Specification for Installation of Electrical

Chambers;
.3 OPSS.PROV 603, Construction Specification for Installation of Ducts; and
.4 OPSS.PROV 1001, Material Specification for Aggregates-General.
.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.7-15, Underground Systems (2015).
.5 American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)

(2018):
.1 AREMA – Chapter 1, Part 5.
.6 CN Rail Specification – SPC 1005 and SPC 6100.
.7 Transport Canada – Regulation TC-E-10.
.8 TSSA Guideline for Excavation in the Vicinity of Utility Lines.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
.1 Supply and install permanent signal conduits HDPE SDR 11 and pull boxes for
CN S&C shown on the Contract Drawings.
.2 Supply and install Fiber Conduits 4-way Jumbo duct
.3 Supply and install new hot dip galvanized steel casing pipe with min. 7.1 mm
thickness (schedule 40) for the location shown on the Contract Drawings.
.4 Supply and install new hot dip galvanized steel casing pipe with min. 12.8 mm
thickness (schedule 40) for the location shown on the Contract Drawings.
.5 The work of this Section consists of the location and protection of all signal and
fibre optic cables in the areas of the works as outlined on the Contract Drawings.
.6 Railway and third-party signal and fibre optic cables in the area will be relocated
by others prior to and during construction. Cables that remain in place shall be
protected by the Contractor.
.7 Remove inactive Utilities and cable. Protect existing active Utilities and cables.
.8 Supply all labour, material and equipment required to locate and protect all CN
and all other fibre optic cables in the area of the works, all to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and/or CN Signals and Communications maintainer.
.9 The Contractor shall use a vacuum truck to locate, verify and identify conflicts for
all existing Utilities within and along the Rail Corridor, and all Utilities and
municipal service connections located in municipal roads that are included in the
Site.
.10 The Contractor shall use a vacuum truck to locate and verify all existing
infrastructure including existing Utilities, cables, pull boxes, and handholes within
the Site along the entire Rail Corridor, and shall consider the following:
.1 In case of the existing infrastructure including existing Utilities, cables,

and pull boxes (handwells) are inactive; the Contractor shall proceed with
the removal after receiving confirmation from CN S&C regarding the
status of each item; and
.2 In case of the existing infrastructure, including existing Utilities, cables,

and pull boxes (handwells) are active; the Contractor shall protect this
infrastructure/Utilities in accordance with the requirements of the Utility
Companies, coordinate with Utility Companies and the Engineer
regarding the relocation plans.
.11 The Contractor shall coordinate with all Utility Companies of the existing Utilities
to remove, protect, and relocate existing Utilities and install all new underground
Utilities for the Works.
to ensure that the work for underground utilities, meets the requirements of this
Section and Section 01620 Quality Assurance.
.2 The Contractor shall perform all the testing as part of its scope under Section
01620 Quality Control and Assurance, and in accordance with the requirements
of this Section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following submittals for review in accordance
with the requirements of Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Work Plan for Underground Utilities submittal consisting of the following

information:
.1 A plan to locate all existing Utilities using the vacuum truck on

grade or high rail capable equipment;
.2 Method of installing conduits;
.3 Method of joining pipes to ensure leakproof installation;

.4 Method of proving continuity of all conduits installed; and
.5 Method of proofing the conduits.
.2 Product data for all types of conduits, handwells and pull boxes; includes
but not limited to:
.1 Material
.2 Density
.3 Water Absorption
.4 Environmental Stress Crack
.5 Melt Flow
.6 Brittleness Temperature
.7 Tensile at Yield
.8 Elongation at Break
.9 Vicat Softening Point
.10 Flexural Modulus
.11 All dimensions
.3 Shop Drawings for Underground Utilities submittal showing the location of

all existing and new pull boxed (handwells), conduits, the conduits layout
and any other information necessary;
.4 Work Plan Methodology for Utility Conduits by Directional Drilling;
.5 Work Plan Methodology for Utility Casing by Trenchless Method;
.6 Work Plan Methodology for Casing (or Conduit) Installation by Open Cut;
.7 Inspection and Test Reports submittal for all tests and inspections
performed by the Contractor appointed inspection and testing company in
accordance with this Section, including testing results to support proof
that conduits are clear, properly connected one piece to the next,
waterproof and capable of being filled with wires as required; and
.8 As-Built Drawings for the Works performed by the Contractor within the
Limits of Construction.
.9 The Contractor shall submit a confirmation from the supplier to confirm
that all HDPE products (Conduits and pull boxes) are designed to support
Copper E90 railway loading.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS AND CASING
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that:
.1 100mm HDPE conduits and casings are High-Density Polyethylene Duct,

Type SDR 11, by Gravenhurst Plastics (HDPE Polyduct), dura.line or
approved equal. The Contractor shall ensure that they will be a smooth
wall type, inside and outside, suitable for direct burial or directional
drilling, with inside diameters as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The
contractor shall coordinate with CN Rail regarding the colour code for the
signal conduits before placing the order.
.2 Tracer wire, #14 AWG RWU90 green insulated copper conductor cable is
attached to the conduits for tracing, complete with terminal boxes,
markers and tracer wire connections;
.3 Connections are welded watertight or are mechanical watertight; and
.4 Fiber Conduits 4-way Jumbo duct manufactured by dura.line are colour

coded as follows:
.1 4-32mm HDPE Conduits:
.1 1-32mm Blue;
.2 1-32mm Red;
.3 1-32mm Brown; and
.4 1-32mm Green.
.2 Steel Casing Pipe:
.1 168.4 mm Dia. Schedule 40, 7.1 mm thick hot dipped galvanized steel
pipe and 550 mm Dia. Schedule 40, 12.8 mm thick hot dipped galvanized
steel pipe for power and communication conduit casing are installed in
the location indicated on the Contract Drawings;
.2 Threaded couplers hot dipped galvanized steel or a galvanized shell

coupler with rubber inlay torque to 125 ft/lbs with Loctite are utilized; and
.3 Hot dipped galvanized expansion coupler at maximum 25m spacing is

utilized.
.3 Pull boxes (handwells):
.1 Pull box sizes and depth per the information provided in the Contract
Drawings.
.2 Pull box manufactured by Oldcastle Infrastructure or approved equal.
.4 Cable Marker Tape:
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that re-printed, red (power), yellow

(communication), 75 mm wide, 4 mil polyethylene at depth of 500mm,
marked “Caution Buried Cable” is placed between each set of conduits as
specified on the Contract Drawings.
.5 Fish Rope:
.1 Fish rope, polypropylene type or twine rope, shall be installed in each

conduit and duct.
.6 Bedding and backfill material
.1 Bedding and backfill materials in accordance with the requirements in

Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall perform on Site inspections to determine the exact routing
of all new conduits and accommodate any modifications that may require Site
adjustment during the construction phases. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of any such changes before incorporating into the design or
construction.
.2 The locations of the pull boxes provided on the Contract Drawings are
approximate. The Contractor shall adjust the location based on the Site
conditions.
.3 The Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer before splicing
any conduits. In the event that approval is granted, butt fusion welding shall be
used to splice conduits.
.4 The Contractor shall record all locations of joints(splices) by use of GPS

coordinates.
.5 The Contractor shall clean and reinstate the areas affected by the works and
reinstate the original elevation and conditions before installation.
3.2 COORDINATION WITH RAILWAY SIGNAL WORK
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer for any installation of power
and signal railway signal cables.
3.3 PULL BOXES INSTALLATION
.1 Pull boxes are installed in the approximate locations shown on the

Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall adjust the location based on the
Site conditions;
.2 Pull boxes are located no closer than 3 m from the centerline of the track;
.3 Pull boxes are installed on a 100 mm compacted bed of sand, with

positive drainage and a confirmed discharge;
.4 The top of the pull boxes is sealed, level, and even with the surrounding
finish grade. The Contractor shall avoid placing the pull boxes under the
ballast;
.5 Flexible ducts are routed through the bottom of the pull boxes and capped
300 mm above the bottom. Conduits shall be placed in the designated
boxes;
.6 The grading around the pull boxes is adjusted to the elevation shown on
the Drawings or reinstated to the original conditions; and
.7 Lid for the pull boxes is supplied with the name of the utility in the box:
.1 Signals; and
.2 Power.
3.4 HDPE CONDUITS OR CASING
.1 Conduits or casings are installed at an average depth of 1.2 m to 1.5 m

below the finished ground; and
.2 Tracer wires are attached to the conduit with electrical tape.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that for all casings installed across existing tracks
using directional drilling or any other location by directional drilling, The
Contractor shall submit for review, a Work Plan Methodology for Conduits by
Directional Drilling indicating the Contractor’s methodology including:
.1 A description of individual assigned duties associated with directional

drilling operation;
.2 A procedure for avoiding and detecting drill contact with obstructions. This
procedure shall include a description of the emergency recovery
procedure if unintended contact with obstruction occurs;
.3 A method of controlling excess drilling gel fluid to prevent contamination

of rail ballast and a means of cleaning ballast should contamination occur;
.4 A method of detecting cave in or obstruction along the intended exit

passage of drilling fluid; and
.5 Undertake construction monitoring in accordance with Section 02201

Construction Monitoring. A Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan
(GIMP) shall be submitted including the following:
.1 A method of continuously monitoring track elevation and a means

of acknowledging a change in elevation of any rail in accordance
with Section 02201 Construction Monitoring; and
.2 A means of recording changes in elevation on all rails above the

line of the drill rod, as well as on each side of the center line of drill
rod and reamer in accordance with Section 02201 Construction
Monitoring.
.3 The Contractor shall submit Work Plan Methodology for Casing (or Conduit)
Installation by Open Cut submittal for review providing a detailed construction
methodology including a Construction Settlement Monitoring Plan (CSMP), in
accordance with the Contract Documents prior to commencing work. For the
installation of conduits at the road, the Contractor shall ensure that Work Plan
Methodology for Casing (or Conduit) Installation by Open Cut shall also include:
.1 Acquisition of the required road occupancy permits;
.2 A method of traffic control ensuring the safety of vehicular traffic and

pedestrians traveling across the level crossing upon the approach of a
train;
.3 Restoration of disturbed areas to the satisfaction the Municipality;
.4 Notification to the Municipality of intended lane and road closures;
.5 A description of the equipment to be utilized by the Contractor throughout

the process; and
.6 Anticipated duration of occupation of the grade crossing.
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that all casing pipes are either capped or all ends
are plugged and terminated as follows:
.1 For casing terminations, terminate 1 m below ground level maintaining

the required depth under all existing and proposed tracks, the Contractor
shall backfill with sand and mark the end of the HDPE with a stake or the
Engineer approved equal/alternative;
.2 For casings installed parallel to the existing tracks terminate 1 m below

ground at the approximate locations shown on the Contract Drawings.
Casing ends shall be marked with stakes and backfilled with sand; and
.3 Sealing compound shall be injected between the casing pipe and the
HDPE conduits.
3.5 TRENCHING BESIDE RAILWAY LINES
.1 The Contractor shall control the excavation process for open cut utility trench on
daily basis. The trench must be backfilled at the end of the work shift to avoid any
hazard to rail operations and maintenance crews.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that excavation does not interfere with the normal
45-degree splay of bearing from either the bottom of the base slabs or the edge
of tie footings and bearing structures.
.3 If an unknown utility is found, the Contractor shall stop the activity immediately
and contact the utility locator to identify the Utility Company. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the Engineer and the Utility Company regarding the relocation
and protection of the utility.
.4 If an existing utility is damaged, the Contractor shall immediately stop the work
and notify the Engineer and the Utility Company. The Contractor shall replace or
reinstate the damaged utility to the original conditions.
.5 Provide construction monitoring in accordance with Section 02201 Construction

Monitoring.
3.6 CONDUITS INSTALLATION
.1 The Contractor shall install the conduits upon completion of the subgrade layer
as indicated on the Contract Drawings, by open cut direct buried or directional
drilling methods.
.2 The Contractor shall install the conduits in the hot dipped galvanized steel pipe in
the locations as shown on the Contract Drawings.
.3 The Contractor shall interrupt existing duct banks and provide pull boxes and
new duct banks as necessary.
.4 The Contractor shall make directional changes in conduits runs exceeding a total
of 10 degrees, either vertically or horizontally, by long smooth bends that have a
minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet.
.5 The Contractor shall cap the conduits at both ends immediately after the proofing
process. The Contractor shall ensure that the conduits are ready for future use.
The Contractor shall fill all conduits entering pull boxes or housings with a sealing
compound after installing the cables.
.6 The Contractor shall provide, compact and cover sand bedding in accordance
with Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling and OPSS.PROV
1001. Prior to the commencement of bedding, pipe laying and backfilling, the
Contractor shall ensure that the trench is free of debris and sharp rocks.
.7 Prior to backfilling the trench, the Contractor shall ensure that the conduits are
lying flat, and are not intertwined with one another, to allow for future
unobstructed installation of cables.
.8 The Contractor shall mark routing of ducts with cable marker tape placed along
the centerline of the trench, approximately 500 mm below finished grade.
.9 The Contractor shall provide the installed conduits and ensure that all conduits
are free of water, debris, breakage and distortion. The Contractor shall submit a
proving certificate for each section of the conduits, witnessed and signed by its
inspection and testing company.
.10 The Contractor shall carry out restoration of the Site upon completion of the Work
in accordance with Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling and the
requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
.11 Modern signals and communications cables are conveyors of high technology
information. Disruption of this service is costly to repair and most importantly,
causes severe loss of revenue and inconvenience to CN, and their customers. In
addition, the cables carry high voltages that could cause serious injury or fatality.
Therefore, it is important that Contractors use extreme caution when working in
the vicinity of any signals and communications cable:
.1 Prior to mobilization to the site, contact the “Ontario 1 Call” at 1-800-400-

2255 cable locates.
.12 Take every conceivable precaution to ensure that the cables are not damaged.
.13 Supply and maintain the required protection of all signals and communications
cables within the working limits, including overhead cables.
.14 For all underground cables, adhere to the following specific procedures:
.1 Prior to mobilization of the Contractor's equipment to the site, the Railway

shall stake out the location of the cable by means of markers and/or
fluorescent paint. The Contractor shall make a joint inspection with the
Railway during the stake out and will be required to sign the Railway’s
locate form. The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 72
hours’ notice prior to mobilization of equipment to allow for cable locates;
and
.2 The Contractor shall carry out their excavation operations in accordance

with “Instructions for Excavators, Underground S&C Cable, SCP-1005 &
SCP-6100”, with the following modifications. A copy of the bulletin is
attached to these Specifications.
3.7 PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO EXCAVATION
.1 Do not operate any heavy equipment nor excavate mechanically within 1 meter
(3 feet) of the cable until arrangements for protecting the cable have been made
with the Engineer.
.2 Prior to commencing any excavation work or any work near and around the fibre
optic or signal cables, the Contractor shall provide the railway flagman a copy of
a current locate sheet, no more than 30 days old, for their records and
information.
.3 Prior to commencing any excavation work or any work near and around the fibre
optic or signal cables, the Contractor shall receive authorization daily from the
Engineer and confirm that the Engineer has notified CN's Network Management
Centre at (800) 661-3687.
.4 Prior to excavation, all cables must be exposed by approved hydra-vac service
over the entire area of the works, at intervals approved by the Engineer and/or
CN Signals and Communications maintainer Generally, cables will require
locating as directed and where new facilities cross existing cables.
.5 Record and mark location and depth of cables on a working copy of plans. Place
a marker, to protrude not more than 100 mm (4”) above original ground, in the
hole indicating location and depth of cables and immediately backfill holes with
approved material. No open holes will be allowed at the end of the work shift.
.6 The Contractor may also be required to expose cables not in the immediate area
of excavation, in order to provide positive identification of the cables. The
Engineer and
.7 CN Signals and Communications maintainer will determine this requirement

during the joint inspection.
3.8 EXCAVATION & PROTECTION
.1 All excavations required within 1 meter (3 feet) of the cable shall be done
carefully, with hand digging or approved hydra-vac service only, and in the
presence of the Engineer and/or CN Signals and Communications maintainer.
.2 When it is necessary to cross over the cable with heavy equipment or during
blasting operations, the Contractor shall protect the cable with 1 meter (3 feet) of
cover or greater depth, as dictated by ground conditions and determined by the
Engineer. Material used for cover shall be approved fill and separated from the
ballast shoulder by means of a heavy filter fabric. The Railway roadbed shall be
restored to its original elevations on completion of the works:
.1 The Contractor may be required to install steel troughing or steel plate as

directed by CN.
3.9 DAMAGE
.1 Any damage to a signals or communications cable shall be reported promptly to

the Engineer and/or CN Signals and Communications maintainer. The Contractor
shall make no attempt to repair damaged cables.
.2 The Contractor shall be held liable for any costs for repairs and loss of revenue
resulting from any disruption to the cable system caused by their operation.
4.1 GENERAL
.1 Measurement and payment for all work of this section shall be in accordance with
the Schedule of Prices listed in the Form of Tender and shall include all labor,
equipment, surveying, and material required to perform the work specified herein.
4.2 HYDRA-VAC TRUCKS
.1 Measurement shall be by hour of time used on site as certified by the Engineer.

Time sheets shall be certified daily. This item will be paid under the Provisional
Items in the Form of Tender.
4.3 CONDUITS
.1 Measurement shall be by linear meter of properly installed set of four conduits

measured along the centerline of the duct bank. Payment at the Contract price
shall include excavation and disposal regardless of the depth; supply and
installation of conduits including connections/elbow and terminations; supply,
placement and compaction of sand bedding, sand cover and earth backfill,
installation of fish rope, proofing installation, and supply and placement of
warning tape all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.4 PULL BOXES

.1 Measurement shall be by each of properly installed pull box. Payment at the
Contract price shall include excavation and disposal regardless of depth; supply
and installation of pull boxes; supply, placement and compaction of bedding and
backfill all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.5 PAYMENT
in the Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour,
use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Work of this
Section.
.2 Supply of water for hydra-vac trucks, disposal of excavated materials and backfill
for holes for the Work shall be considered incidental to the work, and no separate
payment will be made for these items, except for items under Provisional Items
as approved by the Engineer.

CN – DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION MONITORING SECTION 02201
GENERAL CONDITIONS
this Specification apply equally to this Section of the Specifications.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for Construction monitoring for the Work.
.2 The Contractor shall undertake Construction monitoring for the Work activities
that are carried out in close proximity to the existing railway track, all type of
structures, embankments, as well as all types of underground structures
(including existing sewers, watermains, gas main, fiber optics works and other
buried and all types of surface features).
.3 The Contractor acknowledges that its operations may pose a risk to existing
adjacent and nearby infrastructure due to vibration, soil displacement,
dewatering, and settlement. The Contractor shall perform all work using methods
that minimize all possible risks to the surface and buried structures, services and
features.
.4 The Contractor shall demonstrate, through its Geotechnical Instrumentation

Monitoring Plan, that a fully documented program of planned inspection,
monitoring and recording is in place, and consequent actions will be undertaken
to ensure that this requirement is met.
.5 The Contractor will be required to make restitution to the Railway for all costs
required for repairs to the railway tracks if as a result of their operations, it is
determined that the elevation or alignment of the railway tracks has changed.
.6 Setting out and Measurement Section 01610

.9 Signal and Fibre Optic Cables Section 02200
.10 Site Demolition and Removal Section 02225
.11 Building Demolition and Removal Section 02227
.12 Concrete Segmental Retaining Wall Section 02276
.14 Winter Works Section 02312
.16 Culverts and Storm Sewers Section 02630
.19 Pipeline Crossing by Horizontal Directional Drilling Section 15239
.20 HDD Drilling, Pullback Oil Pipeline Relocation Project Section 15240
.1 American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA).
.2 CN Utility Crossing/Encroachment Application Packet.
.3 Geotechnical Reports for the Project included in the Contract Documents.
.1 Contractor shall be responsible for conducting their own quality assurance

program to ensure all Construction monitoring meets the requirements of this
1.5 SUBMITTALS
with this Section and Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Submit a comprehensive Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan

(GIMP), 20 Business Days prior to installation of Construction monitoring
for design criteria, baseline readings, instrumentation, monitoring
frequency, reporting of data, methodology to implement the Works and
locations of monitoring for the project prepared by a professional engineer
licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario:
.1 The Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan, prepared by

the Contractor, shall include the proposed design, installation
details and installation schedule for setting up monitoring points,
including proposed equipment for drilling, grouting and cleaning
the inside of casings of the boreholes for the in-ground monitoring
points.
.2 Submit baseline readings and monitoring reports at the required

frequency for the project.
1.6 WORK INCLUDED
.1 The Contractor shall develop a Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan for

the Work, referred to as ‘ground and track movement monitoring’, which tracks
vertical and lateral ground movements adjacent to excavations, movements of
railway track and grading, groundwater levels and pressures, Utilities, prior to,
during and after Construction (including all weather conditions). The Contractor
shall ensure that the Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan meets the
requirements of the Contract Documents, including the Contractor Safety
Program and Site Specific Safety Plan.
.2 During Construction, the Contractor shall monitor all operations for the following:
.1 Horizontal ground movement; and
.2 Vertical ground movement.
.3 The Contractor shall take all possible reasonable steps through its Construction
means and methods to ensure that:
.1 Ground movements associated with Construction adjacent to or otherwise

affecting adjacent buildings and active railway track and grading are
minimized; and
.2 Ground movements with the potential to affect any building, structure,

service, active railway track and grading or other facility or feature on the
Site or in its general vicinity as may be affected by Construction activities,
are minimized, whether these are caused by dewatering, excavation,
compaction, caisson installation, excavation for retaining walls, or any
other Construction activities.
.4 The Contractor’s Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan shall include

installation and monitoring of instrumentation to obtain:
.1 Daily measurement of settlement, lateral movement, visual cracking or

signs of distress at adjacent buildings, structures, and embankments;
.2 Recording of all ground movement affecting rails, underground Utilities,
structures, services and any other facilities which the Works Construction
may affect in accordance with required monitoring frequencies. The
Contractor shall ensure that the data provides an average reading during
Construction; and
.3 Measurement of vertical and lateral movement of rails during any

Construction activity in the vicinity of the tracks that may affect the track
stability.
.5 The instrumentation and monitoring shall provide the information necessary to

confirm compliance to this Section. In addition, the Contractor shall perform its
own monitoring to ensure all Construction methodologies avoid risk of damaging
existing structures, Utilities, the railway track, and grading and other railway
equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and repairs to
any adjacent structures, Utilities, railways (CN or any other adjacent railway),
buildings, and for any impact on adjacent railway infrastructure and railway
operations related to its failure to verify that its Construction methodology
maintains readings below allowable displacement and loading limits.
.6 The Contractor shall ensure that the monitoring program generates

measurements of ground movements in a manner that will enable an immediate
response to any undue ground movements. The Contractor shall ensure that the
monitoring system demonstrates that Construction activities are not creating
undue risk to existing structures or railway track and grading. The Contractor
shall use the monitoring result to modify its Construction activities to reduce the
risk of any activities adversely affecting the existing structures or features being
monitored.
.7 The Contractor shall carry out all the monitoring in accordance with the
requirements stated in this Section that identifies the following:
.1 All monitoring instruments, equipment, and installation procedures;
.2 All monitoring locations;
.3 The monitoring frequency and duration for each instrument and reading;
.4 All Construction activities pertaining to each type of monitoring, for

example, ground movement limits for each building and service; and
.5 Actions to be taken in the event that monitoring suggests that any

threshold values may be approached. The Contractor shall ensure that
the limits of settlement and the required actions are included in the
Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan and are in accordance
with.
.8 The Engineer will review the Contractor’s monitoring program in accordance with
Section 01340 Submittals, requirements and provide recommendations, including
suggestions to improve the system so that the monitoring program can be altered
to enable the Contractor to modify its Construction operations prior to any
structure or facility, railway track, and grading or railway equipment being
damaged or otherwise compromised.
.9 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a progress monitoring report within
three Business Days upon the Engineer’s request. The report shall include
proactive actions required for any Construction impact mitigation. The Contractor
shall submit a post Construction survey report and post Construction track
monitoring report to the Engineer prior to Substantial Completion of the Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary monitoring instrumentation
required to complete the Works and satisfy the requirements of the Contract
Documents including vertical displacement measuring points (i.e., settlement
rods), settlement and lateral movement pins, crack monitoring gauges, and other
required equipment.
2.2 LOCATIONS
.1 The Contractor shall submit a Monitoring Locations Plan as part of GIMP in

accordance with requirements in Section 01340 Submittals and as specified
below.
.2 With regards to settlement and lateral movement for structures, the Contractor
shall, as a minimum, install one point on the structure of each property fronting
Construction and shall monitor daily for both horizontal and vertical
displacements before, during and after Construction:
.1 Contractor shall ensure that the measurement of structure displacements

is made using points either temporarily or permanently fixed to the
structure;
.2 Contractor shall not use driven nails, pins, or marks made on the
structure for measurement of displacements as these devices or
markings can result in equivocal measurements or be dislodged from
their initiation location; and
.3 Contractor shall ensure that all structure surveying is accurate to within

1.5mm. Existing cracks or cracks that appear during Construction shall be
fitted with suitable crack monitoring gauges.
.3 The Contractor shall indicate the location for the railway track and grading,
retaining wall, shoring and other piles in the track proximity in the Geotechnical
Instrumentation Monitoring Plan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION AND REPORTING
3.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall design the Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan,

supply and oversee installation of all settlement and displacement measurement
devices, daily inspections, implement the monitoring plan, interpret and prepare a
report of the results of the monitoring data. In addition, the Contractor shall
ensure that the Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan contains
emergency contact information and action plans for situations where the
monitoring readings or visual observations indicate that the threshold values are
being approached or have been exceeded.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the frequency of monitoring is in accordance

with the requirements identified in this Section.
.3 The Contractor shall submit monitoring reports (that include reference to the
Shop Drawings with numbered monitoring targets, pins and points) that show the
readings in tabular and graphical formats for all monitoring activities performed
during the previous week. Upon completion of the monitoring program, the
Contractor shall ensure that a final report is submitted that demonstrates the
results and interpretation of the readings. The Contractor shall ensure that these
reports are included in the Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Plan and
submitted in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals and Section 01620
Quality Control and Assurance.
.4 The Contractor shall take all possible reasonable steps to ensure that ground
movements associated with any Construction activity adjacent to or otherwise
affecting adjacent structures, services, railway track and grading or railway
equipment are minimized and subsequently reflected in the monitoring reports.
.5 The Contractor acknowledges that the Engineer may suspend installation

operations adjacent to the railway tracks at any time, especially during
excessively hot periods or when rail temperature exceeds 32°C (90°F).
.6 The Contractor shall undertake regular monitoring of the horizontal and vertical
alignment of the railway track and grading.
.7 The Contractor acknowledges that removal and reinstatement of any monitoring

system is necessary based on Construction staging and sequencing of the
Works. The Contractor shall re-establish points and baseline readings as
required and as required by the Engineer and at no additional cost to CN.
.8 General requirements for all monitoring plans:
.1 The ground movement (settlement/heave) monitoring must be performed

by a qualified and competent party. In-ground monitoring points shall
have florescent markers with blunt tops to protect track workers from
injury;
.2 A reference drawing showing location and general arrangement of the
ground movement monitoring points is required for CN review and
acceptance;
.3 A baseline is required to be established by taking at-least three readings

prior to construction, taken on three separate days;
.4 The following notes should be included:
.1 CN shall have the right to request additional monitoring and to the

satisfaction of CN regarding the frequency and accuracy of
monitoring.
.5 The following movement monitoring reading frequencies shall be

followed:
.1 Visual monitoring of the track, ground, any shoring work and

existing structures shall be performed a minimum of twice daily
during construction / boring/tunneling activities and when any
ROW excavation is in an open condition; and
.2 Track movement monitoring via surveying of in-ground monitoring

points and deep monitoring points shall be performed twice per
day during construction/boring/tunneling activities and when any
ROW excavation is in an open condition.
.6 After the crossing / construction has been completed, a set of readings

shall be taken at each ground movement monitoring point for:
.1 Once a day for 14 days;
.2 Then twice weekly for the next 30 days (i.e. month);
.3 Then once monthly for the next three months; and
.4 The above frequency may change depending on site conditions

and the monitoring may continue up to one year.
.7 ‘Alert levels’ with actions to be taken, are required. The alert levels shall
be as indicated in Table 1:
.1 Allowable Limits: The Contractor will review the available data and
provide comments on any potential ground movement concerns
and implications to railway operations. The ground movement
monitoring reports shall be forwarded to CN or CN representative
within 24 hours of readings;
.2 Review Limits: The Contractor will immediately notify all parties

involved. Monitoring frequency shall be increased to determine if
any additional ground movement is occurring. Monitoring
frequency shall remain increased until there is stabilization of the
ground movement. The contractor shall plan for remedial works
within seven days. The work may continue;
.3 Alarm Limit: The Contractor will immediately notify all parties

involved. The work will immediately cease until an assessment of
the observed ground movement is conducted and inspected by a
qualified and competent Geotechnical Engineer. The Contractor
shall arrange for immediate repairs to the track. The findings with
a proposed action plan will be reviewed by CN or CN
representative. No construction work shall take place until
instructed by a qualified and competent Geotechnical Engineer
and CN or CN representative subsequent to the following
conditions being satisfied:
.1 The cause of ground movement has been identified;
.2 A corrective / preventive plan is established and adopted;

and
.3 Any corrective and/or preventive measure deemed

necessary is implemented.
TABLE 1. GROUND AND TRACK MOVEMENT MONITORING – ALLOWABLE, REVIEW &

ALERT LIMITS
3.2 TEMPORARY EXCAVATION, RAILWAY SHORING AND STABILITY OF

EXISTING TRACK BED
.1 At any location where the Engineer deems that the Contractor’s work methods
may destabilize the existing track bed, the Contractor is required to undertake
ground and track movement monitoring and install a track protection system and
monitoring system. Both angular movements and vertical settlement shall be
monitored by the Contractor.
.2 For the purposes of design, the nearest point at which excavation can be
undertaken, is as follows:
.1 Starting 457 mm (18”) from the edge of tie, measured perpendicular to

the rail, calculate a slope to the bottom of the proposed excavation at a
2:1 slope. If a 2:1 slope cannot be maintained or more restrictive
conditions occur, approved shoring will be required;
.2 These excavation criteria may not be encroached upon, regardless of soil

conditions; and
.3 All excavations must comply with the Occupational Health and Safety Act.
.3 Either angular movement or settlement of the ground behind the track protection
that exceeds the establishment limits shall be reported to the Engineer
immediately.
.4 The following method of monitoring for horizontal and vertical settlement and
reporting limits shall be implemented:
.1 Prior to construction, the Contractor shall install steel rods in the

centerline of all tracks, at two meter intervals for at least 25 meters on
either side of the proposed installation;
.2 The Contractor shall be required to take survey shots of the elevation and
location of these monitoring rods prior to start of construction and on a
daily basis and shall send the monitoring reports (tracking X, Y, and Z
direction movements) to the Engineer via facsimile or e-mail, within 24
hours;
.3 Monitoring of the shoring wall shall include the survey measurements of

scaled targets attached to the piles at the top of piles and at each
anchoring point. The scaled targets shall be placed at a maximum
spacing of 6 m with targets placed at the extreme ends and the targets
distributed between the outer limits. The survey targets shall be
monitored for on a daily basis and shall send the monitoring reports
(tracking X, Y, and Z direction movements) to the Engineer via facsimile
or e-mail, within 24 hours.
.4 Should the Contractor note a difference in elevation or lateral movement
from the original readings, as noted in Table 1 for Class 4 Track, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately;
.5 If movement of the tracks is more rapid than expected, or if movement

approaches the allowable limit, work shall be suspended, the Engineer
shall be notified, and suitable measures shall be taken to ensure stability
of the tracks and to ensure movement does not exceed the levels
specified;
.6 The monitoring reports shall also include lateral movement of the

temporary piles, measured at the top and bottom of the excavation. An
intermediate point shall be measured once the excavation is completed;
and
.7 The frequency of settlement monitoring may be increased or decreased

at the discretion of CN.
3.3 TRACK MONITORING DURING CONSTRUCTON OF NEW UTILITIES

CROSSING THE TRACKS
.1 Monitoring Guidelines: The monitoring requirements are for one (1) utility
crossing. For more than one (1) utility crossing, the monitoring requirements are
subject to change (i.e. monitoring points shall monitor all utility installations).
.1 Ground and Track Monitoring plan: Additional information required for

ground movement monitoring in the vicinity of CN ROW for underground
utility crossings:
.1 In-ground monitoring points are to be installed along the center of
the track at 2 meters center-to-center intervals for at least 25
metres on either side of the proposed installation/crossing. If more
than one track, the points are to be installed along the center line
of each track. In-ground points shall extend 1.2 meters below the
ground surface. In-ground monitoring points shall not create a
tripping hazard to workers and shall be fitted with a high visibility
reflective rubber end cap; and
.2 Deep-in-ground movement monitoring points are to be installed
along the alignment of the proposed casing placement/utility within
the ROW (maximum of 4.0 meters (13 ft)) intervals and
approximately at a depth of 1 meter above the proposed utility
alignment):
.1 The deep monitoring points are to be located outside the
track structure (i.e. ties, ballast, etc.).
.2 Contractor shall ensure that over-excavation does not occur and the
liner/casing is installed tight to the excavation;
.3 Report theoretical vs. actual volumes of spoils removed on per meter and
total bases;
.4 Contractor shall ensure that the excavation is fully supported until the
liner/pipe installation is complete;
.5 Ensure that the bulkhead is installed at the end of every work shift or
during any prolonged stoppage of work; and
.6 Ensure that voids are fully grouted to refusal immediately after the
completion of liner/pipe installation.
.2 Report theoretical vs. actual volumes of grout pumped. Settlements of greater

than 4mm shall be reported to CN immediately. Review and Alert levels.
.3 Reporting to CN during/post Construction:
.1 Progress of the contractor and pipe installation and what work was
completed on that day;
.2 A summary of the daily ground surface and subsurface movements

showing a comparison to a baseline reading taken before the start of
construction, settlements of greater than 4 mm shall be reported to CN
immediately;
.3 Any other geotechnical issues that may be of concern to CN;
.4 Log of settlement survey results showing:
.1 Station;
.2 Date and Elevation of Initial Readings;
.3 Date and Elevation of Subsequent Readings; and
.4 Difference in Elevation.
.5 Submit ground surface and subsurface monitoring reports to CN on a

daily basis, showing a comparison to baseline readings taken prior to the
commencement of construction. Settlement of 4mm is to be reported to
CN immediately. For a horizontal movement of 9mm or greater and for a
vertical movement of 12 mm or greater, the work is stopped until a
resolution is achieved.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF SETTLEMENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION
.1 The Contractor shall not backfill or remove instruments until they are no longer
required, including until Substantial Completion, if it is required.
.2 The Contractor shall backfill borehole casings for removed instruments with
cement grout up to the underside of surface restoration.
.3 The Contractor shall backfill surface excavations with unshrinkable fill when
within roadways or sidewalks and with selected fill when outside of such areas up
to the underside of surface restoration. The Contractor shall remove steel
casings, if any, to a minimum depth of 1500 mm below the ground surface.
.4 The Contractor shall restore surfaces affected by the installation of instruments to

their original condition prior to completion of the Works.
3.5 DISCLOSURE OF CONSTRUCTION MONITORING DATA
.1 The Contractor shall not disclose any Construction data to third parties and shall
not publish data without prior approval and written consent of the Engineer.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for Work of this Section shall be included in the unit-priced item
included in the Form of Tender for construction monitoring. Payment will be for
full compensation for all materials, labour, use of equipment, tools, submittals,
monitoring reports, reinstatement of the monitoring system, removals of the
monitoring system and incidentals for the Work.

CN – DESIGN & NOISE AND VIBRATION SECTION 02202
CONSTRUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL SEPTEMBER 2023
MILTON LOGISTICS HUB – PHASE 2A PAGE 1 OF 9
GRADING & DRAINAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the noise and vibration monitoring and control
requirements for the Works.
.2 The Contractor shall conform to the Contract Documents.
.3 The Contractor shall supply all labour, Products, equipment, tools, supervision,
and services necessary for noise and vibration monitoring and control work and
reading vibration instruments specified in this Section.
.4 The Contractor shall supply monitoring data to the Engineer and shall ensure that
all data is considered acceptable and accurate for the purposes of assessing the
noise and vibration levels for the Project. The Contractor acknowledges that the
Engineer will rely on this data for the interpretation of noise and vibration levels
from construction activities for the Project. The Contractor shall submit
monitoring data in weekly reports. In addition, the Contractor shall make
available daily data as and when requested by the Engineer.
.1 Environmental Requirements Section 01560
.4 Conditions Surveys Section 02203
.1 The Contractor shall comply with the following guidelines, including;
.1 United States Federal Transit Administration Report No. FTA-VA-90-

1003-06, (May 2006); and
.2 Health Canada Guidance for Evaluating Human Health Impacts in

Environmental Assessment: Noise, (January 2017).
.2 Final List of Approval Conditions (CEAA) (January 21, 2021)
.3 The Contractor shall refer to the Technical Data Report for Noise Effects
Assessment included in Background Information (Stantec 2015).
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.4 The Contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Investigation Report for the Project
included in Background Information.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 “Construction Equipment” means any equipment or device designed for use in

construction or material handling including air compressors, pile drivers,
pneumatic or hydraulic tools, bulldozers or trucks, tractors, excavators, trenchers,
cranes, derricks, loaders, scrapers, pavers, generators, ditchers, compactors and
rollers, pumps, concrete mixers, graders, or other material handling equipment.
.2 “Construction Noise” means noise occurring as a result of the operation of

Construction Equipment during construction.
.3 “Construction Vibration” means vibration occurring as a result of the operation

of Construction Equipment during construction.
.4 “Peak Particle Velocity (PPV)” means the instantaneous maximum rate of

change with respect to time of the particle displacement, measured on the
ground, and velocity amplitudes are given in units of millimeters per second from
zero to peak amplitude.
.5 “The Frequency of Vibration” means the rate of oscillation that occurs in one
second, measured in hertz (Hz), where 1Hz equals one cycle per second.
.6 “Zone Of Influence” means the area of land within or adjacent to a construction

site, including any buildings or structures, that potentially may be impacted by
vibrations emanating from a construction activity where the Peak Particle Velocity
measured at the point of reception is equal to or greater than 5mm/sec at any
frequency; or where noise during construction activity may be higher than the
Performance Limits for Noise specified in Section 01560 Environmental
Requirements unless deliberate mitigation measures are adopted; or such
greater area where specific site conditions are identified by the Environmental
Specialist.
to ensure all the work related to noise and vibration monitoring meet the
requirements of this Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure all submittals comply with Section 01340 Submittals
and Section 01560 Environmental Requirements.
.2 The Contractor shall, in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals:

GRADING & DRAINAGE
.1 Submit the Construction Monitoring Equipment and Calibrating Equipment
Test Reports (including updated calibration certificates following
subsequent yearly calibrations or upon completion of repairs to the
instruments in accordance with requirements of this Section;
.2 Submit a Baseline Noise and Vibration Report;
.3 Submit a Construction Noise and Vibration Zone of Influence Study

Report;
.4 Submit a Noise and Vibration Monitoring Location Plan;
.5 Submit Weekly Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report that also
includes notifications of vibration limit, including the following:
.1 Equipment Failure Report in accordance with the requirement of

this Section; and
.2 Performance Limit Response Plan of Action in accordance with

the requirement of Section 01560 Environmental Requirements.
.6 Submit a Final Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report.
1.7 NOISE CONTROL MEASURES
.1 The Contractor shall conform to Section 01560 Environmental Requirements.
.2 General Noise Controls:
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate operations that approach noise emission

limits outlined in Section 01560 Environmental Requirements in such a
way that they will not be occurring simultaneously where possible;
.2 The Contractor shall route haulage and dump trucks on main roads where
possible;
.3 The Contractor shall use vehicles and equipment with efficient muffling
devices;
.4 The Contractor shall minimize drop heights of materials and use positive
noise attenuation for all construction zones where repetitive metal to
metal contact may generate excessive noise, i.e. muck cars, tipping
chains, dump trucks and excavators; and
.5 Where significant noise is generated by warning devices when equipment

is operating in reverse, the Contractor shall minimize reverse operations
by arranging equipment to enter and leave the Site in the same direction
where possible. Where feasible, the Contractor shall use bidirectional
equipment in order to avoid the need to reverse. All mobile equipment
and vehicles on the Site that have backup alarms are equipped with
GRADING & DRAINAGE
broadband backup alarms only. Alarms shall continue to meet all
applicable safety standards.
.3 The Contractor shall implement noise mitigation measures during construction

where noise levels exceed limits outlined in Section 01560 Environmental
Requirements at a Construction Noise and Vibration Sensitive Receptor, or in a
practical effort to address persistent complaints if they arise, as noted below:
.1 Implement noise compliance checks to ensure equipment levels complies

with local by-laws and MOE Standards, including NPC-115;
.2 Reroute construction and truck traffic;
.3 Where possible, coordinate noisy operations, such that multiple noise-

generating equipment items are not running simultaneously;
.4 Where possible, investigate and implement the use of alternative

construction equipment or methods to reduce noise emissions from
construction. Utilize alternative equipment that generates lower noise
levels;
.5 If practical, impose operational time restrictions on construction

equipment;
.6 Install silencers/mufflers on equipment intakes and exhausts;
.7 Install acoustic enclosures, noise shrouds or noise curtains around noisy

equipment;
.8 Install temporary noise barriers/solid construction hoarding to screen

affected locations; and
.9 Any other effective noise control measure proposed by the Contractor to

meet noise level limits outlined in Section 01560 Environmental
Requirements.
1.8 VIBRATION CONTROL MEASURES
1.9 NOISE AND VIBRATION MONITORING
.1 The Contractor shall conduct noise and vibration monitoring including baseline
measurements near sensitive receptors, in accordance with Section 01560
Environmental Requirements.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT
2.1 MONITORING EQUIPMENT
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining power to the noise and
vibration monitoring equipment. It is assumed that these will be battery operated.
If an alternative power source will be used, such as solar or direct grid
connection, the Contractor shall provide details in accordance with Section
01340 Submittals for review.
.3 The Contractor shall submit a list of noise and vibration monitoring equipment,
including name, model, manufacturer, and serial number to the Engineer or the
Engineer Representative for review as part of its Construction Noise and
Vibration Management Plan, in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals.
.4 The Engineer reserves the right to request any manufacturer documentation for
the noise and vibration monitoring equipment.
2.2 CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT
.2 A list of calibration equipment, including name, model, manufacturer, and serial

number shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with Section
01340 Submittals.
.3 The Engineer reserves the right to request any additional manufacturer

documentation for the calibration equipment or calibration procedures.
.4 Monitoring equipment shall be calibrated within one week prior to its initial use
and once per month thereafter
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer to secure the easement
required for installation of the monitors at the private properties.
.2 The Contractor shall conduct baseline noise and vibration readings as specified
in Section 01560 Environmental Requirements and shall submit a detailed report
of baseline noise and vibration monitoring results to the Engineer in accordance
with Section 01340 Submittals.
.3 The Contractor acknowledges that monitoring frequency shown is a guide and

does not indicate the limit of monitoring required for control or safety of
construction. The Contractor shall perform all monitoring necessary for the safety
and performance of construction operations.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.4 The Engineer reserves the right to adjust, relocate, add or remove monitoring
locations at any time during construction. The Contractor shall revise and submit
up-to-date monitoring location plans as required to address any and all
monitoring location changes during the course of construction to the Engineer for
review.
.5 When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall facilitate access to the
Contractor-installed equipment to all the Engineers to obtain independent
readings.
.6 The location of the monitor(s) shall be adjusted in response to changes in the

Construction activity to capture the highest noise exposure level
.7 The microphone of the noise monitor(s) shall be placed between 1.5 and 4.5
meters above the local ground level
.8 The frequency weighting of the sound level meter shall be set to “A” using a “fast”
response.
.9 Vibration monitoring shall be conducted for structures that are within the Zone of
Influence of construction activities where the predicted vibration levels exceed
the limits set in Section 3.2.
3.2 NOISE AND VIBRATION LEVEL LIMITS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the noise and vibration level limits comply with
requirements under Section 01560 Environmental Requirements.
3.3 DISCLOSURE OF DATA
.1 The Contractor shall not disclose any instrumentation data to third parties and
shall not publish data without prior approval and written consent of the Engineer.
3.4 INTERPRETATION AND USE OF DATA
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for interpretations of monitoring program

data where such data is used to control safety and operations or to meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents, including making any necessary
correlations between instrumentation data and specific construction activities.
.2 The Contractor shall evaluate instrumentation data to determine whether the

response to construction activities is reasonable.
3.5 RESPONSE ACTIONS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the Construction Noise and Vibration
Performance Limits are not exceeded. The Contractor acknowledges that
activities may be suspended in the affected area with the exception of those
actions necessary to avoid exceeding Construction Noise and Vibration
Performance Limits or to make the work and affected properties safe and secure.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.2 If a Construction Vibration Peak Particle Velocity Limit is reached, the Contractor
shall:
.1 Notify the Engineer within one hour of any levels that exceed the Alert
Level;
.2 Stop work in the affected area;
.3 Identify the source causing the excessive noise or vibration, e.g. specific
Construction equipment or activity, or extraneous source un-related to
construction;
.4 Meet with the Engineer to discuss response action(s) and develop a

Vibration Limit Response Plan of Action;
.5 Install additional monitoring if it is deemed necessary by the Engineer;
.6 Implement reviewed Vibration Limit Response Plan of Action; and
.7 Provide daily status updates to The Engineer until Vibration Limit is no

longer exceeded.
3.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION MONITORING FAILURE
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that additional noise and vibration monitors are kept
at the Site such that field monitors can be replaced within 24 hours in the event
of equipment failure.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all noise and vibration monitoring is a
continuous operation. In the event of an equipment failure (for any reason), the
Contractor shall complete the following:
.1 The vibration technician shall check the equipment within eight hours of a
failure and conduct an equipment review. The vibration technician shall
prepare an Equipment Failure Report and submit it to the Engineer
regarding the nature of the failure and the action steps necessary to
repair the equipment. The Equipment Failure Report shall be sent to the
Engineer no later than 24 hours after equipment failure;
.2 If the monitoring equipment cannot be repaired and cannot provide data

within 24 hours, then the Contractor shall ensure that the equipment is
replaced in such a manner that data is provided within 24 hours;
.3 The Contractor shall provide any other additional equipment deemed

necessary to replace monitoring equipment due to failure. The Contractor
shall undertake any required repairs to equipment while in the field;
.4 If noise and vibration monitoring is not restored within 24 hours of a

failure. The Engineer reserves the right to charge back to The Contractor
an amount proportional to the Contractor’s fees for noise and vibration
monitoring for the location and time period in which data is missing; and
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.5 If any equipment failure results in non-compliance with the requirements
of this Section 02201, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for the
non-compliance.
3.7 COMPLAINT PROCEDURE
PART 4 - REPORTING
4.1 GENERAL
.2 Final Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report.
.1 The Contractor shall submit:
.1 Final Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report to the

Engineer for review in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals
no later than one month after Final Completion;
.2 Final Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report shall

include all information included in both the baseline and all
construction monitoring reports as one complete document;
.3 The Contractor shall review the Pre-Condition Survey Report; and

Post-Condition Survey Report (Section 02203 Conditions
Surveys);
.4 Final Noise and Vibration Monitoring Summary Report shall

include reference to the Pre-Condition Survey Report; and Post-
Condition Survey Report (Section 02203 Conditions Surveys) and
note any condition issues directly associated with Construction
Vibration from the Project; and
.5 The Contractor shall ensure that the Final Noise and Vibration
Monitoring Summary Report does not refer to the other reports
and acknowledges that this report shall be considered a
standalone report to document all noise and vibration monitoring
completed for the Project.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
5.1 MEASUREMENT
5.2 PAYMENT
.1 The Lump Sum Prices submitted in the Form of Tender shall include all labour,
materials and equipment required to complete the work and submit the reports.

CN – DESIGN & CONDITIONS SURVEYS SECTION 02203
GENERAL CONDITIONS
this Specification apply equally to this Section of the Specifications.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the pre and post-construction condition survey

requirements for the Works.
.2 The Contractor shall undertake pre-condition surveys and post-condition surveys.
.3 The Contractor acknowledges that its operations may pose a risk to existing
adjacent and nearby infrastructure due to vibration, soil displacement,
dewatering, and settlement. The Contractor shall perform all Works using
methods which minimize all possible risks to the surface and buried structures,
services and features. The Contractor shall have in place a fully documented
program of planned inspections and consequent actions will be undertaken by
the Contractor to ensure that this requirement is met.
.4 The Contractor shall undertake conditions surveys prior to proceeding with the
construction work that shall be carried out adjacent to the existing railway track
and grading, structures (all types, including industrial, commercial and
residential), embankments, as well as all types of underground structures
(including existing sewers, watermains, gas main, fiber optics works, buried and
surface features) and all road right of way assets (including sidewalks, curbs,
cycling facilities, road surfaces and medians).
.5 The Contractor shall undertake post-condition surveys for locations (for which
pre-condition surveys was performed) after the Works is complete.
.6 Material and Equipment Section 01600

.7 Setting and Measurement Section 01610
.12 Site Demolition and Removal Section 02225
.18 Clean Storm Pipes and Drainage Structures Section 02632
.1 American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)

(2018).
to ensure conditions surveys, meet the requirements of this Section and Section
01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 The Contractor shall retain the services of Pre and Post Conditions Survey
Company, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01620 Quality Control
and Assurance, responsible for conducting their own pre-condition and post-
condition survey of all existing structures, buildings and other services which
have any possibility of being affected by the Contractor’s activities.
.3 Contractor shall ensure that all the Pre-Condition Survey Reports and Post-
Condition Survey Reports are signed and stamped by a professional engineer
licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
with this Section, Section 01340 Submittals and Section 01620 Quality Control
and Assurance:
.1 A detailed Pre-Condition Survey Methodology Plan;
.2 A detailed Post-Condition Survey Methodology Plan;
.3 Pre-Conditions Survey Inspection Schedule prior to proceeding with the

Works, indicating all the properties/locations to be surveyed;
.4 Pre-Condition Survey Report and Post-Condition Survey Report for the

following location:
.1 Derry Road:
• From Bronte Road to the gate at Rail Corridor Right of

Way (East Side)
• From the Railway bridge to the Entrance to the

construction access road at Derry Road (West Side)
.2 Britannia Road:
• From First Line to the gate at Rail Corridor Right of Way

(East Side)
• From the entrance to the construction access road at

Britannia Road to 150 m west of the entrance (West Side)
.3 For all other existing adjacent structures, tracks, utilities and

buildings that will remain on site.
.5 Post-Conditions Survey Inspection Schedule at the completion of the

work for all the properties/locations to be surveyed.
1.6 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Prior to the commencement of any construction on the Site, the Contractor shall
perform pre-condition surveys of all existing roads, railway tracks, buildings,
structures and grading, railway equipment and other services, as well as City of
Milton road right of way assets which may be affected by the Works.
.2 The Contractor shall acquire written permission from the property owners of the
Lands on which surveys will be completed prior to undertaking pre-condition and
post-condition surveys.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the pre-condition survey shall include the
locations and conditions of adjacent properties, buildings, underground
structures, utility services and structures that may be affected by the Works,
including all areas of permanent or temporary work, all areas of temporary
structures and shoring and all residences abutting the Rail Corridor.
.4 Post-Condition Survey Methodology Plan and Post-Condition Survey Report:

Project Co shall submit a work methodology plan for undertaking post-condition
surveys under the submittal Post-Condition Survey Methodology Plan. The
Contractor shall undertake post-condition surveys in accordance with the
requirements of this Section. The Contractor shall follow the same approach to
undertaking post-condition surveys as was undertaken for the pre-condition
surveys to record any changes and shall provide a report under the submittal
Post Condition Survey Report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary monitoring instrumentation
required to complete the Works and satisfy the requirements of the Contract
Documents including vertical displacement measuring points (i.e., settlement
rods), settlement and lateral movement pins, crack monitoring gauges, and other
required equipment.
2.2 LOCATIONS
.1 The Contractor’s Pre-Condition and Post-Condition Survey Methodology Plan

shall identify all the locations for which a condition survey is undertaken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION AND REPORTING
3.1 GENERAL
.1 A pre-condition survey shall be undertaken for the following areas:
.1 Derry Road:
• From Bronte Road to the gate at Rail Corridor Right of

Way (East Side)
• From the Railway bridge to the Entrance to the

construction access road at Derry Road (West Side).
.2 Britannia Road:
• From First Line to the gate at Rail Corridor Right of Way

(East Side)
• From the entrance to the construction access road at

Britannia Road to 150 m west of the entrance (West Side)
.3 For all other existing adjacent structures, tracks, utilities and

buildings that will remain on site.
.2 The pre-condition survey shall include but not be limited to pavement structures,
sidewalks, utilities, and drainage that shall be impacted by the contractor
vehicles, trucks and equipment.
.3 The pre-condition survey shall be undertaken before the Contractor proceeds

with the construction work. A pre-condition survey report shall be submitted in
accordance with the requirements of this Section and including the following
information:
.1 Existing condition, noting any areas of significant concerns.
.2 Adjacent structures, including culverts, driveway entrances, signs, poles,

etc;
.3 Defects shall be described, including dimensions wherever possible; and
.4 Photographs or video of the entire area.
.4 A post-condition survey shall be undertaken by the Contractor after completion of

the Work and shall submit a Post-Condition Survey Report in accordance with
the requirements of this Section, noting any changes noted from the pre-
construction survey.
.5 Pre-Condition Survey Report: The Contractor shall ensure that the Pre-Condition
Survey Report includes the following:
.1 The owners and occupiers of Lands that fall within the zone of influence
of the construction activities as noted above. These owners and
occupiers are to be advised of the survey by public notice (i.e. pamphlet,
newspaper) provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate
with and have the notice reviewed by. The Contractor shall ensure that
the Engineer and the affected community are informed well in advance of
the zone of influence;
.2 Pre-construction inspection of buildings and structures within the zone of

influence to identify existing cracks in walls, floors, interior finishes and
exterior cladding of all stories above and below grade in sufficient detail to
facilitate comparison of pre-construction and post-construction condition.
The inspection shall include pictures for all structures and trees/plants
located on each property along the Rail Corridor including the front and
back yard;
.3 Where it is not possible to gain access for a pre-construction survey, the

Contractor shall submit statements documenting that at least three
attempts were made to gain access is not granted; and
.4 A report shall be prepared for reference covering all buildings and

structures included in the pre-construction survey. The report shall
include a copy of all public notices, names and address of residents who
provided their written authorization for the survey, those that did not
provide written authorization, and those that did not respond. The
Contractor shall ensure that detailed notes on the structural integrity of
the buildings are documented for the surveys that were conducted,
including photographs (date and time stamped) and diagrams of all
features, existing cracks, dimensions (length, width and depth) of noted
cracks, other structural damage issues, weather related damage, noting
whether the building is considered a heritage building.
.6 Post-Condition Survey Report: The Contractor shall perform the post-conditions

survey and provide this report for all areas where, pre-conditions survey was
conducted and reported, with the same approach as pre-conditions survey and
for any properties, upon receiving notification from the Engineer with regards to
any damage as a result of the Contractor construction activities during both the
construction period and for a period of up to one year following Substantial
Completion.
.7 The Contractor shall ensure that all of the pre-condition and post condition
surveys and inspections, photographs, notes, and videotapes form a clearly
documented record of the benchmark conditions existing on the Site prior to the
commencement of construction operations.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
materials and equipment required to complete the work.

CN – DESIGN & SITE DEMOLITION & REMOVALS SECTION 02225
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for site demolition, salvage and removal,
wholly or in part of those materials and structures as designated within the Limits
of Construction for the Work.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS):
.1 OPSS.PROV 510, Construction Specification for Removal.
to ensure all materials, equipment and removals, meet the requirements of this
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall provide submittals for review in accordance with the
requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals.
1.6 STORAGE & PROTECTION
.1 Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In
the event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs with the
approval of the Engineer and at no cost to CN.
1.7 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Removal and disposal of existing fences of all types, including footings and
gates.
.2 Removal and disposal of existing signs.
.3 Removal and disposal of existing CSP culverts.
.4 Removal and disposal of part of existing culvert and headwall, cleaning existing
culvert, grout remaining portion of the culvert.
.5 Removal and disposal of existing sheds
.6 Removal and disposal of retaining structure and retaining walls.
.7 Removal and disposal existing asphalt, full depth.
.8 Removal and disposal of existing power and light poles including light pole
foundations.
.9 Removal and disposal of garbage debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INFILL OF PIPES, CULVERTS, CATCHBASINS, MANHOLES, ETC.
.1 Ready mix concrete, high-slump, 1 MPA mix, with a maximum of 10mm

aggregate size.
.2 Sika Grout 212a of approved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1 Inspect site with Engineer and verify extent and location of items designated for
removal and items to remain.
.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating
condition.
.3 Contractor shall notify and obtain approvals from all agencies as required prior to
commencing site demolition and removals.
.4 Identify the Limits of Construction on the Contract Drawing and remain within the
limits.
3.2 REMOVAL
.1 Remove items as indicated in the Contract Drawings and as required for the
work.
.2 Do not disturb items designated to remain in place.
.3 Utility Poles to be fully removed including the footing. Cutting off at ground level
is prohibited:
.1 Cables, if present, to be cut off and tied back to existing poles at ends of
work area.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all Site removals and waste material are
removed from the Site and disposed in accordance with Section 01560
Environmental Protection.
.2 Dispose of materials not designated for salvage or re-use in work off site.
3.4 SALVAGE
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that salvaged materials are delivered and stored
properly within the site at the locations provided by CN Rail. The Contractor shall
provide list of materials stored in the yard prior to delivery.
3.5 BACKFILL AND SITE RESTORATION
.1 Upon completion of site demolition and removals, restore areas and existing
works outside areas of demolition to match condition of adjacent undisturbed
areas in accordance with Specifications and requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement and payment for work of this Section shall be in accordance with
OPSS.PROV 510 for the particular item as listed in the Schedule of Prices.
.2 All other demolition and removals will be incidental to the work of construction
and the costs thereof shall be included in other contract rates.
4.2 PAYMENT
in Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour,
Section.
CN – DESIGN & CLEARING AND GRUBBING SECTION 02231
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the Clearing and Grubbing requirements for the Work. The
Contractor shall remove and dispose of trees and vegetation of any types and
sizes within the Limits of Construction of the Project.
.2 The Contractor shall undertake Clearing and Grubbing for all the Lands identified
as construction access and laydown areas within to facilitate the construction of
the Project.
.3 The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements of Section 01560 Environmental

Protection.
.4 The Contractor shall undertake pruning of shared or boundary trees, scrub, and
shrubs of any diameter at breast height that conflict with Construction activities.
.8 Seed Sod and Cover Section 02910
.9 Topsoil and Finish Grading Section 02912
1.3 REFERENCES

.1 OPSS.PROV 201, Construction Specifications for Clearing, Close Cut
Clearing, Grubbing and Removal of Surface Boulders and Piled Boulders.
.2 Government of Canada - Migratory Birds Convention Act, 1994 (1994, c. 22).
.3 Province of Ontario – Fish and Wildlife Conservation Act, 1997, S.O. 1997, c. 41.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 ‘Clearing’ consists of cutting off trees and brush vegetative growth and disposing
of felled trees, previously felled/fallen trees and stumps, and surface debris. This
surface debris may include fence-posts and wire, tires, barrels, metal objects
such as shopping carts, pieces of concrete and asphalt, wood and other building
materials, asphalt shingles, landscaping debris, etc.
.2 ‘Grubbing’ consists of excavation and disposal of stumps and roots, boulders,

rock fragments of specified size, and other objectionable material to not less than
a specified depth below existing ground surface.
.1 Not applicable
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not applicable
.1 Conform to Section 01560 Environmental Protection, Environmental Protection

Plan and Wildlife Management Plan.
.2 Conform to the Soil Management Plan.
1.8 PROTECTION
.1 Clearing and grubbing is restricted to the Limits of Construction as outlined in the

Contract Drawings.
.2 Prevent damage to signs, trees, landscaping, survey control monuments and

benchmarks, buildings, pavement, utility lines, site appurtenances and root
systems of trees which are to remain.
.3 Repair any damaged items to approval of Engineer.
.4 Replace any trees designated to remain, if damaged, as directed by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 Not applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RESTRICTIONS ON CLEARING
.1 Vegetation clearing (nesting birds / migratory bird habitat) is restricted between

April 1 and August 31. The contractor shall confirm with CN’s Environmental
Monitor for the vegetation clearing timing window for any given year that
vegetation clearing shall occur.
.2 Removal of vegetation/trees during the restricted period should only occur under
very limited circumstances. A qualified biologist hired by the Contractor shall be
retained to conduct a wildlife sweep to document the absence of migratory birds
and/or nests at those sites (including both vegetation and structures) at the time
of clearing. If the area is cleared by the qualified biologist, vegetation removal
should occur within 24 hours of the completion of the avian survey; otherwise, an
additional survey will be required.
.3 The Contractor is required to limit vegetation clearing to areas where necessary

as shown on the Limits of Construction Drawing in the Contract Drawings.
.4 Trees shall be felled away from the watercourses and waterbodies.
.5 The Contractor may be required to modify or implement additional mitigation

measures for vegetation and tree removal. CN will notify the Contractor of any
changes.
.6 The Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays to the Contractor’s
operations where the Contractor fails to give sufficient advance notice to the
Engineer to carry out the required inspection.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Inspect the site and verify with Engineer items designated to remain.
.2 Locate and protect utility lines. Preserve active utilities traversing the site in
operating condition.
.3 Notify utility authorities before starting the clearing and grubbing.
.4 Clearly mark out limits of all areas to be grubbed for approval of the Engineer.
.5 Clearing and grubbing operations shall not commence until areas have been
inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.3 CLEARING
.1 Clear as indicated and directed by Engineer, by cutting at a height of not more

than 150mm above ground.
.2 Where limbs may contact utility lines or are close that movement in the trees
could bring them into contact with the lines, branches shall be cut off using only
insulated pole pruners C.S.A. approved for such work. Where practical, this work
will be done from the ground or an aerial lift.
.3 The Contractor shall be required to hand-clear areas in which clearing by

machine may cause damages to fences, telephone or power lines.
.4 Cut off branches and cut down trees overhanging the area as directed by
Engineer.
.5 Cut off and remove unsound branches on trees designated to remain as directed
by Contractor Certified Arborist.
3.4 GRUBBING
.1 Grub out stumps and roots to not less than 200 mm below ground surface.
.2 Grub out visible rock fragments and boulders, greater than 300 mm in greatest
dimension but less than 0.25 m3.
3.5 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
.1 Remove and dispose of all grubbed material off site, including all items listed in
Part 3.3 above. The Contractor may choose to chip and mulch the cleared and
grubbed material to the satisfaction of the Engineer and resulting mulch may be
left on site.
.2 Burying or burning of grubbed materials on the site, including trees, shrubs,

brush, stumps and logs is not permitted.
3.6 STOCKPILE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL WORKS
.1 Stockpile sufficient wood debris material to meet the requirements of the various
environmental features required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
.2 Topsoil will be stripped and stockpiled in accordance with the Grading Plan
Drawings and Soil Management Plan for all permanent and temporary
construction areas. Topsoil piles shall be marked with appropriate signage to
prevent accidental admixing. Topsoil shall not be imported to or exported from
the Site.
.3 Subsoil will be stored separately from topsoil with a minimum of 1 m separation

of the piles. Topsoil from the natural areas will be separated from other topsoil so
that it may be used for restoration.
during construction will be treated in accordance with the Soil Management Plan.
.5 Remove and dispose of any material not required for these works off site.
3.7 FINISHED SURFACE
.1 Leave ground surface in condition suitable for immediate grading operations or

stripping of topsoil.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 No field measurements will be made for the work of this Section.
.2 Measurements for work of this section shall be in hectares (ha) cleared based on
plan quantities for areas as shown on the Drawings.
.3 Measurements for placement of stockpiled wood debris shall be incidental to and

included in the various lump sum and unit prices included in the Form of Tender.
.4 Individual trees that require removal may not be shown on the Contract
Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for removal as if shown on the
Contract Drawings. The removal of such trees shall be considered incidental to
clearing and no separate payment will be made.
4.2 PAYMENT
Certified Arborist, use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete

CN – DESIGN & EROSION CONTROL - GENERAL SECTION 02272
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the erosion and sediment control requirements for the for
the temporary and permanent Work.
.9 Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization Section 02340
.10 Dust and Mud Control Section 02362
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.PROV 804, Construction Specification for Temporary Erosion and

Sediment Control Measures.
.2 Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD):

.1 OPSD 219.110 - Light Duty Silt Fence Barrier;
.2 OPSD 219.120 - Fibre Roll Barrier;
.3 OPSD 219.130 - Heavy Duty Silt Fence Barrier;
.4 OPSD 219.210 – Temporary Rock Flow Check Dam V-Ditch; and
.5 OPSD 219.211 – Temporary Rock Flow Check Dam Flat Bottom Ditch.
.3 Toronto and Region Conservation Authority Erosion and Sediment Control

Guidelines for Urban Construction (2019).
.4 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Drawings.
.5 Environmental Protection Plan (Stantec, 2021).
.6 Wildlife Management Plan and Follow-Up Program (Stantec, 2021).
program to ensure that all erosion and sediment control for the Project meet the
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following submittals in accordance with this
Section and Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Other Submittals; and
.2 Submit Product Data and samples – geotextiles and plastic fencing.
.1 Not applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Conform to OPSD standard drawings as follows:
.1 Light Duty Silt Fence Barrier OPSD 219.110;

.2 Heavy Duty Silt Fence Barrier OPSD 219.130 – avoid nylon mesh
backing in accordance with Ontario’s Reptile and Amphibian Exclusion
Fencing: Best Practices. Version 1.0. Species Technical Note;
.3 Rock Flow Check Dam, V-Ditch OPSD 219.2100;
.4 Rock Flow Check Dam, Flat Bottom Ditch or Channel – OPSD 219.2110;
.5 Light-Duty Fibre Roll Barrier - OPSD 0219.120;
.6 Orange plastic web snow fencing;
.7 Plywood; and
.8 Wood 2 inch x 4 inch wood boards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall comply with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plans
provided in the Contract Drawings and shall provide detailed site-specific
methods and drawings as part of a Surface Water Management Implementation
Plan (SWMIP). The Contractor shall submit the SWMIP to the Engineer and CN’s
Environmental Monitor in accordance with the schedule outlined in Section
01340 Submittals. The SWMIP shall include but not be limited to:
.1 Project/Site Information;
.2 Contact Information/Responsible Parties;
.3 Environmental Permits;
.4 Detailed Site-Specific Methods of the Construction Activities and Erosion

and Sediment Control Measures (including drawings);
.5 Erosion and Sediment Control Best Management Practices; and
.6 Inspection Logs.
.2 The Contractor shall adhere to the timing windows outlined Section 01560
Environmental Protection and shown on the Contract Drawings.
.3 Install all erosion and siltation control devices and tree fencing prior to
commencement of clearing, grubbing and grading works, as outlined in the
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and to the satisfaction of CN’s Environmental
Monitor. The Contractor shall notify CN’s Environmental Monitor of any proposed
changes to erosion and siltation control devices or installation resulting from site
conditions and shall be included in the inspection logs.
.4 No work will be permitted on site until all such erosion and siltation control
devices are properly installed and verified by CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.5 The Contractor must limit vegetation disturbance and tree removal to the Limits
of Construction as per extents indicated in Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall install exclusion fencing in sensitive areas adjacent to active construction
areas in accordance with the Contract Drawings.
.6 Stockpiles onsite shall have silt fencing installed a minimum of 1m distance from
the toe of the stockpile.
3.2 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
.1 Install silt fence barriers to control siltation as well as to delineate the

environmentally sensitive areas identified in the Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan Drawings and as directed by CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.2 Maintain all erosion and siltation control devices to the satisfaction of CN’s
.3 The Contractor shall inspect all erosion and sediment control measures on a
weekly basis and before and after rainfall events (10 mm/24 hours) and
significant snow melts to ensure proper functioning, re-establish if damaged,
cleanout (when sediment accumulation reaches approximately 30%), and
provide a repair or restoration plan outline The Contractor is responsible for
inspection. The Contractor shall report to CN’s Environmental Monitor any major
repairs within 24 hours and document in the inspection logs of the SWPPP and
the Monthly Compliance Report as outlined in Section 01340 Submittals.
.4 As part of the High Flow Contingency Plan detailed in Section 02160 High Flow
Contingency Plan, the Contractor shall subscribe to a meteorological alert
service, ensuring that there is advance warning of flood-producing severe rainfall
events; those producing more than 10 mm of rainfall precipitation in a 24-hour
period. Warning area to be focused on the Indian Creek Watershed (and its
tributaries).
.5 Remove temporary erosion control devices upon completion of work.
.6 If it is determined by CN’s Environmental Monitor that the Contractor has

improperly installed erosion and sediment control measures, the Contractor will
be responsible for correcting the installation at their cost.
3.3 TREE FENCING
.1 Install tree protection barriers at the Limits of Construction under the direction of
a Certified Arborist as outlined in Section 01560 Environmental Protection and as
directed by CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.2 Tree protection barriers must be maintained at 1.2 m high and consist of orange
plastic web snow fencing on a wood frame made of 2x4 boards. Where
excavation or fill material is to be temporarily placed near a tree protection
barrier, plywood must be used to ensure no material extend beyond the Limits of
Construction.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for silt fence or fibre roll shall be by linear meter of properly
installed silt fence as measured in the field.
.2 Measurement for Rock Flow Check Dam shall be by each properly installed flow
check as measured in the field.
.3 Measurement for tree protection barriers shall be by linear meter of property

installed fencing as measured in the field.
4.2 PAYMENT
Section.
.2 Periodic removal of accumulated silt and sediment is considered incidental to the

work and will not be paid separately.
.3 Removal and disposal of erosion control measures is considered incidental to the

works.

CN – DESIGN & RETAINED SOIL SYSTEMS, WALL/SLOPE SECTION 02276
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The general conditions (Annex “A”) of Contract Form No. 3819 and all Sections of Division 1 of this
Specification apply equally to this Section of the Specification.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 02276 specifies the requirements for the design and construction of
retained soil systems (RSS) walls and steep slopes, and the material requirements
for fabrication and delivery of RSS precast concrete elements, including panels for
facing elements, finishing caps, corner elements and other element types.
.1 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
.2 Concrete Work Section 03312
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Ministry of Transportation Ontario (MTO):
.1 Designated Sources for Materials (DSM);
.2 Qualification Criteria for Retained Soil Systems (RSS);
.3 Structural Manual (August 2021);
.4 RSS Design Guidelines (September 2008);
.5 Laboratory Testing Manual (May 2022):

.1 LS-410, Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cores;
.2 LS-412, Method of Test for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces
exposed to Deicing Chemicals;
.3 LS-432, Method of Test for Microscopical Determination of Air Void
System Parameters in Hardened Concrete; and
.4 LS-433, Method of Test for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to
resist Chloride Ion Penetration;
.6 Forms:
.1 PH-CC-701, Request to Proceed;
.2 PH-CC-702, Notice to Proceed; and
.3 PH-CC-822, Certificate of Conformance.
.1 OPSS.PROV 501, Construction Specification for Compacting (November

2014), including all applicable references specified therein;
.2 OPSS.PROV 909, Construction Specification for Prestressed Concrete –

Precast Girders (November 2016), including all applicable references
specified therein;
.3 OPSS.PROV 919, Construction Specification for Formwork and Falsework

(November 2011), including all applicable references specified therein;
.4 OPSS.PROV 1302, Material Specification for Water (September 1996),

including all applicable references specified therein; and
.5 OPSS.PROV 1306, Material Specification for Burlap (April 2019), including

all applicable references specified therein.
.1 CSA A23.2-14C, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores for Compressive

Strength Testing, part of A23.1:19/A23.2:19, Concrete Materials and
Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for
Concrete;
.2 CSA A23.4-16 (R2021), Precast Concrete – Materials and Construction; and
.3 CSA S6:19, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.
.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
.1 ASTM A153/A153M-16a, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware; and
.2 ASTM C171-16, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete.
.1 Acceptance of Individual RSS Precast Concrete Units (Elements)
.1 Acceptance
.1 The acceptance of elements shall be according to the requirements of
this Section 02276, including satisfactory completion of all repairs, if
applicable. Elements not meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents shall be deemed unacceptable and shall not be included
in the Work.
.2 Acceptance of compressive strength, air void system parameters,
rapid chloride permeability, salt scaling resistance and concrete cover
of wet cast concrete shall be on a lot basis.
.3 Acceptance of compressive strength, rapid chloride permeability, salt
scaling resistance and concrete cover of dry cast concrete shall be on
a lot basis.
.4 Elements whose surfaces have not been kept in a continuously wet
condition shall be rejected and replaced.
.5 The lot size shall represent all precast elements from one structure,
from a single RSS supplier, with a maximum lot size of 500 m2 of
vertical face of the RSS. The lot size shall be confirmed by the
Engineer and remain consistent for the duration of the Contract.
.6 Unacceptable lots shall be rejected and replaced.
.2 Concrete Compressive Strength

.1 Compressive strength shall be determined according to LS-410.
.2 Three cores shall be tested to determine the acceptability of
compressive strength of the lot. The 28-day concrete compressive
strength of a lot shall be considered acceptable when the average of
the three individual compressive strength cores is equal to or greater
than the specified strength, and no individual core result is more than
10.0% below the specified 28-day compressive strength.
.4 Test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as they become
available.
.5 Referee Testing of Compressive Strength
.1 Referee testing of compressive strength may only be invoked
by the Contractor within five (5) business days of receipt of the
acceptance test result.
.2 Referee testing of compressive strength shall be carried out on
a set of three cores taken by the Contractor from the concrete
element which the acceptance cores were taken from. The
cores shall be removed in the presence of the Engineer.
Coring shall be according to the Coring clause of this Section
02276. Referee cores shall be obtained within three (3)
business days of invoking referee testing.
.3 The referee laboratory shall be designated by the Owner
based on the applicable roster and cores shall be tested
according to LS-410.
.4 Referee test results shall be forwarded to the Contractor as
they become available.
.5 The confirmation value for confirming the acceptance test
result shall be the greater of 10.0% of the specified strength or
10.0% of the strength of the acceptance cores, expressed to
one decimal place.
.6 If the difference between the referee test result and the
acceptance test result is less than the confirmation value, the
acceptance test result is confirmed, and the acceptance test
result shall be used in the determination of acceptance of the
lot. If the difference between the referee test result and the
acceptance test result is greater than the confirmation value,
the acceptance test result is not confirmed, and the
acceptance test result shall be disregarded, and the referee
test result shall replace the acceptance test result in the
acceptance requirements of this Section 02276.
.7 The cost of referee testing of compressive strength shall be
according to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.3 Air Void System in Hardened Concrete

.1 For wet cast concrete, one core per lot shall be tested for air void
system parameters. Acceptance of air void system shall be based on
the result obtained on the core representing the lot.
.2 Testing of air void system shall be according to LS-432. One half of
the sample shall be tested to determine the acceptability of the lot.
The other half of the sample shall be retained by the Owner for audit
purposes.
available.
.4 For a lot to be considered acceptable, the sample shall have a
minimum air content of 3.0% and a spacing factor of 0.200 mm or
less. Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.
.5 Lots with samples with air content less than 3.0%, a spacing factor
more than 0.200 mm or both shall be rejected and replaced.
.6 Referee Testing of Air Void System in Hardened Concrete
.1 Referee testing of air void system in hardened concrete shall
be according to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.2 The cost of air void system referee testing shall be according
to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.4 Rapid Chloride Permeability

.1 Acceptance of rapid chloride permeability shall be based on the result
obtained on the core representing the lot.
.2 One core per lot shall be tested according to LS-433. Acceptance
testing shall be carried out at 28 to 32 days. Two samples 50 mm long
shall be cut from the core representing a lot, tested and averaged to
determine the acceptance of the lot. Another core shall be retained for
referee testing.
.3 For concrete without silica fume, lots with rapid chloride permeability
less than or equal to 2,500 coulombs are considered acceptable.
Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.
.4 For concrete without silica fume, lots with rapid chloride permeability
results exceeding 2,500 coulombs shall be rejected and replaced.
.5 For concrete containing silica fume, lots with rapid chloride
permeability less than or equal to 1,000 coulombs are considered
acceptable. Acceptable lots shall be subject to full payment.
.6 For concrete containing silica fume, lots with rapid chloride
permeability results exceeding 1,000 coulombs shall be rejected and
replaced.
available.
.8 Referee Testing of Rapid Chloride Permeability
.1 Referee testing of rapid chloride permeability may only be
invoked by the Contractor within five (5) business days of
receipt of the acceptance test result.
.2 Referee testing shall be carried out on two 50 mm samples
obtained from the reserved core representing the lot for which
referee testing was invoked, and the results shall be averaged
to obtain the test result for the lot.
.3 The referee laboratory shall be designated by the Owner
based on the applicable roster and cores shall be tested by
that laboratory.
.5 For concrete without silica fume, when the referee result is
greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 500
coulombs below the acceptance test result, the acceptance
test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid. When the
referee test result for the lot is more than 500 coulombs below
the acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then
not confirmed, and the referee test result shall replace the
acceptance test result in the acceptance requirements of this
Section 02276.
.6 For concrete containing silica fume, when the referee result is
greater than the acceptance test result or no more than 300
coulombs below the acceptance test result, the acceptance
test result is then confirmed and shall remain valid. When the
referee test result for the lot is more than 300 coulombs below
the acceptance test result, the acceptance test result is then
not confirmed, and the referee test result shall replace the
acceptance test result in the acceptance requirements of this
Section 02276.
.7 The cost of referee testing of rapid chloride permeability for all
concrete shall be according to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.5 Salt Scaling Resistance

.1 Acceptance of salt scaling resistance shall be based on the average
result obtained on two 300 mm x 300 mm samples per lot, tested
according to LS-412. For a lot to be considered acceptable, the
average cumulative mass loss of the two samples after 50 freeze-
thaw cycles shall not exceed 0.8 kg/m2.
.2 A lot with an average cumulative mass loss exceeding 0.8 kg/m2 shall
be rejected and replaced.
.3 Referee Testing of Salt Scaling Resistance
.1 Referee testing of salt scaling resistance may only be invoked
by the Contractor within five (5) business days of receipt of the
acceptance test result.
.2 Referee testing for salt scaling resistance shall be carried out
on the set of two referee sawn samples according to LS-412.
.4 When the referee result is greater than the acceptance test
result or no more than 0.1 kg/m2 below the acceptance test
result, the acceptance test result is then confirmed and shall
remain valid. When the referee test result for the lot is more
than 0.1 kg/m2 below the acceptance test result, the
acceptance test result is then not confirmed, and the referee
test result shall replace the acceptance test result in the
acceptance requirements of this Section 02276.
.5 The cost of referee testing shall be as specified in the Contract
Documents.
.6 Water, Admixtures, and Cementing Materials

.1 Acceptance of water, admixtures, and cementing materials shall be
according to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.7 Concrete Temperature
.1 Elements that meet the temperature requirements of this Section
02276 during production and the curing period are considered
acceptable. Elements that do not meet one or more of the
temperature requirements of this Section 02276 are considered
unacceptable and shall be rejected and replaced.
.8 Concrete Cover
.1 The Engineer shall carry out a covermeter survey on the concrete
elements prior to installation. Measurements shall be carried out on
multiple concrete elements randomly selected by the Engineer, at
multiple locations on the elements. A total of thirty (30) measurements
per lot shall be carried out.
.2 Acceptance of concrete cover over steel reinforcement shall be based
on the percentage of satisfactory measurements. The concrete cover
over reinforcing steel shall be within -5/+15 mm of the specified
concrete cover. When 10.0% or more of the total number of
measurements per lot is outside the specified limits, the lot shall be
unacceptable.
.4 The Engineer shall provide the results of the covermeter survey to the
Contractor.
.9 Defects and Deficiencies

.1 Defects and Deficiencies Repairable by Standard Method
.1 Any individual element having one or more of the defects and
deficiencies listed in the table below shall be deemed
unacceptable and the element shall be repaired according to
the table below.
Defects and Deficiencies Repairable by Standard Methods
Condition Repair Method
Bugholes
a) Bugholes with depth a) Prior to filling bugholes,

greater than 5 mm and surfaces shall be blasted
all dimensions at the with high pressure water to
surface not exceeding 25 remove any weak or loose
mm, or material.
b) Bugholes with depth less b) Bugholes shall be filled
than or equal to 5 mm with a proprietary patching
and any dimension at the material placed and cured
surface greater than 50 according to the
mm and not exceeding manufacturer’s
100 mm. instructions.
Honeycombing, Voids, Cavities, Spalls, and

Delaminations
Any area less than an a) Square all sides of the

equivalent area of 300 mm x repair area.
300 mm with no steel
b) Sawcut perimeter of
reinforcement exposed.
removal area to a depth of
10 mm or to the depth of
steel reinforcement,
whichever is less.
c) Remove all loose concrete

using a chipping hammer
or hand tools.
d) Abrasive blast clean all
concrete surfaces to be
patched according to
Section 03312 Concrete
Work.
e) Insert corrosion resistant
wires and anchors.
f) Remove all dust and loose
material from the prepared
surface by using
compressed air.
g) Moisten area to be
repaired.
h) Fill repair area with
concrete or a proprietary
patching material.
i) Cure concrete according to
this Section 02276. Cure
proprietary patching
material according to the
manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Low Cover
Low cover readings between The entire front face surface of

-5 mm and -10 mm of the the entire structure shall be
specified cover. sealed with a sealer
acceptable by the Owner.
Areas against which concrete
is to be placed shall not be
sealed.
Cracks
≤ 0.15 mm Apply sealer acceptable to the

Owner to the cracked areas.
Where the total linear
measurement of crack per m2
is greater than or equal to 5 m,
the entire front face surface of
the structure shall be sealed.
.2 When more than one of the defects or deficiencies listed in the
table above, excluding bugholes, is located in the same area
in the element, the Contractor shall submit a repair proposal
for acceptance according to Clause 1.4.1.9.3 of this Section
02276.
.2 Defects and Deficiencies Causing Rejection
.1 An element having any one of the following defects and
deficiencies shall be rejected:
1. If concrete temperature exceeds 60 °C at any time
during the curing period.
2. If there is honeycombing, voids, cavities, spalls,
delaminations, or cracks, in the concrete that exceed
the conditions described in the table in Clause
1.4.1.9.1.1 of this Section 02276.
3. If there is a crack that extends through to the opposite
face.
4. If the cover does not meet the specified requirements
except as indicated in Clause 1.4.1.9.3 of this Section
02276.
.3 All Other Defects and Deficiencies
.1 A repair proposal signed and sealed by an engineer shall be
submitted to the Engineer for acceptance, when:
1. An element has defects or deficiencies that are not
identified as rejectable or included in the table in
Clause 1.4.1.9.1.1 of this Section 02276 in the list of
defects and deficiencies repairable by standard
methods;
2. More than one of the defects or deficiencies listed in
the table in Clause 1.4.1.9.1.1 of this Section 02276,
except for bugholes, are located in the same area in
the element;
3. Three occurrences of the same defect are present in
the element;
4. There is the presence of pour lines or cold joints;
5. An element has unacceptable surface finish;
6. Dimensional tolerances of the element do not meet the
requirements of this Section 02276; or
7. Failure to maintain moist curing has occurred.
.2 The repair proposal shall include as a minimum:
1. Description of the element and identification of the
defects or deficiencies;
2. A detailed repair plan including materials, method, and
equipment to be used; and
3. Verification that the repair plan complies with the
applicable standards for the type of work.
.3 The following shall be made available to the Owner upon
request:
1. All relevant supporting information, including material
test results, field measurements and observations,
production records, photographs, and structural
analysis calculations, used for determining that the
performance and function originally expected from the
element shall be met.
2. Cause(s) of the defect and corrective action to be
taken to prevent recurrence of the defect in future
production, delivery, or installation.
.4 If the repair proposal is deemed acceptable, the element shall
be repaired according to the proposal. Repairs shall not be
carried out without the prior acceptance of the proposal by the
Engineer.
.10 Assessment of Repairs

.1 The Engineer shall conduct a visual inspection and / or other
measures as required, including requesting additional coring,
covermeter surveys, or any other testing deemed necessary to assess
the effectiveness of the repairs.
.2 Acceptance of RSS at End of RSS Construction
.1 The Engineer shall inspect the work to determine if the completed RSS has
any deficiencies identified in the below tables. If RSS contains any of the
deficiencies listed in the tables below, the RSS shall be deemed rejectable.
Performance Tolerances for RSS
Performance Performance Tolerance (mm)

Requirement
Local Global
Abutments Joint Gap ±5 (Note 1) ≤ 20
High Joint Gap ±10 (Note 1) ≤ 30
Medium N/A ≤ 50
Low N/A ≤ 100
Notes:
1. Joint Gap shall be as specified on the Shop Drawings.
RSS Deficiencies
Number Description of Deficiency
1 Performance tolerance exceeds tolerances according to the

above Performance Tolerances for RSS table.
2 Damaged or deficient facing elements, and damaged or deficient

alignment elements, including elements exhibiting scaling,
delaminations, and cracks.
3 Dead and dying vegetative elements that are an integral part of

RSS.
.3 Acceptance of RSS at End of RSS Warranty Period
.1 The Owner shall accept the RSS at the end of the RSS warranty period if
none of the deficiencies listed in the tables in Clause 1.4.2.1 of this Section
02276 are found during the warranty inspections. The RSS shall not be
accepted until all deficiencies have been repaired by corrective work.
.4 Warranty Inspections
.1 Throughout the warranty period the Owner will carry out warranty
inspections of the RSS for deficiencies in accordance with the tables in
Clause 1.4.2.1 of this Section 02276. The Owner will notify the Contractor as
to the date and time of the inspection(s) and the Contractor may, at their
discretion, be present during the inspection(s).
.2 Within two (2) weeks following a warranty inspection, the Owner will notify
the Contractor in writing of all deficiencies that require corrective work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings
.1 At least 14 days prior to commencement of construction of the RSS, three

sets of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for information
purposes. A separate submission of Shop Drawings shall be made for each
RSS in the Contract. All submissions shall bear the seal and signature of the
design engineer and the design checking engineer.
.2 The RSS superintendent shall always have a copy of the Shop Drawings on
site during the construction of the RSS.
.3 The Shop Drawings shall include as a minimum the following information:

.1 Statement from the manufacturer confirming the experience and
expertise of the design engineer and design checking engineer to
provide design services for the manufacturer’s RSS;
.2 All design, fabrication and construction drawings and specifications for
the RSS;
.3 Location and value of the design height of the RSS;
.4 Defined lines and grades of reinforced volume, length of reinforcing
elements, and type of backfill for RSS;
.5 Details at obstructions, and connections to other structures, as
specified in the Contract Documents;
.6 Statement of contact pressure at the interface between the RSS
backfill and foundation for comparison to the bearing resistance
required by the RSS foundation according to CSA S6 and the
Contract Documents;
.7 Statement of satisfactory internal and external stability;
.8 Joint gaps for concrete facing elements;
.9 Placing tolerances for the RSS; and
.10 Inspection and testing details during construction.
.2 RSS Superintendent
.1 At least 14 days prior to commencement of construction of the RSS, the

name(s) of the RSS superintendent responsible for each RSS in the
Contract shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer.
.2 During construction of an RSS, the RSS superintendent shall not change

without written permission from the Engineer. A request for a change in the
RSS superintendent shall be submitted at least one week prior to the actual
change in RSS superintendent.
.3 Manufacturer’s Representative
.1 At least 14 days prior to commencement of construction of the RSS, the

name(s) of the manufacturer’s representative for each RSS shall be
submitted in writing to the Engineer.
.2 The Engineer shall be notified in writing 48 hours prior to each site visit by
the manufacturer’s representative. The advance notice shall include the
dates and locations the manufacturer’s representative will be on site.
.4 Inspection Reports
.1 For each RSS, an inspection report shall be submitted to the Engineer

following an inspection by the Contractor’s engineer, after each of the
following milestones, and prior to commencement of subsequent operations
on that RSS:
.1 Layout and marking of all lines and grades needed to construct the
RSS; and construction of the alignment elements, where applicable;
.2 Delivery and storage on site of facing elements and reinforcing
elements, where applicable; and
.3 Installation of the facing elements, placement and compaction of the
backfill for RSS, and installation of the reinforcing elements, where
applicable.
.2 The Contractor’s engineer shall be knowledgeable in the design and

construction of the manufacturer’s RSS. The Contractor’s engineer shall
have demonstrated experience and expertise to certify that the RSS work is
in general conformance with the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings
and to issue Inspection Reports and Certificates of Conformance.
.3 Where the design height of the RSS is greater than 5.0 m, the inspection
report shall document inspections at the constructed height of the RSS at
5.0 m, 10.0 m, and 15.0 m, as applicable, up to and including the design
height.
.4 The inspections and inspection reports in no way supersede the inspection

and testing intervals required for the construction of the RSS, as specified in
the Shop Drawings.
.5 Concrete Mix Design
.1 The concrete mix design shall be submitted according to the Mix Design
clause in Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.2 When self-consolidating concrete (SCC) is proposed to be used, and its use

is accepted by the Owner, the requirements for submission shall be
according to the specification for Self Consolidating Concrete available from
the MTO Engineering Materials Office, Concrete Section.
.6 Precast Plant Certification
.1 The certificate verifying compliance of the precast plant with the certification
requirements of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) or the Canadian
Precast Concrete Quality Assurance Certification Program (CPCQA) shall
be submitted to the Engineer with the concrete mix design Form A
submission.
.2 Copies of precast plant certification audit reports of CPCQA or CSA, or both

as applicable, and related documentation shall be submitted to the Owner
upon request.
.3 Documentation verifying certification of the concrete production facility by the

Ready Mixed Concrete Association of Ontario shall be submitted, if concrete
is supplied by a ready mixed concrete supplier, with the concrete mix design
Form A submission.
.7 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and Precast Report
.1 A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and a precast report shall be

submitted to the Engineer for each shipment of elements at least 5 business
days prior to shipping from the precasting plant.
.2 The precast report shall contain the following information:

.1 List of elements in the shipment, including their ID number, lot
number, and description.
.2 The mill certificates for the steel reinforcement used in the elements, if
requested by the Owner.
.3 Temperature records for formwork and steel reinforcement at the time
of concrete placement.
.4 Temperature control records, including location of thermocouple wires
and graphical plots verifying that neither the maximum temperature
limit or maximum allowable temperature difference have been
exceeded.
.5 Record of inspection of moist curing.
.6 Summary of material test results for plastic concrete. For wet cast
concrete, test results for air content, slump, and concrete temperature
shall be submitted. For dry cast concrete, test results for concrete
temperature shall be submitted.
.7 Summary of material test results for hardened concrete: transfer
strength, confirmation of the projected 28-day compressive strength.
.8 Documentation confirming that all repairable defects have been
identified, evaluated, and repaired.
.9 Covermeter and dimensional check report.
.10 When steam curing is used, test results showing that time of initial set
was determined, unless standard delay periods are used, according to
the Steam Curing and Other Application of Heat clause in
OPSS.PROV 909.
.3 MTO Form PH-CC-701, Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the

Engineer before the delivery of each shipment of elements to the site.
.4 The elements shall not be delivered to the site until the Engineer has
received the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance, the precast report
and issued MTO Form PH-CC-702, Notice to Proceed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 General
.1 The RSS shall be designed according to the approved product drawings,
CSA S6, MTO Structural Manual, and the Contract Documents.
.2 The geometric requirements of the RSS, such as lines and grades of the
facing elements and typical cross sections, shall be as specified in the
Contract Documents.
.3 The foundation for RSS shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 RSS Selection
.1 An RSS shall be selected from the MTO’s DSM that meets the application,
performance and appearance requirements for that RSS, as specified in the
Contract Documents.
.2 An RSS shall be selected from the MTO’s DSM designated as either ‘A’
(Accepted) or ‘DE’ (Demonstration). RSS designated as ‘DE’ status requires
inspection, instrumentation and monitoring of the constructed RSS, and the
reporting of the findings to the MTO by the manufacturer as specified in the
Qualification Criteria for RSS.
.3 When there is more than one RSS included in the same tender item number
for payment, all RSS for the tender item shall be selected from the same
MTO’s DSM including type and colour of facing elements.
.4 All RSS that abut an existing structure, or a structure to be constructed as

part of the Work, and that have the same performance and appearance
requirements, shall be selected from the same MTO’s DSM, including type
and colour of facing elements.
.3 Obstruction
.1 Design details of the RSS shall be provided for all obstructions as specified
in the Contract Documents. Where an obstruction exists but is not located to
sufficient accuracy for the design of the RSS, the obstruction shall be
located in the field to sufficient accuracy as required to design the RSS.
.4 Foundation Investigation Report
.1 A foundation investigation report that describes the subsurface conditions at

the RSS is available, as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 The Owner warrants the data in the foundation investigation report, except
that interpretations of the data and opinions expressed in the foundation
investigation report are not warranted.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 General
.1 All materials for the selected RSS shall be according to the approved
product drawings for that RSS.
.2 Precast Concrete Elements
.1 The RSS precast concrete elements, including panels for facing elements,
finishing caps, corner elements and other element types shall be as
specified in the Contract Documents.
.3 Burlap
.1 Burlap shall be according to OPSS.PROV 1306.
.4 Concrete
.1 Materials for concrete shall be according to Section 03312 Concrete Work

with the following additions and amendments:
.1 Compressive strength shall be as specified in the Contract
Documents.
.2 For wet cast concrete, the air void system spacing factor, when tested
according to LS-432, shall be 0.200 mm maximum.
.3 For dry cast concrete, the air void system requirements for plastic and
hardened concrete do not apply.
.4 Loss of surface mass due to scaling when tested according to LS-412
shall not exceed 0.8 kg/m2.
.5 Concrete Sealers
.1 Concrete sealers, if required, shall be from the MTO’s list of acceptable

sealers. The list shall be obtained from the Engineer.
.6 Formwork
.1 All formwork shall be according to OPSS.PROV 919 and CSA A23.4.

Formwork shall be fabricated to meet the dimensional tolerances and
finishes required in the Contract Documents.
.7 Hardware
.1 All hardware shall be non-corroding or galvanized according to ASTM A153.
.8 Moisture Vapour Barrier
.1 The moisture vapour barrier shall be a white opaque polyethylene film

according to ASTM C171, and at least 100 µm thick.
.9 Proprietary Patching Materials

.1 Proprietary patching materials shall be from the MTO’s list of acceptable
concrete patching materials. The list of concrete patching materials shall be
obtained from the Engineer.
.10 Steel Reinforcement
.1 Steel reinforcement shall be according to Section 03200 Concrete

Reinforcement.
.11 Water
.1 Water used for curing, fog misting, steam curing of concrete, including
presoaking of material for moist curing, shall be according to OPSS.PROV
1302.
2.3 PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT
.1 General
.1 Equipment made of aluminum material shall not come in contact with the
plastic concrete.
.2 Consolidating Equipment
.1 Consolidating equipment shall be according to Section 03312 Concrete

Work.
.3 Contact Thermometers
.1 Contact thermometers shall have an accuracy of ±0.5 °C.
.4 Hand Finishing Equipment
.1 Hand finishing equipment shall be according to Section 03312 Concrete

Work.
.5 Temperature Monitoring and Recording System
.1 The temperature monitoring and recording system shall provide unalterable

records of temperature during the recording period. Prior to fabrication, the
temperature monitoring and recording system shall be confirmed by the
Owner, in writing, to be acceptable.
.2 Thermocouples and associated instrumentation shall have an accuracy of

±1.5 °C, and shall record temperatures at time intervals not exceeding 15
minutes, and shall display the temperature.
2.4 PRODUCTION
.1 General
.1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing at least seven (7) business days
prior to commencement of fabrication.
.2 Precast Plant Certification
.1 Elements shall be fabricated at a precast plant certified by CSA or by

CPCQA under the category Group B, Bridges, as subcategory B1 (Precast
Bridge Products).
.1 The placement of steel reinforcement shall be according to Section 03200

Concrete Reinforcement.
.2 Under no circumstance shall steel reinforcement be inserted into plastic

concrete.
.4 Production of Concrete
.1 Production of concrete shall be according to the General, Temperature

Control, Mixing Time and Mixing Rate, and Delivery subsections in Section
03312 Concrete Work.
.5 Placing of Concrete
.1 General
.1 The method of transporting, placing, and consolidating the concrete
shall be such as to prevent segregation.
.2 Concrete shall be deposited within 0.5 m of the top of the steel
reinforcement, and 1.5 m horizontally of its final position.
.3 Concrete shall be placed at a steady rate, such that a monolithic
concrete is obtained without the formation of cold joints or pour lines.
.2 Concrete Placing Restrictions

.1 All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be free of
standing water and debris. All debris shall be removed from the area
where concrete is to be placed.
.2 Any surface against which concrete is placed, including any existing
concrete, steel reinforcement, structural steel, forms, or other surfaces
shall:
.1 be at a minimum temperature of 5.0 °C immediately prior to
commencement of placing concrete; and
.2 not exceed 30.0 °C.
.3 Temperature measurements shall be taken no more than 10 minutes
prior to concrete placement and shall be taken for the same element
on which the concrete temperature is measured as per the Control of
Temperature clause of this Section 02276. Temperature
measurements shall be made with a contact thermometer.
Temperature measurements shall be recorded.
.6 Consolidation
.1 Internal or external vibrators or both shall be used to adequately consolidate

concrete.
.2 Vibration shall not be used to make the concrete flow or to spread the
concrete more than 1.5 m from the point of deposit.
.7 Concrete Finishing
.1 Finishing of the concrete surface shall be done immediately following

placement.
.2 No material shall be applied to the concrete surface or the finishing tools to

aid in the finishing.
.8 Curing
.1 General
.1 Concrete shall be moist cured for 4 days except for concrete
containing silica fume which shall be moist cured for 7 days. Curing in
cold weather conditions shall be according to the Cold Weather
Protection Period clause of this Section 02276.
.2 Moist Curing
.1 Moist curing of exposed surfaces shall commence immediately after
concrete finishing. For elements with exposed surfaces that have
architectural finish, moist curing shall be applied within 30 minutes of
concrete placement.
.2 Moist curing shall be sufficient to keep all surfaces of the element in a
continuously wet condition, with no dry areas, by applying one or a
combination of the following methods:
.1 Curing according to the Curing with Burlap and Water clause
in OPSS.PROV 909.
.2 Curing by means of continuous water application; e.g., mist.
.3 Curing according to the Steam Curing and Other Application of
Heat clause in OPSS.PROV 909.
.4 Curing by means of immersion in water.
.3 Records of moist curing shall be maintained and submitted according
to the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and Precast Report
clause of this Section 02276. The records shall provide evidence that
curing is being confirmed and is satisfactory. As a minimum, records
of moist curing shall include the identification of the person checking
the moist curing and the time that it was confirmed.
.3 Cold Weather Protection Period
.1 If cold weather conditions are present at the end of curing period, the
elements shall be provided with protection from cold weather and
moisture loss for an additional 24 hours, prior to exposure to cold
weather conditions. Protection shall be extended beyond 24 hours if
required to meet the requirements according to the Control of
Temperature subsection of this Section 02276.
.9 Control of Temperature
.1 General
.1 All necessary actions shall be taken to maintain temperatures within
the specified limits. During the moist curing and protection periods,
the following temperature requirements shall be met:
.1 The concrete temperature shall not exceed 60 °C.
.2 The concrete temperature shall not fall below 10 °C before the
end of moist curing.
.2 Temperature Monitoring and Records

.1 The concrete and air temperature during the curing period shall be
monitored and recorded.
.2 The concrete temperature shall be measured and recorded on one
element per day with the thermocouple installed to measure the
maximum internal temperature typically located at mid depth within
the element at the maximum section thickness.
.3 Thermocouples for monitoring air temperature shall measure air
temperature adjacent to the element.
.4 Recording of the concrete and air temperature shall begin at the start
of the concrete placing operation and continue until the end of the
curing period and, if applicable, the end of the cold weather protection
period. The temperatures shall be recorded automatically at intervals
not exceeding 15 minutes. The dataloggers shall continue to operate
until the end of the monitoring period.
.5 The Engineer and any other Owner’s representatives shall be
provided access to verify temperature readings.
.10 Exposure
.1 During moist curing and cold weather protection periods, the element may
be exposed for a maximum total period of 1 hour per day for the purposes of
formwork removal, removal from the bed, filling of bug holes, inspection or
relocation within the plant, except for indoor precast concrete plants, where
the exposure period shall not exceed 2 hours per day.
.2 During the exposure period:

.1 The requirements in the Control of Temperature General clause of
this Section 02276 do not apply.
.2 There shall be no more than three consecutive thermocouple
measurements of air temperature below 10 °C, and none below 5 °C,
when measured at 15 minute intervals.
.11 Stripping Strength
.1 Prior to stripping the formwork, it shall be demonstrated that the stripping

strength, as specified in the Shop Drawings, has been achieved prior to
stripping the formwork. The Contractor, when requested by the Owner, shall
participate in standard cylinder correlation strength testing programs
conducted by the Owner.
.12 Surface Finish
.1 General
.1 Concrete surfaces shall not be treated with cement slurry or paste.
.2 Exposed Surfaces
.1 The appearance of the concrete, including repairs shall be uniform in
colour, pattern, and texture when viewed from a distance of 15 m.
.2 All projections, such as fins and bulges, and all blemishes, such as
stains and rust marks, shall be removed.
.3 Surface Tolerances
.1 Element surfaces when tested with a 3 m long straight edge placed
anywhere in any direction shall meet the following requirements:
.1 For formed surfaces there shall be no gap greater than 3 mm
between the bottom of the straight edge and the surface of the
concrete.
.2 For unformed surfaces on the back side of the element, there
shall be no gap greater than 6 mm between the bottom of the
straight edge and the surface of the concrete.
.13 RSS Identification
.1 Each concrete element shall be identified with a unique number and the date
of casting within 24 hours of stripping forms. The information marked on the
elements shall be marked on any surface of the element except the exposed
front face. Markings shall be stenciled, using indelible ink or paint.
.2 Any markings on a surface that would be visible after installation shall not be
permitted.
.14 Notification
.1 A list of elements and their identification numbers shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 24 hours of the completion of a lot.
.15 Material Sampling and Testing
.1 When requested by the Engineer, samples of steel reinforcement
shall be provided to the Owner according to Section 03200 Concrete
Reinforcement.
.2 Water, Admixtures and Cementing Materials

.1 When requested by the Engineer, samples of all cementing materials,
admixtures, and water shall be obtained and provided to the Owner
for testing.
.3 Plastic Concrete for Wet Cast Concrete

.1 For wet cast concrete, sampling and testing of the plastic concrete for
slump, air content, and temperature shall be according to Material
Sampling and Testing subsection in Section 03312 Concrete Work,
except the frequency of testing shall be as follows:
.1 For concrete supplied by an external concrete supplier and
delivered by a ready mix truck - once for each of the first three
trucks, until satisfactory control is established, and then once
every third truck.
.2 For batches of concrete produced at the precast plant and
delivered by a ready mix truck - once for each of the first three
trucks, until satisfactory control is established, and then once
every third truck.
.3 For batches of concrete produced at the precast plant, and not
delivered by a ready mix truck - once for each of the first five
batches of concrete, until satisfactory control is established,
and then once every fifth batch.
.4 For batches of concrete produced at a precast plant with an
integrated mixing and delivery system (e.g., Autocor) - once
for every second batch for the first six batches, until
satisfactory control is established, and then once every 7 m3 of
concrete.
.2 Satisfactory control is established when three or five consecutive tests
of concrete, as specified above, are within the specified requirements,
without adjustments. If any adjustments are required or conducted,
testing shall continue until three or five consecutive tests, as specified
above, meet the requirements with no adjustments. Satisfactory
control shall be established each day or when there is a break in
production longer than 1.5 hours.
.3 Testing of plastic concrete shall be carried out as close as possible to
the location of discharge of concrete into the formwork.
.4 Sampling and testing of slump, air content, and temperature of plastic
concrete shall be carried out by a person holding either of the
following certifications:
.1 CCIL Certified Concrete Testing Technician, or
.2 ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, or
.3 CSA Standards Concrete Field Testing Technician.
.5 The technician shall always have in their possession a valid, original
card issued by the certifying agency.
.6 The results of the plastic concrete tests shall be recorded and
submitted in the precast report.
.4 Plastic Concrete for Dry Cast Concrete

.1 For dry cast concrete, the concrete shall be tested for temperature.
Temperature shall be measured according to Section 03312 Concrete
Work. The minimum frequency of testing shall be once for each day of
production.
.5 Hardened Concrete for Acceptance Testing

.1 General
.1 Test specimens shall consist of cores and sawn samples
removed from precast concrete facing elements.
.2 Cores and sawn samples shall be removed at the plant or on
site when the element is between 7 to 10 days of age, and
prior to application of any sealer. Cores and sawn samples
shall be removed in the presence of the Engineer or Owner’s
representative.
.3 For panels less than 2 m in vertical height, one additional
panel of the most common size shall be supplied for each lot
for sampling of cores and sawn samples. The concrete facing
element from which the test specimens shall be taken shall be
randomly selected from the lot by the Engineer.
.4 For panels with any dimension greater than 2 m, the cores and
slabs shall be removed from portions of the concrete elements
to be installed below grade, except where no portion of the
elements is below grade, cores and sawn samples shall be
taken from locations as directed by the Engineer. The concrete
element to be tested shall be randomly selected by the
Engineer and the locations of cores and sawn samples shall
be determined by the Engineer. The core and sawn sample
removal locations shall be repaired according to the Coring
clause of this Section 02276.
.5 At the discretion of the Owner, an additional panel shall be
provided of a different element type for acceptance testing.
.2 Coring
.1 One set of cores shall be obtained from each lot for quality
assurance testing as directed by the Engineer. For dry cast
concrete, a set of cores shall consist of five 100 mm diameter
and 200 mm long cores; for wet cast concrete, a set of cores
shall consist of six 100 mm diameter and 200 mm long cores.
If the panel is less than 200 mm thick, the full depth of the
panel shall be cored.
.2 The element from which the cores and samples are taken shall
be clearly labelled and shall be retained until Contract
Completion.
.3 Coring shall be carried out according to CSA A23.2-14C.
Cores shall not contain steel reinforcement or other embedded
material. A covermeter capable of detecting the type(s) of
reinforcing materials in the element shall be used to establish
the location of steel reinforcement and other embedded
material prior to coring.
.4 The contract number, lot number, and element identification
shall be marked legibly on each core with durable ink. Each
core shall be placed in a plastic bag, sealed to prevent loss of
moisture and placed into clear polyethylene security bags
supplied by the Owner when instructed by the Engineer. The
specimens shall be accompanied by a transmittal form and the
Form A of the concrete mix design for the precast element. At
this point, the Engineer shall take possession of, and assume
responsibility for the samples. The Engineer or their
representative may apply security seals.
.5 For concrete elements for use in the work, the core holes and
slab holes shall be filled, within 3 days, according to the Filling
of Core Holes subsection in Section 03312 Concrete Work,
with concrete or a proprietary patching material from the
MTO’s pre-qualified products list. Concrete used to patch
holes shall have comparable properties to that of the concrete
used in the element.
.3 Salt Scaling Sawn Samples
.1 Two 300 mm by 300 mm sawn samples shall be removed from
the element as directed by the Engineer, for testing of salt
scaling resistance by the Owner according to LS-412. Two
additional 300 mm by 300 mm sawn samples shall be
removed from the element and retained by the Owner for
referee testing. Dimensions shall be within -5/+10 mm of
specified values. Sawn samples shall be trimmed to a
thickness of 75 mm to 100 mm. The contract number, lot
number, element identification shall be marked legibly on each
sawn sample with durable ink. Each sawn sample shall be
placed in a plastic bag, sealed to prevent loss of moisture and
placed into clear polyethylene security bags supplied by the
Owner when instructed by the Engineer. The specimens shall
be accompanied by a transmittal form and the Form A of the
concrete mix design for the precast element. At this point, the
Engineer shall take possession of, and assume responsibility
for the samples. The Engineer or their representative may
apply security seals.
.2 For elements without textured architectural finish, the salt
scaling test shall be conducted on the formed front face.
.3 For elements with textured architectural finish, the salt scaling
test shall be conducted on the back face of the element.
.16 Concrete Cover
.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the tolerance for

concrete cover over reinforcement of a precast concrete element shall be -
5/+15 mm.
.2 The Contractor shall carry out covermeter measurements to determine

compliance with concrete cover requirements of this Section 02276.
.3 The Engineer shall be notified in writing when the elements are ready for the
quality assurance concrete covermeter survey.
.17 Dimensional Tolerances
.1 All elements shall meet the dimensional tolerance requirements of CSA 23.4
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. For dimensional
tolerances not specified, the maximum allowable dimensional variation shall
be 1:800 or ± 5 mm, whichever is greater.
.2 Dimensional measurements shall be carried out to determine compliance

with dimensional tolerance requirements of this Section 02276.
.18 Remedial Work
.1 Repair material, including proprietary patching materials, shall be selected to

achieve uniformity of colour and appearance. This requirement shall apply to
all repair methods according to the table in Clause 1.4.1.9.1.1 of this Section
02276. Uniformity of colour and appearance is subject to approval of the
Engineer.
.19 Storage and Delivery
.1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing three (3) business days prior to
delivery of the elements.
.2 Delivery shall include transportation, loading and unloading, and storage of

the elements at the storage site. Transportation and storage of the elements
shall be according to CSA A23.4.
.3 Storage includes, but is not limited to, storage while awaiting delivery in
temporary locations or, at the job site.
.4 Elements shall be loaded for shipping in such a manner that they can be
transported and unloaded at their destination without being damaged or
exposed to stresses for which they were not designed.
.5 Elements, when stored, shall be stored in such a manner to avoid excessive

stress or other damage.
.20 Management of Excess Material
.1 Management of excess material shall be according to the Contract

Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
.1 Skid steer, tired, and tracked vehicles shall not be permitted on any area where the
depth of backfill for RSS over installed reinforcing elements is less than 0.3 m.
Construction vehicles shall not be permitted to be in direct contact with installed
reinforcing elements at any time.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 General
.1 The RSS shall be constructed according to the Shop Drawings and this
Section 02276.
.2 RSS Superintendent
.1 The construction of the RSS shall be scheduled such that it is at all times
under the responsible charge of the RSS superintendent. The RSS
superintendent shall be advised on site by the RSS manufacturer’s
representative as to the required procedures for the construction of the RSS,
for the specified operations and time periods.
.3 Manufacturer’s Representative
.1 The manufacturer’s representative shall be on site to oversee installation of

the RSS and to advise the RSS superintendent of the procedures and
placing tolerances required for the construction of the RSS according to the
manufacturer’s requirements as approved on the MTO’s DSM.
.2 For each RSS item number, the manufacturer’s representative shall be on

site at commencement of the RSS construction for a time period of three
working days to observe the following operations, where applicable:
.1 Layout of the RSS and construction of the alignment elements;
.2 Installation of the facing elements; and
.3 Placement and compaction of the backfill for RSS and installation of
the reinforcing elements.
.3 Whenever there is a change in the RSS superintendent during construction

of the RSS, the manufacturer’s representative shall return to the site to
advise the new RSS superintendent of the procedures and placing
tolerances required for the construction of the RSS according to the
manufacturer’s requirements as approved on the MTO’s DSM.
.4 Certificates of Conformance – Foundation
.1 MTO Form PH-CC-822, Certificate of Conformance, for the foundation of the

RSS shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the construction of the RSS.
.5 Backfill for RSS
.1 Backfill for RSS and reinforcement elements shall be placed within the lines
and grades shown on the Shop Drawings. All backfill for RSS shall be
compacted according to OPSS.PROV 501.
.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, backfill for RSS shall
not be placed against an adjacent concrete structure that is part of the work
until the concrete in that structure has obtained at least 70% of the
compressive strength specified in the Contract Documents.
.6 Performance Tolerances
.1 Performance tolerances for the RSS shall be according to the first table in
Clause 1.4.2.1 of this Section 02276.
.7 Certificates of Conformance
.1 MTO Form PH-CC-822, Certificate of Conformance, shall be submitted to

the Engineer upon completion of each RSS.
.8 Corrective Work
.1 General
.1 All deficiencies shall be repaired according to the repair procedures
for corrective work. All corrective work shall be done within the RSS
warranty period, unless prevented by seasonal shutdown, in which
case the corrective work shall be done prior to June 30 of the
following year.
.2 At least one week prior to commencement of any corrective work,
written notice of commencement of work shall be submitted to the
Engineer and the Owner.
.3 Access to the corrective work shall be provided for inspection by the
Owner when requested.
.2 Repair Procedures
.1 Three copies of repair procedures for corrective work shall be
submitted to the Engineer 14 days prior to commencement of any
corrective work.
.2 The repair procedures shall include a description of the cause and
fully detail the corrective work required to correct the deficiencies
identified by the Owner.
.3 The repair procedures shall bear the seal and signature of an
engineer and be signed by the manufacturer’s representative.
.9 RSS Warranty
.1 The warranty period shall be 36 months from the date of the Contract
Completion Certificate.
.10 Management of Excess Materials
.1 Management of excess materials shall be according to the Contract

Documents.
4.1 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
.1 RSS, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Fabrication, and RSS with Finishing
Cap, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Fabrication
.1 Measurement of RSS, wall/slope, high performance, precast fabrication, and

RSS with finishing cap, wall/slope, high performance, precast fabrication
shall be by area in square metres of precast concrete elements.
4.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT
.1 RSS, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Fabrication, and RSS with Finishing
Cap, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Fabrication
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the RSS, wall/slope, high performance,
precast fabrication tender items and RSS with finishing cap, wall/slope, high
performance, precast fabrication tender items shall be full compensation for
all labour, equipment and materials to do the work.
.2 Corrective work, including investigation of defects and deficiencies, design of

repairs, site access, traffic staging and removal of existing work, shall be at
no additional cost to the Owner, except where the defects and deficiencies
are not the fault of the Contractor.
.2 RSS, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Delivery, and RSS with Finishing Cap,
Wall/Slope, High Performance, Precast Delivery
precast delivery tender items and RSS with finishing cap, wall/slope, high
performance, precast delivery tender items shall be full compensation for all
labour, equipment and materials to do the work.
.3 RSS, Wall/Slope, High Performance, Installation, and RSS with Finishing Cap,
Wall/Slope, High Performance, Installation
installation tender items and RSS with finishing cap, wall/slope, high
performance, installation tender items shall be full compensation for all
labour, equipment and materials to do the work.
.2 Payment for construction of the foundation for RSS shall be made under the
appropriate tender items in the Contract.
.3 Corrective work, including investigation of defects and deficiencies, design of

repairs, site access, traffic staging and removal of existing work, shall be at
no additional cost to the Owner, except where the defects and deficiencies
are not the fault of the Contractor.

CN – DESIGN & NOISE WALL SYSTEM SECTION 02283
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 This Section specifies the detailed design, fabrication, supply, transportation,

delivery and construction of the following noise wall system.
.2 The Contractor shall consider the cost of all available architectural finishes in the
unit price for the noise wall system.
.3 Noise barrier heights shall be referenced from the top of the adjacent rail,
roadway surface, or finished grade elevation (as applicable) unless otherwise
indicated.
.4 Noise barriers shall be designed so that there shall be no sections less than 100
m in length with variable height. Where topographical changes precipitate shifts
in the datum of the noise wall – a minimum of five adjacent panels must be
maintained at each given top of barrier elevation within the 100 m parameter.
.5 Positive drainage shall be provided to eliminate ponding at the base of the noise
barriers.
.6 The noise barriers function safely and in a fully functional manner under the
expected ambient conditions set out in Table 1.1, and under any abrupt changes
in expected ambient conditions set out in Table 1.1.
TABLE A1.1 - Expected Ambient Conditions

High temperature conditions 44°C 111°F
Low temperature conditions -40°C -40°F
Relative humidity 20% to 100% (Non-Condensing)
Snowfall rate per hour 50 mm 2 inches
Snowfall rate per day 300 mm 12 inches
Rainfall rate per hour 65 mm 2.5 inches

Rainfall rate per day 100 mm 4 inches
Ice accretion per hour 13 mm 0.5 inches
Ice accretion per day 50 mm 2 inches
Standing water above top of rail or 76 mm 3 inches

roadway surface (as applicable)
Wind maximum continuous velocity 65 km/h 40 mph
Wind gusts 120 km/h 75 mph
.4 Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Section 02315
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded

Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels;
.2 CAN/CSA G164-M, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles;
.3 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating;
.4 CGSB 85-GP-16M, Painting Galvanized Steel;
.5 CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel

Structures;
.6 CSA W59-M, Welding Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding); and
.7 CSA Z107.9, Standard for Certification of Noise Barriers.

.2 SSPC, Steel Structures Painting Council.
.3 American Society of Testing and Materials International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method;
.2 ASTM C666, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid

Freezing and Thawing;
.3 ASTM C672, Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete

Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals;
.4 ASTM D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent
and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position;
.5 ASTM D638, Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastic;
.6 ASTM D785, Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and

Electrical Insulating Materials;
.7 ASTM D790, Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials;
.8 ASTM D1003, Test Methods for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of

Transparent Plastics;
.9 ASTM D1929, Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics;
.10 ASTM D2843, Test Method for Density of Smoke from Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics;
.11 ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials;
.12 ASTM E90, Standard Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions;
.13 ASTM E313, Standard Practice for Calculating Yellowness and

Whiteness Indices from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates;
.14 ASTM E413, Standard Classification for Determination of Sound

Transmission Class;
.15 ASTM E795, Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During
Sound Absorption Tests; and
.16 ASTM G155, Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus
for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials
.4 CHBDC, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code CAN/CSA S6
.1 OPSS 1440, Steel Reinforcement for Concrete.
.6 ANSI Standard Z97.1, Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance

Specifications and Methods of Test.
1.4 LINES AND LEVELS
.1 Layout lines and establish elevations required for proper location and setting of
support posts, to suit site contours.
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
.1 Reference Wind Pressure for a 25-year return period shall be determined on a

site-specific basis or a wind pressure of 460 Pa, whichever is greater, in
accordance with CAN/CSA S6.
.2 The noise wall system may be built of a variety of materials provided that the
selected material achieves a minimum surface density of 20 kg/m2 or that the
Sound Transmission Class (STC) of the noise barrier panels shall be equal to or
greater than 32 as determined in accordance with ASTM E90 requirements.
.3 The cumulative weight loss of particles after 300 freeze/thaw cycles shall be less
than 1% as determined in accordance with ASTM C666 – Method A
requirements.
.4 The loss of mass due to scaling after 50 freeze/thaw cycles shall be less than 0.8
kg/m2 as determined in accordance with ASTM C672 requirements:
.1 The noise barrier panels shall not exhibit any deterioration in the form of
cracks, spalls or aggregate disintegration after 50 freeze/thaw cycles.
.5 The Flame Spread Index (FSI) of the noise barrier panels shall be less than 10
as determined in accordance with ASTM E84 requirements:
.1 Smoke Development (SD) of the noise barrier panels shall be less than
12 as determined in accordance with ASTM E84 requirements.
.6 The stain applied to the surface of noise barrier panels shall not exhibit any
apparent chalking, checking or blistering after 2,400 hours exposure in
accordance with ASTM G155 requirements, and shall comply with the following
requirement:
.1 The total difference in colour (ΔE*) of the stain shall not be greater than
3.0 as determined in accordance with ASTM G155 requirements.
.7 Constructed such that there is sufficient structural support for the installation;
sound transmission value to comply with ASTM E90.
.8 Footing design shall be based on geotechnical data provided in the Contract

Documents. If supplemental geotechnical information is required by the
Contractor’s designers, this information shall be obtained by the Contractor at
their own expense.
.9 All design, construction, fabrication drawings and specifications required to

complete this Work shall be obtained by the Contractor from the noise wall
system wall supplier, including facing panel layout, size and spacing of posts
including footing details and representative typical details.
.10 Base plate connections: all noise walls installed on retaining walls shall be
connected to the concrete retaining wall cap. All elements of the connection,
including base plate and anchorages, shall be designed by the Contractor in
accordance with AREMA. The Contractor shall provide detailed design drawings
sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the
Province of Ontario.
.11 The contractor to provide design grades for noise wall sections indicates the
elevation of the top of the footings, panels profile, existing ground and existing
utilities through the wall. The information required to complete the grading
drawings along the noise wall shall be obtained as follows:
.1 Footings located within the designed grade: The Contractor to obtain the
information from the CAD design files provided by the Consultant;
.2 Footings located outside the designed grade: The Contractor to survey

the elevation of the original ground at the proposed location of the footing
to establish the proposed footing elevation;
.3 Location and elevation of the existing utilities can be obtained from the
locate of the existing utilities paid under item G2 in the Form of Tender:
and
.4 Payment for the listed works shall be deemed incidental to the unit price
for design, supply and installation of the noise wall system. No Separate
payment shall be made.
.1 Erection shall be performed by the barrier panel supplier or its licensee. Submit
proof of this qualification to the Consultant.
.2 Manufacturer shall oversee field installation and certify the installed work as
being in conformity with the Specifications.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit detailed design and erection drawings in accordance with Section 01340
Shop Drawings and Other Submittals, bearing the stamp of a Professional
Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, at least eight (8) weeks
prior to construction, for approval, and shall include the following:
.1 The Contractor to prepare complete detailed design drawings including all

details for the proposed Noise Wall System. The drawings shall include,
but not limited to the following, footing locations, footing elevations,
footing details incl. reinforcement, support post details, panel details, etc.
.2 The Work Methodology Plan for the construction of the noise wall system,
including procedures and equipment;
.3 Soil parameters and other subsurface data for the design of the noise wall
system;
.4 Actual bearing capacity of proposed foundation;
.5 Bearing capacity required by the noise wall system.
.1 Deliver materials to site in sequence to meet construction schedule.
.2 Safely store all materials and protect from damage prior to installation.
.3 Facing panels shall be handled, stored and shipped in such a manner as to

minimize the danger of chipping, cracks, fractures and excessive bending
stresses.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 The noise barrier system shall resist rusting, warping, animal and insect nesting
and infestation. The noise barrier system shall not display any significant
deterioration, delaminating, disfigurement or failure for a minimum five (5) years
period from the date of Substantial Performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The noise barrier supplier shall be included in the MTO Designated Sources for
Materials DSM #5.50.
.2 The Contractor shall select and use only one (1) system for the Project.
.3 Do not substitute for any component normally supplied by the supplier of the
proprietary wall system.
.4 Verify existing site conditions and ground elevations before preparing shop
drawings.
.5 Materials used shall withstand local weather conditions as noted below, for
example: any exposed steel shall be stainless or galvanized, etc.
.6 Manufacturer of noise wall to prepare detailed layout and fabrication drawings

including specifications together with complete engineering calculations, as per
Section 01340 Submittals.
.7 Posts: New structural steel material conforming to CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade

300W, cleaned to SSPC-SP6 and hot dipped galvanized after fabrication with
minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 to CAN/CSA G164-M.
.8 Concrete footings: 30 MPa concrete at 28-days, conforming to the requirements

of OPSS 1350.
.9 Welds: Conforming to CSA W59-M and CSA W47.1.
.10 Sealant: If required, use GE Canada Silpruf 2000 Series silicone sealant or
approved equivalent.
.11 Anti-Graffiti coating for all instances of pre-cast concrete or wood fibre reinforced
concrete (absorptive side): Gemite Graffiti-Shield ST WB or approved equivalent.
.12 Galvanized primer: Zinc rich conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.181 for new galvanized
metal in compliance with CGSB 85-GP-16M. For galvanized fabrications touchup
to remain unpainted in finished work, use W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.
"Galvafroid" or Kerry Industries "Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or approved equivalent.
.13 Submit test reports for materials as requested by the Consultant.
2.2 POSTS AND POST FOOTINGS
.1 Posts and footings shall be designed to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind,
seismic, handling, transportation, erection, imposed and other loads.
.2 Posts and footings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the approved Shop
Drawings submitted by the noise wall system manufacturer.
.3 Post footings shall be designed with reference to the soil parameters provided in
the Contract Documents and/or supplementary data acquired at the Contractor’s
expense, as described elsewhere in this specification. The depth, size and type
of footing shall be identified on the detailed design drawings submitted by the
noise wall system manufacturer.
.4 Determine footing depth in accordance with the Canadian Highway Bridge
Design Code 2006 based on the soil being compacted to 95% Proctor and per
borehole data provided in the Contract.
.5 The design of the footing shall ignore the horizontal resistance of the top 1000
mm of material in front of the footing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Noise wall design and installation shall only initiate with written approval from the
Owner.
.2 Installation of the noise wall system shall be undertaken by an experienced

Contractor skilled in the construction of noise wall systems.
.3 The Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations pertaining

to the installation of the noise wall system.
.4 Install panels which are visually uniform in appearance in terms of colour, pattern
and texture. Uniformity of appearance is subject to approval. Noise barrier panels
must visually match adjacent panels. Inspect during construction and after
installation at a distance of approximately 15 m from the structure and adjust as
required.
.5 The noise wall system shall be designed to provide smooth and ascetically
acceptable top of wall transitions, where footing grades vary from panel to panel.
.6 Examine the Site to determine local conditions under which the Work will be
undertaken.
.7 Post and footings shall be constructed as per approved design drawings

submitted by noise wall system manufacturer.
3.2 SITE GRADING AND PREPARATION
.1 Grading or berm construction associated with the barrier installation shall be

completed to within 6 mm below the bottom of the barrier prior to constructing the
barrier footings.
.2 All grading shall be in accordance with OPSS 206.
.3 Remove from the site all surplus materials excavated for the placing of noise
barriers and footings.
.4 Compact earth and granular materials according to the requirements of OPSS

501.
.5 There shall be no visible gaps between any barrier panels nor beneath the
bottom panels after completion of the barrier with the exception of the areas
where these have been incorporated in the design.
.6 Have necessary tree pruning and treatment of branches carried out by an

approved Landscape Sub-Contractor to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no
extra cost to the Owner.
3.3 FOOTINGS
.1 Footings in Earth:
.1 Where footings are to be installed on or within 1000 mm from a downward

slope of 3:1 or steeper, the shop drawings shall reflect this and shall note
an increase in embedment depth of a minimum of 500 mm greater than
the requirements of the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code 2006.
Concrete for drilled footings shall be cast entirely against undisturbed soil.
If other than drilled footings are necessary, the footing shall be formed
and the excavation shall be backfilled with granular materials and
compacted to at least 95% Proctor. Where required, the tops of all
footings are to be shaped to provide for full horizontal seating of panels,
the remaining surface area is to be sloped away from the post so as to
shed water. Stepped footings are to be constructed to suit grade
changes; and
.2 Cure concrete in the footings for a minimum period of 5 days before

installing the panels (can be reduced for high strength concrete).
.2 Footings in Rock:
.1 When rock is encountered within the specified excavation depth for

footings in earth, the footing shall be constructed in accordance with the
"Footings in Earth" design down to a minimum of 300 mm into the solid
rock or 1500 mm below the top of footing grade, whichever is the greater
depth; and
.2 Backfill all excavations into rock with concrete. The excavation above the
top of rock may be formed into the required dimensions and the
remainder of the excavation backfilled with granular material.
.3 Footings near tree trunks of DBH>30cm:
.1 When tree trunk of DBH>30cm is within 3m of footing diameter, adjust

post /footing spans to clear trunk areas.
3.4 POSTS
.1 Construct work to the line and grades shown with a tolerance of ±10 mm. Plumb
posts within a tolerance of ±6 mm in 3 m.
.2 Touch-up abraded galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich paint.
.3 Make changes in horizontal direction using special arrangements of the posts as

specified by the manufacturer.
3.5 PANELS
.1 Install panels to the design grades prepared under item 1.5 (l) above. In
particular, note infill panel requirements to match changing slopes along grade,
transitions around culverts and retaining walls, etc. Infill panels to be provided as
required and shall be paid per square meter of installed panel under the same
noise wall system item listed in the Form of Tender (i.e., same unit price of the
noise wall per square meter).
.2 Clean panels and posts of any soils, dirt and debris.
3.6 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
.1 Shortened post spacing will be allowed to avoid placing posts on top of utilities
that interfere with the originally proposed barrier footing location.
.2 Obtain approvals from the utility owner for noise barrier installations within 3
meters of existing utilities.
.3 Work around underground utilities, and when construction operations are liable to
damage utilities, alter method of construction as directed by the Consultant or
utility companies in order to avoid any damage.
.4 The adjustment work (design and construction) and additional structural steel
required around the utilities shall be considered incidental and included in the
unit price of the noise wall's design, supply and installation.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for Noise Wall fence shall be by linear meters (m) of the installed
fence as measured in the field.
4.2 PAYMENT
Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices included
in Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for the design, supply, and
installation of the Noise Wall, including all materials, labour, use of equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
CN – DESIGN & SITE GRADING SECTION 02311
MI.36.79 TO 41.00 HALTON SUB
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the site grading requirements for the works.
.8 Clearing and Grubbing Section 02231
.12 Geotextiles Section 02340
.15 Seed, Sod, and Cover Section 02910

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Contractor shall refer to the following Ontario Provincial Standard

Specification (OPSS):
.1 OPSS.PROV 180, General Specification for the Management of Excess

Materials;
.2 OPSS.PROV 206, Construction Specification for Grading;
.3 OPSS. PROV 212, Construction Specification for Earth Borrow, except as

indicated below in this Section.
.4 OPSS.PROV 510, Construction Specification for Removals; and
.5 OPSS 570, Construction Specification for Topsoil.
.2 The Contractor shall refer to the American Society of Testing and Materials
International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft lbf/ft 3 (600kN
m/m3)).
.3 The Contractor shall refer to the TSSA Guideline for Excavation in the Vicinity of
Utility Lines.
.4 The Contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Reports for the Project attached to
the tender documents.
.5 Soil management drawings.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 The Contractor acknowledges that classification of excavated materials shall

conform to OPSS. PROV 206.
.2 The following classes of materials shall be recognized:
.1 “Borrow” means the material to be supplied and placed by the

Contractor after Stripping and the redistribution of Common Material that
is required to achieve elevations specified on the Contract Drawings;
.2 “Common Material” means any material remaining on-site after

Stripping has been performed. Common Material Excavation refers to the
removal of such material as specified on the Contract Drawings. Suitable
Common Material shall be utilized for construction where specified. The
suitable Common Material is specified in this Section. The excavation of
all materials including hardpan, quicksand and frozen Earth; also, rock,
concrete or masonry less than 1.0 m3 in volume shall be classified as
Common Material excavation;
.3 “Earth” means all soils except those defined as rock, and excludes stone
masonry, concrete, and manufactured materials;
.4 “Embankment” means the fills used to elevate the subgrade (after

Stripping) to the underside of sub-ballast (or subbase) level specified by
the Drawings. Embankments shall consist of suitable material
redistributed from Common Material excavation. Where insufficient
material from Common Material excavation is available, Borrow shall
constitute the remainder of the material;
.5 “Optimum Moisture Content” (OMC) - as defined in ASTM D698;

means the molding water content at which a soil can be compacted to the
maximum dry unit weight using standard compactive effort;
.6 “Rock Excavation” means excavation of material from solid rock

formation, greater than one cubic yard in volume which can be removed
only by drilling and blasting:
.1 Rock shall not include glacial till or “hardpan” or layered rock in its
original location which can be ripped by a single rear-mounted
tooth on a D-8 crawler-type tractor rated at 265 drawbar H.P., or
equivalent.
.7 “Stripping” means any organic material or topsoil removed on-site or off-

site prior to grading operations; and
.8 “Unsuitable Material” means the material that is:
.1 Of such unstable nature as to be incapable of being compacted to

a specified density using ordinary methods;
.2 Too wet to meet the compaction requirements of ASTM D698 and

circumstances prevent suitable in-place drying prior to
incorporation into the Work;
.3 Frozen or containing ice particles;
.4 Used ballast;
.5 Material that exceeds MECP Table1, Table 2 and Table 3 SCS;
.6 Containing organic, peat or other deleterious material;
.7 Otherwise unsuitable for the planned use; or

.8 The Contractor shall make sure to place all the material onsite and
avoid any dispose outside the Limits of Construction. Subject to
the Engineer’s approval, the Contractor shall dispose of the
Unsuitable Material off-site to the appropriate licensed dumping
site.

program to ensure all materials, compaction, etc. meet the requirements of this
.2 The Engineer may also carry out independent Quality Assurance tests as per
Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance of these Specifications as
required.
.3 The Contractor shall implement measures to avoid the introduction or spread of

invasive vegetation within the site and take into account the Ontario Invasive
Plant Council's Clean Equipment Protocol for the industry.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following all submittals for review in accordance
with the requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals at least four
weeks prior to commencing use:
.1 The Contractor shall submit a Soil and Excavated Materials Management

Plan and a Soil and Excavated Materials Management Monthly
Monitoring Report for disposal of all excess soils on Site for review in
accordance with the requirements of this Section, O. Reg. 153/04 and
Section 01560 Environmental Protection;
.2 The Contractor shall submit a Site Grading Quality Plan in accordance

with; the requirements of this Section and Section 01620 Quality
Assurance; and
.3 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the proposed source of

Borrow material and submit the Borrow Test Results submittal covering
the sampling and test results of Borrow:
.1 Prior to the use of material for Site use, the Contractor shall obtain
bulk soil test analysis (O. Reg. 153/04) and certification that all
material to be used on Site meets the requirements of Table 2
SCS for Agricultural or Other Property Use;
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all Borrow material is

characterized by a Qualified Person (as defined under O. Reg.
153/04); and
.3 Payment for these tests, soil characterization and certification will
be paid by the Contractor.
.4 The Contractor acknowledges that if any materials from a proposed

source do not meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall
locate an alternative source or provide required test results to
demonstrate that material from the source in question can be processed
to meet the specified requirements. The Contractor shall submit samples
and the alternative source information or source processing information
for review in accordance with the requirements of this Section;
.5 The Contractor acknowledges that acceptance of material at source does

not preclude future rejection if the material fails to conform to the
specified requirements, lacks uniformity, or if its field performance is
found to be unsatisfactory;
.6 The Contractor shall submit Inspection and Test Reports for all tests and
inspections performed by the Contractor-appointed inspection and testing
company in accordance with this Section and Section 01620 Quality
Contractor and Assurance;
.7 The Contractor shall supply As-Built survey information for Site Grading
for the completed grading;
.8 Submit Transportation and Manifest documentation in accordance with

the requirements of O Reg. 347 General – Waste Management; and
.9 Subject to the Engineer request, the Contractor shall submit Soils

Disposal Reports in accordance with the Soil Management Plan for all soil
disposed of offsite; including:
.1 Landowner/Facility Names and civic address;
.2 Date of disposition;
.3 Quantity (bill of lading);
.4 A record of the exact location where the where the soil is

deposited in the Receiving Site;
.5 Soils Sample Results; and
.6 Confirmation of the appropriateness of the Receiving site.
.10 Work plan to excavate through the shoulder of the existing mainline
tracks.
.11 Work plan for working night shifts and throughout the weekends during
the track’s closure.
.1 Stockpile excavated materials separately and store until required. (e.g. topsoil,
earth fill).
.2 Protect stockpiled materials from contamination.
.3 The Contractor shall implement measures to discourage Bank Swallows from

nesting in temporary banks during construction (including but not limited to soil
and material stockpiles), including reducing slopes to 70 degrees or less between
April 15 to July, unless slopes are tarped. In the event that Bank Swallow nesting
activity is observed, all work in proximity to these temporary banks (including soil
/ material stock piles) shall cease and the Contractor will notify CN’s
.4 Stockpiles shall be temporarily seeded to reduce erosion if left exposed or

inactive for more than 30 days. See Section 02910 Seeding for seed mix
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Suitable Common Material for earth embankments shall consist of material

passing 100% through a U.S. Standard 200 mm sieve. Suitable Common
Material shall be free of organic or deleterious material.
.2 Embankment material shall be as outlined in this section, unless otherwise

directed by the Engineer. Material shall not be placed over frozen earth or ice
surfaces. Frozen earth shall be deemed unsuitable for use in embankment
construction.
.3 Embankment material within 1.2 m of the bottom of the sub-ballast shall be non-
frost susceptible material with less than 30% passing by weight sieve No. 200.
.4 Embankment material within 0.3 m of top of sub-grade shall contain material

passing 100% through a U.S. standard 75 mm sieve.
.5 Imported topsoil (if required) shall conform to OPSS 570.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall examine the Geotechnical Reports prior to proceeding with
the Works.
.2 The Contractor shall evaluate and delineate areas with inorganic/metals/PHC,

and PAHs impacted soil based on comparable analysis of the current laboratory
analysis results of soil with the applicable MECP Table Standards and estimate
volume of the impacted soil. The Contractor shall undertake necessary additional
soil sampling testing to correctly evaluate the vertical and horizontal extent of the
impacted soil, as an accurate calculation of the volume of the impacted soil.
.3 The Contractor acknowledges that all non-impacted soil can be temporarily

stockpiled on the Site for future use as a backfill material/or using for landscaping
purposes.
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that all impacted soil is evaluated as solid non-
hazardous or hazardous waste and is sent off-site as non-hazardous or
hazardous waste to the appropriate landfill. The Contractor shall collect
composite soil samples assuming it as impacted and submit the samples to a
laboratory for Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for waste
evaluation – hazardous or non-hazardous prior to disposing of it off-site.
.5 The Contractor shall undertake regular soils analysis, as required, for excavated
soils or materials to be disposed of off-site to confirm the soil characteristics prior
to disposal in accordance with the Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O 1990, c.
E.19 (EPA) regulations. The Contractor shall account for and consider the
required stockpiling of soils and multiple handling of soils required in the process.
.6 The Contractor acknowledges that soil that requires to be disposed of off-site and
found to contain aesthetic impacts (cinders, slag, ballast, asphalt and/or brick
fragments or other debris) will require disposal as waste regardless of chemical
quality.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES AND TRACKS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all grading work will be within the Limits of
Construction indicated in the Contract Drawings. No grading work shall be done
outside the Limits of Construction.
.2 The contractor shall consider the following for undertaking grading works within
6m of the existing live tracks:
.1 The grading work shall not impact on the stability of the existing track
embankment, subballast and ballast. The grading works shall be
undertaken in accordance with CN Rail guidelines for maximum allowable
temporary excavation along the mainline tracks under railway traffic; and
.2 The grading work shall be undertaken when the adjacent tracks are not in
service or during night-time when there is no railway traffic on the tracks.
The contractor shall coordinate three months in advance with CN Rail and
obtain the approval prior to proceeding with the grading work along the
adjacent existing live tracks.
.3 All work equipment shall be placed with the Limits of Construction.
.4 Existing buried utilities and structures:
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with CN S&C and obtain the locate for all
utilities and underground cables prior to proceeding the work;
.2 The Contractor to coordinate with CN S&C for relocation of the signal

cables and signals components two months prior proceeding the grading
works;
.3 The Contractor shall confirm the locations of all buried Utilities prior to
proceeding with the Works;
.4 The Contractor shall protect all existing buried Utilities and structures as
required;
.5 The Contractor shall notify all owners having jurisdiction and shall
establish the location and state of use of all buried Utilities and structures
prior to commencing the excavation work. The Contractor shall ensure to
mark such locations to prevent disturbance during the Works;
.6 The Contractor shall maintain and protect from damage; water, sewer,
gas, electric, telephone and other Utilities and structures encountered.
The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Utility Companies before
moving or disturbing any Utilities or structures; and
.7 The Contractor shall record the location of maintained, rerouted and

abandoned underground Utilities.
.5 Protect existing trees, landscaping, survey control points & benchmarks,

buildings, pavement, signage, signals, etc. which are to remain. If damaged,
restore to original or better condition unless directed otherwise.
.6 In the event that human remains are encountered, construction activity in

proximity to these remains will be stopped immediately and mitigation measures
will be implemented by CN’s on-site Archaeologist in accordance with the
3.3 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which
soil structure is adversely affected as determined by the Engineer.
.2 Commence topsoil stripping of areas as indicated after area has been cleared of
brush, weeds and grasses and removed from site.
.3 Topsoil will be stripped and stockpiled in accordance with the Grading Plan and
Soil Management Plan for all permanent and temporary construction areas.
Topsoil piles shall be marked with appropriate signage to prevent accidental
admixing. Topsoil shall not be imported to or exported from the Site.
.4 Subsoil will be stored separately from topsoil with a minimum of 1m separation of

the piles. Topsoil from the natural areas (i.e, Indian Creek) will be separated from
other topsoil so that it may be used for restoration.
.5 Stockpile sufficient topsoil for subsequent use.
.6 Implement erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with the

Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and Section 02270 Erosion Control.
.7 Protect stockpiles from contamination and traffic.
.8 Dispose of unused topsoil.
3.4 GRADING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the topsoil and soils containing organic or other
deleterious materials are stripped from the areas in accordance with the
Drawings prior to placement of fill materials. Following Stripping of the topsoil,
the Contractor shall ensure that the subgrade is compacted to 95% Standard
Proctor Maximum Dry Density (SPMDD) and then proof-rolled and inspected to
confirm the adequate conditions are present prior to commencing the fill
placement.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all soft zones are sub-excavated and replaced
with granular B type II material, in lifts that do not exceed 300mm in thickness,
compacted to 98% of SPMDD. The Contractor shall ensure that all repaired
areas are retested.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that water inflows are controlled by drainage system
and subgrade is kept dry all the time.
The Contractor acknowledges that in case of rain, the subgrade may experience
more softening at the surface, in which case further sub-excavation may be
required in order to have the subgrade approved by the Contractor’s Independent
Geotechnical Engineer. The Contractor shall cover the subgrade immediately
with sub-ballast after each section of the subgrade is completed, in order to
mitigate the situation.
.4 The Contractor shall protect the exposed subgrade from frost penetration. If frost
penetrates the exposed subgrade due to the subgrade being left uncovered
overnight in freezing temperatures or for any other reasons, the frozen
soil/material shall be sub-excavated, removed and replaced with granular B type
II in lifts not exceeding 300 mm in thickness, compacted to 95% of SPMDD.
.5 The Contractor shall inspect the subgrade to confirm stability. Any soft zones
shall be sub-excavated and replaced with granular B type II material to improve
the ground conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for all sub-
excavations undertaken as a result of frozen conditions.
.6 Due to the sensitive soil condition, the Contractor shall not disturb the prepared
subgrade by movement of the construction equipment at any time. In the case
that the track bed is used for temporary construction access, a construction mat
shall be constructed; the Contractor shall increase the thickness of the sub-
ballast by two times the required thickness, subject to the approval by the
Contractor’s Independent Geotechnical Engineer. Once the construction traffic is
complete, the Contractor shall remove the additional sub-ballast material. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, placement and removal of the
additional material required for all temporary construction access within the
Project limits. The cost for additional materials shall be borne by the Contractor.
.1 Supply and place geotextile, Terrafix 270R or approved equal/alternative

and geogrid, Terrafix TBX 3000 or approved equal/alternative at the
locations where the subgrade compaction strength is less than 95% of
SPMDD, to prevent pumping of the fines to the sub-ballast and to provide
additional strength to the subgrade. The placement of geotextile and
geogrid is subject to the Contractor Geotechnical Engineer’s approval;
and
.2 Perform sub-excavation as required in accordance with the Contractor

Geotechnical Engineer’s direction. Sub-excavation shall be backfilled with
granular B type II material in lifts not exceeding 300mm in thickness,
compacted to 98% of SPMDD or approved fill from site.
.8 The Contractor shall use granular B type II to elevate the subgrade (after
Stripping) to the design elevation if fill from onsite cut is not available.
.9 The Contractor shall compact all stripped and disturbed areas to compaction
levels as indicated in Section 06120 Quality Control and Assurance.
.10 The Contractor shall key/bench existing slopes to ensure a proper bond between
the new materials and the existing surface as indicated:
.1 The Contractor acknowledges that no more than 10m open

keying/benching is allowed unless authorized by the Engineer; and
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for this operation.

.11 The Contractor shall scarify, aerate, and mix all material to attain water content,
within +2% of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC).
.12 The Contractor shall remove and dispose of material not compacted to levels
detailed in this Section.
.13 Where compaction is not being obtained, the Contractor shall cease placing
material where adequate compaction has not been achieved and shall continue
to apply additional compaction to materials already in place until the desired
compaction result is achieved.
.14 The Contractor acknowledges that final acceptance of the materials will be made
after the materials are dumped, spread and compacted in place in accordance
with the allowable SPMDD:
.1 The Contractor acknowledges that the Engineer may reject material at

source, on transportation vehicle or in place; and
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for removal and disposal of any

rejected material.
.15 The Contractor shall not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs to
remain.
.16 The Contractor shall ensure that all the exposed soil during ditch regrading is
stabilized at the end of each workday.
3.5 TEMPORARY STOCKPILES
.1 Stripping (topsoil) and cut material deemed acceptable for re-use may be
stockpiled in temporary locations as directed by the Engineer, with toes of
stockpiles no closer than 3 m from the existing track, complete with silt fence to
protect the track, existing fence and property line, with positive drainage
maintained at all times.
.2 Limits of Construction for vegetation, watercourse and building protection

outlined in the Contract Drawings and Reference Documents shall be adhered to
by the Contractor.
.3 Upon completion of embankments, the Contractor shall draw from the temporary
stockpiles and place material as topsoil.
.4 Contractor shall restore stockpile sites to the satisfaction of the Engineer on

completion of material removal.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND UNSUITABLE EXCESS SOIL BY REMOVAL
FROM RAILWAY PROPERTY
.1 The Contractor shall review the Soil Management Plan prepared for the Project
and incorporate all pertinent details, background information, recommendations,
mitigation and monitoring measures presented therein.
during construction will be sent for analysis to characterize and determine
suitability for re-use on the Site.
.3 Contaminated soils not suitable for re-use on the Site shall be managed in
accordance with all applicable law, industry standards and best management
practices, including but not limited to:
.1 Section 01560 Environmental Protection;
.2 The Environmental Protection Act;
.3 Ontario Regulation 406/19, as amended;

Materials; and
.5 Management of Excess Soil – A Guide for Best Management Practices

(Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks [MECP], Updated: April
4, 2019, Published: April 5, 2016, as updated)
.4 The Contractor is responsible for the re-use of soils on site to the extent possible,
proper disposal of unsuitable materials is permitted where soil has been deemed
as not fit for onsite reuse (per applicable law), off of the Site. The Contractor shall
arrange for and pay for any additional testing required by the receiver site as a
condition of acceptance of the material. The Contractor shall submit to CN the
forms provided under OPSS.PROV. 180, signed by the receiver site.
.5 The Contractor shall re-use excess soil on the Site to the extent possible. Should
on-site re-use be determined to not be possible due applicable law, the
Contractor shall make all reasonable attempts to locate a suitable off-site
beneficial re-use receiver. Only as a last resort shall disposal of excess soil at
landfill be undertaken. Re-use at off-site beneficial re-use receivers shall be
communicated to CN and the Contractor shall verify and document that the
receiver is operating under appropriate by-laws, permits and regulations and that
the quality of material being re-used is suitable for their operation. Copies of all
agreements, bills of lading, weigh bills, analytical results shall be forwarded to the
CN and/or Contract Administrator.
.6 If requested by CN, the Contractor should work with the Engineer to ensure any
other concerns CN has with the excess soil movement are properly addressed.
3.7 DEWATERING
.1 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress, in accordance with

Section 02140 Dewatering.
.2 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run off.
.3 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or

any portion of work completed or under construction, and in conformance to all
environmental regulations.
.4 Continuously dewater the excavations to control surface runoff or perched water

table seepage for all work to be carried out in the dry condition.
.5 Submit for Engineer’s review details of proposed dewatering methods, such as

dikes or well points.
3.8 SITE TOLERANCES
.1 Finished subgrade, ditches and slopes to be within 15 mm of design as indicated

but not uniformly high or low.
3.9 PROTECTION OF GRADE
.1 The Contractor shall maintain finished subgrade in a condition conforming to this

Section until the succeeding sub-ballast course is constructed, or until granular
sub-ballast is accepted by the Geotechnical Engineer and an Inspection and Test
Report is provided for review by the Engineer.
.2 The Contractor shall repair any damage to the completed subgrade prior to
placing the sub-ballast, to the satisfaction of the Contractor’s Geotechnical
Engineer and shall provide an Inspection and Test Report for review and
approval.
3.10 CONSTRUCTION MONITOTING

Monitoring for temporary excavation and stability of existing track bed.
4.1 GENERAL
.1 Measurement and payment for work of this section shall be in accordance with
OPSS 206 and as listed in the Form of Tender. No additional payment will be
made for overhaul or secondary handling.
.2 Keying/benching of fill into existing slopes shall be considered incidental to the
work and no additional payment will be made for this operation:
.1 No measurement will be made for the keying / benching operation.
.3 The Contractor will not receive payment for any quantity of material placed
outside of the site tolerances specified.
.4 No premium costs will be paid if the Contractor chooses to stage their work in
such a way as to require double handling of material.
.5 The costs for embankment and track monitoring, as required for the Work will be
covered under the applicable item in the Form of Tender.
.6 Calculation of quantities shall be based on volume of material excavated within

the design section, as calculated by the Engineer, from cross sections taken and
provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply original and final cross-
sections (at intervals matching the Contract Drawings) on a monthly basis to the
Consultant. The cross-sections shall be attached to the monthly payment for
justification. The earth quantities shall be finalized and agreed upon on a monthly
basis with the Engineer:
.1 Volumes will be calculated by method of average end areas.
4.2 EARTH – STRIPPING / CUT, SURPLUS / UNSUITABLE EARTH TO

DISPOSAL OFF-SITE
.1 Measurement for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) of volume
excavated based on cross-sections taken by the Contractor, prior to and after
stripping.
.2 The Contractor shall supply sets of original and final cross-sections to the
Engineer for calculation purposes.
.3 The Contractor shall supply the Engineer a detailed list, station by station, of
areas where cut was removed and properly disposed of as per OPSS 180.
4.3 EARTH – CUT, TO ON-SITE FILL
.1 Measurement for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) of excavated
volume, compacted and placed as on-site design embankment, based on cross-
sections taken by the Contractor, prior to and after excavation and shall include
all keying into existing slopes.
areas where cut was removed and placed in fill.
4.4 EARTH - FILL FROM ON-SITE CUT
.1 Measurement for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) of fill volume,
“compacted in placed” as on site design embankment, based on cross-sections
taken by the Contractor, prior to and after placement of fill, and shall include all
keying into existing slopes, compaction and trimming as specified herein.
areas where fill was placed from cut.
4.5 EARTH - FILL FROM BORROW
.1 Measurement for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) of fill volume,
“compacted in placed” as on site design embankment, based on cross-sections
taken by the Contractor, prior to and after placement of fill, and shall include all
keying into existing slopes, compaction and trimming as specified herein.
areas where fill was placed from borrow.
4.6 SUBEXCAVATION
.1 If sub-excavation is deemed required by the Engineer, measurement and

subsequent backfill for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) at the
applicable unit rates for cut and fill.
.2 Sub-excavation quantities (if any) shall be submitted to the Consultant on daily

basis. the Contractor must obtain Consultant’s approval on daily basis for the
extra sub-excavation quantities. The monthly cross-sections shall include the
sub-excavation quantities. Cost for surveying and preparing CAD files for the
cross-sections shall be included in the Contractor price for earth work.
4.7 PAYMENT
use of equipment, tools and incidentals including track monitoring requirements
necessary to complete the Work of this Section.
Payment for night-time work and all equipment required to perform the work
during the night-time shall be included in the unit prices included in the Form of
tender. *** END OF SECTION ***
CN WINTER WORKS SECTION 02312
ENGINEERING MILTON LOGISTICS HUB – PHASE 2A SEPTEMBER 2023
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions (Annex “A”) of Contract Form No. 3819 and all Sections of Division 1
of this Specification apply equally to this Section of the Specification.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WINTER WORK PERIOD
.1 The duration of the winter grading portion of the works will be defined as between
December 01 and March 31, regardless of weather conditions.
.12 Geotextiles Section 02340
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Contractor shall refer to the following Ontario Provincial Standard Specification
(OPSS):
.1 OPSS.PROV 180 Management of Excess Material;
.2 OPSS.PROV 206 Construction Specification for Grading;
.3 OPSS. PROV 212, Construction Specification for Earth Borrow, except as

indicated below in this Section.
.4 OPSS.PROV 510, Construction Specification for Removals; and
.5 OPSS 570, Construction Specification for Topsoil.
.1 ASTM D698-91, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 Refer to Section 02311 Site Grading.
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting their own quality assurance program
to ensure all materials, compaction, etc., meet the requirements of this Section and
Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 The Engineer may also carry out independent Quality Assurance tests as per Section
01620 Quality Control and Assurance of these Specifications.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.2 Contractor shall submit Salt Management Plan in accordance with the requirements of
this Section.
.2 The Contractor shall not use salt for de-icing or traction control purposes during
construction. Except for the use of sand, any other non-salt de-icing methods for traction
control must be approved to the satisfaction of the Engineer and CN’s Environmental
Monitor. If salts such as calcium chloride are deemed necessary, the Contractor must
develop a Salt Management Plan to the satisfaction of the Engineer and CN’s
Environmental Monitor. Once approved, the document will be circulated by the Engineer
to regulatory agencies before use of the material is permitted on the site. Consultation
with regulatory agencies may take up to 4 weeks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Suitable Common Material for earth embankments shall consist of material passing 100%
through a U.S. Standard 200mm sieve. Suitable Common Material shall be free of
organic or deleterious material.
.2 Embankment material shall be as outlined in this Section unless otherwise directed by

the Engineer. Whenever practical, the material shall not be placed over frozen earth or
ice surfaces. Frozen earth shall be deemed unsuitable for use in embankment
construction unless approved by the Engineer.
.3 Embankment material within 0.3 meters of top of the sub-grade shall contain material
passing 100% through a U.S. standard 75 mm sieve.
2.2 GRANULAR MATERIALS
.1 Refer to Section 02701 Granular Materials.
2.3 CONCRETE WORK
.1 Refer to Section 03312 Concrete Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES
3.3 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
3.4 WINTER GRADING
.1 Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing for surface treatment as indicated.
Excavate such that earth fill is segregated from unusable materials and can be
stockpiled on-site for subsequent use.
.2 Do not place material, which is frozen nor place material on frozen surfaces, unless
approved by the Engineer.
.3 During freezing conditions or forecast periods of freezing conditions, leave grade 0.3 m
high/low in order to protect subsequent grade from freezing.
.4 Prior to placing additional material, remove snow and the top layer of frozen material all
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.5 Prepare an area sufficient for the placing operation for that day only. No areas of
unprotected grade will be allowed at the end of the day.
.6 For placement of borrow material, remove snow and a top layer of frozen material from
the borrow pit all to the satisfaction of and at no cost to the Engineer. Ensure that only
unfrozen material is used for fill placement.
.7 Remove any material that has become too wet and replace it with suitable unfrozen
compacted material, from an on-site cut or off-site borrow, as directed by the Engineer.
Material removed will be classified as “mud”. Payment for the removal of material shall
be measured and paid under the appropriate Tender Item for earthworks.
.8 Place fill maximum lifts and compact as described in Section 01620 Quality Control and
Assurance.
.9 Remove and dispose of material not thoroughly compacted at no cost to the Engineer.
.10 Where compaction is not being obtained, cease placing material and give additional
compaction to the material in place.
.11 Final acceptance of materials will be made after materials are dumped, spread, and
compacted in place:
.1 Engineer may reject at source, on transportation vehicle, or in place; and
.2 Engineer will not pay for the removal and disposal of any rejected material.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL
3.6 WINTER GRANULAR MATERIAL
.1 Compact subgrade to 98% of SPMDD. Excavate all weak and soft spots as required and
replace them with a granular sub-base compacted uniformly to 98% of SPMDD.
.2 Place granular as sub-ballast as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.3 Place granular after subgrade is inspected and approved by the Engineer.
.4 Construct granular to depth and grade in areas indicated.
.5 Ensure no frozen material is placed. Sub-ballast shall be taken from the stockpile area
and delivered to the site in an unfrozen condition.
.6 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow or ice.
.7 Prior to placing granular material, remove any snow or portion of high grade, compact as
specified and place granular material. Remove and prepare an area sufficient for the
placing operation for that day only. No areas of unprotected subgrade will be allowed at
the end of the day.
.8 Place granular materials using methods that do not lead to segregation or degradation.
.9 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted
thickness.
.10 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to a specified density before the
succeeding layer is placed.
.11 Ensure that granular material is placed to full depth, as shown on the drawings, at the
end of the days operation, and do not leave any portion of the subgrade unprotected
from freezing.
.12 Remove and replace the portion of the layer in which material has become segregated
during spreading.
3.7 DEWATERING
.1 Refer to Section 02140 Dewatering.
3.8 SITE TOLERANCES
.1 Finished subgrade, ditches, and slopes to be within 15 mm of design as indicated but

not uniformly high or low.
.2 Finished sub-ballast surface to be within 10 mm of elevation as indicated but not

uniformly high or low.
3.9 PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE
.1 Maintain finished subgrade in condition conforming to this section until succeeding sub-
ballast course is constructed, or until granular sub-ballast is accepted by the Engineer.
.2 Repair any damage to completed subgrade prior to placing sub-ballast, all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETE
.1 Take cold weather precautions whenever the ambient temperature is, or is expected to
be, at or below 5°C.
.2 Have protective measures in place, or adjacent to the Work, and approved by the
Engineer before any concrete is mixed or ordered.
.3 Maintain concrete temperatures between 10°C. and 20°C. for a minimum of 3 days for
unloaded areas, and 6 days for areas receiving partial load. These durations may be
reduced by 33 percent with the use of high early strength cement.
.4 In methods employed to maintain the concrete temperature, provide suitable access and
removable inspection plates so that the temperature of the concrete may be measured
and recorded at any time. Locate inspection plates so as to provide representative areas
including corners and more exposed elements, and have their location approved by the
Engineer.
.5 Where the Work is enclosed, and heaters are used to provide heat:
.1 provide an access strip at least 1 m wide between the Work and the nearest
heater;
.2 do not discharge heater outlets directly toward the Work;
.3 duct heater exhausts outside the enclosure;
.4 install a minimum-maximum thermometer inside the enclosure at a location

approved by the Engineer; and
.5 maintain the humidity within the enclosure at or above 40 percent and install a
suitable measuring device, or employ wet curing terminated 12 hr. before the
termination of heating.
.6 Removal of forms, shores, and protection to conform to ACI 306, Tables 5.1.7 for the
structural concrete bearing load. Remove only after tests indicate sufficient concrete
strength and the release of the Engineer is obtained.
.7 At the termination of the protection period, do not drop the concrete temperature more
than 20°C. in the first 24 hr.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices included in Form
of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour, use of equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Work of this Section.
***END OF SECTION***
CN – DESIGN & EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING SECTION 02315
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
.1 This Section specifies the excavation, trenching, backfilling and compaction

requirements for the Work.
.8 Noise and Vibration Monitoring and Control Section 02202
.13 Dust Control Section 02362

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Contractor shall refer to the following Ontario Provincial Standard

Specifications (OPSS):

Materials;
.2 OPSS.PROV 206, Construction Specification for Grading;
.3 OPSS.PROV 401, Construction Specification for Trenching, Backfilling

and Compacting;
.4 OPSS.PROV 501, Construction Specification for Compacting;
.5 OPSS. PROV 514, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting;
.6 OPSD 802.010 Flexible Pipe, Embedment and Backfill, Earth Excavation

for trenching limits; and
.7 OPSS.PROV 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates - Base,

Subbase, Select Subgrade and Backfill Material.
.2 The Contractor shall refer to the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
.1 CAN/CGSB 8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series (March

1988).
.3 The Contractor shall refer to the following American Society of Testing and
Materials International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM C136/C136M-19, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine

and Coarse Aggregates;
.2 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-
m/m3)); and
.3 ASTM D4318-17e1, Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit
and Plasticity Index of Soils.
.4 The Contractor shall refer to the Technical Standards & Safety Authority (TSSA)
Guideline for Excavation in the Vicinity of Utility Lines.
.5 The Contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Reports attached to the tender
documents.
.6 The Contractor shall refer to the Soils Management Plan attached to the tender
documents.
to ensure excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting, meet the
.2 The Contractor shall engage in services of inspection and testing company in

accordance with the requirements in Section 01620 Quality Control and
Assurance to undertake required inspections, testing and undertake any other
work required in accordance with this Section.
.3 The Contractor shall retain the services of a Geotechnical Engineer to undertake

any work required in accordance with this Section as part of its scope under
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the frequency of tests conform to OPSS.PROV
501.
.5 The Contractor shall ensure proper compaction techniques and adherence to the
required densities in accordance with Section 01620 Quality Control and
Assurance and Section 02311 Site Grading.
.6 The Contractor shall perform all testing of materials and compaction. The
Contractor shall arrange all required tests and shall provide copies of all results,
including re-test of failed areas for review. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the re-testing of materials as required to restore defective areas.
.7 The Engineer may carry out their own quality assurance activities. These
activities will not relieve the Contractor in any way with respect to the accuracy of
the quality of the Contractor’s work.
.8 The Contractor shall cooperate with and assist the Engineer during inspections
and tests.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01340 Submittals and this Section:
.1 Source of Materials Report;
.2 Restoration Implementation Plan;
.3 Product Data of materials in this Section; and
.4 Inspection and Test Reports submittal, for all tests and inspections
performed by the Contractor’s inspection and testing company and its
Geotechnical Engineer in accordance with this Section.
.5 Work plan to excavate through the shoulder of the existing mainline

tracks.
.6 Work plan for working night shifts and throughout the weekends during
the track’s closure.
.1 The contractor shall stockpile the extra material in the allocated berms locations
in the Contract Drawings. The contractor shall use all stockpile fill and topsoil
materials placed within CN Rail Milton property between south Lower Base Line
Road to Derry Road.
.2 The Contractor shall execute the delivery, storage and handling of granular
materials in accordance with Section 02701 Granular Materials.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all materials are handled and transported in a
manner and with equipment that will avoid segregation, intermixing degradation,
and contamination by any deleterious material.
.4 The Contractor shall stockpile sites to be stripped, levelled, well-drained and

shall have the required bearing capacity and stability to support stockpiled
materials and handling equipment.
.5 The Contractor shall construct stockpiles on even surfaces.
.6 The Contractor shall protect stockpiled materials from traffic, degradation,

contamination by deleterious material, frost, freezing, and inclement weather.
.7 The Contractor shall provide protection to ensure stockpiled materials do not

exceed their allowable moisture content at time of their placement and
compaction.
.8 The Contractor shall reject intermixed, degraded, contaminated and frozen

materials, as well as any materials containing frost or exceeding their allowable
moisture content and that cannot be properly handled and placed when required.
.9 The Contractor shall remove rejected and excess material from the Site within 48
hours.
.10 The Contractor shall ensure that the management and disposal of excess
stockpile materials is in accordance with OPSS.PROV 180.
.11 The Contractor shall provide additional materials as required when stockpiled
materials take time to thaw or achieve their acceptable moisture content; and
shall ensure that additional materials that are un-segregated, not degraded, free
of contamination, frost and frozen material, and are at the correct moisture
content, ready for handling and placement.

1.8 DEFINITIONS
.1 Classification of excavated materials shall conform to OPSS.PROV 206.
.2 The following classes of materials shall be recognized:
.1 Common Material (CM) is defined as any material remaining on-site after

stripping has been performed. Common Material, Excavation refers to the
removal of such material as specified on the Contract Drawings. The
suitable Common Material shall be utilized for Construction where
specified. The suitable Common Material is specified in Part 2 Section 2.1
Materials of this Section. The Excavation of all materials including
hardpan, quicksand, frozen earth, rock, concrete or masonry less than 1.0
m3 in volume shall be classified as CM excavation;
.2 Earth means all soils except those defined as rock, and excludes stone
masonry, concrete, and manufactured materials;
.3 Rock excavation: excavation of material from solid rock formation, greater

than one (1) cubic yard in volume which can be removed only by drilling
and blasting:
.1 Rock shall not include glacial till or “hardpan” or layered rock in its
original location which, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be
ripped by a single rear-mounted tooth on a D-8 crawler-type
tractor rated at 265 drawbar H.P., or equivalent.
.4 Unsuitable material is defined as material the Engineer determines to be:
.1 Of such unstable nature as to be incapable of being compacted to

a specified density using ordinary methods;
.2 Too wet to be properly compacted and circumstances prevent

suitable in-place drying prior to incorporation into the Work;
.3 Frozen or containing ice particles;
.4 Containing organic, peat or other deleterious material; or
.5 Otherwise unsuitable for the planned use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 The Contractor shall provide the following materials:
.1 Granular “A” material or High-Performance Bedding (HPB) in accordance

with Section 02701 Granular Materials;
.2 Backfill-Native Material:
.1 Native material, subject to the requirements herein, is only

permitted for backfill, from the top of cover materials to the
underside of the profile grade for topsoil. Selected material from
Excavation, approved by the Contractor Independent
Geotechnical Engineer shall be unfrozen, free from rocks larger
than 150 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious
materials.
.3 Sand Fill:
.1 Sand fill shall be natural, coarse sand having clean, hard, strong,
grains free from lumps, soft or flaking particles, shale, clay,
organic matter and other deleterious substances and shall be from
a source that is reviewed in accordance with Section 01340
Submittals; and
.2 The gradation requirements are:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight

4.75 mm 100
2.36 mm 95-100
1.18 mm 60-100
0.60 mm 35-80
0.30 mm 15-50
0.15 mm 2-15
0.075 mm 0-5
.4 Unshrinkable fill (grout), if required, shall be a very weak mixture of

Portland Cement, concrete aggregate and water to 1.5 MPa strength.
2.2 SOURCE APPROVAL
.1 Source of Materials Report: The Contractor shall submit in accordance with

Section 01340 Submittals a Source of Materials Report for review at least 28
days prior to commencing production. The report shall include:
.1 The details for the proposed source of aggregates and imported fill. The
Contractor shall provide access for sampling and testing of quality of
material to the Engineer, if required;
.2 The Contractor shall submit information of the source of materials to be

incorporated into the Works or stockpiled; and
.3 Geotechnical laboratory test results for samples of the specified fill and
aggregates to be supplied under this Section. The Contractor shall submit
with a proposed source of Borrow material, analytical chemistry analysis
of the representative samples of the fill that determine the concentrations
of the chemical parameters contained in Table 1 of the “Soil,
Groundwater and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.I of the
Environmental Protection Act”.
.2 The Contractor acknowledges that if any materials from a proposed source do

not meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall locate an alternative
source or provide required test results to demonstrate that the material from the
source in question can be processed to meet the specified requirements. The
Contractor shall submit samples and the alternative source information or source
processing information for review in accordance with the requirements of this
Section and Section 01340 Submittals.
.3 If the Contractor proposes a change in materials source during the Works, the
Contractor shall advise the Engineer two weeks in advance of proposed change
to allow for sampling and testing.
.4 The Contractor acknowledges that the acceptance of a material at source does

not preclude future rejection if it is subsequently found to lack uniformity, or if it
fails to conform to requirements specified, or if its field performance is found to
be unsatisfactory. The Contractor is responsible for the removal and disposal of
all rejected material.
.5 The Contractor shall implement measures to avoid the introduction or spread of

invasive vegetation within site and taken into account Ontario Invasive Plant
Council's Clean Equipment Protocol for industry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 Examine site and geotechnical report to determine local conditions under which
the work will be undertaken.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES
.1 The Contractor shall remain within the Limits of Construction, as outlined in the
Contract Drawings.
.2 The Contractor shall consider that excavation for the new mainline will require to
encroach the shoulder of the existing live tracks for few sections. The contractor
shall consider excavating through the shoulder of the existing track shall be
undertaken during the night shift and tracks closure. The contractor shall submit
a request three months in advance to CN Rail to obtain the approval for track
closure prior proceeding the work. The contractor shall provide sufficient
manpower and equipment to complete the work within the limited period of the
tracks closure.
.3 Existing buried utilities and structures:
.1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated

are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed;
.2 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify Authorities having
jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and
structures. The Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction shall clearly
mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work;
.3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations;
.4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone
and other utilities and structures encountered. Obtain direction of the
Engineer before moving or otherwise disturbing utilities or structures; and
.5 Record location of maintained, rerouted and abandoned underground

lines.
.4 Protect existing trees, landscaping, benchmarks, buildings, pavement, signage,

signals, etc. which are to remain. If damaged, restore to original or better
condition unless directed otherwise.
3.3 DEWATERING
.1 Dewatering shall be conducted in accordance with Section 02140 Dewatering.
.2 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress.
.3 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run off.
.4 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or

any portion of work completed or under construction, and in conformance to all
environmental regulations.
.5 Continuously dewater the excavations to control surface runoff or perched water

table seepage for concreting and other work to be carried out in the dry condition.
.6 Submit for the Engineer’s review details of proposed dewatering methods, such
as dikes or well points.
3.4 EXCAVATION
.1 Excavate to lines, grades, locations, elevations and dimensions as indicated or

directed by the Engineer.
.2 Remove excavated material and other obstructions encountered during

excavation.
.3 Excavation must not interfere with normal 45° splay of bearing from bottom of
any footing or from the bottom of any tie of an in-service railroad track.
.4 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If
excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw.
.5 The contractor to refer to the typical sections in the Contract Drawings for the
excavation in the shoulder of the existing mainline tracks.
.6 In the event that human remains are encountered, construction activity in

proximity to these remains will be stopped immediately and mitigation measures
will be implemented by CN’s on-site Archaeologist in accordance with the
.7 For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer in writing, do

not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and
do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation.
.8 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material by removal and disposal

off-site.
.9 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses.
.10 Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or
organic matter.
.11 Notify the Engineer when bottom of excavation is reached.
.12 Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed
by the Engineer.
.13 Correct unauthorized over excavation as follows:
.1 Fill with Granular ‘B’ Type II material, compacted to 98% SPMDD, as

specified in Section 02701 Granular Materials.
.14 Hand trim make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations.
Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to
density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with
concrete mortar or grout to approval of the Engineer.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SOIL BY REMOVAL FROM RAILWAY

PROPERTY
.1 Disposal of unsuitable soil shall follow the Soils Management Plan.
.2 Prior to removal of unsuitable soil from any CN property, the Contractor must
prepare an Excess Soils Management Plan to be submitted following Section
01340 Submittals.
.3 CN will obtain bulk soil test analysis on all material to be disposed of, as well as
waste characterization analysis, if required, and results will be provided to the
Contractor. If the Contractor believes further retesting and/or characterization
analysis is requiring, they will do so at their own cost.
.4 Based on the results, the Contractor shall propose disposal sites, following the
requirements of OPSS 180 and CN’s Guideline for Management of Excess Soil
(Off-Site Disposal/Deposit in Ontario).
.5 For each proposed disposal site, the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer for
review:
.1 Landowner/Facility Names and civic addresses, or other property

descriptions (e.g. Lot and Concession, etc.) if addresses are unavailable;
.2 Expected quantity and source location of materials to be disposed of at

the site;
.3 Expected schedule for disposal; and
.4 Completed OPSS site selection form.
.6 Upon review and acceptance of the proposed disposal sites and accompanying
documentation:
.1 For disposal sites registered as licensed waste disposal facilities, the

Engineer will grant approval and authorize disposal to commence; and
.2 For disposal sites not registered as licensed waste disposal facilities (i.e.
industrial, commercial, residential, agricultural and similarly zoned
properties):
.1 CN will prepare an acceptance package for the disposal site and

provide to the Contractor;
.2 The Contractor shall provide the acceptance package to the

Landowner for review and signature;
.3 The Contractor shall return the signed acceptance package to the

Engineer; and
.4 The Engineer will grant approval and authorize disposal to

commence.
.7 The Engineer will not be responsible for any costs or delays associated with site
selection or approvals for soil disposal.
.8 Submit Transportation and Manifest documentation to the Engineer in

accordance with the requirements of O Reg. 347 General – Waste Management.
.9 Submit Soils Disposal Reports to the Engineer for all soil disposed of offsite at
non licensed waste disposal facilities; including:
.1 Landowner/Facility Names and civic address;
.2 Date of disposition;
.3 Quantity (bill of lading); and
.4 A record of the exact location where the soil is deposited at the Receiving
Site (This can include maps, photos, and/or surveyed information).
.10 If requested by CN, the Contractor should work with the Engineer to ensure any
other concerns CN has with the excess soil movement are properly addressed.
3.6 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES
.1 Place and compact granular bedding for all services, as shown on the drawings.
.2 Shape bedding to suit services.
.3 Cover (surround) to be Granular “A’ or “B” Type II, as shown on the Drawings.
.4 Place and compact surround in layers not exceeding 200 mm to 98%, ±2%
SMPDD for sewers and culverts.
.5 Place and compact backfill to haunches of pipe before continuing with cover
backfill.
.6 Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.
3.7 PLACING AND COMPACTION OF BACKFILL
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that backfilling for trenching for drainage pipes and
around manholes, catch basins, and ditch inlets conform to OPSS.PROV 401,
except as modified by the following:
.1 The Contractor shall not proceed with backfilling until its Geotechnical
Engineer has inspected and accepted installation of bedding, covers and
condition of subgrade in accordance with the Contract Documents;
.2 The Contractor shall place all material using methods that do not lead to
segregation or degradation;
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that areas to be backfilled are free from
debris, snow, ice, water and frozen materials;
.4 The Contractor shall remove and replace portion of the layers in which
material has become segregated during placement;
.5 The Contractor shall place backfill materials in uniform layers not

exceeding the following thickness before the compaction:
.1 Select fill: 300 mm;
.2 Granular "A": 200 mm;
.3 Granular "B": 200 mm; and

.4 Sand Fill: 200 mm.
.6 The Contractor shall ensure that its Geotechnical Engineer accepts each
compacted layer in accordance with the Contract Documents before
placing succeeding layers;
.7 The Contractor shall not backfill trenches until the piping, conduits and
cables therein have been inspected, tested, and accepted by inspection
authorities having jurisdiction;
.8 The Contractor shall shape each layer to a smooth contour and compact
to specified density before the next layer is placed;
.9 The Contractor shall place layers simultaneously on both sides of

structures to equalize the loading. The Contractor shall ensure that the
maximum difference in the thickness of the layers does not exceed 0.3m;
.10 The Contractor shall compact backfill materials to the following minimum
densities for backfill:
.1 Select fill: 98% Maximum Dry Density;
.2 Granular "A": 100% Maximum Dry Density;
.3 Granular "B": 100% Maximum Dry Density; and
.4 Sand Fill: 100% Maximum Dry Density.
.11 The Contractor shall ensure compaction operations do not cause

vibration and noise levels to exceed acceptable limits in accordance with
jurisdictional authorities and in accordance with Section 01560
Environmental Protection and Section 02202 Noise and Vibration
Monitoring and Control;
.12 The Contractor shall ensure that all field compaction testing by
Geotechnical Engineer on other similar backfill areas forms the basis of a
direct comparison of individual in-situ density tests the target density; and
.13 The Contractor shall ensure that backfilling of pits and trenches for
underground Utilities within the Rail Corridor and/or inside the railway
loading influence zone is compacted to 98% SPMDD at 150 mm loose
lifts of granular material acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer.
3.8 MANAGEMENT OF EXCESS SOILS – DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND

UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
.1 The Contractor shall refer to Section 02311 Site Grading.

3.9 WATER FOR COMPACTION
.1 The Contractor shall supply and utilize water for compaction in accordance with
OPSS.PROV 501.
3.10 INSULATION BOARDS
.1 The Contractor shall install Insulation Boards, DOW Styrofoam Brand Highload
100 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation or approved equal/alternative on top of all
storm sewer placed at depth less than 1.2 m from finish grade in accordance with
Section 02630.
.2 The Contractor shall protect the insulation board from damage.
.3 In drainage trenches, the Contractor shall place insulation board to the size and
location as shown on the Contract Drawings, with the joints butt tight.
3.11 TOLERANCES
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that excavating and trenching conform to

OPSS.PROV 206 and OPSS.PROV 401.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the finished subbase, base and backfill surfaces
are within 10mm of elevation as shown on the Contract Drawings.
3.12 RESTORATION
.1 Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and
correct defects as directed by the Engineer.
.2 Clean and reinstate areas affected by work as directed by the Engineer.
.3 Restoration shall also follow the Soils Management Plan.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be deemed incidental to and included
in the various lump sum and unit prices included in the Form of Tender, including
but not limited to all excavation regardless of the depth, disposal of surplus and
unsuitable material off site, bedding and backfill, temporary lighting, working night
shift and over the weekends to complete the work necessary to complete the

CN – DESIGN & STRUCTURAL EXCAVATIONS SECTION 02316
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 02316 specifies the requirements for excavating and backfilling for
structures, including dewatering.
.1 Condition Surveys Section 02203
.2 Temporary Railway Shoring Section 02368
.1 OPSS.PROV 501, Construction Specification for Compacting (November

.2 OPSS.PROV 510, Construction Specification for Removal (November 2014),

including all applicable references specified therein;
.3 OPSS.PROV 539, Construction Specification for Temporary Protection

Systems (November 2014), including all applicable references specified
therein;
.4 OPSS.PROV 902, Construction Specification for Excavating and Backfilling –

Structures (November 2019), including all applicable references specified
therein;
.5 OPSS.PROV 1004, Material Specification for Aggregates – Miscellaneous

.6 OPSS.PROV 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates – Base, Subbase,

Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material (April 2013), including all applicable
references specified therein; and
.7 OPSS.PROV 1860, Material Specification for Geotextiles (November 2019),

including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 Quality assurance for compaction of earth and granular materials shall be in

accordance with OPSS.PROV 501.
.2 Quality assurance for granular aggregate materials for use in backfill to structures
shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1010.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Preconstruction Survey
.1 Prior to commencing the work, a condition survey of property and structures

that may be affected by the work shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Section 02203 Condition Surveys. The survey shall include
the locations and conditions of adjacent properties, tracks, buildings,
underground structures, utility services and structures, such as walls abutting
the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 Dewatering
.1 Where dewatering is required, the Contractor shall be responsible for the

design of the dewatering system for the intended purpose.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Granular
.1 Granular material to be used for backfill, bedding and frost tapers shall be
according to OPSS.PROV 1010.
.2 The 19.0 mm clear stone to be used for wall drains shall be according to
OPSS.PROV 1004.
.2 Native Backfill
.1 Native and imported material shall be approved by the Engineer. All material
shall be free from frozen lumps, cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic
matter, rocks and boulders over 150 mm in any dimension, and other
deleterious material.
.3 Geotextile
.1 Geotextile shall be according to OPSS.PROV 1860 and be of the type, class

and filtration opening size (FOS) range specified in the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Compaction equipment shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 501.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Removals
.1 Removals shall be according to OPSS.PROV 510.
.2 Removal of Ice and Snow
.1 All ice and snow shall be removed from all portions of the work area before
any excavation and backfill operations proceed. Frozen materials shall not be
incorporated into the work. Material shall not be placed over frozen ground,
ice or snow.
.3 Temporary Railway Shoring
.1 Temporary railway shoring shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings

and Section 02368 Temporary Railway Shoring.
.4 Protection Systems
.1 Protection systems shall be according to OPSS.PROV 539.
.2 Protection systems shall be installed:

.1 Where the stability, safety or function of an existing structure,
roadway, railway or other facility can be impaired by an excavation or
temporary slope.
.2 To permit excavation where there is a necessity to retain the sidewalls
of an excavation and to permit dewatering by restricting water flow
and facilitating safe execution of the work.
.5 Dewatering Structure Excavation
.1 Until backfilling has been completed and to permit the placing of concrete in
the dry, all work necessary to control the flow of water into the excavation and
to prevent disturbance of the founding material shall be carried out.
.6 Excavation and Backfilling
.1 Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 902.
.7 Inspection for Dewatering, Excavation and Backfilling

.1 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the
commencement of dewatering of the excavation for the structure and
completion of the excavation for the foundation.
.2 The next operation after the completion of the excavation for the foundation
shall not proceed until a Notice to Proceed has been received from the
Engineer.
.3 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion of

the excavation for backfill and frost tapers and prior to the commencement of
backfilling of excavation.
.4 The next operation prior to the commencement of backfilling of excavation

shall not proceed until a Notice to Proceed has been received from the
Engineer.
.8 Management of Excess Material
.1 Management of excess materials shall be according to the Contract

Documents.
.1 Excavation for Structure
.1 Measurement of earth or rock excavation for structure shall be by volume in

cubic meters.
.2 Measurement of excavation for footings shall be based on the neat horizontal

dimensions of the footing to the depth of the bottom of the footing, working
slab or granular pad.
.3 Except as noted below, the quantity of excavation shall include only the
quantities below the designated payment surface within the neat lines
specified in the Contract Documents.
.4 The above measurement also includes:

.1 Removal of asphalt pavement, except where there is a separate
tender item for pavement removal that includes pavement overlapping
the area of structure excavation.
.2 The excavation quantities, below the designated payment surface,
required for placing granular backfill and granular frost tapers.
.3 For open footing culverts, the excavation quantities as measured
below the designated payment surface but between the plan areas of
the footings and above the stream bed or the tops of the footings,
whichever is higher.
.5 Where the structure excavation overlaps excavation required for other work,
the measurement shall be made as specified in the Contract Documents with
no deductions for overlap.
.6 The volume of boulders in an excavation shall be calculated from the three

maximum rectilinear dimensions. The following provisions shall apply:
.1 Only the amount removed shall be considered for payment.
.2 The volume of the boulders removed shall be deducted from the
volume of excavation as calculated above.
.7 The measurement of the total volume of materials considered for payment

shall not exceed the calculated volume of excavation within the theoretical
lines.
.2 Granular Backfill
.1 Measurement for payment of granular backfill shall be by volume in cubic

meters or tonnes as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 The quantity of granular backfill and granular bedding shall include only those
quantities measured below the subgrade and as measured within the
theoretical line and grades specified in the Contract Documents.
.3 Where the Contractor has excavated beyond the limits specified in the
Contract Documents, the conversion factor 2 t/m3 shall be used in
measurement of the excess volume when it is replaced with granular on a
tonnage basis.
.4 The weighing of granular material supplied on a tonnage basis shall be

according to the Contract Documents.
.1 Earth Excavation for Structure
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the Earth Excavation for Structure tender
item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.2 When the Engineer requests excavation for concrete working slabs, granular
working pads, or granular bedding, payment shall be at the Contract price for
the type of excavation required.
.2 Dewatering Structure Excavations
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the Dewatering Structure Excavations

tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials
to do the work.
.3 Granular Backfill to Structure

.1 Payment at the Contract price for the Granular Backfill to Structure tender
item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.2 When the Contract Documents do not include a separate item for granular
backfill to structure, the Contract price for the items directly associated with
the granular backfill to structure shall be full compensation for all labour,
equipment and materials required to do the work.
.4 Overexcavation
.1 No payment shall be made for overexcavation that has not been approved by
the Engineer or for backfill restoration of such overexcavation.

CN – DESIGN & GEOGRID AND GEOTEXTILES SECTION 02340
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the geosynthetic soil stabilization requirements for the
Works.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 ASTM D4439-18, Terminology for Geotextiles;
.2 ASTM D4595-17, Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by

the Wide-Width Strip Method;
.3 ASTM D4759-11 (2018), Practice for Determining the Specification

Conformance of Geotextiles;
.4 ASTM D4873M-17, Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of

Geotextiles;
.5 ASTM D5262-07(2016), Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined

Tension Creep Behavior of Geotextiles;
.6 ASTM D5321/D5321M-19, Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of
Soil and Geotextile or Geotextile and Geotextile Friction by the Direct
Shear Method; and
.7 ASTM D6637/D6637M-15, Standard Test Method for Determining the

Tensile Properties of Geogrids by the Single Rib or Multi-Rib Tensile
Method.
.1 OPSS.PROV 206, Construction Specification for Grading, except as

indicated below.
.3 Project Geotechnical Report.
program to ensure that the geosynthetic soil stabilization meets the requirements
of this Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 Manufacturer Qualifications by Geosynthetic Accreditation Institute (GAI)-

Laboratory Accreditation Program (LAP).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with Section
01340 Submittals and this Section, at least four weeks prior to commencing the
work:
.1 Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization – Product Data and Test Results,

providing the manufacturer’s data sheets and test results for the Products
used.
.1 Geotextile labeling, shipment, and storage shall follow ASTM D 4873. Product
labels shall clearly show the manufacturer or supplier name, style name, and
roll number.
.2 Each geotextile roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the
geotextile from damage due to shipment, water, sunlight, and contaminants.
.3 During storage, elevate and cover geotextile rolls to protect them from the
following: site construction damage, precipitation, extended ultraviolet radiation
including sunlight, chemicals, flames including welding sparks, excess
temperatures, and any other environmental conditions that may damage the
physical property values of the geotextile.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Non-woven geotextile with an Apparent Opening Size (AOS) of <0.15 mm

(ASTM D4751) and a grab tensile strength of >1.3 kN (ASTM D4632).
Acceptable products are Terrafix 270R or approved equivalent.
.2 Geogrid Terrafix TBX3000, or an equivalent biaxial geogrid that meets or

exceeds minimum physical properties.
.3 Erosion Control Blankets - geotechnical biodegradable matting (non-

plastic) – Terrafix Coir Mats 700
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall excavate the subgrade to the line and grades as shown on
the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall fill over-excavated areas with
compacted recycled concrete material in accordance with Sections 02311 Site
Grading and 02315 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. At a minimum, the
Contractor shall proof roll foundation soil to backfill the geosynthetic placement.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Geotextile shall be placed as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by

the Engineer.
.2 Geotextile may be temporarily secured in place with staples, pins, sandbags or

backfill as required by fill properties, fill placement procedure or weather
conditions or as directed by the Engineer.
.3 Geotextile shall be overlapped as recommended by the Manufacturer and

connected mechanically to form splices.
.4 Backfill material shall be placed in lifts and compacted as directed under project
specifications. Backfill shall be placed, spread and compacted in such a manner
as to minimize the development of wrinkles in and/or movement of the geotextile.
A minimum fill thickness of 150 mm (6in) is required prior to the operation of
tracked vehicles over the geotextile.
.5 Turning of tracked vehicles should be kept to a minimum to prevent tracks from
displacing the fill and damaging the geotextile. Rubber-tired equipment may pass
over the geotextile reinforcement at low speeds, less than 16 km/hr (10 mph).
.6 Sudden braking and sharp turns shall be avoided. Any geotextile damaged
during installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to CN.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement and payment for work of this Section will be based on field
measurement, in square meters (m2), of the product properly installed as directed
by the geotechnical engineer on site, with no allowance for waste, side overlap or
side splices.
4.2 PAYMENT
Section.

CN – DESIGN & TRAFFIC CONTROL SECTION 02350
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the traffic control requirements for the Works, including:
.1 Supply, place and maintenance of temporary traffic control devices as

required for the Works, in accordance with the Ontario Traffic Manual,
Book 7;
.2 Traffic control, including a road detour, if necessary, for the reconstruction

of track crossings as indicated on the Contract Drawings;
.3 Traffic control at construction accesses and laydown areas, as required.

The contractor shall ensure all construction accesses at the main roads
are protected by temporary traffic control devices and traffic control
personnel at all times. The contractor is responsible for the safety of all
vehicles and equipment entering or exiting the site through the
construction accesses.
.4 Installation of new traffic signs (WC-4, etc.) and signposts as required

upon completion of the Works, and restoration of the Site to its original
condition, in accordance to the Contract Drawings;
.5 Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive traffic management plan for

the construction access to the site from Derry Road, Britannia Road and
Terminate Road. The plan shall be prepared two (2) months prior to
proceeding to use the access. The Contractor shall submit the plan to
Town of Milton for review and approval;
.6 Coordinate and retain the services of a paid duty police officer, as

required by the Contractor; and
.7 All other traffic control measures are required to complete the Works.

.5 Winter Work Section 02312
.1 OPSS.PROV 723, Construction Specification for Energy Attenuators.
.2 Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM) – Book 7 – Temporary Conditions (January 2014).
.3 Transport Canada, Grade Crossings Standards – January 2019.
.4 Transport Canada, Pedestrian Safety at Grade Crossing Guide (2009)
.5 Highway Traffic Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. H.8.
.6 Load restrictions:
.1 MTO: http://www.mto.gov.on.ca; and
.2 Town of Milton: http://www.milton.ca.
to ensure that all traffic control for the Works meets the requirements of the
Specifications, in accordance with Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 The Contractor shall retain services of a Traffic Engineer in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance, for preparing
submittals and undertake any other work required in accordance with this
Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Prior to commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall provide a

Construction Traffic Management Plan to the Engineer for review in accordance
with Section 01340 Submittals. The Construction Traffic Management Plan shall
include the following:
.1 The identification of Limits of Construction, all hazards and all measures

required to protect the workers on Site. The Contractor shall ensure that
the Construction Traffic Management Plan protects everyone, that is
associated with the Project and ensures public safety;
.2 The identification of routes to be used on municipal/regional roads,

including entrance and exit points to and from the Site;
.3 The Contractor shall verify that all load restrictions are accommodated
within their plans. The Contractor shall design traffic safety into work
zones and shall provide for safety, mobility, advanced warning and
positive guidance for traffic and pedestrian movement and
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Construction Traffic Management

Plan remains on Site at all times for inspection by the regulating
authorities.
.2 The Contractor shall obtain all required road occupancy permits for the Project,
prior to the commencement of any work within its jurisdiction in accordance with
this Section and Section 01340 Submittals.
1.6 STAGING PLANS AND CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that for each stage of construction, lane diversion or
alteration in the traffic control setup, a detailed Construction Traffic Management
Plan is provided for review before commencing the Works and shall maintain a
copy on Site during construction. The Construction Traffic Management Plan
shall:
.1 Encompass all component areas of the temporary work zone including

Limits of Construction and necessary approach routes outside of the
temporary work zone to incorporate advance signs;
.2 Consist of drawings prepared in accordance with the Contract

Documents, indicating all key dimensions, streets labelled with names,
and vehicle access gate locations;
.3 Identify curb line, sidewalks, property lines, and any Existing Third-Party
Infrastructure adjacent to the Site on the drawings;
.4 Indicate the vehicle movements entering and exiting the Site on the
drawings and identify the types of vehicles expected;
.5 Indicate the type and location of all temporary construction signs,

advance warning signs, delineators, barricades, flashers, temporary
pavement markings, the position of traffic control persons and detour
route for in accordance with Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7 – Temporary
Conditions for any road closure;
.6 Show all available vehicle lanes and widths, pedestrian walkways,

construction vehicle access, egress routes, emergency routes, local
access availability in accordance with Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7 –
Temporary Conditions; and
.7 Identify any impacts to nearby properties including driveways and traffic

street signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall supply, place and maintain all barricades, warning signs,
delineators, temporary concrete barriers and flashing lights required for the
protection of the public and the Works, including warning signs of construction
operations maintained at both ends of the work zone, in accordance with the
Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7 – Temporary Conditions.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all signs, flashers, barricades, temporary
concrete barriers, and delineators are cleaned and maintained throughout the
duration of the Project. The Contractor shall use either flexible drums (TC-54) or
construction markers (TC-52) with flashers for delineation in accordance with
Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7 – Temporary Conditions. The Contractor
acknowledges that no other material will be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROAD CLOSURE AND DETOUR
.1 The Contractor shall not close any lanes of the road without written approval from
the Engineer. Before re-routing traffic, The Contractor shall erect suitable signs
and devices in accordance with instructions contained in the Ontario Traffic
Manual, Book 7 – Temporary Conditions.
.2 The Contractor shall install advanced notification/warning/detour route (TC-64)

signs a minimum of two weeks in advance of the closure, identifying the time and
location of the closure. The Contractor shall assume that a minimum of five TC-
64 signs will be required for each detour.
.3 The Contractor shall prepare notices for any closures in accordance with CN’s
Communications Protocol. All public and municipal notification will be completed
by CN.
.4 The Contractor shall restore roadways in accordance with the Municipal

Standards after removal of the road detour and entrance widenings.
.5 The Contractor shall carry out snow and ice removal (including all de-icing
required to remove ice patches, freezing rain, and snow accumulation, etc.)
within the construction zone for the safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians:
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all areas are in bare pavement condition
with painted lines visible and
.2 De-icing shall be done in accordance with Section 02312 Winter Work.
.6 The Contractor shall coordinate the closure and signage within the limits of the
Project with CN, the Engineer and the Town of Milton.
.7 The Contractor shall coordinate the closure and signage within the limits of the
Project with the Engineer.
.8 The Contractor shall comply with the Town of Milton, municipal, firefighting,
ambulance service and Police Service regulations relating to notifications for
road or lane closures that may be used by emergency vehicles, within the limits
of the Project.
3.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL PERSONS, SIGNS, BARRICADES.
.1 The contractor shall provide a traffic control flagger/person at the entrance/exit of

the site access road to public roads as needed for large deliveries/granular
deliveries/ etc.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the Construction Traffic Management Plan is in
conformance with the procedure outlined in the pamphlet entitled “Correct
Methods for Traffic Control” issued by the Construction Safety Associations of
Ontario.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that each traffic control person wears high visibility
safety apparel in accordance with the Ontario Traffic Manual – Book 7 –
Temporary Conditions.
.4 The Contractor shall provide, place in service, maintain and then remove all of
the traffic control devices required by the Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7 -
Temporary Conditions for all temporary traffic control issues for both short and
long term durations. The Contractor shall ensure that all the required devices are
readily available on Site at all times to meet the requirements of this Section.
.5 The Contractor shall advise of the rough surface, raise maintenance covers, steel
plates and narrow lanes for motor vehicles, bicycles and pedestrians on all
approaches within areas of the Site.
.6 The Contractor daily shall:
.1 Confirm the traffic control devices in-use for legibility, damages,

suitability, and location; and
.2 Remove signs which do not apply to the Site conditions.

.7 The Contractor acknowledges that the maintenance of Construction Traffic
Management Plan is a continuous 24 hours a day obligation. The Contractor
shall provide a named contact(s) who will be available 24 hours a day,
throughout the duration of the Project.
3.3 REFLECTIVITY REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Contractor acknowledges the requirements of OHSA Reg. 213/91 Section

67, 68 and 69 regarding traffic control measures, TC-22 Stop/Slow paddles,
traffic control persons, and worker clothing.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all nylon vests are in accordance with OHSA
Reg 213/91 Section 67, 68, and 69.
3.4 TRAFFIC CONDITIONS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary construction and maintenance is
in accordance with the Town of Milton and reviewed Submittals of this Section.
.2 The Contractor shall correct Non-Conformances within 24 hours of receipt of any

such Non-Conformance notification from the Engineer. Repairs shall be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
.3 The Engineer reserves the right to retain a qualified contractor to complete any
repairs that have not been initiated by the Contractor within 24 hours of written
notification. All costs for such repairs shall be borne by the Contractor.
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that all new traffic signs are installed, and all new
markings are painted prior to the reopening of the road to traffic in accordance
with the Drawings.
3.5 OPEN EXCAVATION
.1 The Contractor shall schedule work so that there is no open excavation adjacent
to a lane carrying traffic overnight and on non-working days.
.2 The Contractor acknowledges that no excavations are allowed within 4m of lanes

carrying traffic, unless protected by a concrete barrier with a fence.
3.6 LOCATION AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1 The Contractor shall not store materials within 4m of the travelled portion of any
roadway.
.2 The Contractor shall not store equipment within 4m of the travelled portion of any
roadway.
.3 The Contractor shall remove any equipment or material which constitutes a traffic
hazard.
3.7 DELIVERY AND TRUCKING
.1 The Contractor shall plan and schedule the routes of vehicles transporting all
materials to, from or within the Site so that vehicular movements are
accomplished with minimum interference and interruptions to traffic and in
accordance with the Construction Traffic Management Plan.
.2 The Contractor shall notify suppliers of materials and equipment of the above
requirements.
.3 The Contractor shall verify all restrictions as defined under Highway Traffic Act,
R.S.O. 1990, c. H.8.
3.8 SIGNAGE
.1 The Contractor shall install the signage in accordance to the signage drawings.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 No measurement. for payment will be made for work of this Section.
4.2 PAYMENT
materials and equipment required to design, supply, place, maintain and remove
traffic control system, as called for in this Section.

CN – DESIGN & DUST & MUD CONTROL SECTION 02362
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the dust and mud control requirements for the works.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.PROV 501, Construction Specification for Compacting;
.2 OPSS.MUNI 506, Construction Specification for Dust Suppressants; and
.3 OPSS.MUNI 2501, Material Specification for Calcium Chloride.
.2 Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 903.
.3 Environmental Protection Act (Ontario), R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19.
program to ensure that the dust and mud control meets the requirements of this
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit Product Data for the non-chloride chemical dust
suppressant for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340
Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 The Contractor shall use water as a dust suppressant. The Contractor may use a
non-chloride-based chemical dust suppressant where the application of water is
not suitable.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the water supplied conforms to OPSS.PROV
501 and OPSS.MUNI 506.
.3 The use of any salts or salt solutions is prohibited.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUST & MUD CONTROL
.1 The Contractor must take such steps as may be required to prevent dust
nuisance resulting from they operations. The Contractor must implement an Air
Quality Best Management Practice Plan in accordance with the Environmental
Protection Plan and 01340 Submittals:
.1 Temporary access routes and parking lots during construction will be

graveled to reduce dust emissions relative to travelling over the soil; and
.2 To control fugitive dust emissions, the Contractor shall implement dust

control measures, including:
.1 The use of dust suppressants (i.e., water or other approved
materials) with the least potential for adverse environmental
effects;
.2 Avoiding handling of non-enclosed granular materials during
sustained high wind conditions unless not technically feasible;
.3 Minimizing activities that generate large quantities of dust during
high winds;
.4 Covering or enclosing sources of granular materials stored in
open containers within the Site;
.5 Covering truckloads of materials which could generate dust (as
necessary);
.6 Covering or wetting materials stored on-site to prevent blowing
dust and paving areas as required;
.7 Managing temporary and permanent roads and parking lots
located within the Site in a manner that reduces fugitive dust
emissions from dirt surfaces, including through paving and the
removal of loose materials on road surfaces within the Site and
adjacent public roads using street sweepers or similar equipment
as required;
.8 Establish a 30 km/h speed limit on roads within the Site and
require all staff on-site to abide by this speed limit; and
.9 Install a windsock on site to monitor wind speeds and direction.
.2 The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring all dirt and mud that is tracked
onto the roadways from vehicles entering or leaving the Site is regularly cleaned
from the roadways. The Contractor must, upon request from the Engineer, CN’s
Environmental Monitor, CN complaint process or their consultant, immediately
proceed with clean-up operation at their expense using street sweepers or similar
equipment, or if in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has not removed or
cannot sufficiently remove the mud from the road, the Engineer will proceed with
the necessary clean up with all costs being charged to the Contractor.
.3 The Contractor shall design, supply, install and remove mud mats at all
construction accesses:
.1 The Contractor shall place a gravel pad or an equivalent pre-approved

product at the planned entrance to the worksite;
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the gravel pad is a minimum of 15

meters in length and can accommodate the longest anticipated vehicle
entering or exiting the Site;
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the gravel pad is a minimum of 3.6
meters in width and can accommodate the widest anticipated vehicle
entering or exiting the Site;
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the gravel pad is a minimum of 0.3
meters in depth and comprises a 50 mm to 150 mm diameter coarse
aggregate placed on top of woven geotextile filter fabric;
.5 The Contractor shall incorporate a water supply with a pump system to

wash vehicle undercarriages and wheels at a designated location;
.6 The Contractor shall install a temporary sediment control (such as silt

fibre rolls or silt fences) to control washed-off sediment from the gravel
pad;
.7 The Contractor shall ensure that positive drainage is provided at the mud
mat locations;
.8 The Contractor shall remove the mud mat upon completion of the Work;
and
.9 The Contractor shall provide a truck sweeper at all roads where the
construction accesses are located and shall ensure that the roads leading
to the working areas are clean at all times.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for Work of this Section shall be deemed incidental and included in the
various lump sum and unit priced included in the Form of Tender.

CN – DESIGN & TEMPORARY RAILWAY SHORING SECTION 02368
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 02368 specifies the requirements for the construction, maintenance,
monitoring and removal of the Owner designed temporary railway shoring made
necessary by excavation, embankment construction, dewatering, or other work.
.3 Structural Excavations Section 02316
.4 Concrete Caissons Section 02384
.6 Structural Steel Section 05120
.1 Canadian National Railway (CN):
.1 Guidelines for Design of Railway Structures (January 2006), including all

applicable references specified therein; and
.2 Design Criteria for the Shoring Walls submitted by the Consultant/Contractor

(November 2011), including all applicable references specified therein.
.2 American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
.1 Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 28, Article 28.5.4
(2020), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 OPSS.PROV 539, Construction Specification for Temporary Protection

Systems (November 2014), including all applicable references specified
therein;
.2 OPSS.PROV 942, Construction Specification for Prestressed Soil and Rock
Anchors (April 2020), including all applicable references specified therein;
and
.3 OPSS.PROV 1601, Material Specification for Wood, Preservative Treatment,

and Shop Fabrication (November 2014), including all applicable references
specified therein.
.1 General
.1 In addition to the quality control measures instituted by the Contractor, the

Contractor shall complete a preconstruction condition survey and monitor the
temporary railway shoring installation as specified in this Section 02368, and
as shown on the Shop Drawings.
.2 Inspection of Welds
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for visual inspection of all welds. Any
required testing of welds shall be as specified by the Engineer.
.3 Monitoring
.1 General
.1 Monitoring shall be conducted by a Registered Ontario Land Surveyor
or an engineer in accordance with Section 02201 Construction
Monitoring.
.2 The minimum requirements for monitoring shall include the survey
measurements of scaled targets attached to the shoring wall at the
elevations specified. The scaled targets shall be placed at a maximum
spacing of 6 m with targets placed at the extreme ends and the
targets distributed between the outer limits. The survey targets shall
be monitored for horizontal displacement from the vertical at the
frequency specified.
.3 All test results, observations, and records, including the
preconstruction survey, taken during construction and operation of the
temporary railway shoring shall be available on the site for review by
the Engineer.
.4 If movement of the temporary railway shoring approaches the
allowable limit, the Engineer shall be notified immediately and suitable
measures shall be taken to ensure stability of the temporary railway
shoring and to ensure movement does not exceed the performance
level specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 The temporary railway shoring shall be monitored during construction.

Readings shall be taken during installation of the temporary railway shoring at
the top, at each restraint point, at the dredge line, and halfway between the
restraint points at each construction stage during the installation of the
temporary railway shoring. After installation, the above readings shall be
taken weekly.
.4 Inspection of Temporary Railway Shoring
.1 The Contractor’s engineer shall inspect the following work:

.1 Layout and extent of temporary railway shoring.
.2 Piling.
.3 Installation of temporary railway shoring, including excavation to
dredge line.
.4 Removal of temporary railway shoring.
.2 The Contractor’s engineer shall inspect and verify that the materials have
been supplied and installed according to the Contract Documents. A
Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer upon
completion of the installation of the materials.
.3 The Contractor’s engineer shall inspect and verify that the temporary railway
shoring was installed, monitored, and subsequently removed according to the
Contract Documents. A Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the
Engineer upon completion of the removal of the temporary railway shoring.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings
.1 At least 14 days prior to commencement of the temporary railway shoring

installation, three sets of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer
for information purposes. Prior to making a submission, the seal and
signature of the Contractor’s engineer shall be affixed on the Shop Drawings
verifying that the drawings are consistent with the Contract Documents.
.2 Prestressed anchor submissions shall be according to OPSS.PROV 942.
.3 The Contractor shall have a copy of the Shop Drawings at the site during
temporary railway shoring installation.
.4 The following information and details shall be shown on the Shop Drawings:
.1 Plans, Elevations and Details
.1 Location of temporary railway shoring, including subdivision
and mileage limits.
.2 Plan and elevation of shoring showing the extent of the
temporary railway shoring.
.3 Details of the shoring system, including cross-sections.
.4 Details of internal bracing.
.2 Design Criteria
.1 Pressure diagrams including values of horizontal and vertical
loads, dead load, and live load surcharge.
.2 Design assumptions and parameters.
.3 Anchor bond stresses.
.4 Pile design.
.5 Anchor system stressing schedule specifying working loads,
stressing loads, and lock in loads.
.6 Details of preload, when required.
.7 Performance level.
.3 Materials:
.1 Grade of structural steel and grade of species of structural
wood.
.2 Concrete strengths.
.3 Grout strengths.
.4 Details of protection from rain and frost action.
.5 Wood lagging and size.
.6 Mill certificates or test reports from an independent
organization certified by the Standards Council of Canada
certifying that the steel meets the requirements of the grade,
where specified.
.7 Details of patented accessories, including load test data.
.4 Installation Procedure:
.1 Installation sequence and procedure, including to the
installation of piling, lagging, anchor systems, and rakers.
.5 Monitoring Method:
.1 The proposed method of monitoring the performance of the
temporary railway shoring during installation and use. The
method of monitoring shall be consistent with the requirements
specified in the Quality Control subsection of this Section
02368.
.6 Removal of Temporary Railway Shoring:
.1 The details of the procedures associated with the removal of
the temporary railway shoring, indicating: method, sequence of
work, and removal limits, except when the temporary railway
shoring is specified in the Contract Documents to be left in
place.
.2 Amendments to Temporary Railway Shoring
.1 Work shall not proceed on amendments to the temporary railway shoring until
the Contractor has received sealed and signed approval to proceed from the
Contractor’s engineer and has submitted a copy of the approval to the
Engineer.
.2 Amendments to the temporary railway shoring shall be submitted to the

Engineer on revised Shop Drawings bearing the seal and signature of the
Contractor’s engineer.
.1 Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
condition survey of property and structures that may be affected by the work
in accordance with Section 02203 Condition Surveys. The survey shall
include the locations and conditions of adjacent properties, tracks, buildings,
the site within a horizontal distance of 2Hw from the face of the temporary
railway shoring, where Hw is the height of the wall from the ground surface to
the dredge line.
.4 Mill Test Certificates
.1 Mill test certificate submissions shall be according to Section 05120

Structural Steel.
.5 Concrete Mix Design
.1 Concrete mix design submissions shall be according to Section 03312

Concrete Work.
.6 Milestone Inspections
.1 The Contractor’s engineer shall witness interim inspections of the following

work:
.1 Layout and extent of temporary railway shoring.
.2 Piling.
.3 Installation of temporary railway shoring, including excavation to
dredge line.
.4 Removal of temporary railway shoring.
.2 A copy of the written permission to proceed shall be submitted to the

Engineer prior to commencement of the successive operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 Design shall be in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, except
as modified and supplemented by CN Guidelines for Design of Railway Structures
and CN Design Criteria for the Shoring Walls submitted by the
Consultant/Contractor.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03312 Concrete Work.
.2 Structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05120 Structural Steel.
.3 Wood shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1601.
.4 Prestressed anchor materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 942.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Equipment for installation, testing and monitoring of prestressed anchors in soil and
rock shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 942.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Construction, maintenance, monitoring and removal of temporary railway shoring

.2 Fabrication, installation, testing and monitoring of pre-production and production test

anchors, and production anchors shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 942.
.3 Management of excess materials shall be in accordance with the Contract

Documents.
.1 No measurement of temporary railway shoring shall be made.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the temporary railway shoring tender items shall be
full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do the work.

CN – DESIGN & RIP RAP SECTION 02372
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for rip rap for the Work.
.8 Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling Section 02315
.9 Subdrainage Section 02620
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.PROV 511, Construction Specification for Rip-Rap. Rock

Protection and Gravel Sheeting;
.2 OPSS 1004 Aggregates – Miscellaneous; and
.3 OPSS.PROV1860 Material Specification for Geotextiles
.1 OPSD 810.010 General Rip-Rap Layout for Sewer and Culvert Outlets.
.1 ASTM D4595-17, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of

Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method. Canadian General Standards
Board (CGSB).
.4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
.1 CAN/CGSB 148.1, No. 3-M85, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics and

Geomembranes; and
.2 CAN/CGSB 148.1, No. 3-M85, Methods of Testing Geotextiles and

Geomembranes – Thickness of Geotextiles.
to ensure that the rip rap for the work meet the requirements of this Section and
1.5 SUBMITTALS
with the requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Sample for Rip Rap. The sample shall represent the material that will be
supplied by the Contractor; and
.2 Product Data and Sample for Geotextile submittal, including the Product
Data, technical information, a sample for geotextile and copies of test
reports.
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Inform the Engineer of the proposed source of material and provide access for
sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing production.
.2 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, materials from the proposed source do not
meet, or cannot reasonably be processed to meet, specified requirements, locate
an alternative source or demonstrate that material from the source in question
can be processed to meet specified requirements. Acceptance of material at
source does not preclude future rejection if it fails to conform to requirements
specified, lacks uniformity, or if its field performance is found to be unsatisfactory.
.1 Protect geotextile from adverse weather conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RIP-RAP
.1 This specification covers the requirements for the placing of rock protection at the
locations specified in the contract drawings for median stone sizes (D50) listed in
Table 1. In addition, this table includes the rock gradation associated with the
D50 for all the locations and identifies the rock gradation that follows the
specifications outlined in OPSS 1004, November 2012.
Table 1: Summary of Riprap Sizes and Gradation
D50 (mm) Rock Gradation Remark
Corresponds to gradation R-10

125 See Table 2a taken from Table 8 in OPSS
1004
Modified based on D50 size to
150 See Table 2b conform with gradation of R-10
(Table 8 in OPSS 1004)
300 See Table 3 in Section 2.2
Table 2a: Rock Gradation for Rock Protection (D50 = 125 mm)
Size Percentage
(mm) Passing (%)
180 100
155 70 - 90
125 40 - 55
60 0 - 15
Table 2b: Rock Gradation for Rock Protection (D50 = 150 mm)
Size Percentage
(mm) Passing (%)
225 100
188 70 - 90
150 40 - 55
75 0 - 15
2.2 RIPRAP – SPECIAL PROVISION
.1 Scope:
.1 This special provision covers the requirements for the placement of riprap
with D50=300 mm and D50=400 mm, at the locations specified in Contract
Drawings.
.2 Materials:
.1 The rock shall be hard, dense with relative density not less than 2.65,
durable quarry stone, free from seams, cracks or other structural defects
and well graded;
.2 The riprap shall be well graded and shall meet the gradation requirements
shown in the following tables:
Table 3: Rock Gradation for Rock Protection (D50 = 300 mm)
Size Percentage Passing

(mm) (%)
400 100
300 45-60
200 35-40
100 20-35
26.5 0-15
Table 4: Rock Gradation for Rock Protection (D50 = 400 mm)
Size Percentage Passing

(mm) (%)
500 100
400 45-60
200 35-40
100 20-35
26.5 0-15
.3 Installation:
.1 Blend riprap in accordance with the gradation as specified in Tables 2, 3

and 4;
.2 Place riprap according to the details provided in the Contract Drawings;
.3 Ensure a smooth transition where riprap will be placed adjacent to a

watercourse to match the existing up and downstream channel sections;
and
.4 The placement and gradation of the riprap shall be completed to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.3 RIVERSTONE PROTECTION
.1 This specification covers the requirements for the placing of riverstone rock
protection at the locations specified in the contract drawings that are listed in
Table 5. In addition, this table includes the rock gradation associated with the
D50 for all the locations and identifies the rock gradation that follows the
specifications outlined in OPSS 1005, November 2014.
Table 5: Summary of Riverstone protection locations in project area

D50 (mm) Dmax (mm) Rock Gradation Remark
It corresponds to gradation
200 300 See Table 6 SB-200 taken from Table 3
in OPSS 1005, Nov. 2014
Table 6: Rock Gradation for Riverstone Rock Protection (D50 = 200 mm)
Mass % Less than Mass

(kg) specified
16 100
7 40-60
2 0-10
3.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement of Payment for the riprap placement shall be by cubic meter (m3),
including all equipment, materials and labour.
3.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment at the contract price for the above tender item shall be full
compensation for all labour, equipment and materials required to complete the
work.

CN – DESIGN & STEEL H-PILES SECTION 02383
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 02383 specifies the requirements for the supply and installation of
driven steel H-piles.
.1 OPSS.PROV 903, Construction Specification for Deep Foundations (April

2016), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 CSA G40.20-04/G40.21-04 (R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or

Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel;
.2 CSA W47.1-03 (R2008), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of

Steel; and
.3 CSA W59-03 (R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.1 ASTM A572/A572M-18, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy

Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel;
.2 ASTM A913/A913M-19, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy

Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-
Tempering Process (QST);
.3 ASTM D1143/D1143M-07, Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations

under Static Axial Compressive Load;
.4 ASTM D3689-07, Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations under Static
Axial Tensile Load; and
.5 ASTM D3966-07, Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations under
Lateral Loads.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 903 with the following
additions and amendments:
.1 Clause 903.07.08.01.01 of OPSS.PROV 903 is deleted in its entirety.
.2 Clause 903.07.08.01.02 of OPSS.PROV 903 is deleted in its entirety and

replaced with the following:
.1 Complete access to visually inspect the welds shall be given to the
Engineer.
.2 All welds shall conform with the requirements of CSA W59 and the
Contract Documents. A representative sample of splice welds, not
less than 30%, shall be selected by the Engineer for visual inspection.
The sample of splice welds shall be taken from different piles.
.3 If the sample of splice welds do not pass the visual inspection and
need to be repaired, the visual inspection by the Engineer may be
increased up to 100% of the welds.

.1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing, 48 hours in advance of
installing piles, which will require weld splicing. The Engineer shall be
immediately notified in writing if there are any schedule changes for
each pile requiring weld splicing.
.2 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer after the
completion of splice welds for each construction stage of work.
.3 The next operation shall not proceed until a Notice to Proceed has
been received from the Engineer.
.4 Radiographic or ultrasonic testing shall be carried out by the Engineer
using procedures according to CSA W59.
.5 Ultrasonic or radiographic testing shall be carried out on the entire
length of selected splice welds chosen at random by the Engineer.
.6 The welds selected for the random ultrasonic or radiographic testing
shall be taken from different piles and shall include 10% of the splice
welds, rounded to the next highest number, but no fewer than two.
.7 If any welds do not pass the ultrasonic or radiographic testing and
need to be repaired, these non-destructive testing requirements may
be increased up to 100% of the welds.

.1 All welds that have been repaired shall be visually inspected and shall
undergo non-destructive testing performed by the Engineer.
.5 Clause 903.07.08.02 of OPSS.PROV 903 is deleted in its entirety and
.1 Results from completed Visual Inspection Reports and Non-
Destructive Test Reports will be provided upon request.
.6 Clause 903.07.08.03 of OPSS.PROV 903 is deleted in its entirety.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 General
.1 All submissions shall bear the seal and signature of a Contractor’s engineer
experienced in the field of deep foundations.
.2 When welded field splices are used, welding procedures according to the
Canadian Welding Bureau shall be submitted to the Engineer.
.1 Prior to commencing the work, a condition survey of property and structures

that may be affected by the work shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Section 02203 Condition Surveys. The survey shall include
the locations and conditions of adjacent properties, tracks, buildings,
the site
.1 Mill test certificate submissions shall be according to Section 05120

Structural Steel.
.4 Installation of Driven Piles
.1 The following shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to

construction, for information purposes only:
.1 A schedule of work identifying time and sequence of activities.
.2 Type of equipment, anvil, helmet, and hammer details, including the
hammer energy assumed by the Contractor, stated potential energy
(rated energy) of the hammer, operating efficiency, and weight of ram.
.3 Procedure for monitoring pile installation.
.4 Details of the method of attaching proprietary driving shoes.
.5 When welded field splices are used, welding procedures in
accordance with the Canadian Welding Bureau;
.6 When load testing is specified in the Contract Documents, details of
the full-scale test, including site preparation and the details of the load
application, components, equipment, testing apparatus, and method
of monitoring.
.7 Information pertinent to establishing the resistance of a pile when the
wave equation analysis method is used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Steel H-Piles
.1 Steel H-Piles shall be of the grade specified in the Contract Documents and
shall be according to CSA G40.20/G40.21.
.2 When CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W has been specified, the following
steel grades may be substituted:
.1 ASTM A572, Grade 345; or
.2 ASTM A913, Grade 345.
.3 When CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 450W has been specified, the following
steel grades may be substituted:
.1 ASTM A572, Grade 450; or
.2 ASTM A913, Grade 450.
.4 Steel H-piles shall conform to a straightness tolerance of 1.5 mm maximum

per metre of length.
.2 Driving Shoes
.1 Driving shoes shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 Driving shoes shall transfer the driving stresses to the pile over the full cross-
sectional area of the pile.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Equipment for driving piles shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 903.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Transporting, storing and handling of piles shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV

903.
.2 Pile driving requirements and restrictions, driving shoes, splicing, cutting off piles,
protective coating for piles, monitoring driven piles, jetting, tolerances, load test and
repair of welds shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 903 with the following
.1 Welding shall be according to CSA W59 and shall be done by a
qualified welder employed by a firm certified according to CSA W47.1,
Division 1 or Division 2.
.2 Steel H-piles may be spliced providing the pieces being spliced are
not less than 3 m long, except for integral abutments’ piles, where the
pieces being spliced shall not be less than 7.0 m long. Where piles
are located in a waterbody, splices shall be located below the low
water level, unless otherwise encased in concrete.
.2 Clause 903.07.02.07.01 of OPSS.PROV 903 is amended by deleting the first

paragraph in its entirety and replacing it with the following:
.1 The driving of piles shall be carefully monitored and controlled. Pile
driving records shall be produced for each pile and shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
.3 Clause 903.07.02.07.03 of OPSS 903 is deleted in its entirety and replaced

with the following:
.1 General
.1 Piles are to be driven to a specified ultimate resistance that
shall be determined using the Dynamic Formula or High-Strain
Dynamic Testing, as recommended by the foundations
engineer, at end of initial driving. If the specified ultimate
resistance is not achieved, retap/restrike shall be conducted
after initial driving as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer after
the design ultimate resistance is achieved.
.3 The next operation shall not proceed until a Notice to Proceed
has been received from the Engineer.
.2 Driving to a Set
.1 The founding elevation shall be established by driving to a set
determined in accordance with the dynamic formula specified
in the Contract Documents or by the application of the wave
equation analysis procedure that verifies the pile resistance.
This set shall be established on the first pile of every ten piles
driven in a pile group.
.2 The other piles shall be controlled by the pile penetration rate
in blows per millimetre that correlates to the set.
.3 When new conditions, such as change in hammer size,
change in pile size, or change in soil material occur, new sets
shall be determined.
.3 Driving to Bedrock
.1 When driving piles to bedrock, the pile shall be adequately
seated on bedrock without damaging the pile.
.2 Where rock points are used, the rock points shall penetrate
into the rock. Piles driven using rock points shall be driven to
ensure adequate seating on the bedrock without damaging the
pile.
.3 Driving of piles on sloping bedrock shall be stopped when
initial contact is made with the bedrock. The bedrock elevation
shall be recorded. Driving shall then continue, commencing
with energy of 10% of the maximum energy of the hammer.
The pile shall be driven in sets of 20 blows at this energy until
no penetration is observed. Twenty additional blows shall be
applied, and, if no penetration is observed, the energy shall be
increased by an additional 10% and the above procedure
repeated.
.4 Driving shall continue with these stepped increases in energy
and with the same series of blows as described above, until
the pile has been seated on the bedrock.
.5 If unrealistic excessive penetration per blow is observed,
driving shall be stopped, and this excessive penetration
immediately reported to the Engineer.

.1 When requested by the Engineer, all equipment, material, and
personnel shall be supplied to conduct the wave equation analysis
procedure.
.5 Subsection 903.07.06 of OPSS.PROV 903 is amended by deleting the first

paragraph in its entirety and replacing it with the following:
.1 When a load test is specified in the Contract Documents, the testing
shall be according to ASTM D1143 for piles under vertical static load,
ASTM D3689 for piles under tensile load, and ASTM D3966 for piles
under lateral loads. The Engineer shall witness the pile load test. All
records and results of the pile load test shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
.1 H-Piles
.1 Measurement of piles shall be by length in metres of the piling left in place

after cut-off.
.2 Driving Shoes
.1 For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of driving

shoes used.
.3 Retapping Piles
.1 For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of piles

retapped above and beyond the minimum number described in the Retapping
Tests on Piles clause.
.2 Piles retapped as part of the minimum number required for the retapping
tests described in the Retapping Tests on Piles clause shall not be measured
for payment.
.1 Supply Equipment for Installing Driven Piles
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the supply equipment for driving piles
tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and
materials to do the work.
.2 For payment purposes, 50% of the work under this tender item is completed
when the satisfactory performance of the equipment has been demonstrated
to the Engineer by installation of 1% of piles.
.3 Another 40% shall be paid by progress payments proportional to the work

completed. The remaining 10% shall be paid on the satisfactory completion of
the installation of piles.
.4 When the hammer performance is requested to be verified, such verification

shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner when the energy delivered
is less than 90% of the stated potential energy (rated energy) specified in the
submission.
.5 When the energy is equal to or greater than 90% of the stated potential
energy stated in the required submission, the cost verifying the hammer
performance shall be administered as a Change in the Work.
.2 H-Piles and Driving Shoes
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the H-piles tender items and driving shoes
.3 Retapping Piles
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the retapping piles tender items shall be full
compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do the work.
.2 Retapping the minimum specified number of piles for retapping tests shall
include all labour, equipment and materials to do the work and shall be
included in the Contract price for the H-piles tender item.
.3 Where additional retapping is required, payment shall be made based on the

ratio of the number of piles retapped in a pile group above the minimum
requirement, up to the total number of piles in that pile group, times the
tender price for retapping all piles for that pile group, times the tender price
for retapping all piles for that pile group.
.4 Failed Visual Inspection or Non-Destructive Testing of Welds
.1 Costs associated with any required removals and replacement or repairs of

defective welds, following the visual inspection or non-destructive testing,
shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner. No
additional payment will be made for labour and equipment provided by the
Contractor, and the Contractor will pay the Owner $500 for each weld
requiring additional retesting.

CN – DESIGN & CONCRETE CAISSONS SECTION 02384
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 02384 specifies the requirements for the construction of concrete
caisson piles.

applicable references specified therein.
.1 Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume 2, Chapter 8 (2020), including all

.1 OPSS.PROV 903, Construction Specification for Deep Foundations (April

2016), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 CSA W59-18, Welded Steel Construction.
.1 ASTM A252/A252M-19, Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless

Steel Pipe Piles.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Preconstruction Survey of property and structures that may be affected by the work
in accordance with Section 02203 Condition Surveys; the survey shall include the
locations and conditions of adjacent properties, tracks, buildings, underground
structures, utility services and structures, such as walls abutting the site;
.2 Mill Test Certificates in accordance with Section 05120 – Structural Steel indicating
that the steel meets the requirements for the appropriate standards for casings;
.3 Concrete Mix Design Report indicating a suitable, site-specific concrete that meets
the requirements of the hardened concrete;
.4 Work Plan sealed and signed by a professional engineer experienced in the field of
deep foundations providing the following information prior to commencement of work:
.1 A schedule of work identifying time and sequence of activities;
.2 Detailed procedures for caisson excavation in overburden and rock;
.3 Detailed procedures for casing and liner installation and for withdrawal of the
liner;
.4 Detailed procedure for placing concrete in the dry;
.5 Method of maintaining the steel reinforcement cages in position in the

caisson;
.6 Details of filling the annular void around casing;
.7 Details of procedure to be used for monitoring installation; and
.8 When load testing is specified in the Contract Documents, details of the full-
scale test, including site preparation, details of the load application,
components, equipment, testing apparatus, and method of monitoring;
.5 Shop Drawings sealed and signed by a professional engineer experienced in the

field of deep foundations showing the fabrication details of the steel reinforcement
cages, including the lifting points and lifting lugs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 The Contractor is responsible for providing plastic concrete with suitable

characteristics for installation. The concrete shall be flowable, non-segregating
concrete that does not exhibit rapid slump loss.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Casings for caissons shall be in accordance with ASTM A252/A252M, Grade 2. If

welded, they shall be welded by the electric arc method in accordance with CSA
W59. The casing wall thickness specified is the minimum that shall be supplied. The
wall thickness shall be increased as required to ensure the casing is not damaged
during handling and installation.
.2 Steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 03200 – Concrete

Reinforcement.
.3 Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03312 – Concrete Work with the
following additions and amendments:
.1 Concrete shall have a slump of 150 to 180 mm;
.2 When approved by the Engineer in writing, admixtures may be used; and
.3 Where the liner is to be withdrawn, sufficient retarder shall be added to

prevent arching of concrete during liner withdrawal and to prevent setting of
concrete until after the liner is withdrawn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Equipment for construction of concrete caisson piles shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 903.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Transporting, storing and handling of casings, liners and reinforcing steel

reinforcement cages shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 903.
.2 Concrete caisson piles shall be constructed as specified in the Contract Documents.

The final bearing elevation shall be as specified in the Contract Documents or as
determined by the Engineer. When permanent casings are not specified, the caisson
shall be constructed in a drilled hole with or without the use of a temporary liner as
determined by the Contractor.
.3 Excavation, inspection of the excavation, dewatering, backfilling liners left in place,

steel reinforcement, concrete and tolerances for caisson piles shall be in accordance
with OPSS.PROV 903 with the following additions and amendments:
.1 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer before the concrete

placement. The reinforcement shall not be displaced or distorted during the
construction of the caisson. The placement of concrete shall not proceed until
the Engineer has inspected the caisson hole and issued to the Contractor a
Notice to Proceed. Concrete shall be placed immediately after the Notice to
Proceed has been received and shall be placed in the caisson in accordance
with Section 03312 – Concrete Work and as specified herein.
.2 Complete access to inspect the bearing area of the caisson pile prior to the
placement of concrete shall be given to the Engineer.
.1 Measurement of caisson piles shall be by length in metres of the depth along the
centreline between the approved bearing surface at the bottom and the specified
elevation at the top.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the supply equipment for installing caisson piles
tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.2 Payment at the Contract price for the caisson piles tender items shall be full

CN – DESIGN & SUBDRAINAGE SECTION 02620
CONSTRUCTION MILTON LOGISTICS HUB - PHASE 2A SEPTEMBER 2023
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for sub-drainage for the Work.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.PROV 405, Construction Specifications for Pipe Subdrains; and
.2 OPSS.PROV 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates-Base, Subbase,

Select Subgrade and Backfill Material
.1 ASTM D3350-14, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe

and Fittings Material.

.1 CAN/CSA-B181.2-M87, Polyvinylchloride (PVC) and Cholorinated

Polyvinychloride (CPVC) Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings;
and
.2 CAN/CSA-G401.14, Corrugated Steel Pipe Products.
to ensure all materials, compaction, etc. meet the requirements of this Section
and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals prior to commencing
Work:
.1 Product Data;
.2 Manufactures Test Data and Certification for Sub-drainage submittal,

certifying that the proposed HDPE and CSP sub-drain pipe materials
meet the requirements of this Section, including structural performance
criteria, tests and standards, methods of jointing, and all relevant
information; and
.3 Source of Materials Report submittal providing information of the

proposed source and samples of bedding and filter material.
.1 Protect stockpiled granular materials from degradation and contamination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUB-DRAINS
.1 Subdrain Pipe Connection and Outlet as per OPSD 206.050.
.2 Polyethylene Pipe Subdrains (HDPE) (Rigid): Supplied by Armtec or approved

equivalent:
.1 Open or closed profile with smooth waterway, braced with corrugations

that are not in the waterway, perforated, high density, polyethylene pipe
and fittings (tee, bends, end caps, connectors etc.) to ASTM D3350,
CAN/CSA-B182 and BNQ 3624-120;
.2 Solid, perforated, perforated with filter sock, or perforated with non-woven

geotextile;
.3 Minimum pipe stiffness 320kPa;
.4 Joining system required: Soil-tight, Type 3 joint per BNQ 3624-120; and
.5 Product marking required per the applicable CSA or BNQ standard.
.3 Corrugated Steel Pipe Subdrains CSP:
.1 Corrugated steel pipes minimum wall thickness 2.8 mm shall be

according to CAN/CSA-G401-14, galvanized, perforated. Fittings (tee,
bends, end caps, connectors etc.) should be provided by the same pipe
supplier.
.4 Geotextile Filter Material:
.1 All subdrain pipes shall be wrapped with a geotextile filter sock;
.2 Trench shall be wrapped with geotextile filter material as indicated on the

Contract Drawings; and
.3 Geotextile filter sock or trench wrap shall be non-woven Class 1

geotextile, E.O.S. 75 to 150 Microns, 1 mm minimum thickness.
.5 Granular Material:
.1 All subdrain pipe shall be installed with granular bedding and backfill
material as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.1 Pipe Surround: Granular ‘A’ to Section 02701 and OPSS.PROV
1010, with no more than 4% passing the 75 µm sieve; and
.2 Backfill: Granular ‘B’ to Section 02701 and OPSS.PROV1010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRENCHING
.1 Do excavating, trenching, and backfilling in accordance with Section 02315

Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
.2 Place pipe sub-drains after approval of trench by the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Wrap trench with geotextile cloth.
.2 Place 75 mm layer of Granular ‘A’ material to full trench width.
.3 Lay pipe drains on prepared bed, true to line and grade with inverts smooth and
free of sags or high points. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with bed
throughout full length.
.4 Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction.
.5 Make joints tight in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.6 Make water-tight connections to existing drains, new or existing manholes and

catch basins where indicated or as directed by the Engineer. Protect existing
drains from debris, siltation, etc.
.7 Plug open upstream ends of pipes.
.8 Surround and cover pipe with Granular ‘A’ material to full trench depth as
indicated and compact to 98% SPMDD.
.9 Overlap geotextile material at top of cover as indicated and complete backfill.
.10 Protect sub-drains against floatation during installation.
.11 Do not mix or contaminate the sub-drainage granular material with soil or other
material.
.12 Provide rodent grates for outlets other than connections to storm structures.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement shall be by linear metre of properly installed sub-drain as

measured in the field.
4.2 PAYMENT
excavation, use of equipment, tools and incidentals including geotextiles and
granular material necessary to complete the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & CULVERTS & STORM SEWERS SECTION 02630
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 The Contractor shall consider that the construction of all culverts included in this
contract shall be undertaken during the night shift and over the weekends.
.2 This Section includes the requirements for design, supply and construction of the
precast concrete culverts.
.3 This Section includes the requirements for supply and construction of the CSP
culverts located within the railway loading.
.4 This Section includes design, supply, installation and removal of temporary

bypass system in accordance with the requirements of Section 02150 Temporary
Flow Diversion and Section 02160 High Flow Contingency Plan to facilitate the
construction of the culverts.
.11 Site Demolition and Removals Section 02225

.14 Excavating, Trenching & Backfilling Section 02315
.16 Sub drainage Section 02620
1.3 REFERENCES

Materials;
.2 OPSS.PROV 409, Construction Specification for Closed-Circuit

Television (CCTV) Inspection of Pipelines;
.3 OPSS.PROV 410, Construction Specification for Pipe Sewer Installation

in Open Cut;
.4 OPSS.MUNI 416, Construction Specification for Pipeline and Utility

Installation by Jacking and Boring;
.5 OPSS.PROV 421, Construction Specification for Pipe Culvert Installation

in Open Cut;
.6 OPSS.PROV 517 Construction Specification for Dewatering
.7 OPSS.PROV 1801, Material Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe

(CSP) Products;
.8 OPSS.PROV 1802, Material Specification for Smooth Walled Steel Pipe;
.9 OPSS.PROV 1820, Material Specification for Circular and Elliptical

Concrete Pipe;
.10 OPSS 1821, Material Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Culverts and Box Sewers; and
.11 OPSS.PROV 1840 Material Specification for Non-Pressure Polyethylene

Plastic Pipe Products.
.1 A3000-18 Cementitious Materials Compendium;
.2 B182.14-12/B182.15-12 Profile Steel Reinforced Polyethylene (SRPE)

Storm Sewer Pipe and Sitting;
.3 CAN3-G401, AASTHO M-167 or ASTM A761;

.4 CSA W47.1-19 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
(October 2019);
.5 CSA W48-18 Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding
(January 2018); and
.6 CSA W59-18 Welded Steel Construction (May 2018).
.3 American Water Works Association (AWWA):
.1 AWWA C561-12 Fabricated Stainless-Steel Slide Gates.
.4 Transport Canada:
.1 Standards Respecting Pipeline Crossings Under Railways, TC E-10, June

21, 2000.
.5 Geotechnical Report for the Project.
.6 Limits of Construction.
.1 Provide the Engineer with copies of supplier’s test reports on all materials that
are to be incorporated in the culverts.
.2 Provide the Engineer with copies of all field quality control tests conducted on the
culverts.

Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance
Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance of these Specifications.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
with this Section and Section 01340:
.1 Design drawings for the proposed bypass system for each culvert in
accordance with the requirements in Section 02150 Temporary Flow
Diversion and Section 02160 High Flow Contingency Plan;
.2 Shop Drawings for Culverts and Sewers submittal for all types of culverts
and sewers, bearing the stamp of a professional engineer licensed to
practice in the Province of Ontario;
.3 Design calculations for precast concrete class 140-D within the railway
loading confirming that the culvert can sustain Copper E90 loading (using
AREMA safety factor).
.4 Manufactures Test Data and Certification for Culverts and Sewers,
submittal providing manufacturer’s test data and certification that culverts
and sewers materials meet the requirements of this Section and Section
01620 Quality Control and Assurance including structural performance
criteria, tests and standards, and methods of jointing;
.5 Inspection and Test Reports for all tests and inspections performed by the
Contractor;
.6 Leakage Test Report for Culverts and Sewers in accordance with

requirements of this Section;
.7 Pre-construction and Final Inspection Reports for Culverts and Sewers;

and
.8 Work Plan Methodology for installation of the culverts under the live
tracks by open cut. The plan shall include the following but not limited to
the following:
1. Anticipated schedule of the work
2. Details of construction methodology
3. Staging
4. Emergency action plan
.1 Store stockpiled materials on wood supports of sufficient size and strength to

prevent contact with the earth and surface water. Protect stockpiled materials
from contamination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) minimum wall thickness 3.5 mm with all fittings to
OPSS.PROV 1801 to size and class as shown on the Drawings. Corrugated
Spiral Rib Pipe (helical pipe) may be used where CSP is indicated on the
Contract Drawings, unless structural plate corrugated steel pipe
(circumferential/riveted) is shown on the Contract Drawings.
.2 Concrete pipe shall be reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings in

accordance with OPSS.PROV 1820, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
In no instance shall the pressure class be lower than Class 140D.
.3 HDPE pipe and all fittings shall conform to OPSS.PROV1840, open or closed
profile with smooth waterway, braced with corrugations that area not in the water
way.
.4 Non-woven Geotextile:
.1 Terrafix 270R by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc.
.5 Pipe Bedding and Surround Material:
.1 Granular A fill, 19 mm clear crushed limestone, in accordance with

Contract Documents.
.6 25mm thick steel plate to temporarily cap the culverts for future connection.
.7 DOW Styrofoam Brand Highload 100 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation or

approved equal/alternative
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING

Monitoring for temporary excavation and stability of existing track.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 The Contractor shall consider that the construction of all culverts included in this
contract shall be undertaken during the night shift and over the weekends.
.2 The Contractor shall notify CN Rail three months in advance for tracks removal to
facilitate the construction of the culverts under the existing live tracks by open
cut. The contractor shall determine the anticipated timelines for tracks work in
coordination with CN rail and incorporate in the construction schedule.
.3 The Contractor shall install Insulation Boards, DOW Styrofoam Brand Highload
100 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation or approved equal/alternative on top of all
storm sewer placed at depth less than 1.2 m from finish grade.
.4 The contractor shall consider that installation of the culverts crossing under or
adjacent to the live tracks shall occur during the night shift or on weekends to
avoid any disruption to the rail operations. The contractor shall provide the
necessary labour and equipment to complete the work within the limited
timeframe for tracks block.
.5 Design, supply and install bypass system and flow control to facilitate the
construction of culverts in accordance with the requirements of Section 02150
Temporary Flow Diversion and 02160 High Flow Contingency Plan.
.6 Granular Materials to Section 02701 Granular Materials and rip-rap to Section

02372 Rip Rap.
.7 Excavate, place and compact bedding, cover and backfill to Section 02315,
Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
.8 Clean and inspect, culverts and sewers upon completion of installation and
remove debris and sediments and provide a report in accordance with OPSS.
PROV 411.
.9 Remove rejected and excess material from the place of work within 48 hours.
.10 Management and disposal of excess materials in accordance with

OPSS.PROV180.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for culverts and storm sewers shall be by linear meter (m) of
properly installed culvert or storm sewer measured along the centerline of the
pipe from the inlet end to outlet end of the pipe at their inverts.
.2 No measurement will be made for temporary track shoring or monitoring and

shall be deemed incidental to and included in the various lump sum and unit
prices included in the Form of Tender.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit and lump sum
prices included in the Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all
materials, labour, use of equipment, tools and incidentals including but not be
limited to all excavation regardless of the depth, disposal of surplus and
unsuitable material off site, pipe, design supply, install and removal of temporary
track shoring as required and monitoring, connections, granular bedding,
granular backfill, insulation board necessary, cleaning of existing culverts,
inspections, working at night shift and weekends, temporary lighting, leakage
tests to complete the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & DRAINAGE STRUCTURES SECTION 02631
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions (Annex “A”) of Contract Form No. 3819 and all Sections of Division 1 of this
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for storm maintenance holes, catch basins
and ditch inlets and for the works.
.2 In this Section and on the Contract Drawings that pertain to stormwater systems,
the phrase “maintenance hole” and word “manhole” shall be understood as having
the same meaning.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing ang Materials International (ASTM):

.1 ASTM A48/A48M-03 (2016), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings;

and
.2 ASTM C478/C478m-20, Standard Specification for Circular Precast

Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.
.2 Canadian Standard Association (CSA):
.1 CAN/CSA-A8, Masonry Cement;
.2 CAN/CSA-A82.56, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar;
.3 CAN/CSA-G30.18-09 (R2019), Cardon Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; and
.4 CAN/CSA-G164-18, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.3 Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD);
.1 OPSD 403.010, Galvanized Steel Honeycomb Grating for Ditch Inlets; and
.2 OPSD 708.010, Catch Basin Connection for Rigid Main Pipe Sewer.
.1 OPSS.MUNI 407, Construction Specification for New Maintenance Hole,

Catch Basin, Ditch Inlet and Valve Chamber Installation;
.2 OPSS 408, Construction Specification for Adjusting or Rebuilding

Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets and Valve Chambers;
.3 OPSS.MUNI 1351, Material Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete

Components for Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets and Valve
Chambers; and
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to conduct their own quality assurance program
to ensure all materials, compaction, etc. meet the requirements of this Section and
.2 Submit manufacturer’s test data and certification that all materials meet
requirements of this section at least 2 weeks prior to commencing work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit the following for review, in accordance with the
requirements of this Section and Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Shop Drawings for Maintenance Hole Catch basins and Ditch Inlets, fully
detailed, scheduled and dimensioned, for all precast concrete structures,
grates, frames, ladders and accessories. The Contractor shall include a table
(schedule) identifying each structure, with dimensions, depth, location and
side of all openings; and
.2 Manufacturer’s Test Data and Certification for Drainage Structures providing

the manufacturer’s test data and certification that all drainage structures and
materials meet the requirements of this Section prior to commencing the
works.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1 The Contractor shall label each structure in accordance with he submitted schedule.
.2 The Contractor shall store structures, gratings and rings safely and neatly away
from traffic.
.3 The Contractor shall store structures, gratings and rings on wood supports of
sufficient size and strength to prevent contact with the earth and surface water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Contractor shall ensure that all types of drainage structures specified in this
Contract located within the rail corridor are designed per AREMA manual for railway
engineering Chapter 8 using Cooper E90 loading (using AREMA safety factor).
.2 Precast manhole catch basin and ditch inlet units: to ASTM C478M and to OPSD
indicated on the Form of Tender.
.3 Joints: to be made watertight using rubber rings.
.4 Mortar:
.1 Aggregate: to CSA A82.56; and
.2 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A8.
.5 Ladder rungs: to CAN/CSA-G30.18, 25M billet steel deformed bars, hot dipped
galvanized to CAN/CSA G164. Rungs to be safety pattern (drop step type).
.6 Adjusting rings: to ASTM C478M.

.7 Frames, gratings, covers to dimensions and shape as indicated on OPSD 403.010

and following requirements:
.1 Ductile iron gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames. A frame with grating
or cover to constitute one unit. Assemble and mark unit components before
shipment;
.2 Ductile iron castings: to ASTM A48, strength class 30B; and
.3 Castings: coated with two applications of asphalt varnish.
.8 Granular bedding and backfill: Granular B Type II: to Section 02701 Granular
Materials and to Section 02315 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
.1 Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02315 Excavating, Trenching and
Backfilling.
.2 Obtain approval of the Engineer before installing manholes, catch basins or

subdrain cleanouts.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Construct units in accordance with details indicated, plumb and true to alignment
and grade.
.2 Complete units as pipe laying progresses.
.3 Dewater excavation free of standing water as detailed in Section 02140 Dewatering

and Section 02272 Erosion Control. Dewatering and removing soft and foreign
material before placing concrete base.
.4 Set the precast concrete base on 150 mm minimum of granular bedding compacted
to 100% SPMDD.
.5 Precast units:
.1 Make each successive joint watertight with rubber ring gaskets, cement
mortar, or a combination thereof;
.2 Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from the interior surface of the unit
as work progresses; and
.3 Plug lifting holes with precast concrete plugs set in cement mortar or mastic
compound.
.6 Connect catchbasin leads to storm sewer or culverts per OPSD 708.01.
.7 Place frame and cover on the top section to elevation as indicated. If adjustment
required, use a concrete ring.
.8 Clean units of debris and foreign materials. Remove fins and sharp projections.
Prevent debris from entering the system.
3.3 CONNECTION INTO EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
.1 Connect into existing drainage structures by use of previously installed stub pipes.
.2 Remove pipe plug and dispose of by removal from the site.
3.4 ADJUST EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
.1 Adjust the existing drainage structures indicated on the drawings to the final grade
as per OPSS 408.
3.5 LEAKAGE TEST
.1 Visual inspection of leakage will be carried out. If any leakage is observed, correct
leakage as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for manholes and catch basins shall be by each properly installed
drainage structure.
.2 Measurement for connection into existing manholes and catch basins shall be by
each properly installed connection to the existing drainage structure.
.3 Measurement for adjusting existing manholes and catch basins shall be by each
properly adjusted drainage structure.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices included in
the Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all materials, labour, use
of equipment, tools and incidentals including but not limited to all excavation
regardless of the depth, disposal of surplus and unsuitable material off-site,
benching, bedding, backfill, grates, covers, adjusting rings and ladder rungs
necessary to complete the Work of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & CLEAN STORM PIPES & DRAINAGE STRUCTURES SECTION 02632
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements to clean storm pipe and drainage
structures for the works.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications:

Material.
1.4 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
program to ensure all materials, compaction, etc. Meet the requirements of this
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not Used.

CN – DESIGN & CLEAN STORM PIPES & DRAINAGE STRUCTURES SECTION 02632
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Existing manholes, catch basins and storm sewers within the construction limits
shall be cleaned out as shown or directed by the Engineer.
.2 Existing manholes, catch basins and storm sewers shall have all accumulated
materials cleaned out.
.3 Existing storm sewers that connect to structures outside the Limits of

Construction shall be cleaned out up to the 1st structure outside the construction
limits or as directed by the Engineer.
.4 Material removed from the storm system shall be disposed of off-site by the
Contractor as per OPSS.PROV 180.
.5 The Contractor shall provide the water required for flushing the storm system.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for cleanout of storm sewers shall be by a linear meter of properly

cleaned storm pipe measured along the centerline of the pipe between the
centers of connected drainage structures, from the outlet end of the pipe at its
invert to the center of the drainage structure or from the inlet end to outlet end of
the pipe at their inverts.
.2 Measurement for cleaning out manholes and catch basins shall be by each
properly cleaned drainage structure.
4.2 PAYMENT
use of equipment, tools and incidentals including but not be limited to supply of
water and off-site disposal of removed material necessary to complete the Work
of this Section.

CN – DESIGN & EQUIPMENT RENTAL SECTION 02640
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for equipment rental for the Works.
.5 Materials and Equipment Section 01600
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.PROV 127, Schedule of Rental Rates for Construction Equipment

Including Model and Specification Reference, as modified below.
.1 Not applicable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Not Applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Not applicable.
CN – DESIGN & EQUIPMENT RENTAL SECTION 02640
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT & LABOUR RENTAL
.1 Requests and usage of all equipment and labour shall be under the direct
supervision of the Railway.
.2 The supplied equipment and labour shall be ready and capable of performing the
work at any time as requested by the Railway.
.3 No overtime or standby time will be allowed.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement shall be by hour of time used on site as certified by the Engineer.

Timesheets shall be certified daily.
.2 Measurement for the surveyor and surveying equipment shall be by an hour of

time used on-site for both surveyor and a complete set of equipment to
undertake the surveying work. The surveyor shall be qualified to work in railway
project with minimum five (5) years of experience.
.3 Payment at the Contract price shall include all labour, equipment and material to
perform the work specified herein all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.2 EQUIPMENT
.1 The price per hour, for equipment, shall include mobilization and demobilization
to the site, depreciation, interest, insurance, repairs, maintenance, fuels,
lubricants, overhead, profit and any other required apparatus or attachments.
4.3 LABOURERS AND OPERATORS
.1 The price per hour, for labourers and operators, shall include mobilization and
demobilization to the site, wages and subsistence, insurance, overhead, profit
and any other tools and equipment required to perform the work.
4.4 SITE SUPERINTENDENT
.1 Costs for site superintendent shall be incidental to the work and included in the
various unit prices submitted on the Form of Tender.

CN – DESIGN & GRANULAR MATERIALS SECTION 02701
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the granular materials requirements for the work.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society Testing and Materials International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM C117-17, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75um
(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing;
.2 ASTM C136-14, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates;
.3 ASTM D4791-10, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate;
.4 ASTM D698-12e2, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction of

Soil Effort; and
.5 ASTM D1557-12e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

of Soil Modified Effort.
.1 OPSS.PROV 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates-Base, Subbase,

Select Subgrade and Backfill Material.
.1 CAN/CGSB 8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.

Section and, Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 The Contractor shall engage services of an inspection and testing company as

part of its scope under Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance, to
undertake necessary sampling and testing of granular materials specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Granular Material Samples and Test Results providing samples and

testing results of all types of granular materials in accordance with
Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance, Section 02311 Site
Grading and this Section; and
.2 Inspection and Test Reports for all tests and inspections performed by the
Contractor.
.1 Inform the Engineer of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for
sampling at least six (6) weeks prior to commencing production.
.2 If, in opinion of the Engineer, materials from proposed source do not meet, or
cannot reasonably be processed to meet, specified requirements, locate an
alternative source or demonstrate that material from source in question can be
processed to meet specified requirements.
.3 Acceptance of material at source does not preclude future rejection if it fails to

conform to requirements specified, lacks uniformity, or if its field performance is
found to be unsatisfactory.
.4 Provide sampling facilities at discharge end of production conveyor, to allow the
Engineer to obtain representative samples of items being produced. Stop
conveyor belt when requested by the Engineer to permit full cross section
sampling.
.5 Allow continual sampling by the Engineer during production.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS- GENERAL
.1 Aggregate quality: sound, hard, durable material free from soft, thin, elongated or
laminated particles, organic material, clay lumps or minerals, or other substances
that would act in deleterious manner for use intended.
.2 Flat and elongated particles of coarse aggregate: to ASTM D4791:
.1 Greatest dimension not to exceed five times least dimension.
2.2 PRODUCTS
.1 Granular “A”: (Bedding & Backfill):
.1 Granular ‘A’ OPSS.PROV 1010 to this Section and following

requirements:
.1 Crushed quarried rock consisting of hard, durable, angular
particles, free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material,
reclaimed asphalt or concrete, frozen material and other
deleterious materials; and
.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C
136 and ASTM C 117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB 8.1.
.2 Granular “B”: Type II (Road Base & Backfill):
.1 Granular material, Granular ‘B’ Type II, OPSS 1010 and following
requirements:
.1 Crushed quarried rock or crushed pit run stone consisting of hard,
durable, angular particles, free from clay lumps, cementation,
organic material, reclaimed asphalt or concrete, frozen material
and other deleterious materials; and
136 and ASTM C 117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.
.2 Granular produced by crushing pit-run material consisting of naturally

formed deposits of sand, gravel, and cobbles will be acceptable as
Granular B, Type II, but it must conform to the gradations described
above and have a Percent Crushed Minimum of 50%.
.3 Granular “B”: Type II (Suballast):
.1 Granular material, Granular ‘B’ Type II, OPSS.PROV 1010 and following
requirements:
.1 Crushed quarried rock or crushed pit run stone consisting of hard,
durable, angular particles, free from clay lumps, cementation,
organic material, reclaimed asphalt or concrete, frozen material
and other deleterious materials; and
136 and ASTM C 117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1;
Sieve % Passing
Designation Sub-ballast
150 mm N/A
37.5 mm 100
26.5 mm 65 - 100
19.0 mm 55 - 80
12.5 mm 45 - 70
9.5 mm 40 - 60
4.75 mm 30 - 45
1.18 mm 15 - 30
0.300 mm 5 - 15
0.075 mm 0-8
.2 Granular produced by crushing pit-run material consisting of naturally

formed deposits of sand, gravel, and cobbles will be acceptable as
Granular B, Type II, but it must conform to the gradations described
above and have a Percent Crushed Minimum of 50%.
.4 CN Track Ballast Pre-Ballast (Provisional Item):
.1 Ballast for pre-ballasting will be provided on site by the Railway at a mutually

agreed to location to be determined on site; and
.2 The ballast shall be loaded and placed to depth of 150 mm and width of 4.2 m for
each track (diversion and mainline).
.3 Compact ballast to 95% of SPMDD by use of vibratory smooth drum roller.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING & STOCKPILING
.1 Handle and transport aggregates to avoid segregation, contamination and

degradation following the Air Quality Best Management Practice Plan.
.2 Stockpile aggregates off site, or where directed by the Engineer within the Limits
of Construction as shown on the Contract Drawings.
.3 Stockpile aggregates in sufficient quantities to meet project schedules.
.4 Stockpiling sites to be level, well drained, and of adequate bearing capacity and
stability to support stockpiled materials and handling equipment.
.5 Separate different aggregates by strong, full depth bulkheads, or stockpile far

enough apart to prevent intermixing.
.6 Do not use intermixed or contaminated materials. Do not incorporate bottom

300mm of stockpile into work. Remove and dispose of rejected materials as
directed by the Engineer within 48 hours of rejection.
3.2 PLACING
.1 Compact subgrade per Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 Place granular as sub base, base, or backfill, as indicated on the Contract

Drawings.
.3 Place granular after subgrade is inspected and approved by the Engineer.
.4 Construct granular to depth and grade in areas indicated.
.5 Ensure no frozen material is placed.
.6 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow or ice.
.7 Place granular materials using methods which do not lead to segregation or

degradation.
.8 For spreading and shaping material, use spreader boxes having adjustable
templates or screens which will place material in uniform layers of required
thickness.
.9 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted
thickness.
.10 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before
succeeding layer is placed.
.11 Remove and replace portion of layer in which material has become segregated
during spreading.
3.3 COMPACTION
.1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities.
.2 Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved at least as efficient as

specified equipment at no extra cost and written approval must be received from
the Engineer before use.
.3 Equipped with device that records hours of actual work, not motor running hours.
.4 Compaction in accordance with ASTM D698 and ASTM D1557:
.1 Sewer and culvert bedding: Compact to density of not less than 100%
SPMDD;
.2 Pavement sub-base, or granular under cast in place concrete: Compact

to density of not less than 98% SPMDD; and
.3 Backfill, including of subgrade weak or soft spots: Compact to density of

not less than 98% of SPMDD unless otherwise indicated.
.5 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted sub
base.
.6 Apply water as necessary during compaction to obtain specified density.
.7 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with

mechanical tampers approved by the Engineer.
.8 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until

surface is within specified tolerance.
3.4 SITE TOLERANCES
.1 Finished subbase surface to be within 10 mm of elevation as indicated but not

uniformly high or low.
3.5 PROTECTION
.1 Maintain finished sub base in condition conforming to this section until

succeeding base is constructed, or until granular sub base is accepted by the
Engineer.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for work of this item shall be by the cubic meter (m3) “compacted in
place” based on cross-sections taken by the Contractor, prior to and after
placement of granular materials.
.2 The Contractor shall supply sets of original and final cross-sections, for each type
of material placed, to the Engineer for calculation purposes.
.3 If the Contractor chooses not to provide cross-section, measurement will be

based on plan quantities.
.4 Material used for culverts, drainage structures, subdrains, pipelines, etc. shall be
considered incidental to and included in this work and no separate payment shall
be made.
.5 Material used for road works shall be considered incidental to and included in this
work and no separate payment shall be made.
4.2 PAYMENT
Section.

CN – DESIGN & HOT MIX ASPHALT - SUPERPAVE SECTION 02742
CONSTRUCTION MILTON LOGISTIC HUB – PHASE 2A SEPTEMBER 2023
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Conform to the following Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, except as

indicated below:
.1 OPSS 308 – Construction Specification for Tack Coating and Joint

Painting;
.2 OPSS MUNI 310 - Construction Specification for Hot Mix Asphalt;
.3 OPSS 1001 – Material Specification for Aggregates – General;
.4 OPSS 1003 - Material Specification for Aggregates – Hot Mix Asphalt;
.5 OPSS 1101 – Material Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt

Cement; and
.6 OPSS 1151 – Material Specification for Superpave and Stone Mastic

Asphalt Mixtures.
.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting their own quality control
program to ensure all materials, compaction, etc., meet the requirements of the
Specifications and OPSS 310, Clause 310.07.01.
.2 The Engineer may also carry out independent Quality Acceptance tests as per
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 HMA Superpave mix design shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall
conform to OPSS 1151. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for
approval, the mix designs a minimum of thirty (30) days prior to commencing
paving operations.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 Conform to OPSS 310.07.06 Placing of HMA
.2 Deliver and place HMA within temperature ranges specified by the asphalt plant
for each mix design at a continuous and uniform rate and in an amount within the
capacity of paving and compacting equipment.
.3 Immediately spread and compact HMA.
.5 Management and disposal of excess materials in accordance with OPSS 180.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Tack Coat: to OPSS 308.
.2 Aggregates: to OPSS 1001 and OPSS 1003.
.3 Asphalt Cement: to OPSS 1101, Grade as noted on the Form of Tender.
2.2 MIX DESIGN
.1 Mix Design: to OPSS 1151 – Superpave 12.5, Superpave 19.0, Superpave 25

and Superpave 37.5:
.1 Traffic Category E; and

.2 Do not change job-mix without prior approval of the Engineer. When a
change in the material source is proposed, the new job-mix formula is to
be approved and reviewed by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLANT AND MIXING REQUIREMENTS
.1 Conform to OPSS 1151.07.
3.2 EQUIPMENT
.1 Conform to OPSS 310.07.07
3.3 PREPARATION OF BASE COURSE TO RECEIVE HOT MIX ASPHALT
.1 Before placing HMA on a granular or other Base Course, obtain Engineer's

approval that the base is acceptable to receive the HMA.
3.4 TACK COAT
.1 Conform to OPSS 308, prior to placement of HMA, as modified below.
.2 A Trackless Tack is required in this Contract. Application of the tack coat

shall be applied by way of an automated distributor truck capable of double or
triple overlap coverage. Application shall be at a rate of 0.32 l/m2 over milled
surfaces and 0.23 l/m2 over smooth surfaces. Tack shall be placed between all
layers of pavement and on vertical joints at limit of work.
3.5 PLACING HOT MIX ASPHALT
.1 Conform to OPSS 317.07.06.
.2 Place HMA in compacted lifts between 3 and 5 times the Nominal Maximum
Aggregate Size (NMAS) of the mixture or as indicated on the drawings.
.3 If segregation, whether mixture or temperature related occurs, immediately

suspend spreading operation until cause is determined and corrected.
.4 Correct irregularities in alignment left by paver by trimming directly behind

machine.
.5 Taper and level within the base course lift. The intermediate and surface courses
shall be of uniform thickness.
3.6 JOINTS
.1 Conform to OPSS 310.07.11 and as indicated on the Drawings.

3.7 COMPACTION
.1 Conform to OPSS 310.07.12 and the following requirements:
.1 Correct irregularities in areas that develop checking, rippling, or

segregation by loosening surface mix and removing or adding material as
required and repeating rolling operations;
.2 Where the HMA mix design changes and lift thickness changes, change
rolling pattern only as directed by the Engineer;
.3 Do not permit heavy equipment or rollers to stand on finished HMA

surface before it has been compacted and has thoroughly cooled;
.4 After traverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge have been
compacted, start rolling longitudinally at low side and progress to high
side;
.5 Where rolling causes displacement of HMA material, loosen affected

areas at once with lutes or shovels and restore to original grade of loose
material before re-rolling; and
.6 Special consideration should be given to asphalt placement and

compaction at railway crossings, to prevent damages to the rubber rail
seals.
3.8 FINISH TOLERANCES
.1 Conform to OPSS 310.07.13.
3.9 DEFECTIVE WORK
.1 If irregularities or defects remain after final compaction and the work is deemed
defective, remove surface course promptly and lay new material to form true and
even surface and compact immediately to specified density, at no cost to the
Engineer.
3.10 SURVEY
.1 Perform survey of finished compacted asphalt grade and submit survey data to
Engineer.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for work of this section except as noted below shall be in square
metres (m2) of Hot Mix Asphalt - Superpave actually placed and accepted by the
Engineer.
.2 Lap joints shall be considered incidental to the works and no separate payment
will be made.
4.2 PAYMENT
testing, use of equipment, tools and incidentals, including tack coat, necessary to
complete the Work of this section
.2 Stratified Random (ASTM D3665) pavement cores, maximum 150 mm in

diameter, shall be taken at the discretion of the engineer to verify actual
thickness and density of the pavement surface area.
.3 The average thickness for the core shall be based on the measurement from
each quadrant of the core, with the average thickness for the area determined by
averaging the core thickness.
.4 When average thickness is more than or equal to 95% of the specified thickness,
the payment shall be the total surface area of the HMA type laid for the course.
.5 When the average thickness is less than 95% of the specified thickness, the
surface area for payment purposes shall be calculated as follows:
.6 Payment Area =actual area x average thickness

specified thickness

CN – DESIGN & PAINTED TRAFFIC LINES - DURABLE SECTION 02761
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
.5 Hot Mix Asphalt - Superpave Section 02742
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS.MUNI 710, Construction Specifications for Pavement Marking;
.2 OPSS.MUNI 1713, Material Specification for Thermoplastic Marking

Materials; and
.3 OPSS.MUNI 1750 Material Specification for Traffic Paint Reflectorized

Glass Beads.
.1 CGSB 1 GP 12C - 1983, Standard Paint Colours.
.3 MTO Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Metric Edition) - latest edition.

Specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit to Engineer the following material sample quantities at least four (4)
weeks prior to commencing work:
.1 Two 1 L samples of each type of paint;
.2 Sampling to CGSB 1 GP 71; and
.3 Mark samples with the name of the project and its location, paint
manufacturer's name and address, name of paint, CGSB specification
number and formulation number and batch number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Markings:
.1 White Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material to CGSB 1-GP-12C,

white 513-301; and
.2 Yellow Thermoplastic Pavement Marking shall match either the colour

chip of the Ministry of Transportation Ontario or U.S. FED-STD-595B,
Yellow 33538.
.2 Glass beads in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 1750.
.3 Pre-marking paint to be compatible with final marking paint listed above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
.1 Paint applicator to be an approved for the application of thermoplastic material

and shall be capable of mixing, maintaining and applying the material at the
recommended temperature.
.2 Applicator to be capable of applying marking components uniformly, at rates

specified, and to dimensions as indicated, and to have positive shut off.
3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES
.1 Pavement surface to be dry, free from ponded water, frost, ice, dust, oil, grease
and other foreign materials.
3.3 APPLICATION
.1 Lay out pavement markings.

.2 Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, apply material only when pavement
surface temperature is above 5ºC, and relative humidity is less than 70%.
.3 Apply traffic paint evenly at a rate that results in uniform thickness of 1.90 mm
±0.40 mm measured dry.
.4 Apply reflectorizing glass beads as per OPSS.MUNI 710.
.5 Do not thin paint unless approved by Engineer.
.6 Symbols and letters to conform to the MUTCD.
.7 Paint lines to be of uniform colour and density with sharp edges.
.8 Thoroughly clean distributor tank before refilling with paint of different colour.
3.4 TOLERANCE
.1 Pavement markings to be within ±12 mm of dimensions indicated.
3.5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
.1 Protect pavement markings until dry.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for pavement lines shall be in linear metres of each type as

.2 Measurement for pavement symbols shall be by each type of symbol as

4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the lump sum and unit
prices included the Form of Tender. Payment will be full compensation for all
materials, labour, use of equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Work of this section.

CN – DESIGN & FENCING AND ROAD SIGNAGE SECTION 02825
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the fabrication and installation requirements for Fences
and Gates for the works, including the following:
.1 Supply and Install of Chain Link Fence with barbed wire
.2 Supply and Install Chain Link Gates
.3 Supply and Install Orange Construction Fence;
.4 Supply and install orange construction fence.
.5 Supply and Install Wooden Stakes.
.6 Supply and install of road signage
.7 Concrete Accessories Section 03203
1.3 REFERENCES

.1 OPSS.PROV 772, Construction Specification for Chain-Link Fence.
.1 OPSD 972.101, Fence, Highway in Earth, Shale, Loose Rock or Friable

Rock Installation;
.2 OPSD 972.102, Fence, Chain-link, Component – Gate;
.3 OPSD 972.130, Fence, Chain-Link Installation – Roadway; and
.4 OPSD 972.131, Fence, Chain-Link Installation – Concrete Barrier.
.5 OPSD 973.134, Fence, Wildlife freestanding – Type B.
.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International):
.1 CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2:19, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete; and
.2 CAN/CSA G164-18, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.1 CAN/CGSB 138.1-2019, Fabric for Chain Link Fence;
.2 CAN/CGSB 138.2-2019, Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence;
.3 CAN/CGSB 138.3-2019, Installation of Chain Link Fence;
.4 CAN/CGSB 138.4-2019, Gates for Chain Link Fence; and
.5 CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready Mixed Organic Zinc Rich Coating.
.5 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM):
.1 ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless;
.2 ASTM A90/A90M-07, Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Iron

and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coatings;
.3 ASTM A121, Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel

Barbed Wire; and
.4 A653/A653M-03, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip
Process.
.6 Highway Traffic Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. H.8.
.1 Provide the Engineer with copies of supplier’s test reports on all materials that
are to be incorporated in the fences.
.2 Provide the Engineer with copies of all field quality control tests conducted on the
fences.
program to ensure all materials meet the requirements of this Section and
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 For all Product Data, the Contractor shall include:
.1 Performance criteria, compliance with the appropriate reference

standard, characteristics, limits; and
.2 Project transportation, storage, handling, and installation

requirements.
.2 Submit Shop Drawings showing the dimensions, type, size, and nature of
all components and fasteners As-Builts Drawings for Fences and gates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Chain Link Fence with barb wire as per OPSD 972.101 and OPSD 972.130
.2 Chain link fence on top of jersey barriers:
.1 Posts, braces and rails: to CAN/CGSB 138.2, galvanized steel pipe.

Dimensions as indicated;
.2 Line Posts: 60.3 mm O.D., 5.43 kg/m;
.3 Top Rail: 42.2 mm O.D., 5.43 kg/m;
.4 Bottom tension wire: to CAN/CGSB 138.2, 3.5 mm single strand,

galvanized steel wire;
.5 Fabric: Fence Fabric: Type 1 Steel Fabric 3.5 mm steel wire of the
following type;
.6 Class A, Zinc-Coated, Style 2 Medium steel wire, hot dip galvanized

Tension bar: to ASTM A653/A653M, 5 x 20 mm minimum galvanized
steel;
.7 Fittings and hardware: to CAN/CGSB 138.2, galvanized steel;
.8 Post caps to provide waterproof fit, to fasten securely over posts and to
carry top rail;
.9 Turnbuckles to be drop forged; and
.10 Organic zinc-rich coating: to CAN/CGSB 1.181.
.3 CONSTRUCTION OF ORANGE FENCE:
.1 1.2 m high construction plastic orange fence installed with steel T-bar at
1.8 m interval.
.4 WILDLIFE FENCE
.1 Wildlife fence attached to Chain link fence OPSD 973.133 and 973.142
.5 HARDWARE CLOTH FENCES (AMPHIBIAN EXCLUSION FENCE):
.1 Hardware cloth fence (galvanized mesh or Birdscreen). The fence shall

be made of heavy galvanized hardware cloth with a 1/8-inch mesh.
.6 WOODEN STAKES
.1 Pressure Treated Wood Stakes - 1.5" x 1.5" x 3'.
.2 Paint all wood stakes with orange colour.

.7 GATES
.1 Single or double swing of the size indicated on the drawings, c/w

galvanized hinges and latch catch suitable for the use of padlocks that
can be operated from either side of the gate, OPSD 972.102.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
.1 The Contractor shall remove all debris and shall correct ground undulations
along the fence line to obtain a smooth uniform gradient between posts.
.2 The Contractor shall protect all existing fences for all properties along the
perimeter that will remain in place. The Contractor shall replace the fences
damaged due to Construction activities.
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE
.1 Adhere to the Limits of Construction as shown in the Contract Drawings.
.2 The Contractor shall erect fence along lines as indicated on Design Drawings
and in accordance with CAN/CGSB 138.3.
.3 The Contractor shall dispose of all excavated material in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
.4 Install line and corner posts plumb.
.5 Align top of posts to ensure that top rail varies gradually with changes in ground
elevations.
.6 Pass top rail through line post tops to form continuous bracing. Install 150mm
long couplings mid span at pipe ends.
.7 Brace each gate and corner post back to adjacent line post with horizontal center
brace rail. Install brace rail, one bay from corner and gate posts.
.8 Install 10mm steel truss rod and truss tightener diagonally from top of gate post
back to adjacent line post.
.9 Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces and bottom tension wire with 3.5 mm
wire ties with maximum 500 mm centers.
.10 Attach fabric to corners and posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. Stretch
fabric between posts at intervals of 30.0 m maximum.
.11 Install straining post at approximately 90 m.

.12 Install barbed wire in accordance with Shop Drawings.
3.3 WOODEN STAKES
.1 Install wood stakes to delineate the no-go areas and construction limits at 30 m
interval in accordance with Contact Drawings.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION ORANGE FENCE
.1 1.2m high construction plastic orange fence installed with steel T-bar at 1.8 m
Interval in accordance with the layout indicated in the Contact Drawings.
3.5 HARDWARE CLOTH FENCES (AMPHIBIAN EXCLUSION FENCE)
.1 Hardware cloth fence (galvanized mesh or Birdscreen). The fence shall be

made of heavy galvanized hardware cloth with a 1/8 inch mesh.
.1 Pull the mesh taut and staple or secure with screws and a metal stripping to
prevent the mesh from being ripped when pressure is applied.
.2 Installing a top rail or folding the mesh over a taut smooth wire reduces tearing.
.3 An outward facing lip installed on the species side ensures that snakes and
amphibians are unable to climb or jump over the fence.
.4 Tears can be mended with 18-gauge galvanized wire.
3.6 TOUCH UPS
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that any touch-up work performed is undertaken in
accordance with manufacturer’s requirements
.2 Surface preparation:
.1 Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked
coatings. Apply two coats of organic zinc rich paint to damaged areas.
.3 Painting surface:
.1 Pre-treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers’ instructions for

zinc-rich paint.
3.7 CLEANING
.1 Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material off
site.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement of all types of fences shall be by linear meters (m) of the installed
fence as measured in the field.
.2 Measurement for chain link fence on top of jersey barrier shall be by linear
meters (m) of the installed fence as measured in the field.
.3 Measurement for chain link gates shall be by each (ea) gate as installed in the
field.
.4 Measurement for wood stakes shall be by each (ea) stake as installed in the
field.
.5 Measurement for road shall be by each (ea) sign as installed in the field.
4.2 PAYMENT
Section.

CN – DESIGN & STEEL BEAM GUIDE RAIL SECTION 02844
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
.1 Not Used
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Ontario Provincial Stand Drawings (OPSD)
.1 OPSS 552 - Construction Specification for Steel Beam Guide Rail and
Cable Guide Rail, except as modified below
.1 Submit manufacturer’s test data and certification that all materials meet the
requirements of this section at least thirty days (30) prior to commencing work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings showing dimensions, type, size, and nature of all
components and fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Concrete mixes and materials:
.1 Nominal coarse aggregate size: 20mm.
.2 Compressive strength: 30 MPa minimum at 28 days.
.2 Steel Beam Guide Rail: per OPSS 1504 and OPSD 912.185, 912.186 and
912.188 TYPE M.
.3 Steel Beam Guide Rail End Treatment - OPSD 912.255.
.4 Steel Posts.
.5 Steel Offset bracket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
.1 Remove debris and correct ground undulations along guide rail line to obtain
smooth uniform gradient between posts. Provide clearance between bottom of
guide rail and ground surface of 40 mm to 75 mm.
3.2 ERECTION OF GUIDE RAIL
.1 Erect guide rail along lines, as indicated and in accordance with contract
drawings.
.2 Excavate post footing to dimensions indicated.
.3 Space line posts as indicated, measured parallel to ground surface.
.4 Space posts at equal intervals as indicated.
3.3 TOUCH UP
.1 Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush, removing loose and cracked coatings.
Apply two coats of organic zinc-rich paint to damaged areas.
.2 Pre-treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers' instructions for zinc-rich

paint.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material off
site.

4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for work of this section shall be in linear metres of installed guide
rail as measured in the field.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment will be at the Contract price, per lineal metre, and shall include all
labour, equipment and material to perform the work specified herein, including
steel beam guide rail, steel channel, steel posts, steel offset blocks, concrete
footings, fasteners and all incidental items required for Work of this section.

CN – DESIGN & SEED, SOD AND COVER SECTION 02910
GRADING & DRAINAGE
MI. 36.79 TO 41.00 HALTON SUB PAGE 1 OF 7
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the seed, sod and cover requirements for the Works.
1.2 RELATED SCHEDULES AND SECTIONS
.5 Conditions Surveys Section 02203
.7 Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting Section 02315
.1 OPSS.MUNI 804, Construction Specification for Seed and Cover.
to ensure all seed, sod, and cover meet the requirements of the Specifications in
accordance with Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
1.5 SUBMITTALS
with the requirements of this Section, Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Topsoil, Seed and Mulch Test Report at least four weeks prior to
commencing the installation for review in accordance with the
requirements of this Section and Section 02912 Topsoil and Finish
Grading:
.1 Topsoil, Seed and Mulch Test Report shall also include suppliers’
test data and certification, including the Seed Analysis Certificates
confirming that all materials meet the requirements of this Section.
.2 The Contractor shall submit Topsoil and Finish Grading – Topographical

Survey submittal for review. This submittal shall include a topographical
survey of the entire seed and sod area within the construction limits and
access roads of the Works prior to commencing construction and a
topographical survey of the same area following the placing of topsoil,
seed and cover. The Contractor shall submit the pre-construction
topographical survey at least four weeks prior to the construction and the
post-construction topographical survey after completion of the work.
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all Products remain in their original sealed
packaging until their installation.
.2 The Contractor shall store the seeds in a cool, dry location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
.1 Permanent Seeding will include the following mixes as delineated on the

Contract Drawings.
.1 Seed Mix 1 (Stabilization Mix) for all slopes. Sow simultaneously with all
other seed mixes at a rate of 25 kg/ha.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
% Common Name Latin Name
18 Autumn Bentgrass Agrostis perennans
18 Slender Wheat Grass Elymus trachycaulus
12 Canada Wild Rye Elymus canadensis
12 Virginia Wild Rye Elymus virginicus
12 Switchgrass Panicum virgatum
12 Indiangrass Sorghastrum nutans
5 Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii
5 Little Bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium
2 Black-Eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta
2 New England Aster Symphyotrichum novae-angliae
2 Common Milkweed Asclepias syriaca
.2 Seed Mix 2 (Channel Riparian and Riparian Wetland Zone)
Conservation Halton Meadow Marsh Mix or approved other. Sow at a rate of 5

kg/ha.
25 Fowl Bluegrass Poa palustris
25 Fox Sedge Carex vulpinoidea
13 Blue Vervain Verbena hastata
10 Meadow Sedge Carex granularis
5 Dark Green Bulrush Scirpus atrovirens
5 Soft Rush Juncus effusus
2 Boneset Eupatorium perfoliatus
2 Swamp Milkweed Asclepias incarnata
2 Stalk Grain Sedge Carex stipata
2 Tall Manna Grass Glyceria grandis
2 Woolgrass Scirpus cyperinus
2 Spotted Joe Pye Weed Eupatorium maculatum
1 Bebb's Sedge Carex bebbi
1 Blue Lobelia Lobelia silphilitica
1 Grass Leaved Goldenrod Euthamia graminifolia
GRADING & DRAINAGE
1 Purple Stemmed Aster Symphyotrichum puniceum
1 Square Stemmed Monkey Flower Mimulus ringens
.3 Seed Mix 3 (Floodplain Zone)
Conservation Halton Early Succession/Riparian Mix or approved other. Sow at a

rate of 5 kg/ha.
25 Fowl Bluegrass Poa palustris
10 Blue Vervain Verbena hastata
10 Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii
10 Path Rush Juncus tenuis
5 Black Eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta
4 Canada Goldenrod Solidago canadensis
4 Virgin's Bower Clematis virginiana
4 Wild Bergamot Monarda fistulosa
1 Canada Anemone Anemone canadensis
1 New England Aster Symphyotrichum novae-angliae
1 Purple Stemmed Aster Symphyotrichum puniceum
.4 Seed Mix 4 (Upland Zone)
Conservation Halton Upland Dry Meadow Mix or approved other. Sow at a rate of
5 kg/ha.
20 Little Bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium
15 Bottlebrush grass Elymus histrix
15 Black Eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta
8 Canada Goldenrod Solidago canadensis
8 Evening Primrose Oenothera biennis
GRADING & DRAINAGE
5 Virgin's Bower Clematis virginiana
5 Wild Bergamot Monarda fistulosa
1 Canada Anemone Anemone canadensis
1 Grass Leaved Goldenrod Euthamia graminifolia
1 Heart-leaved Aster Symphyotrichum cordifolium
1 New England Aster Aster novae-angliae
.5 Chemicals: Glyphosate or approved other non-selective herbicide, applied to

Zone 6 plots during site preparation in accordance with all applicable regulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that grades are prepared in accordance with the
Drawings prior to installation.
.2 The Contractor shall eliminate all uneven areas and low spots of graded soil and
ensure positive drainage.
.3 The Contractor shall remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mm

diameter and other deleterious materials.
.4 The Contractor shall remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic
materials and petroleum products.
.5 The Contractor shall dispose of all removed material off-site in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
.6 The Contractor shall not use topsoil to fill variations in the prepared earth
surface, including erosion channels.
.7 The Contractor shall ensure that in all disturbed areas, prior to any planting and
mulching, existing subsoil shall be scarified and de-compacted to 30 cm or more.
3.2 SEEDING
.1 Seed mix shall be applied in areas as per this Section.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all seeding used conforms to OPSS.PROV 804.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
3.3 SOD
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that 150 mm topsoil and Number One Turfgrass
Nursery Sod is applied to all Project areas that need to be restored with Sod as
required.
3.4 COVER
.1 The Contractor shall adhere to OPSS.MUNI 804, but at a rate of 4,200 kg/ha.
Hydraulic mulch shall be mixed with water in a hydraulic seeder-mulcher at a rate
of 20-300 kg of dry Product to 500 – 600 liters of water to form homogenous
slurry.
3.5 RESTORATION OF STOCKPILE SITES
.1 The Contractor shall restore each of its stockpile sites used to store materials to
existing conditions in accordance with Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching,
Backfilling and Compacting.
.2 The Contractor shall reinstate any damaged or disturbed areas, caused as a

result, to its operations to the original elevations after completion of the Works
3.6 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1 Project Co shall dispose of any unwanted and surplus materials in accordance

with Sections 02311 Site Grading and Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching,
Backfilling and Compacting.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for payment shall be per square meter (m2) properly seeded by the
Contractor and inspected and approved by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental
Monitor.
.2 Seeding of disturbed areas resulting from other items of this tender (including the
removal of erosion and sediment control measures) shall be considered
incidental to the tender price. Seed shall be applied at rates indicated on the
Contract Drawings per seed mix type and shall be applied. This item will not be
considered for additional payment and the repair and restoration of disturbed
areas shall be considered as part of the entire tender price.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment at the unit price tendered in the Form of Tender shall be considered
compensation in full for all specified labour and equipment, hauling, placing,
handling, sorting, fitting, materials, and incidentals required by the Contractor.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
CN – DESIGN & TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING SECTION 02912
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the requirements of topsoil and finish grading for the
Works.
.6 Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling Section 02315
.7 Seed, Sod, and Cover Section 02910
.1 OPSS.MUNI 802, Construction Specification for Topsoil.
Specifications.
.2 The Contractor shall engage in services of an inspection and testing company as

part of its scope under Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance to
undertake required sampling and testing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Topsoil, Seed and Mulch Test Reports providing test results for soil
analysis and information about sources of topsoil to be used. Reports are
to be provided four weeks in advance of commencing work. The
Contractor shall be responsible for soil analysis and requirements for
amendments to supply topsoil as specified:
.1 The Contractor acknowledges that if any materials from a

proposed source do not meet the specified requirements, the
Contractor shall locate an alternative source or provide required
test results to demonstrate that the material from the source in
question can be processed to meet specified requirements. The
Contractor shall submit samples and the alternative source
information, or source processing information, for review in
accordance.
.2 The Contractor shall submit Top Soil and Finish Grading - Topographical
Survey submittal for review. This submittal shall include a topographical
survey of the entire topsoil, seed and sod area within the Limits of
Construction and access roads of the Works prior to commencing
construction and a topographical survey of the same area following the
placing of topsoil, seed, and cover.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
.1 The contractor shall ensure to reuse all topsoil generated from the site. In case of
additional topsoil is required, the Contractor shall ensure that all imported topsoil
for seeded and sodded areas is a mixture of mineral particulates, micro-
organisms and organic matter:
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all soil texture conforms to the Canadian
System of Soil Classification 3rd Edition (1998), which specifies a
consistency of 20% to 70% sand and 2% to 10% organic matter by
weight;
.2 With regard to fertility, the Contractor shall ensure that all major soil
nutrients present in the following ratios:
.1 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N per gram of

topsoil;
.2 Phosphorus (P): 10 to 20 micrograms of phosphate per gram of

topsoil;
.3 Potassium (K): 80 to 120 micrograms of potash per gram of

topsoil; and
.4 Calcium (C), Magnesium (M), Sulphur (S) and micronutrients

present in balanced ratios to support germination and
establishment of intended vegetation.
.3 The Contractor shall ensure that installed topsoil has a Ph value in the
range of 6.5 to 8.0;
.4 The Contractor shall ensure that topsoil contains no toxic elements or

growth inhibiting materials;
.5 Prior to installation, the Contractor shall ensure that all topsoil is free
from:
.1 Debris and stones over 50mm diameter; and
.2 Course vegetative material, 10mm diameter and over 100mm

length, occupying more than 2% of soil volume.
.6 The Contractor shall ensure that the consistency of topsoil is friable when
moist.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the grades are prepared in accordance with the
Contract Drawings prior to installation. If discrepancies occur, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer for review.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all graded soil has uneven areas and low spots
eliminated, ensuring positive drainage.
.3 The Contractor shall remove all debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of
50mm diameter and other deleterious materials.
.4 The Contractor shall remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic
materials and petroleum Products.
.5 The Contractor shall dispose of all removed material off Site in accordance with
Contract Documents.
3.2 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL
.1 The Contractor shall not place the topsoil until the subgrade is verified and
accepted by the Contractor-appointed survey team and an Independent
Laboratory and Sampling and Testing Company.
.2 The Contractor shall spread the topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm,
over unfrozen subgrade free of standing water.
.3 For sodded areas, the Contractor shall ensure that topsoil is 15mm below the
finished grade.
.4 The Contractor shall spread topsoil to depths as indicated on the Drawings after
settlement and compaction.
.5 The Contractor shall manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs
and obstacles.
3.3 FINISH GRADING
.1 The Contractor shall grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensure
positive drainage. The Contractor shall prepare a loose friable bed by means of
cultivation and subsequent raking.
.2 The Contractor shall consolidate topsoil to the required bulk density using
appropriate equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that it leaves surfaces
smooth, uniform and firm against deep footprinting.
.3 The Contractor shall compact and drag the topsoil to remove any equipment
depressions or any other surface irregularities that will encourage erosion.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
.1 The Contractor shall inspect and test the topsoil in place to determine
acceptance of the material, the depth of the topsoil and the finish grading. The
Contractor shall provide the Topsoil, Seed and Mulch Test Reports for review.
.2 The Contractor shall correct any failure of topsoil, seed or cover work, as well as
any repairs of erosion, including the repair of scouring, slough, and clean-up/
excavation of eroded material (i.e. cleaning-out ditches), for a period of two
growing seasons.
3.5 RESTORATION OF STOCKPILE SITES
.1 The Contractor shall restore stockpile sites used to store materials to their
existing conditions in accordance with Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching, and
Backfilling.
.2 The Contractor shall reinstate any damaged or disturbed areas caused as a

result of its operations to the original conditions and the original elevations after
completion of the Works.
3.6 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1 The Contractor shall dispose the unwanted and surplus materials in accordance
with Section 2311 Site Grading and Section 02315 Excavation, Trenching, and
Backfilling.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for topsoil and finish shall be by square meters of properly installed
topsoil.
.3 Calculation of quantities shall be based on the area of material within the design,
as calculated by the Engineer.
4.2 PAYMENT
Payment for the Work of this Section shall be included in the unit prices included
use of equipment, tools and incidentals to complete the Work of this Section.
***END OF SECTION***
CN – DESIGN & TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING SECTION 02970
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for tree and shrub planting including,
without limitation, all labour, materials and equipment required to install and
warranty plant material including rodent guards, staking and mulching in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
.2 The Contractor shall pre-order all plant material to ensure availability immediately
upon award of contract. All plant substitutions must be approved by a
Landscape Architect prior to order.
.3 The Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor reserves the right to reject plant
material onsite prior to or after planting operations if poor quality stock is
observed. All plant materials shall be subject to inspection upon arrival on job site
before starting work. Immediately remove all rejected plant materials from the
site.
.4 Provide Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor at least 48 hours’ notice of

arrival of plant materials on job site.
.5 All plant material delivered to the site shall be inspected and approved by the
Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor prior to installation. Plant material
deemed unsuitable shall be replaced at the sub-contractor’s expense and no
compensation for disposal or transport of rejected or replacement material shall
be made.
.6 Landscape Maintenance Section 02976

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Contractor is to provide the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor notification

of plant material supply sources. This must occur a minimum 10 working days
prior to projected delivery to the site.
.2 All packing slips for delivery of plant material must be submitted to CN’s
Environmental Monitor within 48 hours of the delivery. Failure to provide
documentation may result in delayed or non-payment of items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
.1 Water: potable free of minerals which may be detrimental to plant growth.
.2 Stakes: 2 x 2 wood a minimum of 2440 mm long.
.3 Ties: Biodegradable webbing material, Arbortie or approved equivalent.
.4 Mulch: shall be coco discs or ‘Gro-Bark SPM’ shredded pine bark mulch or
approved equivalent(s). All plantings in riparian zones to be mulched with coco
discs only. Trees in riparian zones shall have a minimum 60cm diameter coco
mat and trees shall have 90 cm coco mat. All coco mats shall be minimum 4mm
in thickness.
Submit sample of proposed alternate for review and approval by the Engineer or
CN’s Environmental Monitor five (5) working days prior to installation.
.5 Rodent Protection: To be Arborguard or approved equivalent installed per

Manufacturer’s instructions.
.6 All plant material must be nursery grown and meet the specifications set out in
the latest Guide Specifications for Nursery Stock prepared by the Canadian
Nursery Landscape Association (C.N.L.A.) for size, height, spread, grading,
quality and method of cultivation.
.7 Plant Material: True to name and type, structurally sound, well branched; healthy
and vigorous and free from disease, insect infestations, rodent damage, sun
scald, frost cracks, and other abrasions to the bark and densely foliated with a
healthy, well developed root system. Pruning wounds must show vigorous bark
on all edges and all parts must show live and green cambium tissue when cut.
.8 Trees: With straight trunks, well and characteristically branched for species
except where specified otherwise.
.9 Potted Stock: Nursery grown in container.
.10 Bare Root Stock: Nursery grown, in dormant stage, not balled and burlapped or
container grown.
.11 All material must conform to the sizes shown on the plant schedule, except that
larger material may be used when approved by the Engineer or CN’s
Environmental Monitor. Use of larger plants will not increase the contract price.
.12 Plant material sizes must conform to the following standards:
.1 Caliper - diameter of the trunk measured 150 mm above the normal grade
around the plant;
.2 Height - measured from the normal grade around the plant to the top of
the main foliage mass; and
.3 Spread - the diameter of the main foliage mass, at its widest point.
.13 Balled and Burlapped Plants or Wire Basket: plants marked B&B or W.B. are to
be balled and burlapped and shall be dug with a sufficient quantity of earth taken
equally on all sides and bottoms of the plants to include the necessary roots to
ensure growth. The thickness of depth of the balls shall be sufficient to include
the depth of the roots according to species. The balls shall be prepared in a
workmanlike manner and firmly bound.
.14 Perennial Plug: sufficient root mass to ensure long-term success and
establishment.
Apply anti-desiccant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Provide plants to meet minimum plot size and heights indicated in plant
schedules on Contract Drawings.
.2 Provide rootballs of the following minimum sizes to meet the corresponding tree
size. Ensure the rootball is large enough to accommodate at least 75% of the
fibrous root system.
DECIDUOUS TREES CONIFEROUS TREES
Caliper Rootball Diameter Height Rootball Diameter
50 mm 70 cm 175 cm 60 cm
60 mm 80 cm 200 cm 70 cm
70 mm 80 cm 225 cm 80 cm
80 mm 90 cm 250 cm 80 cm
90 mm 90 cm 275 cm 90 cm
100 mm 100 cm 300 cm 90 cm
110 mm 110 cm 350 cm 100 cm
120 mm 120 cm 400 cm 110 cm
.3 Provide a rootball depth as follows:

Rootball Diameter Rootball Depth
50 cm – 100 cm 60% of diameter
100 cm – 150 cm 60% of diameter
.4 Wrap rootballs according to the following schedule:

Rootball Diameter Wrapping Schedule
Up to 50 cm single wrap 142 g hessian burlap
50 cm – 60 cm double wrap 142 g hessian burlap
Over 60 cm double wrap 142 g hessian burlap
and drum laced with 6 mm rope at
20 cm spacing
.5 Carefully tie in all branches before transporting. Do not transport plant material in
an open truck unless it is adequately protected from sun and wind. Protect bare
roots by means of dampened straw, peat moss, saw dust or other acceptable
material to prevent loss of moisture during transit and storage.
.6 Keep roots moist and protected from sun and wind. Heel-in trees and shrubs
which cannot be planted immediately in shaded areas and keep well-watered.
Plant materials shall be planted within 24-hours of arrival on job site whenever
feasible.
.7 Provide a written warranty stating that all plant material as itemized on the plant
schedules are warrantied against defects and mortality for a period of two (2)
years from the date of complete (100%) installation for the planting works as
determined by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor. The Engineer shall
provide written confirmation of the warranty start date once a site inspection has
been completed following notice of completion from the Contractor.
.8 During the warranty period, replace material that is dead or not in a satisfactory,
healthy growing state or that does not meet the requirements of the
specifications at the sole discretion of the Engineer or CN’s Environmental
Monitor, at no extra cost to the Contract. Epicormic growth will not be considered
acceptable growth. For Restoration Planting (01-L-463 to 01-L-465) the
Contractor is required to ensure a minimum 80% success rate within each
planting zone to meet the density target goals for each community.
.9 All plant materials shall be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition at the end of
the warranty period. A plant shall be assumed to be acceptable/successful when
it is structurally sound, when it is well furnished with living foliage, when it has
normal colour, when it shows adequate annual growth and formation of buds and
when it is free from blight or any description. Plant material which has severely
“died back” and has re-grown from a bud or shoot shall be considered to be in an
unsatisfactory condition and unacceptable.
.10 The Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor reserves the right to extend
warranty period for an additional one year if, at the end of initial warranty period,
leaf development and growth is not sufficient to ensure future survival.
.11 All replacements must be plants of the same size and species as shown on the
plant schedule, supplied and planted in accordance with the drawings and
specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
.12 Replacement of plant materials broken or damaged due to circumstances

beyond the Contractor’s control after completion shall not be an obligation under
this warranty including vandalism or extreme weather.
.13 Coordinate operations. Keep site clean and planting holes drained. Immediately
remove soil or debris spilled onto pavement.
.14 Plant bare root plant material during dormant period before buds have broken.
Trees, shrubs and perennials growing in potted containers may be planted
throughout the growing season.
.15 Plant only under conditions that are conducive to health and physical conditions
of plants.
.16 Provide planting schedule. Extending planting operations over long period using
limited crew will not be accepted.
.17 Do all planting as soon as possible after arrival to job site.
.18 Small Trees (up to 3.0 m): Excavate holes to a diameter of 300 mm greater than
root spread or root ball.
.19 Large Trees: Excavate holes to a width of 600 mm greater than diameter of root
ball. In heavy soils, increase planting holes by 50 mm for each 100 mm of root
ball diameter.
.20 Locate all underground and overhead utilities and services at least 48-hours prior
to commencement of any planting.
.21 Protect all utilities from damage during planting operations. Repair any damage
as a result of planting operations to the approval of the Engineer or CN’s
Environmental Monitor and the appropriate utility authority at no additional cost to
the Contract.
.22 The location of trees and shrub plantings are approximate only and shall be field
fit to existing site conditions per the layout parameters provided on the Contract
drawings (01-L-500 and 01-L-501). All caliper-sized tree locations to be staked
out by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental
Monitor prior to installation. Excavate approved locations only.
.23 The sides of all plant holes shall be vertical and the bottoms horizontal. On
slopes, the depth of excavation will be measured at the center of the hole. Unless
otherwise specified, the excess material excavated from the holes of potted or
wire basked plant material shall be removed from the site at the expense of the
Contractor unless otherwise directed by the Contract.
.24 The area to be planted shall be finished to line, grade, and the approval of the
Engineer before planting operations are begun.
.25 Planting shall be done during periods suitable with respect to weather conditions,
locally accepted practices and the approval of the Engineer or CN’s
.26 All plants shall be placed in a plumb position and set 50mm higher than the depth
they grew in the nursery. Prepared backfill shall be placed around the root
system. Tamping or watering shall accompany the backfilling operation to
eliminate air pockets.
.27 Place plant plumb in the center of the planting pit with a minimum of 150 mm of
compacted planting soil mixture around all sides of the rootball. Face the plant to
give the best appearance or relationship to adjacent structures. Cut away any
ropes or wires which might girdle the tree and remove the top one third of burlap
and wire basket.
.28 Place bare root plants so that the roots lie in a natural position and spread out
roots in a horizontal direction.
.29 Planting beds: Loosen compacted materials on planting bottoms and sides,
backfill with approved soil mix in 150 mm layers and firmly tamp each layer to
ensure the plant retains its orientation. Ensure no air pockets remain around the
roots.
.30 Water thoroughly when hole is 1/2 full of tamped soil mixture, and again when
the operation is.
.31 Except for plants in planting beds, construct an earth saucer around each tree
equal to the diameter of the root ball and 100 mm minimum depth to retain water
around the roots.
.32 Install tree supports as shown on planting details in Contract Drawings. Drive
stakes minimum 150 mm into undisturbed soil beneath root ball. Ensure stake is
secure, firm, plumb, and straight and true to line.
.33 Prune all dead, dying and broken branches, do not prune healthy branches.
Preserve the natural form and character of the plants. Do not cut leader. Use
only clean, sharp tools and make cuts flush without leaving stubs.
.34 Spread mulch to a minimum depth of 100 mm or place coco discs. Do not cover
the root flare and ensure that mulch is not mounded on the trunk and is a
minimum of 50 mm from trunk.
.35 Maintain all plant materials from time of planting until the end of the two-year
warranty period in accordance with Section 02976 Landscape Maintenance.
.36 The Contractor shall remove all staking and ties at the termination of the first
year of the two-year warranty period. Rodent guards to be left on for the duration
of the warranty period and shall be removed prior to Final Completion.
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for payment shall be per each item properly installed by the
Contractor and inspected and approved by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental
Monitor.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment at the price tendered in the Form of Tender shall be considered


CN – DESIGN & LIVESTAKES SECTION 02972
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the requirements including, without limitation, the supply,
installation, and warranty of livestakes as per the Contract Drawings.
.4 Stream Restoration Special Provisions Section 02910
.5 Landscape Maintenance Section 02976
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide a written warranty stating that livestakes itemized on the plant schedules
are warrantied against defects and mortality for a period of two (2) years from the
date of complete installation for the planting works as determined by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall provide written confirmation of the warranty start
date once a site inspection has been completed following notice of completion
from the Sub-contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
.1 All plant material shall be harvested locally (within the same physiographic
ecoregion and plant hardiness zone) or purchased from a local nursery, with the
approval of the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor. All live stakes shall be
dormant at time of acquisition and planting. Live stakes may be installed between
November 15 and March 15 in non-frozen conditions.
.2 Live stakes shall be 10-50 mm diameter, and 0.75 -1.0 m length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 All replacements must be plants of the same size and species as shown on the
plant schedule, supplied and planted in accordance with the drawings and
specifications or as approved by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental Monitor.
.2 During preparation, the basal ends of the live stakes shall be cleanly cut at an
angle to facilitate easy insertion into the soil, while the tops shall be cut square or
blunt for tamping. All limbs shall be removed from the sides of the live cutting
prior to installation.
.3 Cuttings for live stakes shall be harvested in manner such that they are cut,
immediately put into water to be soaked for 24-hours, and then planted
immediately after the 24-hours are completed. Cuttings shall remain wet until
they are planted. Outside storage locations should be continually shaded and
protected from wind and direct sunlight.
.4 Live stakes shall be tamped perpendicularly into the finished bank slope with a
dead blow hammer, with buds oriented in an upward direction. Stakes should be
tamped until approximately ¾ of the stake length is within the ground.
.5 The area around each live stake shall be compacted by foot after the live stake
has been installed.
.6 Stakes shall be spaced approximately 0.50 m and 1.0 m on center in a diamond

pattern. One to two inches shall be cut cleanly off of the top of each live stake
(with loppers) at an angle of approximately 15 degrees following installation. Any
stakes that are split or damaged during installation shall be removed and
replaced.
.7 Where nursery availability restricts species from fall planting, accommodation for
spring planting shall be reviewed and must be approved by the Engineer or CN’s
Environmental Monitor in writing.
.8 During the warranty period, replace material that is dead or not in a satisfactory,
healthy growing state or that does not meet the requirements of the
specifications at the sole discretion of the Engineer, at no extra cost to the
Contract. Epicormic growth will not be considered acceptable growth. The Sub-
contractor is required to ensure a minimum 75% success rate within the overall
livestake planting zone to meet the minimum density target goals. A minimum of
one successful livestake shall be present in each square meter (m2) of planting
area to ensure bank stability.
.9 All live stakes shall be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition at the end of the
warranty period. A plant shall be assumed to be acceptable/successful when it is
structurally sound, when it is well furnished with living foliage, when it has normal
colour, when it shows adequate annual growth and formation of buds and when it
is free from blight or any description. A live stake which has severely “died back”
and has re-grown from a bud or shoot shall be considered to be in an
unsatisfactory condition and unacceptable (within the established allowable
mortality parameters).
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for payment shall be per each item properly installed by the sub-
contractor and inspected and approved by the Engineer or CN’s Environmental
Monitor.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 Payment at the price tendered in the Form of Tender shall be considered


CN – DESIGN & CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 03200 specifies the requirements for the supply and installation of steel
reinforcement and mechanical connections for concrete structures.
.1 Retained Soil Systems, Wall/Slope Section 02276
.4 Metal Railings for Structures Section 05121
.1 Designated Sources for Materials (DSM).
.1 OPSS.PROV 905, Construction Specification for Steel Reinforcement for

Concrete (April 2020), including all applicable references specified therein;
and
.2 OPSS.PROV 1440, Material Specification for Steel Reinforcement for

Concrete (April 2020), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 ASTM A276/A276M-17, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and

Shapes; and
.2 ASTM A955/A955M-20, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Stainless Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 905 and OPSS.PROV

1440.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings and Steel Reinforcement Schedules
.1 Shop drawing and steel reinforcement schedules submissions shall be

.2 Welding Details
.1 Welding details submissions shall be according to OPSS.PROV 905.
.3 Mechanical Connections Details
.1 Mechanical connections details submissions shall be according to

OPSS.PROV 905.
.1 Mill test certificate submissions for reinforcing steel bars, stainless steel
reinforcing bars, steel welded wire reinforcement, splice bars and stainless
steel splice bars shall be according to OPSS.PROV 1440.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Reinforcing Steel Bars, Splice Bars, Tie Bars, Dowel Bars, Spirals, and Spacers
.1 Reinforcing steel bars, splice bars, tie bars, dowel bars, spirals and spacers
shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1440 with the following additions
and amendments:
.1 The second paragraph of Subsection 1440.05.01 of OPSS.PROV
1440 is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following:
.1 All reinforcing steel bars shall be Grade 400W except for a
structure, the grade shall be as specified in the Contract
Documents.
.2 Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars, Stainless Steel Splice Bars, Tie Bars, Dowel Bars,
Spirals, Spacers, and Stainless Steel Mechanical Connectors
.1 Stainless steel reinforcing bars, stainless steel splice bars, tie bars, dowel
bars, spirals, spacers, and stainless steel mechanical connectors shall be in
accordance with OPSS.PROV 1440 with the following additions and
amendments:
.1 The first paragraph of Subsection 1440.05.02 of OPSS.PROV 1440 is
deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following:
.1 Stainless steel reinforcing bars and spirals shall be according
to ASTM A276 and ASTM A955, minimum Grade 520.
.3 Plain and Deformed Steel Wire

.1 Plain and deformed steel wire shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV
1440.
.4 Steel Welded Steel Wire Reinforcement
.1 Steel welded steel wire reinforcement shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 1440.
.5 Mechanical Connections Details for Reinforcing Steel Bars and Stainless Steel
Reinforcing Bars
.1 Mechanical connections details for reinforcing steel bars and stainless steel
reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 905.
.6 Mechanical Connectors for Reinforcing Steel Bars and Stainless Steel Reinforcing
Bars
.1 Mechanical connectors for reinforcing steel bars and stainless steel

reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 905.
.7 Associated Hardware
.1 Associated hardware, including spacers and support devices, shall be in

2.2 PRODUCTION
.1 Manufacture of Reinforcing Steel Bars
.1 The manufacture of reinforcing steel bars shall be by a manufacturer listed

under "Mill" in the MTO’s DSM listing for Reinforcing Steel, Uncoated,
Fabricators and Mills, for the grade specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 Manufacture of Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars
.1 Manufacture of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 1440.
.3 Fabrication of Reinforcing Steel Bar, Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bar, Splice Bar, and
Stainless Steel Splice Bars
.1 Fabrication of reinforcing steel bar, stainless steel reinforcing bar, splice bar,
and stainless steel splice bars shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1440
.1 The first paragraph of Subsection 1440.07.03 of OPSS.PROV 1440 is
deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following:
.1 Bars shall be cold bent at the fabricator's shop listed under
“Fabricators” in the MTO’s DSM listings for Reinforcing Steel,
for the grade specified in the Contract Documents.
.4 Identification
.1 Identification of reinforcing steel bars, stainless steel reinforcing bars, splice
bars and stainless steel splice bars shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV
1440.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 All steel reinforcement and accessories shall be kept clean of mud, oil and other
deleterious materials, and stored clear of ground contact.
.2 Steel reinforcement shall be placed according to the tolerances specified in

OPSS.PROV 905, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. The
tolerances specified include fabrication tolerances.
.3 Storage and protection, placing, surface condition, cutting, bending, welding, splicing
and mechanical connections of reinforcing steel bars, stainless steel reinforcing bars,
splice bars, stainless steel splice bars and steel welded wire reinforcing shall be in
.4 Inspection after Installation of Steel Reinforcement and Mechanical Connectors
.1 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion of

the installation of the steel reinforcement and, if any, mechanical connectors.
.2 The next operation shall not proceed until a Notice to Proceed has been
received from the Engineer.

Documents.
.1 Mechanical Connectors and Stainless Steel Mechanical Connectors
.1 For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of

mechanical connectors and stainless steel mechanical connectors installed.
.1 Reinforcing Steel Bar and Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bar
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the reinforcing steel bar, Grade 400W
tender items and stainless steel reinforcing bar tender items shall be full
.2 Mechanical Connectors and Stainless Steel Mechanical Connectors

.1 Payment at the Contract price for the mechanical connectors tender items
and stainless steel mechanical connectors tender items shall be full

CN – DESIGN & CONCRETE ACCESSORIES SECTION 03203
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 03203 specifies the requirements for concrete accessories for the
works, including the following:
.1 Supply and installation of electrical and communication materials to be

embedded in structures;
.2 Fabrication and installation of deck joint assemblies;
.3 Supply and placing of preformed seals, joint fillers, joint sealing compounds
and proprietary joint seals; and
.4 Pressure injection, routing and sealing of joints/cracks in concrete for the

purpose of structural rehabilitation and water seepage control.
.1 Designated Sources for Materials (DSM); and

.1 LS-262, Method of Test for Bulk Relative Density of Compacted
Bituminous Mixtures.
.1 OPSS.PROV 913, Construction Specification for Embedded Work in

Structures for Electrical Systems (November 2017), including all applicable
references specified therein;
.2 OPSS.PROV 920, Construction Specification for Deck Joint Assemblies,

Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers, and Joint Sealing Compounds – Structures
.3 OPSS.PROV 929 Construction Specification Abrasive Blast Cleaning –

Concrete Construction (November 2017), including all applicable references
specified therein;
.4 OPSS.PROV 930 Construction Specification for Structure Rehabilitation –
Concrete Patches, Refacing, and Overlays (November 2014); including all
applicable references specified therein;
.5 OPSS.PROV 932, Construction Specification for Crack Repair – Concrete

.6 OPSS.PROV 1210, Material Specification for Deck Joint Assemblies

(November 2020), including all applicable references specified therein; and
.7 OPSS.PROV 1308, Material Specification for Joint Filler in Concrete

(November 2003), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 CGSB 37.50-M89, Hot-Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and

Waterproofing.
.1 ASTM D36/D36M-14 (Reapproved 2020), Standard Test Method for

Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus);
.2 ASTM D70-18a, Standard Test Method for Density of Semi-Solid Asphalt

Binder (Pycnometer Method); and
.3 ASTM D5329-20, Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, Hot-
Applied, for Joints and Cracks in Asphalt Pavements and Portland Cement
Concrete Pavements.
.1 Deck Joint Assemblies, Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers, Joint Sealing Compounds and
Proprietary Joint Seals
.1 Quality assurance for deck joint assemblies, preformed seals, joint fillers, joint
sealing compounds and proprietary joint seals shall be in accordance with
OPSS.PROV 920.
.2 Pressure Injection, Routing and Sealing of Joints/Cracks in Concrete
.1 Quality assurance for pressure injection, routing and sealing of cracks in

concrete shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 932 with the following
.1 Testing Joint/Crack Sealant Compound
.1 All samples of sealant compound that are used for sealing
joints and cracks in hot mix asphalt pavements and Portland
cement concrete pavements shall/will be tested for all of the
attributes listed in the table below, with the exceptions as
noted.
Testing Requirements
Test Procedures Procedures

Required for Required for Hot-
Hot-Poured Poured
Rubberized Rubberized
Joint/Crack Joint/Crack
Sealing Sealing
Compounds Compounds Used
Used in Hot in Portland
Mix Asphalt Cement Concrete
Pavements Pavements
Sample CGSB 37.50-M CGSB 37.50-M

Preparation
Cone Penetration ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Resilience ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Asphalt ASTM D5329 Not Required

Compatibility (Note 1)
(tested at 80 °C)
Bond (Non- ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329

Immersed) (Note 2)
Flow ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Softening Point ASTM D36 Not Required

(Note 1)
Relative Density ASTM D70 LS-262

(Note 1)
Toughness Not Required CGSB 37.50-M
Notes:
1. For each batch of sealant compound used in hot mix
asphalt pavements, the Contractor shall provide results
for all of these tests. However, for re-heated sealant
compounds that are sampled during construction, these
tests will be completed at the discretion of the Engineer.
2. For each batch of “All Districts” products used as
joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt
pavements, the Contractor shall provide test results
based on bond testing that is conducted in three cycles
at -29 °C with both 50% and 200% extension. For each
batch of “Southern Ontario Only” sealant used as
joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt
pavement, the Contractor shall provide test results
based on bond testing that is conducted in five cycles at
-18 °C with 50% extension. All re-heated sealant
compounds sampled during construction will be tested in
five cycles at -18 °C with 50% extension, or when used
as joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt
pavements, the samples will be tested, as specified by
the Engineer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Deck Joint Assemblies
.1 Within 30 days of the Contract award, the name and address of the
manufacturer of the deck joint assembly shall be submitted to the Engineer.
.2 Deck joint assembly shop drawings submissions shall be according to

OPSS.PROV 920.
.3 Prior to the commencement of fabrication of the deck joint assembly, a

drawing showing the actual joint dimensions at the existing deck joint
assembly locations shall be submitted to the Engineer.
.4 Submittals for cold weather protection for epoxy injection shall be according
to OPSS.PROV 920.
.5 Inspection after the Fabrication of Expansion Joints

.1 A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance and Request to Proceed
shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion of the fabrication
of the expansion joint and prior to shipping from the plant.
.2 The expansion joint shall not be delivered from the plant until the
Engineer has received the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance,
Request to Proceed, and issued a Notice to Proceed.
.6 A concrete mix design shall be submitted according to Section 03312

Concrete Work for concrete in deck joint assemblies.
.2 Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers and Joint Sealing Compounds
.1 Product technical data sheets and samples of preformed seals, joint fillers
and joint sealing compounds shall be submitted to the Engineer.
.3 Proprietary Joint Seals
.1 The proprietary joint seal product technical data sheet shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least five days prior to installation.
.2 Documentation from the proprietary joint seal manufacturer shall be

submitted that shows the date of manufacture of the proprietary joint seal to
be installed.
.1 Crack repair work plan submission shall be according to OPSS.PROV 932.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 Deck Joint Assemblies and Preformed Seals
.1 Deck joint assemblies and preformed seals shall be designed in accordance

with OPSS.PROV 1210.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Electrical and Communication Materials to be embedded in Structures
.1 Electrical and communication materials to be embedded in structures shall be

in accordance with OPSS.PROV 913.
.2 Deck Joint Assemblies, Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers and Joint Sealing Compounds
.1 Deck joint assemblies, preformed seals, joint fillers and joint sealing
compounds shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 920.
.1 All proprietary joint seal materials shall be supplied as new from the
manufacturer and no materials shall be used that are more than two years old
from the date of manufacture.
.2 The proprietary joint seal shall be selected from the table below:
Proprietary Joint Seals
Location Manufacturer Product Model
Transverse D.S. Brown Matrix 502 N/A

Expansion Asphaltic
Joint at Deck Expansion
Ends Bridge Joint
Mageba Polyflex PA-30

Advanced PU
Barrier Wall D.S. Brown V-Seal V-300

Expansion Expansion Joint
Joints Systems
Erie Metal CSBHT - Series CSBHT-100

EOS - Series EOS-100
D.S. Brown & J Series Sealing J-150

Erie Metal Systems
JP Series JP-150
Sealing Systems
EMSEAL BEJS-On-A-Reel BOR-0125

(BOR)
RJ Watson Silicoflex SF-225
Watson Bowman FS Bridge Seal FS-150

Acme (Wabo)
Inverseal IV-200
Jeene 50-W
SPS SPS-225
.4 Materials for Pressure Injection, Routing and Sealing of Joints/Cracks in Concrete
.1 Grout, joint sealing compounds and water shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 932 with the following additions and amendments:
.1 Shipments of hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant
compounds shall meet the requirements given in the table below.
Sealant Designation
Test
“Southern “All Districts”
Ontario Only” (Note 1)
Cone Penetration @ 25 °C  90 units -
Flow (mm) 5 3
Bond - 3 cycles @ 50% Pass -

extension at -18 °C
Notes:
1. A successful field trial is required before a product is accepted
for placement on the MTO’s DSM.
2.3 PRODUCTION

.1 Fabrication of deck joint assemblies and preformed seals shall be in
.2 Joint Fillers
.1 Cutting and tolerance, and packaging and marking of joint fillers shall be in
.3 Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compounds
.1 Pouring Point
.1 The pouring point for hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack
sealant compounds shall be at least 10 °C lower than the safe heating
temperature recommended by the manufacturer.
.2 For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds
used for sealing joints and cracks in Portland cement concrete
pavements, the pouring point shall also be the lowest temperature to
which the material is heated and at which it is suitable for filling a 12.5
mm wide and 40 mm deep groove formed between two blocks of
concrete without inclusions of large air voids or discontinuities and
without damage to the material.
.3 For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant compounds
used for sealing joints and cracks in asphalt pavements, the pouring
point shall also be the lowest temperature to which the material is
heated and at which it is suitable for filling a 40 mm wide and 10 mm
deep groove cut in asphaltic concrete pavement without inclusions of
large air voids or discontinuities and without damage to the material.
.2 Packaging and Marking

.1 The sealing compound shall be packaged in 22 kg or smaller units. It
shall be contained in a polyethylene bag, and the bags, shall, in turn
be placed in a metal container. Each container shall be legibly marked
with the following information:
.1 Designated trade name of the compound;
.2 Manufacturer's name;
.3 Batch number;
.4 Date of manufacture; and
.5 Quantity contained.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Any equipment required to install the proprietary joint seals shall be according
to manufacturer’s requirements.
.2 Equipment for Pressure Injection, Routing and Sealing of Joints/Cracks in Concrete
.1 Equipment for pressure injection, routing and sealing of joints/cracks in

concrete shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 932.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Electrical and Communication Materials to be embedded in Structures
.1 Installation of electrical and communication materials to be embedded in

structures shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 913.
.1 Installation, modification and repair of deck joint assemblies, field installation

of preformed seals and bolted components, trial installations, corrective work,
sampling for quality assurance testing, and inspection after installation of
expansion joints shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 920 with the
following additions and amendments:
.1 The deck joint assemblies shall be installed after asphalt paving.
.3 Joint Fillers
.1 Placing of joint fillers shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 920.
.4 Joint Sealing Compounds
.1 Placing of joint sealing compounds shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV

920.
.1 General
.1 The proprietary joint seals shall be installed at all locations specified in
the Contract Documents.
.2 Surface Preparation
.1 All damaged and unsound surfaces along the joint interface shall be
repaired according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Any
concrete repairs required shall be performed in accordance with
OPSS.PROV 930. Any repairs required along the joint interface to
meet this requirement that are not specified in the Contract
Documents shall be considered a Change in the Work.
.2 For proprietary joint seal systems that require the application of primer
or adhesive, all dust, dirt, debris, and deleterious materials shall be
removed from the joint interface and abrasive blast cleaned according
to OPSS.PROV 929 for concrete surfaces, or as recommended by the
proprietary joint seal manufacturer for steel surfaces.
.3 Product Installation
.1 The proprietary joint seals shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation guidelines and requirements.
.2 A technical representative shall be on site to review the
manufacturer’s installation guidelines and requirements prior to the
initial proprietary joint seal installation and then to observe the
installation.
.4 Post Installation
.1 A letter from each manufacturer’s technical representative shall be
submitted to the Engineer, indicating that the technical representative
was present during initial installation and that each observed
proprietary joint seal was installed according to the manufacturer’s
installation guidelines and requirements.
.1 Installation of all accessories and material shall be according to the

manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in the submitted plan.
.2 Work shall only proceed when the temperature of the concrete is greater than
or equal to 5 °C.
.3 Access, crack identification, crack injection, and routing and sealing of cracks
.7 Management of excess materials shall be according to the Contract Documents.
.1 Embedded Work in Structure
.1 Measurement of embedded work in structure shall be by length in meters.
.2 Deck Joint Assemblies
.1 Measurement of deck joint assemblies shall be by length in meters
.3 Proprietary Joint Seal
.1 Measurement of proprietary joint seal shall be by length in meters.
.4 Routing and Sealing
.1 Measurement of routing and sealing shall be by length in meters.
.1 Embedded Work in Structure

.1 Payment at the Contract price for the embedded work in structure tender
items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.2 Deck Joint Assemblies, Installation
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the deck joint assemblies, installation
.2 Repair of defects or deficiencies identified during the inspection for

acceptance of deck joint assemblies shall be completed with no additional
cost to the Owner.
.3 Preformed Seals, Joint Fillers, and Joint Sealing Compounds
.1 Payment for the tender items in which preformed seals, joint fillers, joint seals
and joint sealing compounds are placed shall include full compensation for all
labour, equipment and materials to do the work of placing these materials.
.4 Proprietary Joint Seal
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the proprietary joint seal tender item shall
be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.
.5 Routing and Sealing – Hot-Poured Rubberized Joint Sealing Compound, and

Routing and Sealing – Cold-Applied Joint Sealing Compound
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the routing and sealing – hot-poured
rubberized joint sealing compound tender items, and the routing and sealing
– cold-applied joint sealing compound tender items shall be full compensation
for all labour, equipment and materials to do the work.

CN – DESIGN & CURB AND GUTTER SECTION 03310
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the requirements for concrete curb and gutter, and
concrete sidewalk.
.3 Quality Control and assurance Section 01620
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 OPSS 353, Concrete Curb and Gutter
program to ensure all materials, compaction, etc., meet the requirements of the
Specifications.
.2 The Consultant may also carry out independent Quality Assurance tests as per
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Copy of mix designs, sieve analysis and specific gravity of aggregates
with report from Testing Agency, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Cement type: Normal Portland GU.
.2 Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 32 Mpa.
.3 Class of exposure: C-2.
.4 Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate: 19 mm.
.5 Slump at point of discharge: 80 ± 30 mm.
.6 Air content: 6.5 ± 1.5%.
.7 Maximum water/cementing materials ratio: 0.45.
.8 Joint filler 10mm preformed expansion joint filler, Type A, non-extruding &
resilient bituminous type, as per OPSS 1308.
.9 Non-staining mineral type form release agent: chemically active release agents
containing compounds that react with free lime to provide water-soluble soap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADE PREPARATION & GRANULAR BASE COURSE
.1 Grading: to Section 02311 Site Grading.
.2 Compact subgrade to 98% of Standard Proctor Dry Density (SPMDD). Excavate

and fill all weak and soft spots as required and backfill with compacted granular
‘B’ to 98% SPMDD.
.3 Place granular base course of OPSS Granular ‘A’ in maximum 150 mm loose lifts
and compact to a minimum of 98% of SPMDD.
3.2 CONCRETE
.1 Obtain the Consultant's approval of granular base prior to placing concrete.
.2 Provide edging as indicated with 10 mm radius edging tool.

.3 Slip-form pavers equipped with string line system for line and grade control may
be used if quality of work acceptable to the Consultant can be demonstrated.
Hand finish surfaces when directed by the Consultant.
3.3 TOLERANCES
.1 Finish surfaces to be within 3 mm in 3 m as measured with 3 m straightedge

placed on surface.
3.4 JOINTS
.1 Install expansion, contraction, and transverse joints as per OPSS requirements.
3.5 CURING
.1 Cure concrete by adding moisture continuously in accordance with

CAN/CSA-A23.1 to exposed finished surfaces for at least 1 day after placing, or
sealing moisture in by curing compound approved by the Consultant.
.2 Where burlap is used for moist curing, place two prewetted layers on concrete
surface and keep continuously wet during curing period.
.3 Apply curing compound evenly to form continuous film, in accordance with

manufacturer's requirements.
3.6 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
.1 Concrete is defective when:
.1 Containing excessive honeycombing or embedded debris.
.2 Concrete damaged by freezing or which is unsatisfactory due to

placement at too high a temperature.
.3 Average 28-day strength of any three consecutive strength tests is less

than specified minimum 28-day strength.
.4 Any 28-day strength test result is more than 3.5 MPa below the specified
minimum 28-day strength.
.2 Repair of defective concrete work:
.1 Repair defective areas while concrete is still plastic, otherwise wait until
curing is completed. Use repair methods approved by the Engineer.
.2 Grind off high surface variations where directed by the Engineer.
.3 Remove and replace defective concrete where directed by the Engineer:
.1 Remove between joints by sawing through concrete across full width.

.2 Replace with new concrete to this Section as directed by the Engineer.
.3 Construct contraction joint between sawn face of existing concrete and

face of new concrete.
.4 Install tie bars between old and new concrete as directed by the
Engineer.

CN – DESIGN & CONCRETE WORK SECTION 03312
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 03312 specifies the requirements for the construction of concrete
structures, including the following:
.1 Design, construction, inspection and removal of formwork and falsework;
.2 Production, delivery, placing and curing of structural concrete;
.3 Supply, delivery and installation of approach slab seat bearings and ballast
wall bearings;
.4 Supply, delivery and installation of ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) foam; and
.5 Abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces and reinforcing steel.
.1 Retained Soil Systems, Wall/Slope Section 02276
.5 Concrete Accessories Section 03203
.6 Metal Railings for Structures Section 05121
.7 Waterproofing Bridge Decks Section 07100
.8 Bearings Section 07109
.9 High Performance Waterproofing Section 07112

.1 LS-412, Method of Test for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces
exposed to Deicing Chemicals;
.2 LS-601, Method of Test for Materials finer than 75 µm Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing;
.3 LS-602, Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregates;
.4 LS-604, Method of Test for Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate;
.5 LS-606, Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregates by use of
Magnesium Sulphate;
.6 LS-608, Method of Test for Determination of Percent Flat and
Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate;
.7 LS-609, Procedure for the Petrographic Analysis of Coarse
Aggregate;
.8 LS-613, Method of Test for Determination of Insoluble Residue of
Carbonate Aggregates;
.9 LS-614, Method of Test for Freezing and Thawing of Coarse
Aggregate;
.10 LS-615, Method of Test for the Determination of Potential Alkali-
Carbonate Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks by Chemical Composition;
.11 LS-616, Procedure for the Petrographic Analysis of Fine Aggregate;
.12 LS-618, Method of Test for the Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to
Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus;
.13 LS-620, Method of Test for Accelerated Detection of Potentially
Deleterious Alkali-Silica Reactive Aggregate by Expansion of Mortar
Bars;
.14 LS-625, Guidelines for Sampling of Aggregate Materials; and
.15 LS-635, Procedure for Determination of Length Change due to Alkali-
Aggregate Reaction in Concrete Prisms at 38 Degrees Celsius.
.2 Forms
.1 PH-CC-433A, Concrete Mix Design Submission Form A;
.2 PH-CC-447, Concrete Aggregate Gradation Acceptance Sheets; and
.3 PH-D-10, Aggregate Sample Data Sheet.
.1 OPSS.PROV 904, Construction Specification for Concrete Structures

.2 OPSS 919, Construction Specification for Formwork and Falsework

.3 OPSS.PROV 929, Construction Specification for Abrasive Blast Cleaning –

Concrete Construction (November 2017), including all applicable references
specified therein;
.4 OPSS.PROV 1001, Material Specification for Aggregates – General
.5 OPSS.PROV 1002, Material Specification for Aggregates – Concrete (April

.6 OPSS.PROV 1301, Material Specification for Cementing Materials

(September 1996), including all applicable references specified therein; and
.7 OPSS.PROV 1350, Material Specification for Concrete – Materials and

Production (November 2019), including all applicable references specified
therein.
.1 CSA A23.2-19, Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete; and
.2 CSA A3000-18, Cementitious Materials Compendium.
.1 ASTM C666-97, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid

Freezing and Thawing.
.1 Quality assurance for structural concrete shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV

904 with the following additions and amendments:
.1 Subsection 1002.08.04 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety and

.1 Sampling
.1 Sampling shall be according to CSA A23.2-1A, LS-625 and all
other requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.
During the production of concrete, QA samples of aggregate
representing each lot of concrete in the work, shall be
randomly taken from the aggregate stockpiles being used to
batch the concrete for that lot. Such stockpiles shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Stockpile shall be of sufficient size to meet all sampling
requirements, including the construction of a proper
sampling pad; and
2. Meet all other requirements to ensure that the samples
taken, for each lot, will be representative of the
aggregates within that lot.
.2 New or clean sample bags or containers shall be provided for
sampling. Sample bags or containers shall be constructed to
prevent the loss of any part of the material or contamination or
damage to the contents during shipment. Sample containers
shall be securely fastened. Metal or cardboard containers are
unacceptable. The sample shall be identified both inside and
outside of the sample container. Data to be included with the
sample shall be according to MTO’s form PH-D-10, Aggregate
Sample Data Sheet.
.3 For physical properties, at least one set of duplicate QA
samples of each coarse and each fine aggregate component
from each individual source shall be randomly sampled from
lots according to the schedule specified in OPSS.PROV 1002
Table 1 with the additions and amendments in this Section
03312.
.4 Separate sets of lots shall be developed for gradation
according to the schedule specified in OPSS.PROV 1002
Table 1 with the additions and amendments in this Section
03312, for each of the following:
1. Individual coarse aggregate component being used for
structural concrete.
2. Individual coarse aggregate component being used for
concrete pavement, concrete base, full depth repair,
and partial depth repair. Or, at the discretion of the
Engineer, the combined coarse aggregate being used
in concrete pavement, concrete base, full depth repair,
and partial depth repair, if a stockpile of such
aggregate has been provided.
3. Individual fine aggregate component being used or, at
the discretion of the Engineer, for the combined fine
aggregate, if a stockpile of such aggregate has been
provided.
.5 Each gradation lot shall be divided into two sublots of
approximately equal tonnage or cubic metres, as applicable.
One set of duplicate QA samples shall be randomly obtained
from each sublot.
.6 If any circumstances, such as the closure of the construction
season or changes in production, result in a lot not being
completed, then the Engineer shall be notified prior to the first
sample being taken within that lot, for the Engineer to adjust
the sublot sizes to accommodate the reduced quantity. If such
notification is not given in time, then acceptance shall be
based on the sampled sublot for the incomplete lot. All lots
shall be deemed to be complete at the end of each calendar
year.
.7 If the Contractor is unavailable to take samples, no further
material shall be placed in the work until the required QA
samples have been taken. The Engineer shall seal each
sample container at the time and place of sampling.
.8 One of the duplicate QA samples shall be randomly selected
from each sublot for testing by the QA laboratory. The QA
laboratory shall retain the remaining sample for referee testing
purposes.
.9 Sample Size
1. The mass of each QA sample shall meet the
requirements of Table 7 in OPSS.PROV 1002. When
more than 30 kg is required, the total sample shall be
recombined by the QA laboratory prior to testing.
.2 Clause 1002.08.05.01 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety and

.1 Physical Properties
.1 The physical property requirements of a lot for fine and coarse
aggregates shall be deemed to be acceptable if all the
physical property test results for the sample representing that
lot are according to OPSS.PROV 1002 Tables 3 and 6,
respectively, with the additions and amendments in this
Section 03312.
.2 If the tested sample of aggregates representing a lot of
concrete does not meet all the physical property requirements
of this specification, then the concrete that includes those
aggregates shall be deemed rejectable, removed from the
work, and replaced.

.1 Gradation for All Other Fine and Coarse Aggregates
.1 Test results carried out according to LS-602 as applicable,
shall be computed to one decimal place and reported on MTO
form PH-CC-447, Concrete Aggregate Gradation Acceptance
Sheets.
.2 The acceptability of a lot based on fineness modulus of fine
aggregate and LS-602 may result in payment at full price, or
rejection.
.3 A complete or incomplete lot shall be deemed to meet the
applicable requirements for gradation if, for each individual
sieve, the percent passing for at least one of the two test
results as well as the average of both test results representing
the two sublots within an aggregate lot, are within the
acceptable limits shown in OPSS.PROV 1002 Table 2 with the
additions and amendments in this Section 03312 for a fine
aggregate, and the applicable limits shown in OPSS.PROV
1002 Table 4 or 5 with the additions and amendments in this
Section 03312, for the applicable coarse aggregate.
.4 When the test results for any sample of fine aggregates
representing a sublot of a concrete lot do not meet the
requirement of Note 1 or 2 in OPSS.PROV 1002 Table 2 with
the additions and amendments in this Section 03312, then all
the aggregates within that sublot shall be rejectable. The
remaining sublot of the lot shall be treated as a separate lot
and shall be deemed to meet the applicable requirements for
gradation if, for each individual sieve, the percent passing for
the test result shall be within the acceptable limits shown in
OPSS.PROV 1002 Table 2 with the additions and
amendments in this Section 03312 for a fine aggregate, and
OPSS.PROV 1002 Table 4 or 5 with the additions and
amendments in this Section 03312, for the coarse aggregate.
.5 If the fineness modulus test result from one sublot within a lot
is smaller than -0.2 from the fineness modulus shown on the
accepted MTO form PH-CC-433A for the corresponding
concrete tender item, and the test result from the other sublot
within the lot is more than +0.2 from the fineness modulus on
the accepted PH-CC-433A, then all the aggregates within that
lot shall be rejectable.
.6 For each individual sieve in OPSS.PROV Tables 2, 4 and 5
with the additions and amendments in this Section 03312, if
the LS-602 result from one sublot within a lot is lower than the
applicable lower specification limit and the result from the
other sublot within the lot is higher than the applicable higher
specification limit, then all the aggregates within that lot shall
be rejectable.
.4 The third paragraph of Subsection 1002.08.06 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is

deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
.1 The retained duplicate QA samples for the lot and both sublots shall
be used for referee testing of the lot. QA Testing of both sublots shall
be completed before referee is invoked.
.5 Table 1 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the
following:
TABLE 1
Lot Schedule for Sampling and Testing
Total Quantity of Each Tender Item or

Items with same Mix Design Minimum Lot Schedule
(Notes 4 and 5)
(Notes 1 and 3)
Concrete Pavement Structural and all

and Base Tender Other Concrete
Items (m2) Tender Items (m3)
(Note 2)
≤ 10,000 ≤ 500 One lot
> 10,000 > 500 Concrete Pavement and

Base: 10,000 m2 lots
Structural and all Other
Concrete: 500 m3 lots
Notes:
1. For the purposes of this table only, the same mix design shall mean
that all the applicable mix designs involved have:
a) Aggregates with the same Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size(s),
comprised of the same individual aggregate component(s),
produced from the same source(s), and from the same bench(es)
when specific bench(es) are required in quarry source(s); AND
b) Where blended fine and/or coarse aggregates are also involved, all
the applicable mix designs have the same relative proportions of
each individual fine aggregate component within the blended fine
aggregate and the same relative proportions of each individual
coarse aggregate component within the blended coarse aggregate,
respectively.
2. For tender items with units of measurement other than m3, the
quantities shall be converted to m3, to establish the lot schedule.
3. Structural concrete items using the same mix design as defined in Note
1 for the same structure shall be combined in individual lots of up to
500 m3. If the total quantity of structural concrete items for all structures
in the contract is less than 150 m3, structural concrete items using the
same mix design as defined in Note 1 for multiple structures shall be
combined in individual lots of up to 15 m3.
4. At the discretion of the Engineer, concrete repairs, individual sections
of bridge decks or critical structural elements such as cast-in-place
girders, cantilever extensions etc., can form their own lot or lots,
regardless of Note 1 and Note 3 or their quantities.
5. Where the remaining quantity of the applicable tender item is
insufficient to form a complete lot and is:
a) Less than one half the quantity of a complete lot, then that quantity
shall be added to the previous lot, or,
b) Greater than or equal to one half the quantity of a complete lot, then
that quantity shall form its own lot.
following:
TABLE 2
Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates, LS-602 (Note 1)
MTO Sieve Designation Percent Passing
9.5 mm 100
4.75 mm 95-100
2.36 mm 80-100
1.18 mm 50-85
600 µm 25-60
300 µm 10-30
150 µm 0-10
0-3 (Natural Sand)

75 µm
0-6 (Manufactured Sand)
Notes:
1. Fine aggregates shall have no more than 45% passing any sieve and
retained on the next consecutive sieve.
2. The fineness modulus shall be a minimum of 2.3 and a maximum of
3.1.
3. The mean fineness modulus for the lot shall not vary by more than
±0.20 from the fineness modulus shown on the PH-CC-433A accepted
by the Engineer for the corresponding concrete tender item.
following:
TABLE 3
Physical Property Requirements for Fine Aggregate(s)
MTO Test Number, Laboratory Test Acceptance Limit

and Sulphur (Note 2)
Content (Note 1)
LS-610 Organic Impurities, 3 (Note 3)

Organic plate number
LS-613 Insoluble Residue, 60 (Note 4)

(IRR75)
minimum % retained on
the 75 µm sieve
LS-616 Contamination, Individual Fine

Sulphate Rocks and aggregate component
Minerals shall contain:
a) No unacceptable
material; and
b) Less than 1.0% of
gypsum, anhydrite,
or other sulphate
minerals.
LS-619 Micro Deval Abrasion, 20

% maximum loss
LS-620 (Note 5) Accelerated Mortar Bar, 0.150

% maximum at 14 days
LS-635 (Note 5) Concrete Prism 0.040

Expansion, % maximum
at 1 year
LS-615 (Note 5) Potential Alkali- Chemical composition

Carbonate Reactivity of shall plot in the non-
Quarried Carbonate expansive field of Fig. 1
Rock (Note 6) of test method.
Sulphur Content A combustion infrared 0.25% (Natural Sand)

(Note 5) absorption method
0.60% (Manufactured
Sand)
Notes:
1. LS-615, LS-619, LS-620 and LS-635 and Sulphur content shall apply to
each individual fine aggregate component in the mix. LS-610 and LS-
613 shall be carried out either on samples taken from a stockpile of the
blended fine aggregate intended to be used in the mix or from samples
taken from stockpiles of each individual fine aggregate component and
later combined in the laboratory to the proportions provided with PH-
CC-433A, prior to testing. All sampling and blending shall be as
specified in the Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling
subsection.
2. If the fraction of a coarse aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve
represents more than 10% of the grading of that aggregate, by mass,
then that fraction of the individual coarse aggregate shall also meet
these requirements.
3. Blended fine aggregate that produces a colour darker than standard
colour No. 3 shall be considered to have failed this requirement.
However, a failed blended fine aggregate may be used if comparative
mortar specimens prepared according to ASTM C87/C87M meet the
following requirements:
a) Mortar specimens prepared using unwashed fine aggregate shall
have a 7 day compressive strength that is a minimum of 95% of the
strength of mortar specimens prepared using the same fine
aggregate washed in a 3% sodium hydroxide solution. Type GU
Hydraulic cement shall be used.
b) The setting time of the unwashed fine aggregate mortar specimens
shall not differ from the washed fine aggregate mortar specimens
by more than 10%.
4. This requirement shall apply to all fine aggregates used in concrete

pavement, concrete base, full depth repair, partial depth repair, and
exposed concrete bridge deck driving surfaces (parking lots are
excluded). Fine aggregates not meeting the IRR75 requirement may be
uniformly blended with other suitable fine aggregate(s), to increase the
IRR75 to a minimum of 60%.
5. The need for data to demonstrate compliance with this test shall be
waived by the Engineer, if the fine aggregate component is from a
source listed on the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation
Structural Concrete Aggregate Sources List or the Concrete Aggregate
Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates.
6. This requirement only applies to aggregates produced from quarried
Gull River and Bobcaygeon geological formations and their
stratigraphic equivalents.
.8 Table 4 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is amended by changing the title to:

.1 Table 4, Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, LS-602,
Structural and all Other Concrete Tender Items Except Concrete
Pavement, Concrete Base, Full Depth Repair, and Partial Depth
Repair.
following:
TABLE 5
Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, LS-602
Concrete Pavement, Concrete Base, Full Depth Repair, and Partial
Depth Repair
Nominal 37.5 mm 19.0 mm Combined

Maximum Size Grading
(Note 1)
MTO Sieve Percent Passing

Designation
mm
53.0 100 - 100
37.5 90-100 - 95-100
26.5 20-55 100 -
19.0 0-15 85-100 35-70
9.5 0-5 20-55 10-30
4.75 - 0-10 0-5

Notes:
1. The combined grading shall be determined either from a sample taken
from a stockpile of uniformly blended coarse aggregate intended for
use in the mix, or from a sample of coarse aggregate blended in the
laboratory according to the proportions provided along with the mix
design submission, as specified in the Aggregate Processing, Handling,
and Stockpiling subsection. As specified in LS-600, the sample of
coarse aggregate blended in the laboratory shall be prepared by first
splitting off sufficient quantities of each of the aggregate components,
based on their individual percentages stated in the mix design and the
overall blended quantity required for LS-602. Then the split portions of
each aggregate component shall be placed in a vessel of appropriate
size and blended together by mixing. The blended aggregate shall then
be tested according to LS-602.
following:
TABLE 6
Physical Property Requirements for Coarse Aggregate(s)
MTO or ASTM Laboratory Test Acceptance Requirements

Test Number, (Notes 2 and 3)
and Sulphur
Content Pavement Structures,
(Note 1) Sidewalk,
Curb and
Gutter, and
Concrete
Base
LS-412 Scaling Resistance

0.80 kg/m2
Due to De-Icing
Chemicals, maximum
loss after 50 cycles of
freezing and thawing.
(Note 4)
LS-601 Wash Pass 75µm, %

maximum
(Guideline A)
- for gravel 1.0 1.0
- for crushed rock 2.0 2.0
LS-604 Absorption, % 2.0 2.0

maximum
L- 608 Flat and Elongated

Particles,
% maximum 20 20
LS-609 Petrographic Number, 125 140

Concrete, maximum
Contamination and Individual coarse aggregate

Unacceptable component shall contain:
Minerals
a) No unacceptable material;
and
b) Less than 1.0% by mass of
gypsum, anhydrite, or other
sulphate minerals.
Siliceous Aggregates
Note 4
Related to LS-412
LS-614 Unconfined Freeze-

6 6
Thaw, % maximum
loss (Note 5)
LS-618 Micro-Deval Abrasion,

14 17
% maximum loss
LS-620 Accelerated Mortar

0.150 0.150
Bar Expansion, %
maximum at 14 Days (Note 7) (Note 7)
(Note 6)
ASTM C666 D-Line Cracking, For Concrete

Average change in Base Only:
length of 3 tested
no more than ± no more than
beams,
0.0350%, ± 0.0350%,
% Average
≥ 90% of the ≥ 90% of the
Fundamental
FTF at 14 days FTF at 14
Transverse Frequency
days
(FTF). (Note 8)
LS-635 Concrete Prism

Expansion Test,
% maximum at one 0.040 0.040
year (Notes 6)
LS-615 Potential Alkali- Chemical composition shall plot

Carbonate Reactivity in the non-expansive field of
of Quarried Carbonate Fig. 1 of test method
Rock (Notes 6 and 9)
Sulphur Content A combustion infrared 0.25% (Gravel)

(Note 6) absorption method 0.60% (Quarried rock)
Alternative Requirement for LS-614
LS-606 Magnesium Sulphate

12 12
Soundness Loss, 5
Cycles, % maximum
(Note 5)
Notes:
1. LS-412, LS-618, LS-620, ASTM C666, LS-635, LS-615 and Sulphur
Content shall apply to each individual coarse aggregate component in
the mix. The remaining tests shown in this table shall be carried out
either on samples taken from a stockpile of the blended coarse
aggregate intended to be used in the mix or from samples taken from
stockpiles of each individual coarse aggregate component and later
combined in the laboratory to the proportions provided with Form A,
prior to testing. All sampling and blending shall be as specified in the
Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling subsection.
2. If the fraction of any coarse aggregate component, passing the 4.75
mm sieve represents more than 10% of the grading of that aggregate,
by mass, then that fraction of the individual coarse aggregate
component shall also meet the fine aggregate requirements given in
Table 3.
3. When a concrete surface including pavements, base, full depth repair,
and partial depth repair and exposed bridge decks are subject to
vehicular traffic, the physical requirements for “Pavement” shown in this
table shall apply to the aggregates used in the mix.
4. LS-412 shall be conducted as specified in the Scaling Resistance
clause. LS-412 will be waived if the aggregate is from the same
bench/formation in a quarry which is listed on the current Ontario
Ministry of Transportation Structural Concrete Aggregate Sources List
or the Concrete Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement
Coarse Aggregates, if, at the discretion of the Owner, the aggregate
under consideration is still representative of the aggregate that the
Owner originally approved.
5. The requirement for this test shall be waived provided that the
Contractor has submitted a written request that the coarse aggregate
meet the alternative requirements for LS-606, magnesium sulphate
soundness, as specified in the Alternative to LS-614 clause.
6. The need to demonstrate compliance with this requirement shall be
waived by the Engineer if the aggregate component is from a source on
the current Ontario Ministry of Transportation Structural Concrete
Aggregate Sources List or the Concrete Aggregate Sources List for
Concrete Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates.
7. If the aggregate is produced from quarried sandstone, siltstone, granite
or gneiss, the expansion shall be less than 0.080% after 14 days. If an
aggregate is produced from quarried Gull River, Bobcaygeon, Verulam,
Lindsay Formations, or their stratigraphic equivalents, the expansion
shall be less than 0.100% after 14 days.
8. The test shall be conducted as specified in the D-Line Cracking clause.
The testing shall be waived if the aggregate is from the same
bench/formation in a quarry which is listed on the current Ontario
Ministry of Transportation Structural Concrete Aggregate Sources List
or the Concrete Aggregate Sources List for Concrete Base/Pavement
Coarse Aggregates, if, at the discretion of the Owner, the aggregate
under consideration is still representative of the aggregate that the
Owner originally approved.
9. This requirement only applies to aggregates produced from quarried
Gull River, Bobcaygeon Formations, and their stratigraphic equivalents.
.2 Quality assurance for approach slab seat bearings and ballast wall bearings shall be
in accordance with OPSS.PROV 904.
.3 Quality assurance for abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces and reinforcing
steel shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 929.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Formwork and Falsework
.1 Formwork and falsework submissions shall be according to OPSS.PROV 919

.1 Clause 919.04.02.02.02 of OPSS.PROV 919 is deleted in its entirety.
.2 Structural Concrete
.1 Structural concrete submissions shall be according to OPSS.PROV 904 with

the following additions and amendments:
.1 Clause 1301.04.01.01 of OPSS.PROV 1301 is amended by deletion
of point a. and replacing it with the following:
.1 A test certificate from a laboratory, qualified according to the
MTO Materials Section, showing compliance of the cementing
material with all the physical and chemical test requirements of
CSA A3000, including the additional requirements of this
specification and the optional test for false set if the product is
Portland cement.
.3 Approach Slab Seat Bearings and Ballast Wall Bearings
.1 Approach slab seat elastomer and ballast wall elastomer submissions shall
be according to OPSS.PROV 904.
.4 EVA Foam
.1 A minimum of seven days prior to installation, a product data sheet for the
EVA foam to be used in the work shall be submitted to the Engineer. The
data sheet shall clearly identify that the supplied EVA foam meets the
requirements of this specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 Formwork and falsework shall be designed in accordance with OPSS.PROV

919.
.1 The concrete mix shall be designed in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1350.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Formwork and falsework materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV

919.
.1 Structural concrete materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 904

.1 Subsection 1002.05.01 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety
and replaced with the following:
.1 Aggregates shall be according to OPSS.PROV 1001 and shall
conform to the requirements of this Section 03312.
.2 Except as noted below or as specified in the Contract
Documents, aggregates shall be sands, gravel, or quarried
rock; provided the source is of such nature and extent to
ensure acceptable processed aggregates of a consistent
grading and quality. When any change in the character of the
aggregate occurs or when the performance of aggregate
meeting the requirements of this specification is found to be
unsatisfactory, use of the aggregate shall be discontinued until
a reappraisal by the Contractor, with the approval of the
Engineer, proves the source to be satisfactory.
.3 Steel slag or air cooled blast furnace slag shall be prohibited
for use as aggregate in concrete.
.4 Use of aggregate in concrete shall not be permitted unless the
aggregate is from a source on the current Ontario Ministry of
Transportation Structural Concrete Aggregate Sources List or
the Concrete Aggregate Sources List for Concrete
Base/Pavement Coarse Aggregates.
.5 Irrespective of compliance with all the physical property
requirements stated in this specification, at the discretion of
the Owner, aggregates may be accepted or rejected for use
based on demonstrated past field performance in concrete.
.6 The field performance of a concrete structure or concrete
pavement/base using aggregates accepted based on
demonstrated past field performance, shall be evaluated
according to CSA A23.2-27A, Attachment A2, Guidelines for
Evaluating the Field Performance of Aggregates: Field and
Laboratory Testing, with the exception that the structure or
concrete pavement/base shall be at least 15 years old. In
addition, the concrete being evaluated to determine the field
performance of an aggregate shall:
1. Have been used for equivalent or more severe
applications;
2. Have been subjected to equivalent or more severe
exposure conditions; and
3. Not contain supplementary cementing materials that
may have mitigated or improved performance such as:
freeze/thaw durability, scaling resistance or alkali
aggregate reactivity of aggregates in concrete.
.7 The Owner may reject the use of any concrete aggregate
based on past field performance in any structure or pavement
of any age.
.2 Clause 1002.05.02.01 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety
.1 Fine aggregates shall not be accepted for use in concrete
pavement, concrete base, full depth repair, partial depth
repair, exposed concrete bridge deck driving surfaces unless
the acid insoluble residue (IRR75µm) as determined by LS-613 is
greater than 60%.
.3 Clause 1002.05.02.02 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its entirety
.1 Unless the Engineer has agreed to allow a special grading, the
fine aggregates shall be according to the requirements
specified in Table 2 with the additions and amendments in this
Section 03312.
.4 Clause 1002.05.03.01.02 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is deleted in its
entirety and replaced with the following:
.1 Concrete Structures, Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter, and Other
Concrete Tender Items of More Than 100 mm in Thickness
1. A single coarse aggregate, with a nominal maximum
aggregate size of 19.0 mm and meeting the grading
requirements shown in Table 4 with the additions and
amendments in this Section 03312 shall be used,
unless specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Stockpiling aggregates in individual size fractions and
blending them to meet the grading requirements,
shown in Table 4 with the additions and amendments
in this Section 03312, for a 19.0 mm nominal maximum
size aggregate, shall be permitted. If individual
stockpiles are used, the combined gradation of all
coarse fractions shall be according to the requirements
specified in Table 4 with the additions and
amendments in this Section 03312.
.1 Concrete Pavement, Concrete Base, Full Depth Repair, and
Partial Depth Repair
1. The grading bands for the individual coarse aggregate
components used in concrete pavement, concrete
base, full depth repair, and partial depth repair are
shown in the first two columns of Table 5 with the
additions and amendments in this Section 03312.
Aggregates shall be stockpiled as individual size
fractions and blended in the mix. The blended
aggregates shall be used for concrete pavement and
concrete base and shall meet the combined grading
requirements specified in the last column of Table 5
with the additions and amendments in this Section
03312. The grading of coarse aggregates used in full
depth repair shall be according to the requirements for
19 mm aggregate or the combined grading
requirements specified in Table 5 with the additions
and amendments in this Section 03312. The grading of
coarse aggregates used in partial depth repair shall be
according to the requirements for 19 mm aggregate
grading requirements specified in Table 5 with the
additions and amendments in this Section 03312.
.1 Concrete Patches, Refacing, Overlays, and Other Concrete
Tender Items of 100 mm or Less in Thickness
1. A single coarse aggregate, with a nominal maximum
aggregate size of 13.2 mm and meeting the grading
requirements shown in Table 4 with the additions and
amendments in this Section 03312, shall be used for
concrete patches, refacing, overlays, and other
concrete tender items of 100 mm or less in thickness.
However, when the thickness of the repair exceeds
100 mm, a single coarse aggregate, with a nominal
maximum aggregate size of 19.0 mm and meeting the
grading requirements specified in Table 4 with the
additions and amendments in this Section 03312, shall
be used.
.7 Subsection 1002.05.04 of OPSS.PROV 1002 is amended by deleting
the second paragraph in its entirety and replacing it with the following:
.1 Coarse and fine aggregates used in a concrete mix shall:
1. individually have a total of less than 1% gypsum,
anhydrite, or other sulphate minerals; and
2. contain no steel slag, air cooled blast furnace slag or
glass.
.2 Coarse and fine aggregates from a pit source used in a
concrete mix shall individually have a total sulphur content of
less than 0.25% as determined by a combustion infrared
absorption method.
.3 Coarse and fine aggregates from a quarry source used in a
concrete mix shall individually have a total sulphur content of
less than 0.6% as determined by a combustion infrared
absorption method.
.8 Clause 1301.05.01of OPSS.PROV 1301 is amended by deletion of
first and third paragraph and replacing it with the following:
.1 Cementing materials shall conform to the physical and
chemical requirements of CSA A3000. Fly ash, slag and silica
fume shall also conform to the optional requirements of CSA
A3000 with the exception of the requirements for “Control of
Expansion Due to Alkali-Silica Reactivity”.
.2 Where Portland cement is required to be certified as being free
from early stiffening tendencies, the penetration shall be 50%
or greater when determined by the method specified in the
Annex A of CSA A3000.
.3 Approach Slab Seat Bearings and Ballast Wall Bearings
.1 Approach slab seat elastomers and ballast wall elastomers shall be in

.4 EVA Foam
.1 EVA foam shall have a compression-deflection range of 34 to 90 kPa when

compressed by 25% of its original thickness. The material does not require
any specific resistance to the action of petroleum base oils.
.2 Adhesive shall be commercial construction grade as recommended by the

EVA foam manufacturer and shall be compatible and appropriate for its
intended use.
2.3 PRODUCTION AND DELIVERY EQUIPMENT
.1 Equipment for production and delivery of structural concrete shall be in
2.4 PRODUCTION
.1 Proportioning, mixing, transporting, field testing and acceptance of concrete

material shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1350 with the following
.1 Stockpiles of aggregates stored in piles, bins or other
temporary facilities, shall be located where those aggregates
are being used to batch the concrete to be used in the work.
.2 The processed aggregates shall be separated into fine and
coarse aggregates and stockpiled separately, as follows:
1. Aggregates separated during processing,
2. Aggregates secured from different sources,
3. Aggregates from the same source but of different
gradings,
4. Aggregates from a new bench in a quarry, or
5. Aggregates resulting from a significant change in
production that affects physical quality.
.3 For sampling and testing purposes, separate stockpiles shall
be provided for:
1. The fine aggregate grading, shown in Table 2 with the
additions and amendments in this Section 03312, and
for each different coarse aggregate grading, shown in
Table 4 or 5 with the additions and amendments in this
Section 03312, that will be used in the mix; and
2. Each different aggregate component within the coarse
and fine gradings referred to the respective tables
above, if one or more of the individual aggregate
components are derived either from a different source
location or from a different lithology within the same
source location.
.4 Where a blended fine aggregate is used in the mix, one of the
following shall also be provided:
1. A single stockpile of uniformly blended fine aggregate
that will be used in the mix; or
2. The proportions of each fine aggregate component in
the mix.
.5 Where a blended coarse aggregate is used in the mix, then
one of the following shall be provided:
1. A single stockpile of uniformly blended coarse
aggregate that will be used in the mix; or
2. The proportions of each individual aggregate
component in the blended coarse aggregate that will
be used in the mix.
.6 Where blended fine or coarse aggregates are to be used in the
work, the proportions shall be submitted at the same time as
MTO form PH-CC-433A, Concrete Mix Design Submission
Form A. If the proportions are changed, then the revised
proportions and a new MTO form PH-CC-433A shall be
submitted.
.7 Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any
description, or aggregates that have become mixed with each
other, shall not be used and removed immediately from the
stockpile.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Equipment for construction of concrete structures shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 904.
.2 Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Concrete Surfaces and Reinforcing Steel
.1 Equipment for abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces and reinforcing

steel shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 929.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Construction, inspection and removal of formwork and falsework shall be in

amendments:
.1 Section 919.03 of OPSS.PROV 919 is amended by the deletion of the
definitions for Quality Verification Engineer and Certificate of
Conformance.
and replaced by the following:
.1 In slab-on-girder construction, screed rail supports shall be
positioned directly over the flange of the exterior girders within
100 mm of the centreline of the web.
and replaced by the following:
.1 A Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the
Engineer upon completion of the construction of the falsework
and formwork for which Shop Drawings are submitted and
prior to the placement of concrete.
.4 Subsection 919.07.06 is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the
following:
.1 All formwork and falsework shall be removed and shall not
damage the concrete. When authorized by the Engineer, piles
used for falsework may be left in place provided the top is 1.2
m below the finished grade or ground level or at least 0.6 m
below streambed.
.2 The method and sequence of removal of the formwork and
falsework shall be such that it permits the concrete to take up
the stresses gradually.
.3 Falsework shall not be removed from post-tensioned
structures until the post-tensioning is complete
.4 When a component is not post-tensioned, falsework may be
removed after the concrete has attained a minimum strength
of 20 MPa.
.5 Formwork shall not be removed until the concrete has attained
a minimum strength of 20 MPa, except for the following:
1. formwork for structure barrier wall, parapet wall, and
curb and sidewalk on deck, where formwork shall be
removed within 24 hours after completion of the
placement except during cold weather as specified in
OPSS.PROV 904, and
2. vertical formwork for approach slabs, deck fascia, and
footings may be removed 24 hours or more after
concrete placement.
.6 Following the removal of formwork, curing must be applied and
maintained in accordance with the Contract Documents. Early
loading of structural concrete must be as specified in the
Contract Documents.
.7 Where insulation is used, the side forms may be slackened off
24 hours after concrete placement to help control temperature.
.8 Removal of temporary supports shall be as specified in the
Contract Documents.
.1 Steel Reinforcement, Mechanical Connectors and Associated Hardware

.1 Steel reinforcement, mechanical connectors and associated hardware
shall be in accordance with Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.
.2 Where the superstructure is continuous over a support, all deck steel
reinforcement shall be placed in the entire deck prior to any concrete
is placed. This requirement does not apply to the bottom slab of post-
tensioned decks with trapezoidal voids.
.2 Deck Joint Assemblies and Joint Material

.1 Deck joint assemblies, joint fillers, joint seals, joint sealing compounds
and external waterstops shall be in accordance with Section 03203
Concrete Accessories.
.3 Preparation for concrete placement, placing of concrete, consolidation,

concrete finishing, curing, control of temperature and temperature difference,
removal of formwork and falsework, construction joints, surface finish,
alignment of components, testing for early strength, early loading of structural
concrete, cracks in formed and unformed surfaces, and concrete cover shall
be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 904 with the following additions and
amendments:
.1 EVA foam shall be installed at locations specified on the Contract
Drawings. EVA foam shall be uniformly attached to all fixed concrete
surfaces by means of an adhesive. Adhesive for EVA foam installation
shall be applied to concrete surfaces that are free of dust, dirt, debris,
and loose concrete.
.2 When EVA foam thickness specified in the Contract Drawings is
greater than thickness commercially available, multiple layers of EVA
foam may be used to meet the specified thickness. Multiple layers of
EVA foam shall be fully bonded to each other using adhesive.
.3 The minimum length of continuous EVA foam shall be the lesser of
the element length or 1.2 m.
.3 Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Concrete Surfaces and Reinforcing Steel
.1 Abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces and reinforcing steel shall be in


Documents.
.1 No deductions from the volume of concrete shall be made for any of the
following:
.1 Drainage openings, load reducing devices, embedded timbers, and
utility and prestressing steel ducts, each of which has a cross-
sectional area of less than 0.1 m2.
.2 Timber, steel, concrete, or concrete filled tubular piles.
.3 Steel reinforcement, miscellaneous hardware, and structural steel.
.2 Measurement of concrete shall be by volume in cubic meters.
.3 Measurement shall be made within the designated limits of work.
.1 Payment for formwork and falsework shall be included in the work in which
they are used.
.2 Where formwork is required for the work under a concrete tender item, it shall
be deemed for progress payment purposes that the formwork, together with
its supporting falsework, when installed, constitutes 35% of the work to be
carried out under the tender item.
.3 Partial payment for construction of the formwork and falsework shall be made
on a prorated basis.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the concrete tender items shall be full
.2 Surface cavities greater than 50 mm and honeycombing shall be repaired at

no additional cost to the Owner.
.3 When a concrete working slab is required by the Engineer, payment shall be

made as a Change in the Work at the unit price of the concrete in the footing
to be placed on it.
.3 Payment for approach slab seat bearings and ballast wall bearings, EVA foam, and
abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces and reinforcing steel shall be included in
the work in which they are used.

CN – DESIGN & WET CAST CONCRETE PAVEMENT SECTION 03320
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
.3 Environmental protection Section 01560
.7 Hot Mix Asphalt – Superpave Section 02742
.1 Conform with the National Building Code of Canada 2010 and any applicable
acts of any authority having jurisdiction and the following:
.1 Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS) 1303 Material

Specification for Air Entraining and Chemical Admixtures for Portland
Cement Concrete.
.2 CAN/CSA-A5-98, Portland Cement.
.3 CAN/CSA-A23.1-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction.
.4 CAN/CSA-A23.2-09, Methods of Test for Concrete.
.5 CAN/CSA A363, Cementitious Hydraulic Slag.
.6 Ontario Provincial Standards Specifications (OPSS) 904 Construction

Specification for Concrete Structures and latest amendments for High
Performance Concrete (HPC).
.2 Where there are differences between the specifications and drawings and the
codes, standards or acts, the most stringent shall govern
.3 OPSS 350 & OPSS 369.
.4 Concrete work to CAN3-A23.1 and CAN3-A23.2, except where specified

otherwise.
.5 Formwork shall be designed, fabricated and installed in accordance with CSA

S269.3-M92, except where specified otherwise.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Placement of New Concrete Pavement as illustrated in the contract drawings

program to ensure all materials, etc. meet the requirements of the specifications,
as per Section 01620 – Quality Control and Assurance of these Specifications.
Section 01620 – Quality Control and Assurance of these Specifications.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit details of the following:
.1 Technical data for aggregates, cements, pozzolons and admixtures to

demonstrate that each meet the specified requirements.
.2 Submit mix design to Engineer for approval two weeks prior to commencing
work. Mix design shall show details of cementitious materials, compressive and
flexural strengths for the proposed mix and required density after placement, all
with certification by a registered Professional Engineer.
.1 Protection Plans for Adverse Weather Conditions

.1 Submit detailed plans for cold weather curing and protection of concrete
placed and cured in weather below 5 degrees Celsius.
.2 Submit detailed plans for hot weather placements including curing and
protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over 27 degrees
Celsius.
.2 Submit Concrete Placement Plan detailing proposed sequence of concrete work

including dates, placement methodology, joint layout, etc. for review.
.3 Each shop drawing shall bear the stamp of qualified professional engineer
registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario.
1.6 CLASS OF CONCRETE
.1 All concrete covered in this section of the specification at 28 days shall have a
minimum compressive strength of:
.1 35 MPa
.2 Modulus of Rupture 650 psi (4.5 MPa)
1.7 SAMPLING
.1 Sampling of all materials, including concrete, will be done by the Contractor.

Concrete for the making of compression test cylinders shall be supplied by the
Contractor, without charge to the Engineer.
.2 A minimum of one full concrete test will be executed for each day of placing
concrete pavement. Sufficient concrete samples will be taken to carry out 7, 14 &
28 days concrete compressive tests. Refer to Section 01620 Quality Control and
Assurance.
1.8 TESTING
.1 All testing will be done and paid for by the Contractor.
.2 Copy of detailed mix designs, sieve analysis and specific gravity of aggregates,
and alkali content of cement with report from Testing Agency, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for their review a minimum of 3 weeks prior to intended use. The
design mixes should indicate all proportions and constituents of the design mix.
.3 Tests for determining alkali content shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM
Standard C114-83A paragraph 17.1 Standard Method of Chemical Analysis of
Hydraulic Cement.
.4 The portland cement shall be tested for alkali aggregate reactivity utilizing the
mortar bar accelerated expansion tests (CSA A23.2-25A) and concrete prism
expansion tests (CSA A23.2-14A). Results of the accelerated mortar bar tests
are subject to acceptance of CN prior to the use of these materials on any
project.
.5 Historical concrete prism expansion tests using the same concrete mix and
aggregate source as proposed for use on specific projects are also subject to
acceptance. The accelerated mortar bar test takes 14 days. The prism expansion
test normally requires readings to be taken over a one year period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Concrete Work in accordance with Section 03312 Concrete Work.

2.2 JOINTS
.1 Provide expansion joints between new concrete pavement and existing / new
structural elements.
.2 For New Concrete Paving areas:
.1 Provide transverse contraction joints to thickness and depth as

illustrated in the contract drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING CONCRETE
.1 All concrete shall be placed in accordance with Clause 7 of C.S.A. Standard

CAN3-A23.1 and shall be placed in continuous pours between construction joints
and expansion joints as shown on the drawings or as agreed upon in
consultation with the Engineer. The Contractor will be expected to provide
sufficient equipment to complete the placing of each section in one continuous
pour of not more than ten hours and an adequate lighting system shall be
provided for finishing the concrete and inspection of forms during dark hours.
.2 Before depositing any concrete all debris shall be removed from the space to be
occupied by the concrete. Mortar splashed upon the reinforcement, and surfaces
of forms shall be removed. Reinforcement shall be checked for position and
fastening and approval of the Engineer obtained. Water shall be removed from
the space to be occupied by the concrete before concrete is deposited, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
.3 Any flow of water into an excavation shall be diverted through proper side drains
to a sump, or be removed by other approved methods which will avoid washing
the freshly deposited concrete. If directed by the Engineer, water ventipipes and
drains shall be filled after the concrete has thoroughly hardened by grouting or
otherwise.
.4 All concrete shall be properly vibrated. The vibrators must not be used for shifting
masses of wet concrete, but for compaction only.
3.2 TEXTURING OF SURFACE
.1 Provide surface texturing to the requirement of OPSS 350
3.3 CURING
.1 All concrete shall be thoroughly "cured" to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer
and as described in C.S.A. Standard A23.1.
3.4 PROTECTION
.1 Place and maintain suitable barriers to protect finished concrete from equipment,
vehicles or pedestrian traffic.
.2 Do not open finished pavement to traffic until directed by Engineer.
3.5 SEALING/RESEALING OF JOINTS AND CRACKS IN CONCRETE

PAVEMENT
.1 Conform to OPSS 369.07
4.1 MEASUREMENT
.1 Measurement for concrete pavement shall be by the square metre (m2) of

acceptably constructed concrete pavement as calculated by surface area of
completed work accepted by the Engineer.
4.2 PAYMENT
.1 The Unit Prices submitted in the Form of Tender shall include all labour,
materials and equipment required to supply and place the concrete, including
concrete accessories and joints, where shown on the drawings and as called for
in this specification.

CN – DESIGN & STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 05120 specifies the requirements for:
.1 Fabrication, delivery and erection of structural steel; and
.2 Surface preparation and coating of structural steel and railing systems.
.2 Steel H-Piles Section 02383
.4 Bearings Section 07109

.1 Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 28, Article 28.5.4
(2020), including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 Structural Manual (August 2021).
.1 OPSS.PROV 906, Construction Specification for Structural Steel for Bridges

.2 OPSS.PROV 911, Construction Specification for Coating Structural Steel and

Railing Systems (November 2022), including all applicable references
specified therein.
.1 CSA S6:19, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code;
.2 CSA W47.1-19, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel;
.6 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)
.1 Steel Bridge Certification Standard, Third Edition (2018).
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Quality assurance for structural steel shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 906.
.2 Coating of Structural Steel and Railing Systems
.1 Quality assurance for coating structural steel and railing systems shall be in
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Structural steel submissions shall be according to OPSS.PROV 906.
.1 Submissions for coating of structural steel and railing systems shall be

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Design of structural steel shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 906 with

the following additions and amendments:
.1 Design of structural steel for Lower Baseline Road bridge and
temporary railway shoring shall be in accordance with AREMA
Manual for Railway Engineering, except as modified and
supplemented by CN Guidelines for Design of Railway Structures.
.1 Design of enclosures and temporary supports shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 911.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Structural steel materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 906.
.1 Materials for coating of structural steel and railing systems shall be in

2.3 PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT
.1 Equipment for coating of structural steel and railing systems shall be in

2.4 PRODUCTION
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Structural steel fabrication, delivery, handling and storage shall be in

amendments:
.1 Clause 906.07.01.07.01 of OPSS.PROV 906 is amended by the
addition of the following paragraph:
.1 The fabrication facility responsible for the fabrication of
structural steel for bridge structures shall be certified by the
CISC in the category of complex steel bridges.
.2 Subsection 906.07.01 of OPSS.PROV 906 is amended with the
addition of the following clause:
.1 Fabrication Outside of Canada and USA
1. For fabrication in a facility outside of Canada and USA,
the following additional requirements shall apply:
a. All structural steel shall be shipped to a
facility in Canada certified according to
CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2 for quality
verification.
b. Shipped structural steel shall be
accompanied by reports containing the
results of all inspections and testing
performed according to clause 1.4.1.1 of
this Section 05120 at the fabrication
facility outside of Canada and USA.
c. Shipped structural steel shall not be
galvanized or coated and shall be in a
condition that permits re-inspection and
testing.
d. An independent welding inspection
company shall be hired to perform
quality verification of shipped structural
steel according to clause 1.4.1.1 of this
Section 05120.
e. Acceptance of structural steel shall be
based on satisfactory re-inspection and
testing of all components according to
clause 1.4.1.1 of this Section 05120.
The reports accompanying the shipment
shall also be reviewed by the welding
inspector. Inspection, testing, and
reporting shall be done on each
shipment received.
f. The welding inspector shall ensure that
traceability of all structural steel has
been maintained by:
i. Correlation of heat numbers on
structural steel to the mill test
certificates.
ii. Review of mill test certificates,
verifying that materials used is
as specified in the Contract
Documents.
g. If the re-inspection or testing performed
on structural steel is not as specified in
the Contract Documents, all structural
steel is rejectable.
h. A Request to Proceed shall be
submitted to the Engineer upon
completion of the re-inspection and
testing prior to shipping from the
Canadian facility. The structural steel
shall not be delivered from the facility
until the Engineer has received the
Request to Proceed and issued a Notice
to Proceed.
.1 Delivery, Handling and Storage
1. A delivery schedule shall be provided to the Engineer
not less than five (5) days prior to shipping.
2. Delivery shall include loading of the members,
transportation, unloading, storage at the storage site
and temporary works for access.
3. Structural steel shall be loaded for shipping in such a
manner that it can be transported and unloaded at its
destination without being excessively stressed,
deformed, or otherwise damaged.
4. Plate girders shall be transported with their webs in a
vertical plane. When girders cannot be shipped with
their webs in the vertical plane, static and dynamic
forces during handling, transportation, and storage
shall be determined using a dynamic load allowance of
100%. Computed stresses shall be according to CSA
S6, Clause 10.10 and the maximum cyclic stress range
shall not exceed the constant amplitude fatigue
threshold for the appropriate fatigue categories
specified in CSA S6, Table 10.4. All the calculations
and associated sketches, including reasons why the
girders cannot be shipped with the webs in the vertical
plane, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer for approval seven (7) days prior to shipping.
The calculations and sketches shall be sealed and
signed by a Contractor’s engineer.
5. Structural steel, when stored, shall be stored in a
manner to avoid excessive stress deformation or other
damage. Plates and sections shall be stored in a way
that steel surfaces are prevented from entrapping
moisture or dirt or being continually wet. Structural
steel shall be protected from contaminants in a way
that still permits alternate wetting and drying cycles.
Storage shall be such to enable free drainage and
avoid moisture pockets or condensation accumulation.
6. Advertising by means of removable signing is permitted
on elements only while in transit to the specified site.
Any permanent markings on a surface that would be
visible after installation shall not be permitted.
.1 General
.1 The extent of work, cleaning requirements, surface preparation,
environmental protection requirements, and type of coating system
shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.
.2 Where there is a conflict between the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the Contract Documents, the more stringent
requirements shall apply as determined by the Engineer.
.3 All components coated off-site shall be protected from handling or
shipping damage by using padded slings, separators, and tie downs
or other similar devices. Loading procedures shall be designed to
protect coated surfaces from any possible damage to the coating.
.4 The Engineer shall be granted access to the galvanizing and painting
shops where components are being cleaned and coated, during all
hours of work.
.5 Galvanized steel components, when stored, shall be stored in a
manner to avoid wet storage stain. Components shall be stored above
ground on skids or other supports. Careful consideration shall be
given to how galvanized steel components are stacked and bundled
to ensure adequate air flow.
.2 Operational constraints, surface preparation and surface profile, application

of coating, field sampling and testing of coating materials, access for
inspection, environmental protection during surface preparation and coating,
and management of excess materials shall be in accordance with
OPSS.PROV 911.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Structural steel erection, quality control, repair of welds, inspection reports,

erected girder elevations, inspection after installation of the structural steel,
and management of excess material shall be in accordance with
.1 Subsection 906.07.03 of OPSS.PROV 906 is amended with the
.1 Atmospheric Corrosion Resistant (ACR) Steel Erection
1. Special care shall be used when unloading, handling
and erecting ACR steel to avoid marking or distorting
the steelwork. All slings shall be nylon strap or chains
with softeners. Care shall be taken to minimize
damage to the developing patina.
2. Plates and fasteners shall be checked for proper fit-up.
If crevices occur in uncoated areas and when required
by the Engineer, at least three coats of a compatible
sealant shall be brush applied, or more coats according
to the sealant manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Subsection 906.07.08 of OPSS.PROV 906 is amended by the
.1 Inspection after Installation of Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistant (ACR) Steel
1. All installed ACR steel components shall be completely
free of mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion
products, oil, grease, dust, dirt, wax-based crayon
marks and other foreign matter.
2. The appearance of components shall be generally
uniform in colour and texture, except for slight streaks
or discolourations, when viewed from a distance of 15
m.
.1 Structural Steel
.1 No measurement of structural steel shall be made.
.1 No measurement of coating of structural steel and railing systems shall be

made.
.1 Structural Steel
.1 Fabrication of Structural Steel

.1 Payment at the Contract price for the fabrication of structural steel
.2 All costs incurred to perform re-inspection and testing at a Canadian
facility shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
.3 Structural steel that requires no further fabrication and that is stored at
the fabricator's premises in Ontario or some other location in Ontario
away from the working area shall be eligible to be paid for when the
Contractor obtains a lease from the property owner that names the
Owner as the tenant. The Owner shall provide the form of lease for
this purpose that specifies payment of $1.00 for the term of the lease.
The Contractor shall retain full responsibility for the Work.
.2 Delivery of Structural Steel, and Erection of Structural Steel

.1 Payment at the Contract price for the delivery of structural steel tender
items and erection of structural steel tender items shall be full
.3 Shop and Field Inspection and Testing

.1 The supply of electric power, scaffolding, protection from weather, and
access for material testing and inspection shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility at no extra cost to the Owner.
.4 Bearings
.1 Payment for the supply and installation of bearings shall be according
to Section 07109 Bearings.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the coating new structural steel tender
items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.2 Remedial work on environmental protection shall be completed by the

Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

CN – DESIGN & METAL RAILINGS FOR STRUCTURES SECTION 05121
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 05121 specifies the requirements for metal railings for structures
including posts and anchorage assembly.
.1 OPSS.PROV 908, Construction Specification for Metal Traffic Barriers and

Metal Railings for Structures (November 2021), including all applicable
references specified therein.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 908.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submissions shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 908.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 908.
2.2 PRODUCTION
.1 Fabrication, handling, transportation and storage shall be in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 908.
CN – DESIGN & METAL RAILINGS FOR STRUCTURES SECTION 05121
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Installation shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 908.
.1 Measurement of metal railings for structures shall be by length in meters from end to
end of railing.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the parapet wall railing tender items shall be full

CN – DESIGN & WATERPROOFING BRIDGE DECKS SECTION 07100
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 07100 specifies the requirements for waterproofing of concrete bridge
decks with hot applied asphalt membrane.
.2 For Lower Baseline Road bridge, this Section 07100 specifies the requirements for
waterproofing of the abutment walls and wingwalls.
.1 Designated Sources for Materials (DSM); and

.1 LS-262, Method of Test for Bulk Relative Density of Compacted
Bituminous Mixtures.
.1 OPSS.PROV 914, Construction Specification for Waterproofing Bridge Decks

with Hot Applied Asphalt Membrane (November 2014), including all
applicable references specified therein;
.2 OPSS.PROV 1212, Material Specification for Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt

Joint Sealing Compound;
.3 OPSS.PROV 1213, Material Specification for Hot Applied Rubberized Asphalt

Waterproofing Membrane (March 1998), including all applicable references
specified therein; and
.4 OPSS.PROV 1215, Material Specification for Protection Board (March 1998),

including all applicable references specified therein.
.1 CGSB 37-GP-9MA (1983), Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing,

Damproofing and Waterproofing; and
.2 CGSB 37.50-M89, Hot-Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and
Waterproofing.
.1 ASTM D36/D36M-14 (Reapproved 2020), Standard Test Method for

Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus);
.2 ASTM D70-18a, Standard Test Method for Density of Semi-Solid Asphalt

Binder (Pycnometer Method); and
.3 ASTM D5329-20, Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, Hot-
Applied, for Joints and Cracks in Asphalt Pavements and Portland Cement
Concrete Pavements.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 914 with the following
.1 Testing Joint/Crack Sealant Compound

.1 All samples of sealant compound that are used for sealing joints and
cracks in hot mix asphalt pavements and Portland cement concrete
pavements shall/will be tested for all of the attributes listed in the table
below, with the exceptions as noted:
Procedures Procedures
Test Required for Hot- Required for Hot-
Poured Rubberized Poured Rubberized
Joint/Crack Sealing Joint/Crack Sealing
Compounds Used Compounds Used
in Hot Mix Asphalt in Portland Cement
Pavements Concrete
Pavements
Sample Preparation CGSB 37.50-M CGSB 37.50-M
Cone Penetration ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Resilience ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Asphalt Compatibility ASTM D5329 Not Required

(tested at 80 °C) (Note 1)
Bond (Non- ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329

Immersed) (Note 2)
Flow ASTM D5329 ASTM D5329
Softening Point ASTM D36/D36M Not Required

(Note 1)
Relative Density ASTM D70 LS-262

(Note 1)
Toughness Not Required CGSB 37.50-M
Notes:
1. For each batch of sealant compound used in hot mix asphalt
pavements, the Contractor shall provide results for all of these
tests. However, for re-heated sealant compounds that are
sampled during construction, these tests will be completed at
the discretion of the Owner.
2. For each batch of “All Districts” products used as joint/crack
sealant compound in hot mix asphalt pavements, the Contractor
shall provide test results based on bond testing that is
conducted in three cycles at -29 °C with both 50% and 200%
extension. For each batch of “Southern Ontario Only” sealant
used as joint/crack sealant compound in hot mix asphalt
pavement, the Contractor shall provide test results based on
bond testing that is conducted in five cycles at -18 °C with 50%
extension. All re-heated sealant compounds sampled during
construction will be tested in five cycles at -18 °C with 50%
extension, or when used as joint/crack sealant compound in hot
mix asphalt pavements, the samples will be tested, as specified
by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 914 with the following additions
and amendments:
.1 Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound

.1 Shipments of hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant
compounds shall meet the requirements given in the table below.
Sealant Designation
“Southern “All Districts”

Test Ontario Only” (Note 1)
Cone Penetration @ 25 °C  90 units -
Flow (mm) 5 3
Bond - 3 cycles @ 50% Pass -

extension at -18 °C
Notes:
1. A successful field trial is required before a product is accepted
for placement on the MTO’s DSM.
2.2 PRODUCTION
.1 Production, packaging, marking, shipment and delivery of materials for waterproofing

of concrete bridge decks with hot applied asphalt membrane shall be in accordance
with OPSS.PROV 1212, OPSS.PROV 1213, OPSS.PROV 1215 and CGSB 37-GP-
9MA with the following additions and amendments:
.1 Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound

.1 Pouring Point
.1 The pouring point for hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack
sealant compounds shall be at least 10 °C lower than the safe
heating temperature recommended by the manufacturer.
.2 For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant
compounds used for sealing joints and cracks in Portland
cement concrete pavements, the pouring point shall also be
the lowest temperature to which the material is heated and at
which it is suitable for filling a 12.5 mm wide and 40 mm deep
groove formed between two blocks of concrete without
inclusions of large air voids or discontinuities and without
damage to the material.
.3 For hot-poured rubberized asphalt joint/crack sealant
compounds used for sealing joints and cracks in asphalt
pavements, the pouring point shall also be the lowest
temperature to which the material is heated and at which it is
suitable for filling a 40 mm wide and 10 mm deep groove cut in
asphaltic concrete pavement without inclusions of large air
voids or discontinuities and without damage to the material.
.2 Packaging and Marking
.1 The sealing compound shall be packaged in 22 kg or smaller
units. It shall be contained in a polyethylene bag, and the
bags, shall, in turn be placed in a metal container. Each
container shall be legibly marked with the following
information:
1. Designated trade name of the compound;
2. Manufacturer's name;
3. Batch number;
4. Date of manufacture; and
5. Quantity contained.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 Construction equipment shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 914.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 General requirements, deck surface preparation, tack coating, application of

waterproofing membrane, membrane reinforcement, application of protection board,
forming and filling of grooves, sampling for quality assurance and management of
excess material for waterproofing of concrete bridge decks with hot applied asphalt
membrane shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 914 with the following additions
and amendments:
.1 Subsection 914.07.07 of OPSS.PROV 914 is amended by the addition of the

following to the first paragraph:
.1 Forming and filling of grooves shall be performed within 14 days of
surface course asphalt placement at the location of each groove.
.1 Measurement of membrane reinforcement shall be by length in metres. Allowance

shall not be made in the measurement for the turn-up at vertical faces or for any
overlap.
.2 Measurement of waterproofing system shall be by area in square metres.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the waterproofing system and membrane
reinforcement tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and
.2 When the Contract does not contain separate tender items for the work required by
this Section 07100, payment at the Contract price for the bridge deck waterproofing
tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do
the work.
.3 Repairs to damaged grooves shall be made at the Contractor’s expense at no

additional cost to the Owner.
.4 Payment adjustment due to membrane thickness deficiency, payment adjustment

due to membrane quality deficiency, and calculation of total adjustment payment

CN – DESIGN & BEARINGS SECTION 07109
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 07109 specifies the construction requirements for the installation of
bearings.
.1 Structural Manual (September 2021).
.1 OPSS.PROV 922, Construction Specification for Installation of Bearings

.2 OPSS.PROV 1202, Material Specification for Bearings – Elastomeric Plain

and Steel Laminated (November 2020), including all applicable references
specified therein.
.1 CSA S6:19, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.
.1 ASTM D412-16, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension; and
.2 ASTM D2240-151, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer

Hardness.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 922.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submissions shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 922.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
.1 The bearings, including any fasteners or dowels, shall be designed according to CSA
S6 and the MTO Structural Manual, Division 1.
.2 The effective elastomer thickness for plain bearings shall be greater than or equal to
15 mm and less than or equal to 25 mm.
.3 All internal layers of elastomer in a laminated elastomeric bearing shall have the
same thickness.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Materials shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 922 with the following additions
and amendments:
.1 Subsection 1202.05.03 of OPSS.PROV 1202 is deleted in its entirety and

.1 Approach Slab Bearings and Ballast Wall Bearings
.1 The physical properties of elastomer used for the manufacture
of approach slab bearings or ballast wall bearings shall be
according to the following:
1. Hardness, when tested according to ASTM
D2240 shall be 55 +10/-5 Shore A.
2. Minimum tensile strength shall be 15 MPa,
when tested according to ASTM D412, Method
A.
3. Minimum ultimate elongation shall be 400%,
when tested according to ASTM D412, Method
A.
.2 Subsection 1202.07.04 of OPSS.PROV 1202 is amended by the deletion of

the following:
Steel laminates tested according to LS-429. 0.25 Te
.3 Table 1, Physical Requirements for Polyisoprene and Polychloroprene of

OPSS.PROV 1202 is amended by deleting Note 2 in its entirety and replacing
it with the following:
2. Shear Modulus testing shall be performed with the test
specimen in an enclosed freezer unit capable of maintaining
the specified conditioning temperature. A ±25 percent strain
cycle shall be applied for a period of 100 seconds. The first
three-quarter cycle of strain shall be discarded and the shear
modulus shall be determined by the slope of the force
deflection curve for the next half cycle of loading.
2.3 PRODUCTION
.1 Production of steel-laminated elastomeric bearings for bridges and for approach slab
bearings and ballast wall bearings shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1202.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 General requirements, bearing seats, installation of anchors, grouting, alignment and

elevation tolerance, temporary attachments, positive attachment of elastomeric
bearing strips, sampling for quality assurance testing, inspection after installation of
the bearings and management of excess materials shall be in accordance with
.1 Clause 922.07.09.01 of OPSS.PROV 922 is amended by the addition of the

following:
.1 The following elastomeric bearings shall be provided as test samples
for destructive testing purposes, as noted in Table 1. These bearings
are in addition to those required for installation on the Contract.
Elastomeric Bearing Test Samples for Destructive Testing
Numbe Dimensio Plain or Number of Structure Bearings

r of ns Laminat Bearings Identificati Location
Sampl ed Represent on Represent
es to ed by ed by Test
be Sample Sample
Tested
1 500 x 400 Laminat 12 Britannia South and

x 100 ed Access North
Road Abutments
Bridge
1 600 x 500 Laminat 6 Britannia Pier

x 60 ed Access
Road
Bridge
.2 Subsection 922.07.10 of OPSS.PROV 922 is amended by the addition of the

following:
.1 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer upon
completion of the installation of the bearings on the substructure and
prior to any loading on the bearings.
.2 Any loading on the bearings shall not proceed until a Notice to
Proceed has been received from the Engineer.
.3 A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Engineer after loading
of the bearings and any specified jacking, but prior to opening to
traffic.
.4 Opening the bridge to traffic shall not proceed until a Notice to
Proceed has been received from the Engineer.
.1 For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of the bearings
installed.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the bearings – elastomeric, laminated tender items
shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do the work.
.2 Payment at the Contract price shall include full compensation for any additional
bearings supplied for destructive testing.
.3 Payment adjustment for elastomeric bearings with steel laminates shall be in


CN – DESIGN & HIGH PERFORMANCE WATERPROOFING SECTION 07112
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 07112 specifies the requirements for waterproofing of concrete bridge
decks with high performance waterproofing system, including the following:
.1 Surface preparation;
.2 Application of the high performance waterproofing system; and
.3 If applicable, repair of rejectable lots.
.2 Ballast Mat System Section 07113
.1 Guidelines for Design of Railway Structures (January 2006),including all

applicable references specified therein..

.1 ASTM C501-84(2015), Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to

Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by Taber Abraser;
.2 ASTM C1305/C1305M-16, Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of

Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane;
.3 ASTM C1583/C1583M-13, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of

Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete
Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-Off Method);
.4 ASTM D257-14, Standard Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance

of Insulating Materials;
.5 ASTM D543-20, Standard Practice for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics
to Chemical Reagents;
.6 ASTM D570-98(2018), Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of

Plastics;
.7 ASTM D638-14, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics;
.8 ASTM D2240-15e1, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer;
.9 ASTM D2369-10(2015)e1, Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of

Coatings; and
.10 ASTM D4541-17, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings
Using Portable Adhesion Testers.
.4 International Organization for Standards (ISO):
.1 EN ISO 527:2019, Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 1:

General Principles;
.2 EN ISO 868:2003, Plastics and Ebonite – Determination of Indentation

Hardness by Means of Durometer (Shored Hardness);
.3 ISO 7783:2018, Paints and Varnishes – Determination of Water-Vapour

Transmission Properties – Cup Method; and
.4 ISO 7784-2:2016, Paints and Varnishes – Determination of Resistance to

Abrasion – Part 2: Method with Abrasive Rubber Wheels and Rotating Test
Specimen.
.5 German Institute for Standardization (DIN):
.1 DIN 53505 (August 2000), Shore A and Shore D Hardness Testing of

Rubber.
.6 French Standardization Association (AFNOR):
.1 NF EN 13653:2017, Flexible Sheets for Waterproofing – Waterproofing of

Concrete Bridge Decks and Other Concrete Surfaces Trafficable by Vehicles
– Determination of Shear Strength; and
.2 NF P98-285 (September 1992), Tests Relating to Pavement, Waterproofing

Materials for Structures, Determination of Shore Hardness.
.7 European Organization for Technical Approvals (EOTA):
.1 Technical Reports:
.1 EOTA TR 003 (May 1999), Determination of the Watertightness;
.2 EOTA TR 004 (May 2004), Determination of the Resistance to
Delamination;
Dynamic Indentation;
.4 EOTA TR 007 (May 2004), Determination of the Resistance to Static
Indentation;
Fatigue Movement; and
.6 EOTA TR 013 (May 2004), Determination of Crack-Bridging
Capability.
.1 Quality assurance shall be in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway

Engineering, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 29, Section 29.13, and the following;
.1 Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced Applicator who is

authorized in writing by Manufacturer for installation of the specified
waterproofing system. The Applicator shall be an established firm regularly
engaged in satisfactory installations of similar materials on projects similar in
nature and complexity.
.2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification.

Manufacturer shall be a primary blender with proprietary formulations, an
Approved Applicator program, and have the capacity to provide field technical
services as required. All primers and membranes shall be provided from the
same manufacturer.
.3 Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative: Manufacturer shall provide an

authorized representative (“On-Site Representative”) to be on the job site at
all times to observe the installation of each portion of the membrane system.
The On-Site Representative, upon consultation with the Engineer, may
suspend any item of work that is suspect and/or does not meet the
requirements of this specification or Manufacturer. Resumption of work shall
only occur after the On-Site Representative and Engineer are satisfied that
appropriate remedial action has been taken by Applicator. Upon approval by
the Engineer, the Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative presence may be
relaxed or excluded. If relaxed or excluded, the roles and responsibilities of
the Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative shall be performed by a quality
manager employed by the Applicator or third-party inspector who have
demonstrated knowledge and understanding of the materials and installation,
and be competent to perform, and evaluate the testing outlined herein.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data: For each component comprising waterproofing system, submit

waterproofing manufacturer’s (“Manufacturer”) technical data sheets, safety data
sheets (“SDS”), results of physical property testing conducted by an AASHTO-
accredited third party laboratory, instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrates, and installation and testing procedures. All third-party testing shall have
been conducted within the past five (5) years.
.2 Installation and testing procedures, including:

.1 Surface preparation plan, including means, methods, equipment, and
containment procedures for all dirt, dust, and other pollutants and particles.
.2 Procedures for all products to be applied.
.3 Testing and inspection plans for all products to be applied.
.4 Tie-In and repair procedures for all products to be applied.
.5 Inclement weather plan.
.3 Applicator Approval from Manufacturer: Submit certificate signed by the

Manufacturer certifying that Applicator is an approved Applicator of Manufacturer’s
products.
.4 Manufacturer’s Written Warranty, signed by the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or

replace waterproofing material that is defective in content or composition.
.1 Warranty includes all material, required to repair or replace waterproofing

material that is defective in content or composition.
.2 Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of the

substrate or the formation of new cracks in the substrate that exceed 1/8” in
width.
.3 Warranty Period: 3 years from time of delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All components of the high performance waterproofing system shall be

manufactured by a single manufacturer and shall be compatible with each
other.
.2 Primer shall be a one component, solvent-free, 100% reactive, acrylic-based

methyl methacrylate (MMA) resin requiring only the addition of a catalyst. The
primer shall be MATACRYL Primer CM (Steel and Concrete) by RPM
Belgium/Alteco Polymer Systems or Owner approved equal/alternative with
properties equal to or better than the following:
Material Properties Criteria
Percent reactive resin 100%
Pot life at 20 °C (68 °F) 10 to 20 minutes
Cure time at 0 °C (32 °F) to 20 °C (68 °F) 20 to 45 minutes
Recoat time at 20 °C (68 °F) 30 to 45 minutes
Multi-coat application, solution weld Yes
Tensile strength > 10.34 MPa (1500 psi)
.3 Natural quartz aggregate employed as a broadcast into the primer shall be

dry, clean and free from any impurities, and is between 0.3mm and 0.7mm.
.4 Waterproofing membrane shall be a one component, solvent free, 100%
reactive polyurethane & methyl methacrylate blend (PUMA) resin requiring
only the addition of a catalyst. The waterproofing membrane shall be
MATACRYL RB by RPM Belgium Vandex or Owner approved
equal/alternative; it is suitable for application in temperatures between -15 °C
(5 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F); the waterproofing membrane meets or exceeds the
following properties as related to laboratory prepared samples tested at 20 °C
(68 °F) and 24 hour cure where applicable:
Percent reactive PUMA resin 100%
Pot life at 20 °C (68 °F) 10 to 20 minutes
Cure time at 0 °C (32 °F) to 20 °C (68 °F) < 60 minutes
Volatile organic content (ASTM D2369) < 1%
Tensile adhesion to concrete (ASTM > 2.76 MPa (400 psi)
C1583/C1583M)
Tensile adhesion to SSPC-SP 10 steel (ASTM > 6.89 MPa (1000 psi)
D4541)
Resistance and effect of liquids (ASTM D543) No visible penetration
Water absorption (ASTM D570) < 1.3%
Shore 'D' hardness (ASTM D2240) 44 to 45
Shore 'D' hardness (EN ISO 868) 35
Elongation (ASTM D638) > 245%
Elongation (EN ISO 527) 407%
Tensile strength (ASTM D638) > 8.27 MPa (1200 psi)
Tensile strength (EN ISO 527) > 11.58 MPa (1680 psi)
Abrasion resistance (ASTM C501, Taber CS-17) Weight Loss < 87 mg
Volume resistivity (ASTM D257) 2.1 x 1011 Ohms cm
Surface resistivity (ASTM D257) 1.4 x 1011 Ohms
AREMA ballast indentation Approved
SNCF Approved
HAPAS BBA Approved
Modulus of elasticity (EN ISO 527) 88 MPa (12,760 psi) at 21 °C
(70 °F)
The waterproofing membrane shall meet or exceeds the following properties

as related to laboratory prepared samples tested at -30°C (-22°F) and 24
hour cure where applicable:
Tensile strength > 8.27 MPa (1200 psi)
Dynamic crack bridging (ASTM C1305) > 3mm (120 mils)
Crack bridging (VTT) > 5 mm (200 mils)
.5 Sealer coat, applied to protect the exposed waterproofing membrane and low
modulus waterproofing membrane from UV damage, shall be one
component, solvent-free, 100% reactive, acrylic-based methyl methacrylate
(MMA) resin requiring only the addition of a catalyst; it shall be capable of full
cure in less than one hour at 0°C (32°F); the sealer coat is MATACRYL STC
by RPM Belgium Vandex or Engineer approved equal/alternative.
2.2 PACKAGING AND MARKING
.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all components of the high performance
waterproofing system are supplied to the job site in the manufacturer’s sealed and
labeled containers ready for use.
2.3 PRODUCTION
.1 Delivery, storage and handling of high performance waterproofing system

components shall be in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering,
Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 1, Article 1.22.7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 The equipment shall be approved by the manufacturer of high performance

waterproofing system and is in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instructions regarding all aspects of the health and safety requirements,
environmental control and product application procedures.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing prior to commencement of any waterproofing

operations. Waterproofing shall not commence until permission to proceed is given
by the Engineer.
.2 All components of the high performance waterproofing system shall be stored at the
job site in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and relevant
health and safety regulations; handling, mixing and addition of components is
performed in a safe manner in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
.3 Waterproofing operations shall be carried out only when the air temperature and
substrate temperature are between -15°C (5°F) and 35°C (95°F); waterproofing is
not carried out when wind, rain, snow or moisture from any source are capable of
contaminating surfaces.
.4 Surface of concrete to be waterproofed shall be completely treated by abrasive blast

cleaning in accordance with Section 03312 – Concrete Work, to expose sound,
laitance-free concrete; curing compound used on the concrete surface is completely
removed; all dirt and debris is removed; immediately prior to application of the
primer, the concrete surface is cleaned with jet of oil-free compressed air to remove
all dust and other foreign material.
.5 Prior to priming of the surface, the Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative and the
Engineer shall inspect the prepared substrate and identify any defects; waterproofing
does not commence until all defects identified by this inspection are remedied to the
satisfaction of the Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative and the Engineer.
.6 Prior to commencement of the waterproofing operations, three acceptable tests for

tensile surface strength shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for each 465 m² of waterproofed area; all tests are witnessed by
the Engineer; based on the test results, the Engineer or the Manufacturer’s On-Site
Representative, may request additional substrate preparation and retesting.
.7 Ensure adequate protection of equipment and adjacent areas from overspray or

other contamination during waterproofing operations.
.8 Waterproofing operations shall be performed sequentially with no delay between

operations.
.9 Application of primer, broadcast of natural quartz aggregate, application of

waterproofing membrane, and application of sealer coat shall be in strict accordance
with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and the following:
.1 Primer is applied wherever waterproofing membrane is to be applied; the

primer is uniformly applied onto concrete in one or two coats at a coverage
rate of 0.40kg/m² (1 gallon per 80 to 100ft²) or as required by the
manufacturer using equipment approved by the manufacturer of the primer;
the primer is applied when concrete surface is dry (surface moisture less than
6%) and clean; drying of the concrete surface is not expedited by use of torch
or any other means; for substrates other than concrete, coverage rates are as
per manufacturer’s recommendations using equipment approved by the
manufacturer of the primer;
.2 Natural quartz aggregate is broadcast into wet primer at a rate of 0.30 kg/m²;
.3 Treatment of joints, corners and recesses in substrate is in accordance with

the manufacturer’s printed instructions;
.4 Waterproofing membrane is not applied until the primer has cured

completely; the primer is free of any surface moisture and dirt and is not dried
by torch or any other means; waterproofing membrane is applied in one or
more coats at an overall coverage rate of 4.00kg/m² (1 gallon per 12.5ft²) to
form a uniform film which will achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 3mm
(120 mils);
.5 Debonding material is placed below steel joint cover plate assemblies at deck
joints as shown in the Drawings; the steel joint cover plate assemblies are
fully centered onto the deck joints in concrete;
.6 Low modulus waterproofing membrane is hand packed into the gaps between
plates and adjacent to the plates of the steel joint cover plate assemblies, up
to the top of joint cover plate assemblies, to ensure total filling of the gaps;
immediately thereafter, a layer of low modulus waterproofing membrane
which will achieve a minimum dry layer thickness of 3mm (120 mils) is
applied over the steel joint cover plate assemblies, extending to the
waterproofing membranes on each side of the deck joints; the low modulus
waterproofing membrane overlaps the waterproofing membrane by a
minimum of 150mm;
.7 The maximum duration the unprotected waterproofing membrane and low

modulus waterproofing membrane are exposed to UV radiation is in strict
accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the high
performance waterproofing system; and
.8 Sealer coat is applied at a coverage rate of 0.80 to 1.00 kg/m²; the surface of
waterproofing membrane and low modulus waterproofing membrane is
flooded with sealer to achieve full coverage; immediately thereafter, sealer is
back rolled in order to remove excess sealer.
.10 The treatment of rejectable lots shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s repair
proposal if deemed acceptable by the Engineer. If the repair proposal is deemed
unacceptable by the Engineer, the high performance waterproofing system shall be
rejected and replaced.
.11 Material Sampling and Acceptance Testing shall be in accordance with the following:
.1 The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator recorded on a form

to be submitted to the Engineer:
a. Temperature
1) Air, substrate temperatures, and, if applicable, dew point.
b. Adhesion Tests
1) Adhesion tests of the cured system to the substrate shall
exhibit a minimum Pull-off strength of 400psi on Concrete
surfaces and 300psi on Steel surfaces.
c. Coverage Rates
1) Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity
of material used against the area covered
.2 B. The Applicator shall furnish a Daily Work Report detailing all recorded
temperatures, humidity levels, installation details & schedules etc.

Documents.
.1 Measurement of high performance waterproofing system shall be by area in square

metres.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the high performance waterproofing system tender
items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do the
work.
.2 Repair of rejectable lots shall be made at the Contractor’s expense at no additional

cost to the Owner.

CN – DESIGN & BALLAST MAT SYSTEM SECTION 07113
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section 07113 specifies the requirements for ballast mat system for concrete
bridge decks with high performance waterproofing system, including the following:
.1 Prepare substrate;
.2 Supply and install the ballast mat;
.3 Bond the ballast mat protection layer using thermal fusion; and
.4 If applicable, repair rejectable lots.
.2 High Performance Waterproofing Section 07112


.3 International Organization for Standards (ISO):
.1 ISO 10319:2015, Geosynthetics – Wide-Width Tensile Test.
.4 German Institute for Standardization (DIN):
.1 DIN 45673-5:2010, Mechanical Vibration – Resilient Elements used in

Railway Tracks – Part 5: Laboratory Test Procedures for Under-Ballast Mats;
and
.2 DIN 53455:1981, Testing of Plastics, Tensile Test.

.1 The Contractor shall ensure a Ballast Mat System Specialist Subcontractor

undertakes the installation of ballast mat system. The Ballast Mat System Specialist
Subcontractor shall completely prepare all the submittals and undertake any other
work required in accordance with this Section 07113.
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting its own quality assurance
program to ensure that the ballast mat system for the Works meets the requirements
of the Specifications.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s Product Data – Ballast Mats at least six
(6) weeks prior to installation indicating:
.1 Performance criteria, showing compliance with the requirements specified in

this Section 07113;
.2 Compliance with appropriate reference standards, characteristics, limitations

and trouble-shooting protocol;
.3 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements;
.4 Test reports; and
.5 Samples:
.1 300 mm x 300 mm samples of ballast mat.
.2 The Contractor shall submit the following field reports:
.1 Daily Inspection Report – Ballast Mats; and
.2 Manufacturer’s Field Report – Ballast Mats.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All components of the ballast mat system shall be manufactured by a single

manufacturer and shall be compatible with each other and the high performance
waterproofing system.
.2 Ballast mat shall be Under Ballast Mat Sylodyn DN 1019 by Getzner Werkstoffe
GmbH or Owner approved equal/alternative that is comprised of a 15 mm thick
closed cell foamed polyurethane resilient layer and a 3 mm thick protection layer of
geotextile bonded to the top of resilient layer for the purpose of resisting ballast
penetration and enabling thermal fusion bonded joints in ballast mat; ballast mat
shall meet or exceed the following properties within a 20% tolerance, unless
otherwise noted:
Material Properties Characteristic Test Method Note

Data
Specific static stiffness Cstat DIN 45673-5 Evaluation as
between 0.02 and 0.10 N/mm² 0.100 N/mm3 a secant
between 0.02 and 0.20 N/mm² 0.079 N/mm3 stiffness (3rd
load cycle)
Specific dynamic stiffness Cdyn1(ƒ) DIN 45673-5 σm = 0.06 ±
for determination of track dynamics 0.112 N/mm3 0.04 N/mm²
Cdyn1 (5 Hz) 0.114 N/mm3
Cdyn1 (10 Hz) 0.116 N/mm3
Cdyn1 (20 Hz) 0.117 N/mm3
Cdyn1 (30 Hz)
Low frequency dynamic stiffening DIN 45673-5

κdyn1 (10 Hz) 1.14
High frequency dynamic stiffening DIN 45673-5

κdyn2 (20 Hz) at preload 0.03 N/mm² 1.08
Mechanical loss factor (Cdyn2)  = 0.10 DIN 45673-5 Dependency

on frequency,
preload and
amplitude
(reference
value)
Mechanical fatigue resistance passed DIN 45673-5 TU Munich,
Report No.
1988
Tensile strength of resilient layer 1.7 N/mm2 DIN 53455
(minimum)
Tensile strength of protection layer 20 kN/m ISO 10319
(minimum)
Elongation at rupture of resilient 450% DIN 53455
layer (minimum)
Elongation at rupture of protection 50% ISO 10319
layer (minimum)
Water admission by volume DIN 45673-5
resilient layer + protection layer 10%
protection layer 67%
Water resistance DIN 45673-5
decrease of tensile strength 4%
decrease of elongation at rupture 0%
Ageing DIN 45673-5
change of Cstat ΔCstat < 7.0%
change of mass Δm < 0.5%

Freeze-thaw resistance DIN 45673-5
change of Cdyn1 ΔCdyn1 < 1%
Ozone free of cracks DIN 45673-5
Oil and grease resistance DIN 45673-5
decrease of tensile strength 10%
Flammability B2 DIN 45673-5 Normally
inflammable
.3 The thermal fusion bonded protection layer joining strips over joints in ballast mat
shall be of the composition and geometry specified by the manufacturer of the ballast
mat system; ballast mat systems that do not feature thermal fusion bonded geotextile
joining strips commercially endorsed by the manufacturer of the ballast mat system
are not acceptable;
.4 Ballast mat adhesive shall be MATACRYL RB by RPM Belgium Vandex or Owner

approved equal/alternative in accordance with Section 07112 – High Performance
Waterproofing System; ballast mat adhesive develops an adhesive bond between
the ballast mat resilient layer and the high performance waterproofing system that
exceeds the tensile strength of the ballast mat resilient layer.
2.2 PACKAGING AND MARKING
.1 All components of the ballast mat system shall be supplied to the job site in the
manufacturer’s sealed and labeled packaging ready for use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Equipment shall be approved by the manufacturers of ballast mat system and high
performance waterproofing system and shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturers’ printed instructions regarding all aspects of the health and safety
requirements, environmental control and product installation procedures.
.2 Cutting of ballast mat shall be performed in a manner that prevents damage to the
high performance waterproofing system; cutting through the ballast mat placed on
top of the high performance waterproofing system with knives or similar tools
capable of damaging the high performance waterproofing system is strictly
prohibited.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
.1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing prior to commencement of any ballast mat
system installation operations; installation of ballast mat system shall not commence
until permission is given by the Engineer.
.2 All components of the ballast mat system shall be stored at the job site in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and relevant health and
safety regulations; handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed
in a safe manner in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
.3 The installation of the ballast mat system shall be carried out only when the air
temperature and substrate temperature are between 15°C (59°F) and 35°C (95°F),
providing the substrate is above the dew point; installation of ballast mat system is
not carried out when wind, rain, snow or moisture from any source are capable of
contaminating surfaces.
.4 Surfaces of ballast mat and substrate to be bonded shall be completely treated in

accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
.5 Prior to applying the ballast mat adhesive, the Ballast Mat System Specialist
Subcontractor and the Engineer shall inspect the prepared substrate and identify any
defects; installation of ballast mat shall not commence until all defects identified by
this inspection are remedied to the satisfaction of the Ballast Mat System Specialist
Subcontractor and the Engineer.
.6 Prior to commencement of the ballast mat system installation operations, an

acceptable pull-off test shall be conducted for each bridge deck; the tests are
conducted to failure and shall be considered acceptable if the ballast mat resilient
layer fails before its bond to the high performance waterproofing system; all tests are
witnessed by the Engineer; based on the test results, the Engineer or the Ballast Mat
System Specialist Subcontractor may request additional substrate preparation and
retesting.
.7 Ballast mat system installation operations shall be performed sequentially with no

delay between operations.
.8 Application of ballast mat adhesive, installation of ballast mat and thermal fusion
bonding of ballast mat protection layer shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s printed instructions and the following:
.1 Sections of ballast mat are left to relax after they are unrolled for a minimum
of three hours, unless specified otherwise by the manufacturer; during this
time, ballast mat shall be protected from moisture contamination;
.2 Ballast mat adhesive shall not be applied on the areas that are specified in
the Drawings to remain unbonded; and
.3 The maximum gap at joints between ballast mat sections does not exceed 5
mm.
.9 The Contractor shall ensure that the treatment of rejectable lots is in accordance with
the manufacturer’s repair proposal if deemed acceptable by the Contract
Administrator. If the repair proposal is deemed unacceptable by the Contract
Administrator, the ballast mat system shall be rejected and replaced.
.1 Measurement of ballast mat system shall be by area in square metres.
.1 Payment at the Contract price for the high performance waterproofing system tender
items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment and materials to do the
work.
.2 Repair of rejectable lots shall be made at the Contractor’s expense at no additional

cost to the Owner.

CN - DESIGN & COMMON WORK RESULTS SECTION 16010
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 Prior to tendering, the Contractor and all subcontractors and suppliers shall read
and be governed by all Parts, Specifications, Drawings and Addenda of the
Tender and Contract Documents which affect the respective work of each.
.2 The complete work under this Contract shall be governed by the dictates of good
practice and shall be complete in all details of materials and methods even if not
minutely specified. The Work shall be properly coordinated with the requirements
of all work specified in other sections. The work includes testing as specified,
start up and placing of the work into operation (commissioning), ready for use by
the Owner.
1.2 INTENT
.1 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials and necessary equipment to
provide complete and operating electrical systems as set forth on the plans and
in these Specifications, and as called for elsewhere in the Contract documents.
Any work, even if not shown or specified, which is obviously necessary or
reasonably implied to complete the work, shall be carried out as if it was both
shown and specified.
.2 The responsibility as to which Division provides required articles or materials

rests solely with the Contractor. Extras will not be considered based on grounds
of difference in interpretation of the Specifications as to which trade was involved
to provide certain specialties or materials.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
.1 Where references are made to standard Specifications such as Canadian

Electrical Code CEC, National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable
Engineers Association (IPCEA), Instrument Society of America (ISA), etc., the
latest edition and revisions of such standard Specifications shall apply.
.2 The electrical installation shall comply with the latest edition of the Ontario
Electrical Safety Code, and all applicable municipal and local codes and the
regulations of local inspection authorities.
1.4 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL
.1 All work shall be performed by competent tradesmen, be executed in a

workmanlike manner and present a neat, mechanical appearance when
completed.
.2 For work involving specialties such as instrumentation, etc., the Contractor shall
employ only tradesmen or Subcontractors fully qualified and experienced in such
work.
.3 All materials to be new, meeting the quality specified and conform to the
standards of the Underwriter Laboratory Canada. Where equipment or materials
are specified by technical description only, they are to be of the best commercial
quality obtainable for the purpose.
.4 Electrical equipment that is shown on the plans or called for in the specifications
that is not ULC approved to be treated in one of the following ways:
.1 Make known to the Engineer in writing not less than ten (10) days prior to
closing date of tender, or
.2 Make allowance in Tender for having said equipment locally approved.
.5 Uniformity Of Equipment:
.1 Unless otherwise specifically called for in the Specifications, uniformity of

manufacturer to be maintained throughout the project for any particular
item or type of equipment. Manufacturer of the electrical distributions and
control devices to be of the same manufacturer.
1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
.1 Electrical Drawings indicate general location and route to be followed by conduits

and do not show all structural and mechanical details. In some cases, conduit is
not shown on the plans or shown diagrammatically in schematic or riser
diagrams.
.2 Follow civil, structural, and mechanical Drawings for details of this work and
install electrical conduits, boxes and fittings to coordinate with civil, structural and
mechanical work and details.
1.6 EXAMINATION OF OTHER DRAWINGS
.1 The Contractor shall examine carefully the civil, structural, and mechanical
Drawings and work of other trades, to satisfy themself that the work under this
Contract can be satisfactorily carried out without changes to the buildings and
layouts as shown on the plans.
.2 Should any item arise indicating conflict with equipment of other trades or
requiring additional work beyond the intent as described in the Specifications and
shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall immediately bring the matter to the
attention of the Engineer before submitting their Tender. Failure to do so
constitutes acceptance of responsibility for any necessary work.
1.7 PERMIT, INSPECTION, AND FEES
.1 The Contractor shall obtain all permits required, (paying all fees levied) and after
completion of the work, shall furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of Final
Inspection and Approval from the Electrical Inspection Authorities. Permits shall
be taken out at the beginning of the work.
1.8 SETTING OUT THE WORK
.1 The Contractor shall thoroughly examine the Drawings and Specifications and
especially figured dimensions immediately after the Contract is awarded and
report any discrepancy, error, or omission to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
give the work their personal supervision, lay out their own work, do all necessary
leveling and measuring or employ a competent engineer to do so. Figures, full
size and dimensioned Drawings shall take precedence over scale measurements
of Drawings. No plea as to the actions and directions of other than the Engineer
will be admitted as justification for any departure made from the Drawings,
Specifications, or Contract. It shall remain the duty of the Contractor to take their
own measurements of the work.
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all work completed contrary to
the intent of the Drawings and Specifications and shall bear all costs for same.
Where the intent of the Drawings and Specifications is not clear, he should obtain
a clarification from the Engineer before proceeding with the work, otherwise no
compensation will be forthcoming for any necessary adjustments.
.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for prompt installation of their work in

advance of concrete pouring or similar work. He shall provide sleeves and any of
their materials to be embedded in concrete and locate them where required.
.4 Where any equipment supplied by this Contractor must be built in with the work
of other Contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of the
equipment to be built in or measurements to allow necessary openings to be left
so as not to delay the work.
.5 The Contractor shall protect all work executed both from the elements and the
progress of construction and shall make good any work supplied that has been
damaged from any cause whatsoever.
.6 The Contractor, in setting out of their work, shall make reference to architectural,
civil, structural and mechanical Drawings. He shall consult with the respective
trades in setting out locations for conduit runs, luminaires, panel assemblies, etc.,
so that conflicts are avoided and symmetrical even spacing is maintained.

Multiple runs of cables and conduits shall be laid out so that they leave the main
run-in order with a minimum of crossovers.
1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1 The Contractor to be responsible for all cutting required for electrical installation.
Structural members not to be cut without the written consent of the Engineer.
.2 The Contractor to be responsible for patching and repairing of surfaces damaged

by cutting for electrical work.
.3 Where work damages work of other trades, repair and make good such damage
to the satisfaction of the trade concerned and the Engineer.
.4 Locate and provide holes and sleeves required for electrical work. Relocate
improperly located holes and sleeves at no cost.
1.10 ALTERATIONS
.1 Alterations entailing additional work or deletions shall be carried out only upon
written request by the Engineer.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
.1 Submit Shop Drawings, product data and samples for all electrical components
as indicated in the respective sections of these Specifications and as required by
the Engineer.
.2 Shop Drawings shall indicate specific details of construction, dimensions,

capacities, weights and electrical performance characteristics of equipment or
material being supplied for this project.
.3 Submit design drawings showing the location of all existing and new handwells
and duct banks.
.4 Submit method of installing conduits to the consultant for approval.
.5 Submit specifications for all new handwells (handholes, manholes and pull
boxes).
.6 Submit the method of joining pipes to ensure leakproof installation.
.7 Submit the method of proving continuity of all conduits installed to the consultant
for approval.
.8 Submit to the Engineer, in writing for approval, the proposal method of proofing
the conduits.
.9 Provide testing result to support proof that conduits are clear, properly connected
one piece to the next and waterproof and capable of being filled with wires s
required.
.10 Submit to the Engineer, in writing for approval, the proposed method of proofing
the ducts are free of water, debris, breakage or distortion.
1.12 PROTECTION
.1 Protect the work of others from damage resulting from the work of this Division.
.2 Protect the work of this Division from that of others, make good any damage,
remove all debris and rubbish and leave the project site in a clean and tidy
condition to the approval of the Engineer.
.3 Guard exposed live electrical equipment during construction for personnel safety
and provide applicable warning signs.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Continuously update drawings to accurately record all items such as change

orders, alterations or additions, runs of conduit, locations of all pull boxes,
numbers and locations of outlets, motors, panels, and luminaires that may occur
during progress of the work.
.2 All conduit runs must be shown on the Record Drawings complete with size,
routing, wire count and wire termination numbers.
1.14 FINISHES
.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by removal of rust and scale, cleaning,
application of rust resistant primer inside and outside and at least two (2) coats of
finish enamel.
1.15 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S AND UL LABELS
.1 Manufacturer's nameplates and ULC labels to be visible and legible after

equipment is installed.
1.16 WARNING SIGNS
.1 Provide warning signs, as specified or to meet requirements of Inspection

Authorities and Engineer.
.2 Use porcelain enamel signs, minimum 7” x 10” size.

1.17 INCOMING SERVICE CONNECTION
.1 The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the incoming service power
connections with the Owner.
1.18 USE OF PRODUCTS DURING CONSTRUCTION
.1 Any equipment used for temporary or construction purposes shall be acceptable

to the Engineer. Clean and restore to "as new" condition all equipment prior to
the time of substantial completion.
.2 All lamps used for a period longer than three (3) months shall be replaced prior to
final acceptance.

CN – DESIGN & CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS SECTION 16034
CONSTRUCTION AND CONDUIT FITTINGS SEPTEMBER 2023
GRADING & DRAINAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and
Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada;
.2 CSA C22.2 No. 45, Rigid Metal Conduit;
.3 CSA C22.2 No. 56, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal
Conduit;
.4 CSA C22.2 No. 83, Electrical Metallic Tubing;
.5 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit; and
.6 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 227.3, Non-metallic Mechanical Protection Tubing

(NMPT), A National Standard of Canada.
1.2 LOCATION OF CONDUITS
.1 The Drawings do not show all conduits. Those shown are in diagrammatic form
only. Conduits are to be provided to create complete raceway systems.
1.3 NUMBER & SIZES OF CONDUITS
.1 Conduits to be provided shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents and/or

as required to suit requirements of systems installed.
1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittal procedures shall be in accordance with Section 01340 Submittals.
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.

GRADING & DRAINAGE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
.1 Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, hot dipped galvanized steel threaded.
.2 Epoxy coated conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, with zinc coating and corrosion
resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.
.3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings.
.4 Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2.
.5 Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum liquid-tight flexible metal.
.6 Flexible PVC conduit: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3.
.7 HDPE Conduit, SDR11: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 327-16
2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1 Provide all pull boxes, junction boxes, terminal boxes, fittings, seals, plugs, cover
plates, bushing, clips, rods and accessories as required and as applicable:
.1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and smaller; and
.2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm.
2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1 Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified.
Coating: same as conduit.
.2 Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for 27 mm and larger conduits.
2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1 Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 103
mm linear expansion.
.2 Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear
expansion and 21 mm deflection in all directions.
.3 Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
.4 Opening through fire rated walls shall be sealed with ULC listed fire proofing
assembly
GRADING & DRAINAGE
2.5 FISH CORD
.1 Polypropylene fish cord for empty conduits.
2.6 SITE VERIFICATION
.1 Verify all wall, partition, and door locations, coordinate with other disciplines and
then mark the conduit/device layouts prior to start of work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or

specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and
installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum

interference in spaces through which they pass.
.2 Use rigid PVC conduit underground and buried in or under concrete slab on
grade and in corrosive areas.
.3 Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 21 mm.
.4 Bend conduit cold:
.1 Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original

diameter.
.5 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up

tight.
.6 Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.7 Remove and replace blocked conduit sections:
.1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.
.8 Install all conduit, conduit fittings and accessories in accordance with the latest
edition of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code in a manner that does not alter,
change or violate any part of the installed system components or the CSA/UL
certification of these components.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.9 Use epoxy coated conduit underground in corrosive areas and where exposed to
exterior elements. (ie: pole mounted service entrance conduits)
.10 Use rigid galvanized conduit except above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical
injury, as well as concealed work in masonry or poured concrete construction.
.11 Cap all conduits at both ends with waterproof ends immediately after the proofing
process. Contractor shall ensure that the conduits are ready for future use.
3.3 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
.1 Locate to suit reinforcing steel:
.1 Install in centre one third of slab.
.2 Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.
.3 Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
.4 Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane,

before membrane is installed:
.1 Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
.5 Conduits in slabs: minimum slab thickness four (4) times conduit diameter.
.6 Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 25 mm concrete cover.
.7 Organize conduits in slab to minimize crossovers.
3.4 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE SLABS ON GRADE
.1 Run conduits 25 mm and larger below slab and encase in 75 mm concrete

envelope:
.1 Provide 50 mm of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.
3.5 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1 Slope conduits to provide drainage.
.2 Waterproof joints (PVC excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.

GRADING & DRAINAGE
.1 No Measurement or separate Payment will be made for this work. All work under
this section will be paid under the Lump Sum Prices listed in the Schedule of
Prices.
END OF SECTION
CN – DESIGN & INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS IN TRENCHES SECTION 16043
CONSTRUCTION AND IN DUCTS SEPTEMBER 2023
GRADING & DRAINAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 CAN/CSA-Z809, Sustainable Forest Management; and
.2 C22.2 No.327-16, HDPE conduit, conductors-in-conduit, and fittings.
.1 ASTM D3261-16, Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylee

(PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing; and
.2 ASTM D3350-21, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe

and Fittings Materials.
.3 Ontario Electrical Safety Code
.2 Product Data:
.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data

sheets for cables and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original

factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in

clean, dry, well-ventilated area;
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.2 Store and protect cables from nicks, scratches, and blemishes; and
.3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HDPE CONDUITS
.1 High-density polyethylene material in accordance with ASTM D3350.
.2 Used in direct burial, encased or in concrete reinforced duct bank.
.3 HDPE fittings and transitions shall meet ASTM D3261.
2.2 PVC CONDUITS
.1 PVC tubing shall be schedule-40. Sunlight resistance, FT-4 rating, fire resistant,
impact and chemical resistant, non-corrosive and non-magnetic.
.2 Used in direct burial, encased or in concrete reinforced duct bank.
.3 connectors, couplings, straps, elbows, expansion joint fittings shall be of the

same material and manufacturer as PVC tubing. Expansion/contraction fitting
shall be telescopic sleeve type with O-rings gasket.
2.3 WARNING TAPE:
.1 0.10 mm thick polyethylene tape manufactured by Brady or Seton.
2.4 FISH WIRE:
.1 Yellow, waterproof, polypropylene rope, minimum 6 mm diameter
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - DIRECT BURIED CONDUITS/DUCTS
.1 Install conduits/ducts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in locations

indicated on Contract Drawings and in accordance with the OESC.
.2 At joints, apply jointing cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Install fish wire in empty conduits/ducts to facilitate wire and cable pulling.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.4 Clean conduits/ducts end of burrs. Thoroughly clean with suitable mandrels to

remove dirt, concrete, and imperfections likely to damage wires or cables during
pulling operation.
process in the handholes or manholes. The Contractor shall ensure that the
conduits are ready for future use.
.6 Place red plastic warning tape above centreline of each conduit/duct, 300 mm
below grade, through entire length of run unless indicated otherwise.
.7 Close both ends of spare ducts and future ducts with bell end plug of same
material duct, inserted into a coupling to form a watertight seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE ENCASED CONDUITS/DUCTS
.1 Perform concrete Work necessary to complete installation in accordance with

Contract Drawings.
.2 Apply jointing cement at conduit/duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions for watertight joints.
.3 Arrange conduits in duct bank and secure in place with plastic or concrete
separators, installed at 1500 mm intervals. Joints shall be staggered at 150 mm
in adjacent layers.
.4 Provide fish wires in empty ducts and secure wire at both ends.
.5 Close both ends of spare ducts and incomplete runs with bell and plugs of same
material as conduits/ducts. Ends shall have watertight seals.
process in the handholes or manholes. The Contractor shall ensure that the
conduits are ready for future use.
.7 Lay red plastic warning tape above centreline of each duct bank, 300 mm below
grade, throughout entire length of run. Duct bank over 500 mm wide, use two (2)
tapes, laid 100 mm from duct bank edge.
3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by cables installation.

GRADING & DRAINAGE
Prices.
END OF SECTION
CN – DESIGN & BASIC ELECTRICAL SECTION 16050
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND METHODS SEPTEMBER 2023
GRADING & DRAINAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
.4 Project Closeout Section 01800
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for

Electrical Installations;
.2 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No. 1, Overhead Systems;
.3 CAN3-C235, Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V;
.4 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.7, Underground Systems; and
.5 CSA Z462, Workplace Electrical Safety.
.2 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer’s Association of Canada (EEMAC):
.1 EEMAC 2Y-1, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.
.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code

Product Line (NESC):
.1 IEEE SP1122, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th

Edition.
.4 Ontario Electrical Safety Code, Latest edition

GRADING & DRAINAGE
.2 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit installation details of equipment indicating proposed location,

layout and arrangement, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be
shown to ensure co-ordinated installation;
.2 Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and

replacement of operating equipment devices; and
.3 If changes are required, notify Engineer of Record of these changes

before they are made.
.3 Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01620 Quality Control and

Assurance.
.1 Provide CSA certified equipment and material;
.2 Where CSA certified equipment or material is not available, submit such

equipment or material to inspection authorities (ESA) for special approval
before delivery to site;
.3 Submit test results of installed underground conduits;
.4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract;
.5 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in

PART 3 - LOAD BALANCE; and
.6 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon

completion of Work to Engineer of Record.
.4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Engineer of Record manufacturer's

written report, within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical
system and instrumentation testing, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY
CONTROL.
.1 Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01620 Quality Control and

Assurance.
.2 Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed master

electricians, electricians or apprentices:
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under
direct supervision of qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific
tasks; and
.2 Permitted activities: determined based on training level attained and

demonstration of ability to perform specific duties.
.1 Material Delivery Schedule: provide Engineer of Record with schedule within two
(2) weeks after award of Contract.
1.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
.1 Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical
sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.
.2 Operating instructions to include following:
.1 Safety precautions; and
.2 Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each

system or item of equipment.
.3 Post instructions where directed.
.4 For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant

materials or weatherproof enclosures.
.5 Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are
secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1 Operations and Maintenance Data shall be submitted in accordance with Section

01800 Project closeout.
.2 Items to be described in these binders shall include those outlined in their

respective sections of these Specifications.
.3 Include in Operations and Maintenance Data:
.1 Details of design elements, construction features, component function

and maintenance requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation,
maintenance, repair, modification, extension and expansion of any portion
or feature of installation;
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.2 Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component
illustrations, exploded views, technical descriptions of items and parts
lists. Advertising or sales literature not acceptable;
.3 Names and addresses of local suppliers for items must be included in the
Maintenance Manuals; and
.4 Copies of all test data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1 Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01005 General

Requirements.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS
.1 Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of inspection authorities and

Engineer of Record.
.2 Porcelain enamel signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.
2.3 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
.1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables. Provide engraved
nameplate, size 2.
2.4 FINISHES
.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside
and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel;
.1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish; and
.2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC

2Y-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified

otherwise.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.2 Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.1 and
CSA C22.3 No. 7 except where specified otherwise.
3.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1 Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are

visible and legible after equipment is installed.
3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
.1 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete:
.1 Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe, sized for free passage
of conduit, and protruding 50 mm.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred

during shipment or installation, to match original paint.
4.1 GENERAL
.1 Measurement of conduit shall be by length in meters horizontally along the

longitudinal axis of the duct or trench; from center to center of poles, pole
footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, and electrical structures; and to the
face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads. Payment at the
Contract price shall include excavation regardless of the depth; placement of
ducts including connections and terminations; supply, placement and compaction
of sand bedding, sand cover and earth backfill; supply and supply and placement
of warning tape, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.2 Measurement of concrete encased duct banks shall be by length in meters

horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct or trench; from center to center
of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, and electrical
structures; and to the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation
pads. Payment at the Contract price shall include excavation regardless of the
depth; placement of ducts including connections and terminations; supply,
placement and compaction of sand bedding, sand cover and earth backfill;
supply and supply and placement of warning tape, all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.3 When multiple conduits are installed in a single ductbank, the measurement will
be the linear length of the center conduit only. Payment will not be made for each
individual conduit.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
perform the work specified herein including but not be limited to all excavation
regardless of the depth, bedding, conduits, fittings, connections, concrete
encasement and granular backfill all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

CN – DESIGN & CONDUITS SECTION 16111
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 0 General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code - Part 2
.2 CAN3-C235 Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 50,000 V
.3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.4 Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.6 Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)
.7 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.8 Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC)
1.3 LOCATION OF CONDUIT
.1 Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammatic
form only. It is intended to have two parallel conduit systems, one for power
distribution and one for communication cable.
.2 Install conduits underground and surface mount as shown on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
.1 All conduits to be Rigid PVC (CSA Std. C22.2 No. 211.2) unless otherwise
stated.
.1 Material: PVC tubing shall be schedule-40, sunlight resistant, FT-4 rating,

fire resistant, impact and chemical resistant, non-corrosive and non-
magnetic.
.2 Restrictions: not permitted in hazardous classified locations, not subject

to physical damage and up to systems 600V and less when surface
mounted.
.3 Applications: for use in direct burial, encased and/or concrete reinforced

duct bank, underground, above ground, encased or exposed applications.
.4 Fittings: connectors, couplings, straps, elbows, expansion joint fittings

shall be of the same material and manufacturer as PVC tubing.
Expansion/contraction fitting shall be telescopic sleeve type with O-rings
gasket.
.5 Cement shall be solvent type for PVC conduits supplied by same

manufacturer.
2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 2” and smaller. Two-hole steel
straps for conduits larger than 2”.
.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1 Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.
.2 Factory "ells" where 90° bends are required for 1” and larger conduits.
2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1 Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 4”

linear expansion.
.2 Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear
expansion and 20mm deflection in all directions.
.3 Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
2.5 FISH CORD
.1 Polypropylene, unless stated otherwise.
2.6 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
.1 20MPa concrete complete with four (4) 20M continuous rebar

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum

interference in spaces through which they pass.
.2 Directional bore, in trench, and surface mount conduits as shown on the

drawings.
.3 Use rigid PVC conduit for surface mounting and for underground installation.
.4 Install fish cord in empty conduits. Provide identification tag for each conduit in a
junction box that identifies its destination point.
process. Contractor shall ensure that the conduits are ready for future use.
.6 Where conduits become blocked, remove, and replace blocked section. Do not
use liquids to clean out conduits.
.7 Minimum conduit size 21 mm unless noted otherwise. No reduction in sizes will

be accepted.
.8 Provide a proof the installed conduits are free of water, derbis, breakage or
distortion. Submit to the consultant, in writing for approval, the proposed method
of proofing the ducts.
.9 Have site inspected by Owner’s Representative after laying conduits but before
backfilling or concrete pouring.
3.2 CONDUITS PASSING THROUGH CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
.1 Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
.2 Where conduits pass through waterproof membrane provide oversized sleeve

before membrane is installed. Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
3.3 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1 Install underground conduits by directional boring and trenching in boulevard.
.2 Encase conduit in concrete to suit duct bank detail requirements indicated on

contract documentation as well as Electrical Safety Authority standard
configuration.
.3 Properly identify conduits at both ends.
.4 Slope conduits to provide drainage.

.5 Install conduits prior to installation of concrete slab and provide all elbows to
terminate the conduit above ground and in a junction box.
4.1 GENERAL
.1 Measurement of conduit shall be by length in meters horizontally along the

longitudinal axis of the duct or trench; from center to center of poles, pole
footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, and electrical structures; and to the
face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads. Payment at the
Contract price shall include excavation regardless of the depth; placement of
ducts including connections and terminations; supply, placement and compaction
of sand bedding, sand cover and earth backfill; supply and supply and placement
of warning tape, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.2 Measurement of concrete encased duct banks shall be by length in meters

horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct or trench; from center to center
of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, and electrical
structures; and to the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation
pads. Payment at the Contract price shall include excavation regardless of the
depth; placement of ducts including connections and terminations; supply,
placement and compaction of sand bedding, sand cover and earth backfill;
supply and supply and placement of warning tape, all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.3 When multiple conduits are installed in a single duct bank, the measurement will
be the linear length of the center conduit only. Payment will not be made for
each individual conduit.
perform the work specified herein including but not be limited to all excavation
regardless of the depth, bedding, conduits, fittings, connections, concrete
encasement and granular backfill all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

CN – DESIGN & MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 20 05 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
.1 This Section covers general requirements for supply, installation, and testing of
mechanical systems and equipment as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.1 Comply with local authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Provide warning signs, nameplates and glass covered diagrams as required by

inspection authority.
.3 Submit required documentation and Shop Drawings to authorities having

jurisdiction in order to obtain approval for the Work. Copies of Contract
Documents may be used for this purpose. Contractor to prepare additional
information, details etc. authorities require.
.4 Where materials require special inspection and approval of CSA or local

authorities, obtain such approval for particular installation.
.2 Pipe Welding Section 20 05 17
.3 Mechanical Identification Section 20 05 53
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product data;
.2 Shop Drawings;
.3 Test reports.
.4 Test certificates and in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction;
.5 Commissioning package;
.6 Commissioning closeout package;
.7 Training plan; and
.8 Operation and Maintenance Manuals As-Built Drawings.
1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS AND ALTERNATIVE PRODUCTS
.1 Where a specified Product is substituted or an alternative Product is proposed,

submit Product data for both the specified Product and the alternative Product.
.2 Alternative and substitute submittals will be returned without review unless

accompanied by the specified Product submittal literature.
.1 Equipment shall not be delivered to the Site until it is ready to be installed.
.2 Whether located on site or not, protect all equipment from dust, dirt and the
elements.
1.7 TRAINING
.1 Provide training as indicated within mechanical Specification Sections.
1.8 DIMENSIONS
.1 Verify dimensions by reference to Product data sheets, Shop Drawings and field
measurement where applicable.
.2 Include for necessary changes or additions to routing of piping, and other

services, to accommodate electrical, utility and all other site conditions.
1.9 COORDINATION
.1 Co-ordinate installation of mechanical equipment with equipment of other trades.

Notify other trades in advance of openings, anchors, hangers, supports or other
provisions necessary for installation.
.2 Co-ordinate installation of all new mechanical services to avoid interferences.

Co-ordinate installation of mechanical equipment with equipment of other trades.
.3 Identify embedded, concealed or recessed equipment before construction start.

Notify other trades concerned of openings, anchors, hangers, supports or other
provisions necessary for installation of mechanical Works installed or provided
which may affect other Work.
.4 Read Contract Drawings in conjunction with manufacturer's Installation

Instructions.
.5 Install mechanical items in time to avoid cutting or patching of Work.
.6 Include for reconstruction of Work required due to lack of timely submissions

before commencing Work. Remove, relocate or replace Work to the Engineer
acceptance.
.7 Where conflicts or Site conditions require appreciable deviation from the Work as
specified or indicated, notify the Engineer before proceeding.
1.10 SPARE PARTS
.1 Provide spare part list including component parts availability, names and
addresses of spare part suppliers, and list of specialized tools necessary for
maintenance.
.2 Furnish spare parts in accordance with mechanical Specification Sections.
.3 Submit manufacturer's recommended spare parts lists for all mechanical

equipment for purposes of ordering selected spare parts. Submit copies, each
copy to be contained in a binder with individual Specification Sections separated
by tabs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVALS AND QUALITY
.1 Provide new materials and new Products only. Equipment to bear approval
stamp of CSA, or approval label of other authority having jurisdiction for particular
application and location used.
.2 Provide units of same manufacture where two (2) or more units of same class or
type of equipment required.
2.2 SLEEVES
.1 Provide sleeves as follows:
.1 Vertical: Extend 50 mm above and below the slab; and
.2 Horizontal: Flush to width of wall.

2.3 FINISHES
.1 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop painted Products scratched or marred

during shipment or installation, to match original paint.
.2 Clean, prime and paint exposed hangers, racks, and fasteners to prevent rust.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WELDING
.1 Perform welding in accordance with Section 20 05 17 Pipe Welding.
3.2 FASTENINGS
.1 Provide anchor bolts, sleeves and fasteners of same finish as adjacent materials,
unless stainless steel or other material specified.
.2 Space anchors within their load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide
positive permanent anchorage. Organic material plugs unacceptable.
.3 Establish anchor locations by means of templates or by utilizing pre-drilled

steelwork as template.
.4 Install anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
.1 Identify mechanical equipment and systems in accordance with Section 20 05 53

Mechanical Identification and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.2 Identification of equipment not specifically listed in Section 20 05 53 Mechanical

Identification to meet standards set by Section 20 05 53 Mechanical
Identification. Directions supplied by the Engineer at later date.
3.4 CONSUMABLES
.1 Provide consumables for duration of the Contract.
.2 Provide list including component parts availability, names and addresses of

suppliers, recommended manufacturer schedules for consumables.
3.5 TRIAL USE
.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Engineer of any device, machinery, apparatus,

equipment or other Work supplied under this Section before final completion and
written acceptance by The Engineer, is not evidence of acceptance by the
Engineer.
.2 The Engineer has the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the
Contractor claims Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents,
for such reasonable length of time as the Engineer deems sufficient for making
complete and thorough test. No claim allowed for damage to or breaking of any
parts of such Work used, when caused by defective materials or improper
workmanship.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Test equipment and systems provided under this Division for electrical and
mechanical defects in accordance with Standards and recommendations of
manufacturers, and corrections and adjustments made prior to requesting
inspection by the Engineer.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
.1 Perform commissioning in accordance with this Section.
.2 General:
.1 Provide these services, as required, to ensure installation is in proper

working order and to ensure the Engineer’s staff is conversant with all
aspects of its care and operation;
.2 Check, adjust, calibrate and balance components, as applicable,

including controls, piping and field wiring. Provide these services for such
period and for as many visits as necessary to achieve complete working
order in subject work;
.3 Commissioning closeout reports to include piping schematics; and
.4 Inspections by jurisdictional authorities shall include all appropriate local

and provincial authorities, such as:
.1 Building Inspection’s Department, in accordance with Ontario

Building Code;
.2 Ministry of Labour, Regulation for Industrial Establishments; and
.3 Technical Standards and Safety Authority (TSSA).
3.8 CLEANING
.1 At completion of Work, carry out complete and thorough clean up on surfaces of

equipment, and on interior of panels.
.2 Where equipment shows corrosion, or damage to finish, touch-up surfaces to

The Engineer acceptance.
.3 Leave polished, painted or plated Work bright and clean. Repair, adjust and
lubricate mechanisms and leave in operational condition.
.4 Clean or replace, to the Engineer’s satisfaction, all equipment components that

become plugged or inoperable as result of debris entering mechanical systems.
3.9 MECHANICAL INTERFERENCES
.1 Based upon the information presented on the Contract Drawings, manufacturer’s

installation instructions and Shop Drawing submittals, co-ordinate the final
location of mechanical equipment and piping with other disciplines.
.2 Review drawings and submittals as they become available and identify potential
interference problems to the Engineer before construction of same commences.
.3 Adjust equipment location where required to allow clearances and access for
routine maintenance.
.4 Prior to commencing installation prepare and submit drawings of equipment and

systems, requiring tight co-ordination among trades, and where deviations from
the Contract Drawings must be made to resolve interference with other systems,
building structure, or to maintain access for routine maintenance.
3.10 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS
.1 Prepare and submit interference Drawings on hard copy and on disk in format
suitable to the Engineer
.2 Provide plan and section Drawings at the appropriate locations and scales, with
sufficient detail and dimensions to clearly indicate coordination described below.
.3 Interference Drawings shall indicate coordination of locations of all equipment &

piping, including but not limited to, industrial, electrical and mechanical
equipment, as well as all associated services including, but not limited to,
mechanical piping, sanitary and storm piping, and electrical and communication
services. Coordinate with all trades in the preparation of Drawings.
.4 Indicate on the interference Drawings clearance to equipment where required for

maintenance and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction.
.5 Indicate hangers, supports and bracing on the interference Drawings.
.6 Installation shall not commence until final interference drawings have been
submitted and review comments have been incorporated to satisfaction of The
Engineer.
3.11 MAINTENANCE
.1 Maintain all equipment and systems installed until Substantial Performance.

Carry out regular scheduled maintenance of all equipment and systems until
Contract Completion, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
maintenance plan.
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & PIPE WELDING SECTION 20 05 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary
for pipe welding for the Work.
.3 Pressure Piping Section 20 11 12
.4 Piping, Valves and Fittings (GAS) Section 23 11 23
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Welding Society (AWS):
.1 ANSI/AWS B2.1, Standard for Welding Procedures and Performance

Qualifications;
.2 AWS C1.1, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding;
.3 AWS W1, Welding Inspection Handbook; and
.4 AWS Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes.
.1 CAN/CSA-W117.2, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes;
.2 CSA B51, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code;
.3 CSA W47.2-M, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of

Aluminum;
.4 CSA W48, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding;
.5 CSA W178.1, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations; and
.6 CSA W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors.

.3 NFPA-51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting and Other Hot
Work.
.4 TSSA, Technical Standards and Safety Authority

program to meet the requirements of this Section and Section 01620 Quality
Control and Assurance.
.2 Welder's Qualifications Requirements:
.1 Welding qualifications to CSA B51;
.2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each

procedure performed from authority having jurisdiction;
.3 Furnish welder's qualifications to The Engineer 21 Days prior to starting

Work; and
.4 Each welder to possess identification stamp issued by authorities having

jurisdiction.
.3 Inspector's Qualifications Requirements:
.1 Inspectors qualified in accordance with CSA W178.2.
.4 Welding Procedures:
.1 Registration of welding procedures to CSA B51;
.2 Copy of welding procedures available for inspection at all times; and
.3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes to CAN/CSA-W117.2.
.5 Regulatory requirements:
.1 Hot Work Permit in accordance with NFPA 51B;
.2 TSSA inspection. Refer to Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping; and
.3 Contractor’s quality plan registered with the TSSA.
.6 Mock-up:
.1 Provide sample of welds for inspector’s review; and
.2 Provide sample of pipe to establish acceptance standards for dirt and

rust.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Documentation Package:
.1 Submit welder’s certificate for each welder;
.2 Submit proposed welding procedure certified by authorities having

jurisdiction, for each welder;
.3 Submit welder’s identification stamp for each welder; and
.4 Submit inspection and test plan as indicated in Part 3.
.2 Closeout Submittals:
.1 Submit final inspection and test plan report as indicated in Part 3.
1.6 WORKING HOUR RESTRICTIONS
.1 To conform to requirements of the Engineer.
.1 Storage and protection:
.1 Keep all piping clean and dry with ends capped.
.2 Organize materials in accordance with Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Gas Piping: Refer to Section 23 11 23 Piping, Valves, and Fittings (GAS).
2.2 ELECTRODES
.1 Electrodes: In accordance with CSA W48 Series.
.1 Tests and inspection.
.2 Verification of Performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine piping for defects, excessive dirt and rust.
.2 Reject unacceptable materials.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Welding to ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,

Sections I and IX and ANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures conforming to
ANSI/AWS B2.1, AWS C1.1, and applicable requirements of provincial authority
having jurisdiction.
3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1 Do not proceed with any work before obtaining welding/cutting permit from Fire
Prevention Section of the Engineer Safety Department.
.2 For specific requirements, refer to the following Sections:
.1 Section 23 11 23 Piping Valves and Fittings (Gas)
.3 Identify each weld with welder's identification stamp.
3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 Review all weld quality requirements and defect limits of applicable codes and
standards with The Engineer before any work is started.
.2 Prepare and submit "Inspection and Test Plan" to the Engineer prior to starting.
Submit final "Inspection and Test Plan Report".
.3 Do not conceal welds and pipe markings until inspected, tested and approved by
inspector.
.4 Provide for inspector to visually inspect all welds during early stages of welding
procedures to AWS W1. Repair or replace all defects as required by codes and
as specified herein.
3.5 SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
.1 General:
.1 Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualified to CSA W178.1

and CSA W178.2 and approved by the Engineer;
.2 In accordance with ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code,

Section V, CSA B51 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction; and
.3 Inspect and test all welds to "Inspection and Test Plan" by
non-destructive visual examination.
.2 Hydrostatically test all welds to ANSI/ASME B31.1.
.3 Visual examinations: Include entire circumference of weld externally and

wherever possible internally.
.4 Failure of visual examinations:
.1 Upon failure of any weld by visual examination, perform additional testing

as directed by The Engineer of total of up to 10% of all welds, selected at
random by The Engineer.
.5 Full radiographic tests for all welded piping systems.
.1 Spot radiography: Conduct spot radiographic tests of up to 10% of all

welds, selected at random by the Engineer from all welds which would be
most difficult to repair in event of failure after system operational
.2 Radiographic film: Identify each radiographic film with date, location,

name of welder and submit to the Engineer. Replace film if rejected
because of poor quality;
.3 Interpretation of radiographic films: By qualified radiographer; and
.4 Failure of radiographic tests: If any weld fails tests, tests will be extended
to all welds made by welder responsible.
3.6 DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION
.1 As described in ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels

Code.
.2 In addition, to above:
.1 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm adjacent to cover bead on the outside

of pipe;
.2 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm adjacent to root bead on the inside of

pipe;
.3 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm at the combination of internal surface

and external surface;
.4 Incomplete penetration and incomplete fusion; depth of such defects

being greater than 0.8 mm;
.5 Repair all cracks and defects in excess of 0.8 mm in depth; and

.6 Repair defects whose depth cannot be determined accurately on basis of
visual examination of radiographic tests.
3.7 REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS
.1 Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds at Contractor's expense.
3.8 CLAIMS FOR DELAYS
.1 Claims for delays in completion of Contract not entertained for reasons of failures
of welds to pass examinations.
3.9 CLEANING
.1 Upon completion of a weld, hammer to loosen slag and weld spatter. Wire brush
internal pipe at weld and blow debris out of pipe.
3.10 PROTECTION
.1 Protect pipe and valve markings.
.1 No Measurement or separate Payment will be made for this Work. All work under
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 20 05 21
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the labour, products, equipment and services

requirements for pressure gauges for the Work.
.4 Mechanical General Requirements Section 20 05 00
.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
.1 ANSI/ASME B40.1, Gauges-Pressure, Indicating Dial Type-Elastic

Element.
to ensure that the work for pressure gauges meet the requirements of this
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data:
.1 Submit manufacturer's Product data indicating performance

criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standards,
characteristics, and limitations, for the following items:
.1 Pressure gauges;
.2 Stop cocks;
.3 Syphons; and
.4 Wells.
.2 Closeout Submittals Package:
.1 Submit the following for incorporation into Operations and

Maintenance Manuals:
.1 Identification: Manufacturing name, type, year, serial
number, number of units, capacity, and identification of
related systems;
.2 Functional description detailing operation and control of
components;
.3 Performance criteria and maintenance data;
.4 Operating instructions and precautions;
.5 Safety precautions; and
.6 Maintenance and troubleshooting guidelines/protocol, and
recommended equipment for analysis and repair.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Ranges: Full range to be twice design operating point.
2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 Adjustable glycerine filled, 100mm or 115mm diameter, in accordance with

referenced standards.
.2 Accurate to within 1% of scale range.
.3 Type 304 stainless steel case with relief valve and polished stainless steel
bayonet.
.4 Stainless steel rotary movement with stainless steel bushings and socket.
.5 Clear acrylic window.
.6 Dual scale white dial and black pointer:
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 H.O. Trerice Co. No. 700 Series;

.2 Weiss Instruments Model LF4S-2; and
.3 Ashcroft #35-1009 SWL-26.
.7 Options:
.1 Snubber (brass) for pulsating operation; and
.2 Bronze ball valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Install so easily read from grade, from platform or from above for gauges
installed below grade level.
.2 Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.
3.2 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 Install in the following locations:
.1 In locations as indicated.
.2 Install gauge cocks for balancing purposes, elsewhere as indicated.
this Section will be paid under the Lump Sum Prices listed in the Schedule of
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & VALVES – PRESSURE PIPING SECTION 20 05 24
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 This Section specifies the labour, products, equipment and services required for
valves – pressure piping, for the Work.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 ANSI/ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;
.2 ANSI/ASME B16.10, Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions Valves;
.3 ANSI/ASME B16.11, Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded;
.4 ANSI/ASME B16.25, Buttwelding Ends; and
.5 ANSI/ASME B16.34, Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.
.2 API 598, Valve Inspection and Testing.
.3 API 607, Fire Safe Valve Design.

.1 ASTM A49-12(2019), Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon
Steel Joint Bars, Microalloyed Joint Bars and Forged Carbon Steel
Compromised Joint Bars;
.2 ASTM A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel

Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service;
.3 ASTM A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for
Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service;
.4 ASTM A216, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable

for Fusion Welding for High Temperature Service; and
.5 ASTM B85, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings.
.5 Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):
.1 MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
Unions;
.2 MSS SP-61, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves; and
.3 MSS SP-110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding Solder Joint,

Grooved and Flared Ends.
.6 OFC, Ontario Fire Code.
.7 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
.1 SAE J429, Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally

Threaded Fasteners;
.2 SAE J515, Standard Specification for Hydraulic O-Ring Materials,

Properties and Sizes for Metric and Inch Stud Ends, Face Seal Fitting and
Four-Screw Flange Tube Connections; and
.3 SAE J518, Hydraulic Flanged Tube, Pipe and Hose Connections, Four-
Bolt Split Flange Type “HS-150/2000”.
.8 TSSA, Technical Standards and Safety Authority.
1.4 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1 Select valves rated and certified for operating and test pressures indicated.
.2 Free of leaks at the operating and test pressures.

to ensure that work for valves for pressure piping meets the requirements of this
Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance:
.2 Installer’s qualifications: Refer to Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
.1 Provide fire safe valves in all piping conveying flammable and

combustible liquids, in accordance with OFC Part 4; and
.2 Pressure piping subject to registration with TSSA. Refer to Section 20 11

12 Pressure Piping.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
with the requirements of Section 01340 Submittals:
.1 Product Data:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data for all Products listed in this

Section except Products submitted as Shop Drawings, indicating:
.1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate
reference standards, characteristics, limitations, and
troubleshooting protocol.

.1 Maintenance data;
.2 Installation instructions for all valves;
.3 Canadian Registration Numbers (CRNs) for all valve types;
and
.4 Spare parts list.
.3 As-Built Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Except for specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer.

.2 Valves individually tested.
.3 Requirements common to valves, unless specified otherwise:
.1 Pressure-temperature ratings: In accordance with ANSI B16.34;
.2 Inspections and tests: In accordance with API 598;
.3 Pressure Testing: In accordance with MSS SP-61.
.4 Flanged valves:
.1 Face-to-face dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.10; and
.2 Flange dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.5 with 1.6mm

raised face.
.5 Butt-weld valves:
.1 End-to-end dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.10; and
.2 End dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.25 bored for pipe

schedule as indicated.
.6 Socket weld valves:
.1 End to end dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.10; and
.2 End dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B16.11.
.7 Hand operator: Heavy-duty lever, 2mm thickness stainless steel, with

markings to MSS SP-25;
.8 Markings: In accordance with MSS SP-25;
.9 Identification:
.1 Plate showing catalogue number, size, material of body disc, stem

seat, fluid, and pressure-temperature rating; and
.2 Body markings: manufacturer, size, primary service rating,

material symbol.
.10 CRN registration number required for all Products.
2.2 BALL VALVE – COMPRESSED AIR (WP TO 300 PSI)
.1 Application: Compressed air.

.2 Ball Valve – Threaded Ends (2½” and smaller):
.1 Brass body, PTFE seats;
.2 Locking handle;
.3 Automatic relief vent (except valves serving bypass function);
.4 Conbraco Industries Apollo 70-100-14-27, 600 psig WOG. (Bypass valves

model 70-100-27) for isolating valves located within pits and Apollo 70-
100-15 (wheel handle) for valves at hose bag c/w glad hand above
ground charging stations; and
.5 Ball valve – Socket Weld Ends (3” or larger):
.1 Three-piece carbon steel body, PTFE seats;
.2 Stainless steel ball and stem;
.3 Stainless steel handle and nut;
.4 MSS-SP-110; and
.5 Conbraco Industries Apollo 83-400, 1250 psig WOG with features

indicated above.
2.3 BALL VALVE – COMPRESSED AIR (WP UP TO 300 PSI)
.1 Locate venting ports on the downstream side of valve.
.2 Arrange valve so that venting port is directed away from operator’s position.
.3 Omit venting ports for valves that serve a bypass function.
2.4 VALVE ACCESSIBILITY
.1 Locate valves in accordance with the following order of preference:
.1 Adjacent to equipment served;
.2 Locate within hand reach of grade level; and
.3 Locate within hand reach of 8’ step ladder.
2.5 THREADED VALVES
.1 Install only where permitted. Refer to Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.

2.6 TESTING
.1 Perform pressure testing of valves with piping systems specified under Section
20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
2.7 PROTECTION
.1 During construction, testing and start-up, tag and lock out all valves that may
result in leaks or injury if unwittingly opened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install all valves in upright position with stem or axis of rotation above horizontal.
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 20 05 53
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the design, Labour, Products, equipment and services
necessary for mechanical identification for the Work.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 CAN/CGSB-24.3, Identification of Piping Systems.
.2 CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
.2 CPPI - Colour Symbol System to Mark Equipment and Vehicles for Product
Identification.
.3 Ontario Fire Code – Part 4 Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
.4 WHMIS – Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System made under

Occupational Health and Safety Act.
.5 TSSA, Technical Standards and Safety Authority.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data:
.1 Submit manufacturer's Product data for all Products listed in this

Section indicating:
.1 Sizes, colours, material, identification legend, identification

systems, and fasteners; and
.2 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate
reference standards, characteristics, limitations, and
troubleshooting protocol.
.2 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit Shop Drawings indicating:
.1 Equipment schedule indicating equipment location,

service, identifier, nameplate type, nameplate colour, and
method of fastening.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit samples of each identification Product.

.1 Equipment schedule indicating equipment location,

service, identifier, nameplate type, nameplate colour,
nameplate location, and method of fastening; and
.2 Manufacturer’s installation instructions for the following

items:
1. Equipment nameplates; and
2. Pipe markers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES
.1 General:
.1 Use numbering system on shop and record Drawings and throughout

course of Work;
.2 Mechanical identification in English;
.3 Obtain exact wording from The Engineer if wording of mechanical

identification not specified;
.4 Locate nameplates for easy reading;

.5 Type 304 stainless steel, minimum 0.64 mm thick with machine engraved
upper case black filled lettering;
.6 Mount manufacturer's nameplate on each piece of equipment,

mechanically fastened using stainless steel rivets or screws;
.7 Fabricate nameplates to withstand wear or deterioration of lettering in

located environment;
.8 Indicate:
.1 Size;
.2 Equipment model;
.3 Manufacturer's name;
.4 Serial number;
.5 Equipment Tag Number;
.6 Performance Data;
.7 Electrical data: including voltage, cycle, phase, power, and motor

size.
.8 Service Information; and
.9 Date of Manufacturer.
.9 Install approval label/registration plates (i.e. CSA, ULC or Ontario Hydro

Special Approval) as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
.1 General:
.1 Nameplate text layout consists of one or more separate lines of text as

follows:
.1 Equipment description as indicated in the Equipment Nameplate

Schedule; and
.2 Identify mechanical equipment tag number as YYYY - #, where:
.1 Tag Identifier wording YYYY: As indicated in the

Equipment Nameplate Schedule; and
.2 Number #: sequential and as identified on the Contract
Drawings.
.2 Mounting Location: As indicated in the Equipment Nameplate

Schedule;
.3 Product Type: Select to suit application as indicated in the Equipment

Nameplate Schedule:
.1 Product Type E-1:
.1 Rectangular, lamacoid plastic plate 3 mm thick,

semi-flexible, non-aging, three (3) layer, laminated
phenolic material, with machine engraved 7 mm uppercase
lettering, chamfered edges, and two (2) 4.5 mm minimum
holes located at each side of long dimension;
.2 Minimum height 40 mm and length to suit required text and

mounting screws;
.3 Nameplate text layout to consist of the following

information:
1. Line 2: Equipment Description; and
2. Line 3: Equipment Tag Number.
.4 Manufacturers:
1. Seton;
2. Brady; or
3. Smillie McAdams Summerlin.
.2 Product Type E-2:
.1 Rectangular, lamacoid plastic plate 3 mm thick,

semi-flexible, non-aging, 3 (three) layer, laminated
phenolic material, with machine engraved 25 mm
uppercase lettering, chamfered edges, and two (2) 4.5 mm
minimum holes located at each side of long dimension;
.2 Minimum height 130 mm and length to suit required text

and mounting screws;
.3 Nameplate text layout to consist of the following

information:
1. Line 2: Equipment Description; and
2. Line 3: Equipment Tag Number.
.4 Manufacturers:
1. Seton;
2. Brady; or
3. Smillie McAdams Summerlin.
.2 Equipment Nameplate Schedule:
.1 Service: Compressed Air System.
Tag
Product
Description Identifier Mounting Location
Type
Wording
.2 Service: HVAC Equipment Within Compressor Enclosure
Tag
Product
Type
Wording
.3 Service: Natural Gas and Propane Service
Tag
Product
Type
Wording
Gas Meter GM On equipment E-1
Pressure Regulator/Relief Valve PRV On equipment E-3
2.3 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES
.1 General:
.1 Product Type S-1:
.1 Nameplate: Square, 200 x 200 mm, minimum 0.64 mm thick, type

304 stainless steel with four (4) holes at each corner. Multiple
lines as described elsewhere;
.2 Tag Identifier Wording: Machine engraved black filled letters,

minimum 5 mm high, to include the following:
.1 System Description: For each system as indicated in the

system nameplate schedule;
.2 TSSA Design Registration Number;
.3 Air Regulator Setpoint: As indicated on the Contract

Drawings;
.4 Maximum Air Regulator Setpoint: As indicated on the

Contract Drawings;
.5 Air Relief Setpoint: As indicated on the Contract Drawings;
.6 Maximum Allowable Fluid Operating Pressure: As

indicated on the Contract Drawings; and
.7 Pump Air Pressure/Fluid Pressure Ratio: As indicated on

the Contract Drawings.
.3 Location: Unobstructed clear view; and
.4 Manufacturers:
.1 Seton.
.2 Brady.
.3 Smillie McAdams Summerlin.
.2 System Nameplate Schedule:
.1 System: Compressed Air Distribution System.
Tag Identifier Product

Description Mounting Location
Wording Type
Natural Gas Service As indicated As indicated S-1
2.4 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
.1 General:
.1 Pipe: Paint all piping to base colour indicated in the Pipe Identification
Schedule in accordance with Section 09 91 00 and in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction;
.2 Apply pipe identification markers to CAN/CGSB-24.3 after pipe painting

complete; and
.3 Obtain exact wording from the Engineer if wording of mechanical

identification is not specified.
.2 Piping Systems Governed by Codes:
.1 Natural gas: In accordance with CSA B149.1 and authorities having

jurisdiction; and
.2 Propane gas: In accordance with CSA B149.1 and authorities having

jurisdiction.
.3 Pipe Markers:
.1 Requirements common to all Pipe Markers:
.1 Selection to suit indoor or outdoor application as indicated;
.2 Marker band:
.1 Colour: As indicated in the table; and
.2 Minimum length:
1. Up to 50 mm outside diameter: 200 mm long band;
2. 65 to 150 mm outside diameter: 300 mm long band;
3. Over 200 mm outside diameter: 600 mm long band;
and
4. Band length suitable to accommodate required text,
arrows and pictograms as indicated.
.3 Text:
.1 Colour: As indicated in the Schedule; and
.2 Identifier Wording: As indicated in the table, block capital

lettering and direction of flow arrows on the single line, size
lettering to CAN/CGSB-24.3.
.4 Identifier Arrow:
.1 Size arrows to match size and colour of lettering;
.2 Use double headed arrows where flow reversible.
.2 Product Type P-1:
.1 Snap-on Pipe Marker (Outdoor):
.1 Mechanically applied, coiled wrap-around, 360° visibility,

high performance polyester with chemically protective
laminate, suitable for outdoor application and resistant to
fading, moisture, dirt and temperatures between –40°C
and 115°C; and
.2 Manufacturer:
1. Seton – Ultramark Snap-on, special order as
required where identifier wording varies from
manufacturer’s standards and for outside diameters
150 mm and larger; and
2. Smillie McAdams Summerlin, special order as
required where identifier wording varies from
manufacturer’s standards and for outside diameters
150 mm and larger.
.4 Pipe Identification Schedule:
.1 Service: Service Piping.
Marker
Description Tag Identifier Wording

Product Band Text
Type Colour Colour
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1 General:
.1 Verify substrate surfaces solid, free from surface water, frozen matter,
dust, oil, grease, scaling or laitance, projections and other foreign matter
detrimental to performance; and
.2 Remove deleterious material from substrate and clean to manufacturer's

instructions.
.2 Manufacturer's Nameplates:
.1 Do not insulate or paint over nameplates.
.3 Mechanical Equipment Nameplates:
.1 Locate nameplates in conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading from

floor and to properly identify equipment;
.2 Install stand-off for nameplates on the hot surfaces and insulated

surfaces;
.3 Equipment: Secure nameplates to equipment substrate with minimum of
2 self-tapping stainless steel screws;
.4 Valves: Secure circular and square nameplates to valves with stainless

steel jack chain, trade size #16, and S hooks. Ensure chain and
nameplate do not impede operation of valve.
.4 System Design Nameplates:
.1 Provide system nameplates as scheduled in Part 2; and
.2 Location: In accordance with Part 2 to facilitate easy reading from floor

and to properly identify equipment.
.5 Pipework Identification:
.1 Install pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, as indicated; and
.2 Locate pipe markers in accordance with the following:
.1 On the long straight runs in the open areas and equipment rooms,
one identification marker minimum clearly visible from any one (1)
viewpoint in the area and at 20 m maximum intervals;
.2 Adjacent to changes in the direction;
.3 On both sides of visual obstruction and where run difficult to

follow;
.4 At the beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of
equipment in the run;
.5 At the point immediately upstream of all valves. Where not

possible, place identification as close to valve as possible,
preferably on the upstream side;
.6 Legend easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas

and readily accessible points; and
.7 Plane of lettering approximately at the right angles to the most

convenient line of sight with consideration for operating positions,
lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or lettering caused
by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & PRESSURE PIPING SECTION 20 11 12
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
installation, testing, and certification of pressure piping systems for the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable Codes, including:
.1 Installation of pressure pipe systems by qualified pipe fitters and welders;
.2 High pressure pipe, fittings, and specialties;
.3 High pressure hose assemblies;
.4 Testing piping systems;
.5 Inspection of piping systems by TSSA;
.6 Witnessing of pressure tests by TSSA; and
.7 Certification of installed systems by the Contractor and TSSA.
.2 Pressure piping systems include:
.1 Compressed air system; and
.2 Any other system governed by the Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act and
Code.
.3 All work carried out including, but not limited to, related work described in other
Sections:
.1 Section 20 05 00 Mechanical General Requirements.
.2 Section 20 05 17 Pipe Welding.
.3 Section 20 05 24 Valves (Pressure Piping).
.4 Section 20 05 53 Mechanical Identification.
.4 TSSA Design Registration:

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the registration of piping system
design with Technical Standards and Safety Authority (Boilers and
Pressure Vessels Division).
.5 Pipe Welding Section 20 05 17
.6 Valves (Pressure Piping) Section 20 05 24
.1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch;
.2 ANSI/ASME B31.1, Power Piping;
.3 ANSI B2.1, Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal);
.4 ASME B16.3, Malleable Iron Thread Fittings;
.5 ASME B16.4, Cast Iron Threaded Fittings;
.6 ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ½ through 24;
.7 ASME B16.9, Factory Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings; and
.8 ASME B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.

Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless;
.2 ASTM A105/A105M-21, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings

for Piping Applications;
.3 ASTM A106/A106M-19a, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon
Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service; and
.4 ASTM A197/A197M-00(2019), Standard Specification for Cupola

Malleable Iron.
.3 Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act of Ontario.
.1 CSA B51:19, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.
.5 Ontario Fire Code, Part 4.
.6 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
.1 SAE J515, Specification for Hydraulic O-Ring Materials, Properties and

Sizes for Metric and Inch Stud Ends, Face Seal Fitting and Four Screw
Flange Tube Connections;
.2 SAE J516, Hydraulic Hose Fittings;
.3 SAE J517, Hydraulic Hose; and
.4 SAE J343, Test and Test Procedures for SAE 100R Series – Hydraulic
Hose and Hose Assemblies.
.7 TSSA, Technical Standards and Safety Authority
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 Rusty: Piping that is covered by rust over more than 5% of its surface area.
1.5 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1 All systems shall be free of leaks at maximum operating and test pressures.
.2 Piping shall be free of excessive vibration, hammer and sway.
.3 Select all pressure piping, valves, fittings, hoses and joining methods in
accordance with this Section to meet maximum working pressure in each system
as noted on the Contract Drawings, typically determined by the compressed air
generating system components.
to ensure that the pressure piping work meet the requirements of this Section
and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance.
.2 Installer’s qualifications:
.1 Employ Contractor approved by Technical Standards and Safety

Authority (Boilers and Pressure Vessels Division), Province of Ontario to
install systems listed herein. Contractor shall have a Quality Plan filed
with the TSSA;
.2 Certified welders and valid procedures. Refer to Section 20 05 17 Pipe

Welding; and
.3 Certified pipe fitters.
.1 Install all systems required to be registered under Boilers and Pressure

Vessels Act in accordance with this Section, to latest requirements of
CSA B51 – Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code, and all
related codes and standards governing selection and installation of
piping, fittings, joining methods, welding, valves, etc.; and
.2 Schedule and pay for regular general inspections with authority having
jurisdiction at the regular intervals throughout construction period
including, but not limited to, the following:
.1 Pre-construction material inspection;
.2 Welding procedure;
.3 General installation inspections; and
.4 Other inspections as requested by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 Prior to submitting Shop Drawings and/or Product Data for any system governed
by the Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act, Contractor shall review Contract
Drawings and Specifications for conformance with CSA B51 and related
standards and bring any discrepancies to attention of The Engineer well in
advance so as not to delay construction. This review is intended to avoid
installation of products that may later be rejected by the TSSA.
.1 Product Data – Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit manufacturer's Product data for all Products listed in this

Section indicating:
.1 Performance criteria, dimensional and pressure rating
data, compliance with appropriate reference standards,
characteristics, limitations, and troubleshooting protocol;
and
.2 Product transportation, storage, handling, and installation

requirements.
.2 Shop Drawings for Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit Shop Drawings where applicable indicating:
.1 Elevations, sections and details of operating components,

dimensions, gauges, finishes and relationship of operating
components to adjacent construction;
.2 Complete engineering design data to confirm design

criteria specified met; and
.3 Pipe installation details above and below grade.
.2 Include product data for compressed air piping system.
.3 Quality Assurance Submittal Package for Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit for each worker, copies of valid welder’s certificates, pipe

fitter’s certificates, and registration with TSSA Boilers and
Pressure Vessels Division; and
.2 Submit references of individual’s previous work completed over

past five years involving pressure piping systems, including a
detailed description of type and magnitude of work, and
Contractor’s name work was completed with.
.4 Commissioning Package for Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit the following:
.1 Commissioning Procedures.
.2 Submit results of radiographs, together with copy of welder's

license and description of procedures used, to TSSA inspector;
and
.3 Submit inspection and test reports.
.5 TSSA Package for Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit all required forms to CSA B51 and TSSA requirements;

.2 Submit copies to both The Engineer and TSSA; and
.3 Items to include:
.1 List of all welders working upon piping systems;
.2 Each welder’s certification and welding procedure

registration number(s);
.3 Welders’ credentials prior to beginning installation of any

system governed by the Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act;
and
.4 TSSA form, “Piping Systems Installation and Test Data

Report.”
.6 Commissioning Closeout Package for Pressure Piping:
.1 Deficiency Report; and
.2 Commissioning Closeout Report.
.7 Closeout Submittals Package for Pressure Piping:
.1 Submit the following for incorporation into Operation and


number, number of units, capacity and identification of
related systems;

components;
.5 Safety precautions;
.6 Component parts availability including names and

addresses of spare part suppliers;
.7 All TSSA test and inspection reports;
.8 Pressure rating of every device in each system, including

pipes, fittings, hoses, flexible connectors, and valves;
.9 Actual working operating pressure of each system;
.10 Setting of each pressure regulator, PRV, etc.;
.11 Maintain records and include documentation provided to

TSSA of all certified fittings and assemblies (CRN);
.12 Copy of test certificate TSSA form “Piping Systems

Installation and Test Data Report” completed and signed
by the Contractor and TSSA inspector;
.13 Copy of piping system registration documents;
.14 Manufacturer’s instructions for piping delivery and storage;
.15 Copy of full set of reviewed Shop Drawings and, if

applicable, Marked-up Shop Drawings; and
.16 Warranty information.
1.8 APPROVALS
.1 The Contractor shall register Contract Drawings and Specifications, where

required under Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act, with Technical Standards and
Safety Authority (TSSA).
1.9 GENERAL
.1 Refer to Section 20 05 00 General Requirements.
.2 All system components (including tanks, receivers, piping, fittings, hoses and
valves) clearly identified and marked in accordance with Section 20 05 53
Mechanical Identification so their maximum operating pressure and temperature,
manufacturer, and standard of manufacture easily determined.
.3 All pressure piping, valves, fittings, hoses, and joints specified herein supplied
from single manufacturer.
1.10 INSPECTIONS
.1 Inspect new piping prior to hydrostatic test by design engineer and by authorities
having jurisdiction. Where Province has approved drawings, TSSA certified
inspector to inspect installation.
.2 Costs for inspection to be paid by Contractor.
.3 Welding inspections and examination in accordance with Section 20 05 17 Pipe

Welding.
.1 Maintain piping clean and dry at all times.
.2 Cap pipe ends until ready to be installed.
.3 Remove piping from site, or reject delivery of piping, that is dirty or rusty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 Materials:
.1 All piping, valves, fittings, hoses and joints free of leaks while operating at
the maximum rated operating pressure of delivery system and during
pressure testing. All components rated for maximum rated operating
pressure of delivery system. Maximum expected operating pressure for
each system shown on the Contract Drawings;
.2 Select and size all components so rated working pressure is not

exceeded; and
.3 All valves serving flammable or combustible fluids shall be steel body in

accordance with the Ontario Fire Code and Section 20 05 24 Valves –
Pressure Piping.
2.2 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
.1 Butt Welded Fittings: In accordance with ASME B16.9:
.1 Wall thickness to match pipe schedule used.
.2 Forged Steel and Socket-Weld Fittings: In accordance with ASME B16.1.
.1 Threaded:
.1 For schedule 80 or XS pipe: Class 2000;
.2 For schedule 160 pipe: Class 3000; and
.3 For XXS pipe: Class 6000.
.2 Socket Welding Fittings:
.1 For schedule 80 or XS pipe: Class 3000;
.2 For schedule 160 pipe: Class 6000; and

.3 For XXS pipe: Class 9000.
.3 Malleable Iron Fittings: In accordance with ASME B16.3:
.1 Select fitting class to suit maximum pipe working pressure at listed pipe
size and operating temperature as follows:
.1 Class 150 Fittings:
.1 NPS 3 and smaller: Up to 300 psi maximum working

pressure, operating temperature less than 150°F.
.2 Class 300 Fittings:
.1 NPS 1 and smaller: Up to 2000 psi maximum working

pressure, operating temperature less than 150°F;
.2 NPS 1¼ to 2: Up to 1500 psi maximum working pressure,

operating temperature less than 150°F; and
.3 NPS 2½ to 3: Up to 1000 psi maximum working pressure,

operating temperature less than 150°F.
.2 Compressed Air Systems: Fittings and fabricated pipework hot dipped

galvanized in accordance with ASTM A53/A53M.
.4 Flanged Fittings (Low Pressure): In accordance with ASME 16.5:
.1 Type: Raised face, Class: 150, to suit listed working pressure shown on
the Contract Drawings, Gasket: full, material to suit liquid.
.5 Flanged Fittings (High Pressure): In accordance with SAE J515:
.1 Code 61, 3000 psi flat socket pipe, SAE four-bolt pattern and O-ring
gasket; and
.2 Code 62, 6000 psi flat socket pipe, SAE four-bolt pattern and O-ring
gasket.
.6 Pipe Threads: In accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 and B1.20 using approved
oil resistant compound.
.7 Unions: In accordance with ASTM A197 and ANSI B2.1.
.8 Cast Iron Fittings (In accordance with ASME B16.4): Not permitted.
2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS
.1 Low Pressure Systems - Metallic (Working Pressure: Up to 300 psi):

.1 Application: Compressed Air Systems;
.2 Pipe: All sizes: Galvanized Carbon Steel, Schedule 40, in accordance

with ASTM A106, Grade B, seamless;
.3 Fittings:
.1 NPS 2½ and smaller: Malleable iron, threaded, galvanized, Class

150; and
.2 NPS 3 and larger: Buttweld (compressed air header only).
.4 Joints:
.1 NPS 2½ and smaller: Threaded; and
.2 NPS 3 and larger: Welded (compressed air header only).
.5 Valves: Refer to Section 20 05 24 Valves – Pressure Piping;
.6 Flexible Hoses: Refer to Article 2.4; and
.7 Flanges:
.1 NPS 3 and larger: Not applicable.
.2 Low Pressure Systems – Non-Metallic - (Working Pressure: Up to 300 psi):
.1 Application: Compressed Air Systems.
.2 Pipe: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin (Fusiolen) meeting

the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F
2389 or CSA B137.11. The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled
materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from
resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All pipe shall
be made in an extrusion process. Hydronic hot water and heating piping
shall contain a fiber layer (faser) to restrict thermal expansion. All pipe
shall be manufactured with a 1 mm (0.039”) layer of HDPE to protect the
pipe from UV exposure. All pipe shall comply with the rated pressure
requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. All pipe shall be certified
by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or
CSA B137.11. Pipe shall be Aquatherm® Green Pipe® MF®UV,
available from Aquatherm, NA.
.3 Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin (Fusiolen)

meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of
ASTM F 2389. The fittings shall contain no rework or recycled materials
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the
same specification from the same raw material. All fittings shall be
certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F
2389 or CSA B137.11. Fittings shall be Aquatherm® Green Pipe®
available from Aquatherm, NA. Note that the fittings do not need to have
UV protection. Fittings shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
.4 Valves: Valves with PP-R bodies shall be manufactured from a PP-R

resin (Fusiolen) meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength
requirements of ASTM F 2389. The valves shall contain no rework or
recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant
from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. Valves
with brass bodies shall be manufactured in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications. Valves shall be aquatherm® Fusiotherm®
available from Aquatherm, NA.
.5 Joints: Install fittings and joints using socket-fusion, elecrofusion, or butt-

fusion as applicable for the fitting or joint type. All fusion-weld joints shall
be made in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer’s
specifications and product standards. Fusion-weld tooling, welding
machines, and electrofusion devices shall be as specified by the pipe and
fittings manufacturer.
.6 UV Protection: Piping shall be provided with a Factory applied, UV-

resistant coating or alternative UV protection.
2.4 FLEXIBLE HOSES (PRESSURE PIPING)
.1 Requirements common to all flexible hose, unless specified otherwise:
.1 All flexible hoses supplied from single manufacturer;
.2 Banded clamp end and gear clamp connection fittings are not permitted
for use;
.3 Each complete hose assembly (including hose and end connections)

shall bear a Canadian Registration Number (CRN), or to SAE J343;
.4 Length: To suit installation arrangements shown on the Contract

Drawings unless noted otherwise. Excessive lengths not permitted.
Sufficient length to achieve minimum required bend radius and installation
as recommended by manufacturer;
.5 Hose size and end fittings to suit equipment connections;
.6 Complete with rated swivel unions; and
.7 Burst pressure minimum four times working pressure.
.2 Hoses shall bear manufacturer’s identification and labelling as follows:

.1 SAE 100R classification or CRN;
.2 Working pressure;
.3 Manufacturer and Model No; and
.4 Date of fabrication.
.3 Flexible Hose – Low Pressure Systems:
.1 Construction: Performance to SAE 100 R4, synthetic rubber tube, wire

inserted suction, reinforcement consisting of helical wire between two
textile braids, synthetic rubber cover, crimped end connectors with NPT
threaded male swivel skive nipple.
.4 Flexible Hoses – High Pressure Piping Systems:
.1 Construction: Performance to SAE 100 R4, synthetic rubber tube, wire

inserted suction, reinforcement consisting of helical wire between two
textile braids, synthetic rubber cover, crimped end connectors with NPT
threaded male swivel skive nipple.
2.5 CASINGS:
.1 Under tracks or above storm piping, compressed air carrier pipe casings shall be
steel, minimum 4.8 mm thick, watertight, Butt welding capable of withstanding
railway loading (Cooper E-80 Live Load).
.2 Ensure that the casing pipe has two layers of protection coating and cathodic
protection in accordance with CSA Z662-19.
.3 Ensure that casing pipe inside diameter accommodates pipe and spacers.
.4 Casing spacers shall be high density polyethylene segments, integrally molded

solid core runners and non-metallic or corrosion resistant assembly components
for field assembly with hand tools.
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 Conform to Section 20 05 21 Pressure Gauges and supplemented as specified

below.
.2 Dial type, 90 mm diameter, self-indicating, liquid filled.
.3 Accuracy: 0.5% over full range.
.4 Range: 1.5 times operating working pressure as shown on the Contract

Drawings.
.5 Accessories:
.1 Shut-off valve: To suit operating pressure.
.6 Manufacturers: In accordance with Section 20 05 21 Pressure Gauges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
.1 Installation performed by certified pipe fitters.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Lay out work in accordance with lines and grades as indicated.
.2 Verify lines, levels, dimensions as indicated against established benchmarks.

Report discrepancies to the Engineer and obtain written instruction.
.3 Adjust pipe route and/or equipment location to avoid conflicts with new and/or
existing.
.4 Provide offsets in the piping including encased sections to avoid interferences

with buried storm water piping. Piping shall be offset above interferences to
avoid low points in the system.
.5 Provide sufficient clearance for routine maintenance of new equipment.
.6 Where pipe/equipment installed obstructs maintenance access to other services,

relocate as instructed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Engineer.
3.3 INSPECTIONS
.1 Leave joints in the piping systems uncovered until tests completed and system
inspected and approved by the Engineer.
.2 Radiographic inspections in accordance with Section 20 05 17 Pipe Welding:
.1 Notwithstanding inspection specified in Section 20 05 17 Pipe Welding,

carry out radiograph inspections of 10% of welds on all medium and high-
pressure piping systems to ANSI/ASME B31.1M;
.2 If joints on a 10% radiographic test fail, radiograph all joints performed by

welder whose joint failed;
.3 Radiograph repaired joints to ANSI/ASME B31.1M;
.4 Perform magnetic particle tests on the welded slip-on flanges; and

.5 Submit results of radiographs, together with copy of welder's license and
description of procedures used, to TSSA inspector.
.3 The Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction to inspect new piping prior to
hydrostatic pressure tests for compliance with reviewed Drawings and
Specifications.
.4 TSSA’s certified inspector to inspect installation where Province has approved

the Drawings.
.5 Obtain from the Engineer requirements for inspection and testing of system
modifications, design changes and repairs performed in house.
.6 Pay all costs for inspections performed by jurisdictional authority.
.7 Perform, at no additional cost to the Engineer, radiographic or ultrasonic testing

of all welds failing visual inspection by TSSA.
.8 Coordinate installation and testing activities with inspection requirements of

TSSA. At the minimum:
.1 Schedule regular TSSA inspection of any system component before

installation;
.2 Schedule regular TSSA inspection of all welds and joints as they are
made;
.3 Provide TSSA with credentials of all workers;
.4 Conduct all tests required by TSSA to prove welder qualified to perform

applicable welding procedure(s);
.5 Provide TSSA with any additional documentation requested to

demonstrate piping system components are suitably rated;
.6 Schedule with TSSA to witness all pressure tests performed.;
.7 Correct noted TSSA construction deficiencies to satisfaction of the TSSA

at no additional cost to the Engineer;
.8 Retest any system to satisfaction of TSSA at no additional cost to the

Engineer; and
.9 Put no system governed by Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act into service
until approval granted by TSSA and The Engineer.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
.1 Install all systems required governed by the Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act to
latest requirements of CSA B51 – Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping
Code, and all related codes and standards governing selection and installation of
piping, fittings, joining methods, welding, valves, etc.
.2 Clean piping before installation. Remove rust and scale. Deburr pipe after cutting
and chips after threading.
.3 Clearances:
.1 Maintain clearance around systems, equipment and components and

between pipes and structures for Operation and Maintenance, as directed
and to manufacturer's recommendations, for greater of:
.1 Observation of operation, inspection, servicing, and maintenance;

and
.2 Disassembly, removal of equipment and components without

interrupting operation of other system, equipment, and
components.
.4 Coordinate location of piping, valves and reels with all other services. Provide
necessary clearance for maintenance. Identify potential interferences to The
Engineer for resolution.
.5 Flanges: Use suitable graphite lubricant on the bolts and nuts.
.6 Drain valves:
.1 Install at all low points in the piping systems, at equipment, at section

isolating valves and elsewhere as required, whether shown on the
Contract Drawings or not;
.2 Weld couplings for drains into piping to ANSI/ASME B31.1M; and
.3 Install piping drain valves at the low point of the piping entry into manifold
and/or charging valve stations.
.7 Branch take-offs:
.1 Use welding tees, socket or butt only;
.2 Where reducing tees of proper size are unavailable, use available tees
with reducers. Tees with increasers not acceptable; and
.3 Weldolets not acceptable.

.8 Cap open ends of piping during installation. Remove foreign material from inside
piping.
.9 Flanges: Tighten bolts evenly with torque wrench.
.10 Revisions to location of piping require approval of the Engineer. Prepare and
submit Drawings of all proposed revisions.
.11 Connections to equipment: Provide pressure rated unions where hose

assembly does not include a swivel joint.
3.5 FABRICATION OF PIPING
.1 Codes: Perform work in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1M.
.2 Joints:
.1 At the valves connected to hose reels: One (1) only screwed joint
permitted; and
.2 Elsewhere: Welded throughout, except at flanged components.
.3 Screwed joints:
.1 Provide clean machine cut threads;
.2 Use approved compound on the male threads; and
.3 Permitted only at last fitting (valve) of each pipe run.
.4 Branch connections:
.1 Use butt or socket weld fittings only;
.2 Weldolets, threadolets, or half couplings not permitted; and
.3 Pipe to pipe welded branch connections not permitted.
3.6 NON-METALLIC PIPING INSTALLATION
.1 Piping Installation:
.1 Installers shall be trained and certified to install the pipe according to the
manufacturer’s guidelines. Contact your local Aquatherm representative
for training;
.2 Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following
applications:
.1 Underground Piping: Polypropylene (PP-R) piping in SDR 7.4 per
manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM D2774.
.3 Installation must be accomplished with the proper tools for installing

Aquatherm piping following manufacturer’s instructions;
.4 Remove standing water in the bottom of trench;
.5 Do not backfill piping trench until field quality-control testing has been
completed and results approved;
.6 Install piping at uniform grade of 0.2 percent. Install drains, consisting of

a tee fitting, DN 20 ball valve, and short DN 20 threaded nipple with cap,
at low points and elsewhere as required for system drainage;
.7 Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure;
.8 Install piping free of sags and bends;
.9 Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections;
.10 Thrust blocks shall not be required with PP-R piping; and
.11 Expansion loops shall not be required for direct buried underground PP-R
piping.
.2 Trench Installation:
.1 Do not disturb the bottom of trench; otherwise, compact and stabilize it to

ensure proper support;
.2 Remove standing water in the bottom of trench;
.3 Bed the pipe on a minimum 150 mm layer of granular fill material with a
minimum 150 mm clearance between the pipes;
.4 Support piping with proper pitch, separation, and clearance to backfill or

side forms using temporary supporting devices that can be removed after
back filling with insulation;
.5 Place backfill after field quality-control testing has been completed and
results approved;
.6 Remove temporary hangers and supports; and
.7 Manually backfill 150 mm of clean backfill. If mechanical compaction is

required, manually backfill to 300 mm before using mechanical-
compaction equipment.
.3 Fusion Welding of Joints:
.1 Install fittings and joints using socket-fusion, elecrofusion, or butt-fusion

as applicable for the fitting or joint type. All fusion-weld joints shall be
made in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer’s specifications
and product standards;
.2 Fusion-weld tooling, welding machines, and electrofusion devices shall be

as specified by the pipe and fittings manufacturer;
.3 Prior to joining, the pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
ASTM F 2389 and the manufacturer’s specifications. The black plastic
coating on the UV pipe shall be removed before fusing the pipe; and
.4 Joint preparation, setting and alignment, fusion process, cooling times

and working pressure shall be in accordance with the pipe and fitting
manufacturer’s specifications.
.4 Inspecting and Testing:
.1 While still accessible all piping shall be pressure/leak tested to the

manufacturer’s standards;
.2 Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction and as specified by the piping system manufacturer;
.3 The reason for the required testing criteria is to enable installers to locate
faulty joints and pipe and workmanship issues that may result in leaks.
Finding such faulty joints, pipe cracks, etc. is critical in the preliminary
stages of construction in order to eliminate or, at least, to minimize costly
damages that may occur once the system is put into service;
.4 Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Test piping as specified by
the piping system manufacturer with dry air, or nitrogen to a pressure of
150 psi or 150% of working pressure, whichever is greater;
.5 Do not leave butt fusion machines connected to the piping when testing;
.6 Always take precautions to eliminate hazards to persons near lines being

tested. For the entire duration of the procedure and any subsequent
retesting, only authorized persons that are conducting the test or
inspecting the piping section being tested should be allowed in the
proximity of the section under test. Caution all personnel to stay well clear
of the pipe unless checking for leaks;
.7 For the entire duration of the procedure, the test section and the work
area around the test section and equipment shall be supervised or
secured with barricades and warnings so that unauthorized persons are
kept a safe distance away;
.8 A failure in the piping system or mechanical components and connections
may result in sudden, violent, uncontrolled, and dangerous movement of
system piping, or components, or parts of components;
.9 Take measures to ensure that all parts of the section under test are
structurally restrained against movement if failure occurs. Observe
manufacturer’s precautions for securing and restraining temporary
mechanical end (test) caps. Defective or improperly secured temporary
end closures or mechanical end caps shall not be used;
.10 When connections, joints and seals are to be exposed for observation
during the test, use restraint methods to control movement in the event of
joint or connection separation, giving due consideration to restraining
forces in both the lateral/outward and longitudinal/axial directions;
.11 Pipe connected to connections, joints and seals that are exposed for
leakage observation shall be restrained. The unrestrained exposed pipe
distance to the side of the exposed connection, joint or seal shall not
exceed the greater of 5 pipe diameters or 3 ft. (1 m); and
.12 When properly made, heat fusion joints in polypropylene pipe are
structurally comparable to the parent (PP-R) pipe material and do not
leak. Leakage at a fusion joint indicates a possible poor joint having the
imminent potential for complete separation. If leakage is observed at a
fusion joint, move away immediately, and depressurize the test section.
.5 Identification:
.1 Install continuous metallic/plastic underground warning tapes during back

filling of trenches for underground hydronic piping. Locate tapes 150 to
200 mm below finished grade, directly over piping. Alternatively install 8 –
10 gage copper wire at 6” – 8” directly over the pipeline. Provide warning
tapes above the wire at 6” to 8” below the finished grade directly over the
pipeline.
.6 Field Quality Control:
.1 While still accessible all piping shall be pressure/leak tested to the

manufacturer’s standards. Tests shall be carried out using water,
compressed air or a mixture of the two. The test pressure shall be as
indicated in the pressure leak testing procedures required by the
manufacturer. Any leaks detected shall be repaired at the contractor’s
expense by removing the leaking part and replacing with new parts
welded per the pipe manufacturer’s guidelines; and
.2 Prepare test and inspection reports. Deliver to owner and manufacturer to

obtain product warranty
3.7 PIPE LAYING
.1 Provide recesses on trench bottom for couplings, fittings, and valves to ensure
bearing will occur along barrel of pipe.
.2 Lay service line pipe on proper grade to drain from end device to compressed air
main.
.3 Lay compressed air pipe on trench bottom that are graded in accordance with
Specifications to prevent sags and low points in piping.
.4 Ensure minimum of 1000 mm distance between compressed air pipe and any
underground structure that runs parallel to the pipe unless noted otherwise.
.5 Ensure minimum of 100 mm distance between compressed air pipe and any
underground structure that crosses compressed air pipe unless noted otherwise.
.6 Ensure that the location and arrangement of pipe and connections provides
protection from mechanical damage.
.7 Provide shut off valve above grade where shown and upstream of all
compressed air outlets/connections.
.8 Provide steel casings where indicated on Drawings. Provide spacers in

accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations, pipe spacer
manufacturer’s recommendations, and no less than 1200 mm centres for 100
mm steel pipe. Cap or plug all ends of casings, terminate maintaining required
depth under all tracks or above storm piping, backfill with sand and mark end of
casing. Indicate locations of casing terminations on As-Built Drawings.
.9 Provide tracer wire on all non-metallic and uncased buried pipe. Extend up at
each riser with minimum 450 mm length above finished grade. Bring tracer wire
up to surface every 300 m and using 50 mm diameter valve boxes for locating
purposes. Connect tracer wires together using split bolt #10 connectors. Wrap
split bolts in electrical putty.
.10 Coordinate installation of cathodic protection anodes with other utility trades to
avoid interference. Identify locations of anodes on As-Built Drawings.
.11 Mark routing of piping with marker tape placed along centerline of the trench,
approximately 250 mm below finished grade or as indicated on the Drawings.
3.8 ANTI-CORROSION PROTECTION
.1 Remove all substances that will impede or otherwise be detrimental to the

performance of the coating prior to the coating application. This includes
removal of all loose or non-bonded material, rust scale, dirt, mill scale,
burrs, sharp edges and weld splatter. Remove excessive moisture prior to
applying anti-corrosion coating; and
.2 Reference: Steel Structures Painting Council:
.1 SP-1 solvent cleaning;
.2 SP-2 hand tool cleaning; and
.3 SP-3 power tool cleaning.
.2 Primer Application:
.1 TC Color Coat Primer – Apply TC Color Coat Primer four mils thick with
gloved hand. Ensure to prime the total surface to be coated.
.3 Tape application:
.1 Tape shall be applied by hand with a 50% overlap:
.1 Preferred method: Apply tape in a spiral wrap; and
.2 Cigarette wrap tape strips when conditions do not allow for spiral
wrapping.
.2 As tape is applied use hand pressure to seal the overlap and smooth out
wrinkles, assuring that the tape has contact with the substrate and the
tape overlap has melded and sealed to the preceding layer. Ensure that:
.1 The tape wrap extends at least 4” over the existing coating;
.2 The tape wrap is free of gaps, voids and holes; and
.3 For coating vertical or riser pipe: start wrapping at the low end of
the pipe segment, wrap in an upward direction from ground toward
sky.
.4 Outer wrap option for mechanical protection:
.1 Above or below grade application: Tape coat Rugged Wrap – a 30 mil,

open-weave, non-shielding fiberglass mesh, water activated urethane,
wrap used to reinforce wrap and increase the impact resistance; and
.2 Provide epoxy corrosion protection covering on steel piping to local gas

authority approval including welded joints.
.5 Handling of coated pipe: Take required measures to handle the coated pipe to
prevent exposure to abrasion or damage prior to, during and after installation.
3.9 WELDING
.1 Perform welding in accordance with Section 20 05 17 Pipe Welding, and

requirements of this Section.
3.10 HOUSEKEEPING
.1 Maintain good housekeeping of all materials and take every precaution

necessary to ensure Products not inadvertently mixed between systems.
.2 Protect all Product certification markings from soiling and damage during
handling and installation. Install and orient all equipment, piping, fittings, hoses,
and valves so certification markings remain visible for inspection.
.3 Do not paint, cover or conceal system piping, valves, hoses, fittings, and
especially certification markings until all inspections and pressure tests
conducted successfully and system approved for operation by TSSA.
3.11 PIPE SUPPORTS
.1 In strict accordance with requirements of this Section.
.2 Provide to details as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.3 Submit Shop Drawings for review before fabrication and installation.
.4 Install to manufacturer's recommendations.
.5 Install to details indicated on the Contract Drawings.
3.12 VALVES
.1 Provide valves in accordance with Section 20 05 24 Valves – Pressure Piping.
.2 Install isolation valve at each compressed air station.
.3 Install additional valves as required to isolate all branch lines.
.4 Install only steel valves for all flammable and combustible fluids.
.5 Install isolating valves at the branch take-offs, at pieces of equipment and

elsewhere as indicated.
.6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.7 Install in the accessible locations.
.8 Depending upon piping configuration and ease of operation, on the horizontal

pipes install with stem horizontal or above.
.9 Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping.
.10 Isolation valves in main runs or branches: Socket weld or flanged.
.11 Valves at the hose connections: Screwed unless indicated otherwise.
3.13 PRESSURE TESTS
.1 Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
.1 Perform hydrostatic pressure tests on the compressed air systems;
.2 Conduct tests in presence of The Engineer and as required by the

TSSA’s inspector;
.3 Give the Engineer and TSSA minimum of five Business Days’ notice of
intention to perform pressure tests;
.4 After installation and before concealing, perform hydrostatic pressure

tests to 1.5 times maximum working pressure and maintain test pressure
without loss or leaks for 24 hours;
.5 Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed
to withstand test pressure or test media and indicate in test report;
.6 Bear costs for tests, for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making
good;
.7 Insulate or conceal work after approval and certification of tests by the

Engineer;
.8 Use test media indicated on the Contract Drawings, and unless indicated
otherwise, use fluid intended to be carried by each piping system;
.9 Supply new high quality accurately calibrated pressure gauges to verify

test pressures, as specified under this Section. Submit bill of sale as proof
gauges are new;
.10 Test gauges not new: Submit calibration certificate dated within one
month of test date;
.11 Replace all pressure gauges suspected to be faulty or out of calibration;
.12 Provide equipment that will safely and accurately generate test pressures,
under controlled conditions, and without potential for human error. Submit
proposed test equipment to the Engineer for approval;
.13 In accordance with above, test pressures may be generated as follows:

.1 Hydraulic hand pump (preferred);
.2 Piston pump controlled by regulated air supply;
.3 Electric pump with unloader or relief set to test pressure; and
.4 Methods using on/off control of equipment to limit pressure not

permitted.
.14 Any pressure test procedure found unsafe, in opinion of the Engineer staff
or TSSA inspector, will be cancelled and rescheduled at the Contractor’s
expense; and
.15 Upon successful completion of pressure test for each individual pressure
piping system, prepare and submit detailed test report.
3.14 PAINTING
.1 Clean, prime and paint all piping in accordance with Section 20 05 53 Mechanical
Identification.
.2 All painting performed by qualified trades.
.3 Do not cover pipe identification markings until the Engineer and TSSA inspector
have inspected them.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
.1 In accordance with Section 20 05 53 Mechanical Identification.
3.16 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1 Cleaning Solutions:
System Clean/Flush with:

Compressed Air Water/Air
.2 Timing: Systems to be operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices

functional, before cleaning is carried out.
.3 Install Products such as flow meters and dispensing valves only after cleaning
certified as complete.
.4 Conditions at time of cleaning:
.1 Systems to be free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign

material; and
.2 Isolation valves to be operational, fully open to ensure terminal units can
be cleaned properly.
.5 Compressed Air System:
.1 Blow out water from hydrostatic testing as follows:
.1 At all drip legs and dirt pockets (at air hose stations and air
regulators); and
.2 At all hose reels. At all automatic drains.
3.17 PRODUCTS FOR TESTING, FLUSHING AND CHARGING
.1 Purchase and supply all fluid Products required for flushing of each system.
.2 Arrange for bulk/drum delivery of Products as required to suit system and activity.
.3 Allow for disposal and/or recycling of waste Product for each system.
.4 Where directed by The Engineer, reserve waste Products for priming and testing
of waste oil and/or waste glycol systems.
3.18 COMMISSIONING
.1 Perform Commissioning in accordance with Section 20 05 00 Mechanical

General Requirements.
.2 Verify operational performance in general conformance with the following outline:
.1 Compressed air system (low pressure piping and fittings):
.1 Flushing and cleaning;
.2 Pressure test;
.3 Inspection of piping for excessive vibration;
.4 Flow rate achieved at each dispenser;
.5 Setpoint at each pressure relief valve; and
.6 Other.
.3 Commissioning method shall include:
.1 Instrumentation: Verify accuracy of pressure gauges by comparison with

calibrated test instruments;
.2 Full scale tests:
.1 Upon completion, conduct full scale tests at specified operating

pressure and air regulator setpoints.
.3 Reports:
.1 Reports supplemented as specified herein.
3.19 START- UP OF PRESSURE SYSTEMS
.1 Timing after:
.1 Cleaning is completed;
.2 Pressure tests are completed;
.3 Joints radiographed as specified; and
.4 Painting and identification are complete.
.2 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
.3 Set pressure controls.
.4 Ensure air is removed and piping is fully charged.
.5 Clean out strainers where installed.
.6 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and flow at all dispensers.
.7 Check for leaks.
.8 Eliminate pipe vibration.
.9 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, and springs as necessary.
.10 Monitor pipe movement, performance of anchors.
.11 Check operation of relief valves.
.12 Test operation of operating, limit and safety controls.
.13 Record pressure of air supply and relief setting for each system.
.14 Fasten loose items of equipment to ensure quiet operation of system.

3.20 CERTIFICATES
.1 Complete and submit TSSA form “Piping Systems Installation and Test Data
Report”.
Prices.

CN – DESIGN & COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM SECTION 22 15 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
compressed air system for the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
including but not limited to:
.1 Air Compressors;
.2 Air Dryers;
.3 Filters;
.4 Compressed Air Station Receiver Tanks;
.5 Modular Compressor Rooms; and
.6 Auxiliary Receiver Tanks.
.2 Compressed air supply connections to following equipment:
.1 Air hose stations; and
.2 Underground pad charging valves.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) :
.1 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Pressure

Vessels.
.1 CSA B51:19, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.
.3 Ontario Health and Safety Act (OSHA).
to ensure that the compressed air system work meet the requirements of this
Section and Section 01620 Quality Control and Assurance:
.1 Manufacturer's qualifications:
.1 ISO 9001 and 14001 certified; and
.2 Member of Compressed Air and Gas Institute (CAGI).
.2 Installer’s qualifications: Refer to Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
.1 Compressed air systems registered with the TSSA. Refer to

Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawing(s) for Compressed Air System:
.1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference

standards, characteristics, limitations and troubleshooting
protocol; and
.2 Elevations, sections, details, operating components, dimensions,

gauges and finishes.
.2 Commissioning Submittal(s) for Compressed Air System:

.1 Submit Test Procedures;
.2 Submit Test Reports;
.3 Submit Closeout Report; and
.1 TSSA forms;
.2 Field inspection and test reports; and
.3 Manufacturer’s field reports.
.3 Closeout Submittal(s) for Compressed Air System:
.1 Submit the following for incorporation into Operation and


number, number of units, capacity, and identification of
related systems;

components;
.5 Safety precautions;
.6 Spare parts list;
.7 Consumables;
.8 Lubrication schedule indicating lubrication points and type

of lubricant recommended;
.9 Maintenance and troubleshooting guidelines/protocol, and

recommended equipment for analysis and repair; and
.10 Extra stock materials list in accordance with Article 1.6.
.2 Copy of full set of reviewed Shop Drawings and, if applicable,

Marked-up Shop Drawings; and
.3 Warranty information.
1.6 TRAINING
.1 Provide training plan, training course material, training schedule, and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
.1 Two fully packaged compressed air system stations no. 1 & 2, each package
consisting of (but not limited to) the following:
.1 Two 60 HP Rotary Screw Air Compressors;
.2 One Heatless Dessicant Air Dryer;
.3 One Receiver Tank; and
.4 One Self-Contained Weatherproof Container.
.2 Each fully packaged system shall be internally pre-piped (including flanges for
piping connections between internal compressed air components and exterior
receiver tank), ducted and electrical ready for final connections by the installing
contractor.
.3 Three Auxiliary Receiver Tanks
2.2 ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS
.1 Each air compressor shall be a single stage, air cooled, oil injected, rotary screw
air compressor complete with high efficiency TEFC drive blower motor, inlet air
filter, vibration mounts, lubrication system, coolant/air separation,
compressor/capacity controls, starter, controller, packaged pre-filter and moisture
separator & condensate drain. Available options shall include surge
protection and power outage restart.
.2 Capacity:
.1 269 ACFM at operating pressure of 145 psig or 248 ACFM at 150 psig.
.3 Operating Pressure:
.1 Set to operate at 120 to 130 psig.
.4 Motor:
.1 60 HP (44.74 kW), 1800 RPM;

.2 High-efficiency, IP55 TEFC, class F insulation;
.3 Built-in space heaters; and
.4 Easy access grease fittings.
.5 Voltage:
.1 575/3/60.
.6 Cooling Fan:
.1 Cooling fan – 1.5 HP (1.1 kW) motor, selected for direct ducting of cooling
exhaust; and
.2 Air end: Rotary screw compressor with optimized screw profile, oversized,
low speed, 1:1 drive, operating at motor speed.
.7 Inlet Filter:
.1 Compressor intake fitted with 3 micron intake filter @ 99% minimum

efficiency, cleanable multiple times before requiring replacement. No
tools required for replacement.
.8 Separator:
.1 High efficiency centrifugal separator with 2 stage after filter;
.2 2 PPM or less fluid carry over;
.3 Easy to read level indicator;
.4 Quick disconnect fittings for examination of separator element; and
.5 Separator tank ASME or CRN listed.
.9 Control:
.1 Integral control console, PC-based Intel processor, real time operating

system;
.2 Monitors and controls all critical compressor functions, warning, alarms

and troubleshooting;
.3 Optimized control methods for energy conservation and pressure

regulation; and
.4 Container temperature control operates dampers to recirculate heat back

into space or reject it to outside.
.10 Acceptable Manufacturers:
.1 Ingersoll Rand Model RS45i; or
.2 Comaico – Sullair S-Energy series, Model 4590B.
2.3 DESICCANT AIR DRYERS
.1 Compressed air dryers capable of reducing the moisture content of air to

maintain a pressure dew point of the dried air at -40°F.
.2 Dryer shall employ twin-drying towers comprising ASME code welded pressure
vessels, spherical-particle, non-corrosive activated alumina desiccant, and
desiccant fill and empty ports. A continuous supply of dry air shall be provided by
the automatically cycled operation of the drying vessels on a fixed cycle,
including drying, pressure stabilization and regeneration. Automatic cycling shall
be controlled by an electronic controller. Airflow shall be directed through
alternate drying vessels by pneumatically operated valves which require no
lubrication. Dryers shall use high performance, stainless steel angle seated
valves.
.3 Fire rated pressure relief valves shall be located on each pressure vessel.
.4 The purge air control system shall include mufflers to reduce the noise level of
the purge air exhaust to within OSHA standards. No electrical or other energy
shall be supplied to the dryers from an outside source for reactivation. Total
electrical requirements shall not exceed 5 Amperes at 110, 115 or 120 Vac. The
dryers shall include, as a minimum, gauges showing pressure in each drying
tower, a gauge showing purge pressure, a manual purge adjustment valve, UL
type 4 PLC with a keypad & screen, and a light indication panel that indicates the
status of the dryer including ON/OFF & tower status.
.5 The PLC controller shall incorporate a user display screen that will provide
information regarding dryer status (ON/OFF), dryer step sequence information,
operating hours for various components (including main flow & purge valves),
alarm status & notification, and maintenance information. The PLC shall be
provided with RS485 communication as standard.
.6 The dryers shall be equipped with an Energy Management System (EMS): a

hygrometer sensor located downstream of the desiccant bed will determine the
moisture content of process air and the PLC controls will correspondingly
modulate the dryer cycle.
.7 The PLC controller display shall include the dew-point value, system status,
enable / disable function, cycle point indication, ability to facilitate adjustment of
the set-point, and a common alarm dry contact.
.1 Ingersoll Rand Model HLA300, 300 scfm inlet capacity; or
.2 Comairco – Sullair Model DHL-300-V01, 300 scfm inlet capacity.
2.4 PREFILTER AND AFTER FILTER:
.1 A prefilter shall be included for installation upstream of the dryers to remove oil
and liquid water down to 0.01 mg/m³ content at 21°C (0.008 ppm W at 70°F).
Prefilter shall be capable of removing solid particles as small as 0.01 micron.
Prefilter shall employ a no-touch replaceable element. Filters shall include an
automatic drain valve for periodic removal of separated contaminants. Filter is
equipped with a dual scale differential pressure gauge for indication of element
replacement.
.1 Ingersoll Rand Model FA600IH; or
.2 Comairco – Sullair FX-0350-H
.3 An after-filter shall be included as standard for installation downstream of the

dryers to remove particulate matter. After filters shall be capable of removing
solid particles down to 0.1 micron. After filters shall employ a no-touch
replaceable element. Filters are equipped with a dual scale differential pressure
gauge for indication of element replacement.
.1 Ingersoll Rand Model FA600IG; or
.2 Comairco – Sullair FX-0350-FR
2.5 SELF CONTAINED WEATHERPROOF MODULAR AIR COMPRESSOR ROOM
.1 Provide for each air compressor packaged system station, one single use
shipping container, approximately 30’ long by 8’ wide, with barn style double
doors on one end and a swing type access door to facilitate regular access for
maintenance.
.2 Each container (two total required) is to contain the compressed air components
package; consisting of 2 x Ingersoll Rand Model RS45i - 60 hp Rotary Screw Air
Compressors, 1 x HL300 Desiccant Air dryer and 1 x Oil Water Separator. The
container interiors are to be skinned with sheet metal and painted for a smooth
finish.
.3 Supply and install all lighting required for a safe working environment (110 volts).
.4 Supply and install a voltage transformer from 575 volts to 220, 110, and 24 volts,
of a suitable size to operate the ventilation fan and louvers, the lighting, the
electronic auto drains and some additional plugs for maintenance use. Supply
and install a mounting panel, splitter, disconnect, and all other electrical
requirements to operate each compressor and air dryer. Supply a fused main
disconnect to operate all the equipment and all other electrical components
required to ensure that the hydro supply and wiring meets specified ESA code.
Supply and install a junction box (splitter) to connect the electrical feed. All
electrical components shall be suitable for the compressed air packaged systems
supplied.
.5 Provide electronically operated intake louvers to interface with the air

compressors. Provide electronically modulating, thermostatically operated
discharge louvers into air discharge ventilation from the compressors. Supply
pressure controlled louvers to automatically divert discharge air into the
compressor room when necessary.
.6 Provide a suitable space heater to maintain a minimum winter temperature of

55°F.
.7 Insulate the Container package internally to reduce noise and heat loss complete
with steel cladding
.8 Prime and paint the internal surface of the container.
.9 Note: Each container is ESA certified prior to delivery.
2.6 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
.1 Secure all equipment to the container to prevent movement in transit.
.2 Cut ventilation openings required for venting the compressors intake, discharge,
and ventilation. Provide a suitable duct and shroud to ventilate the compressor
room. Provide an electric damper and programmable thermostat. Provide and
install all ducting required for ventilation/heating.
.3 Supply and install all Carbon steel piping required to connect the air compressors
through the filters, air dryers, to a discharge port on the outside of the container,
and install a manual ball drain valve to prevent water from accumulating in the
discharge pipe. Connect all drain points to a common area and pipe into the
oil/water separator. Install all condensate lines to OWS inside container.
2.7 COMPRESSED AIR STATIONS AIR RECEIVER TANKS
.1 ASME and National Board stamped vertical air receiver tank.
.2 Maximum Working pressure: 150 psig at 400 F.
.3 Volume: 4012 L (1060 US Gallons).
.4 Dimensions: 1350 mm diameter by 3800 mm high (54” x 152”).
.5 Finish: Primer and baked on powder coat primer gray.
2.8 AUXILIARY AIR RECEIVER TANKS ‘T-1, 2 & 3’
.1 ASME and National Board stamped vertical air receiver tank.
.2 Maximum Working pressure: 200 psig at 400 F.
.3 Volume: 757 L (200 US Gallons).
.4 Dimensions: 762mm diameter by 1828mm high (30” x 72”).
.5 Finish primer and baked on powder coat primer gray.
.6 Manufacturers:
.1 Ingersoll Rand;
.2 Steel Fab;
.3 Aircom Technologies;
.4 Manchester; and
.5 CAI.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
.1 Pressure Relief Valve (PRV):
.1 Fixed set point, ½” NPT nominal pipe size, brass body;
.2 Relief set point calibrated and permanently set at factory in accordance

with settings indicated on Contract Drawings; and
.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ingersoll Rand PRV or Sullair
.2 Pressure Gauge:
.1 4” Dia. Liquid-Filled Pressure Gauge 0-300PSIG;
.2 Lower Mount; and
.3 Acceptable Manufacturers Ingersoll Rand PG or Sullair
.3 Condensate Drain:
.1 Electronic No-Loss Drain;
.2 Nema 4/IP67 rating, Electronic control sensor, No air loss, Drains on

demand; and
.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ingersoll Rand Model ENL-5 or Sullair.
.4 Air Hose:
.1 Refer to Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
.1 Install compressed air piping from main line to outlets, equipment, and
connections as shown on Contract Drawings. Take branch connections serving
equipment and air hose stations off top of main line.
.2 Install isolation valves at beginning of each branch serving more than one piece
of equipment.
.3 Install isolation valves at beginning of each branch serving more than one piece
of equipment.
.4 Neatly route air piping using one hanger system.
.5 Prime, paint and identify compressed air piping and unpainted equipment as per
Section 20 05 53 Mechanical Identification.
.6 Coordinate power wiring with Division 26.
.7 Leave complete system ready for continuous, efficient and satisfactory operation.
3.2 ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS AND MODULAR ENCLOSURES
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Mount modular air compressor rooms on housekeeping pads.

.3 Connect compressed air lines from air receiver tanks to each main compressed
air line.
.4 Set controls to schedule operation of intake and relief dampers to control room
temperature. Provide additional wiring as required for complete system
operation, in accordance with standards of Division 26. Set system to recirculate
when room temperature is below 10°C.
.5 Leave equipment ready to operate. Set to deliver 145 psig supply air pressure.
3.3 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYERS
3.4 AIR RECEIVER TANKS
.2 Mount on concrete housekeeping pads.
.3 Install ASME relief valves set to 200 psig.
3.5 CONDENSATE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.2 Pipe clean condensate to drain.
.3 Extend condensate drains from equipment to condensate management system.
.4 Provide electronic drain valves as required on equipment, for complete system

operation.
.5 Extend drain line from condensate management system to an exterior drain point
complete with an insect/pest screen located within the interior of the container to
avoid cold weather freeze up.
.6 Connect to power source in accordance with Division 26.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Conduct pressure tests and certification of new compressed air piping as per
Section 20 11 12 Pressure Piping. Isolate piping and equipment not part of test.
.2 Arrange for the Engineer and all inspection authorities having jurisdiction to
witness tests.
.3 Notify the Engineer 21 days minimum prior to testing.

.4 Submit written inspection reports and test certificates to the Engineer.
.5 Submit complete testing and startup reports for the entire compressed air system
to the Engineer.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
.1 Perform Commissioning
.2 Verify operational performance in general conformance with following outline:
.1 Operational performance outline:
.1 Air compressors operate with demand to maintain supply

pressure;
.2 Room temperature controls, damper operation;
.3 Air dryer;
.4 Compressed air consumption;
.5 Condensate management system;
.6 Air supply pressure at farthest pipe runs satisfactory under flow.

Adjustment of supply air pressure set point as required;
.7 Settings of relief valves; and
.8 Verify surge protection and power outage restart.
3.8 MAINTENANCE
.1 Maintain all equipment and systems installed until Substantial Performance.
.2 Carry out regular scheduled maintenance of equipment and systems following

Substantial Performance until Contract Completion.
Prices.
** END OF SECTION ***

CN – DESIGN & PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS SECTION 23 11 23
CONSTRUCTION (GAS/PROPANE) SEPTEMBER 2023
GRADING & DRAINAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
.1 This Section specifies the Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary
for piping, valves and fittings (gas) for underground propane piping work.
.1 AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering (2018), Volume 1, Chapter 1

Roadway and Ballast, Part 5 -Utilities.
.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless; and
.2 ASTM A234/A234M – 19, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of

Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.
.1 CSA B137.4-17, Polyethylene (PE) Piping Systems for Gas Services;
.2 CAN/CSA B149.1-20, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code;
.3 CSA Z662-19, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems; and
.4 CSA Z245.30-18 Field-applied External Coatings for Steel Pipeline

Systems.
.4 Transport Canada, TC E-10, Standards Respecting Pipeline Crossings Under

Railways.
GRADING & DRAINAGE

program to meet the requirements of this Section and Section 01620 Quality
Control and Assurance.
.1 Conduct a quality assurance program to ensure that all of the work for
underground gas piping, meets the requirements of the Specifications.
.2 Ensure all work of this Section is performed by a contractor licensed for gas
systems installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Manufacturer’s Product data for all Products listed in this Section

indicating performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference
standard, characteristics and limitations;
.2 Commissioning Plan;
.3 Safety Certification Plan for Underground Propane Piping;
.4 Inspection and Test Reports for Underground Propane Piping for all
inspections and tests, ten (10) working days after each inspection and
test;
.5 Workplan Methodology for Installation of Underground Propane Piping

(including under railway tracks). The work plan methodology shall include
the following minimum requirements:
.1 Details of installation of all types of underground propane piping

including trenchless installation for pipes crossing track(s).
Provide drawings showing the details of excavation and distance
to existing tracks and turnouts;
.2 Environmental and right of way impact mitigation requirements in

accordance with Contract Documents;
.3 Methodology for any temporary excavation if required; and
.4 Dewatering requirements in accordance with Contract Documents.
.6 Closeout Submittals:
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.1 Include final test and commissioning reports into Operations
Manual; and
.2 As-Built Drawings.
.1 Store stockpiled materials on wood supports of sufficient size and strength to

prevent contact with the earth and surface water. Protect stockpiled materials
from contamination.
.2 Cap open ends of pipe.
.3 Protect materials subject to corrosion from the elements.
.4 Protect materials subject to degradation from UV/Sunlight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS - STEEL
.1 Black Steel pipe, ASTM A53 grade B, Schedule 40 complete with ‘yellow jacket’
polyethylene covering to CSA Z245.30-18.
.2 Fittings: ASTM A234, 150 lb, steel butt welded fittings; complete with field fitted
heat shrink polyethylene joint and fitting wrap, half lapped 10 mil polyethylene.
.3 Anti-corrosion protection for valves and exposed metal parts: TC COLOR COAT
ENVIROTAPE WAX COATING as manufactured by CHASE Construction
Products (TAPECOAT/ROYSTON):
.1 TAPECOAT TC COLOR COAT PRIMER - white petrolatum wax primer

applied by hand prior to the application of any of the ENVIROTAPE
products;
.2 TC COLOR COAT ENVIROTAPE - a 60 mil wax tape coating system

resistant to ultraviolet light and environmental exposure, self-hardening
outer skin surface for above grade exposure. Colour: Yellow; and
.3 TC RUGGED WRAP - 30 mil, non-shielding, open-weave fiberglass

mesh, water activated urethane, wrap used as an optional reinforcing
wrap to increase the impact resistance of wax tapes.
.4 Buried section of steel piping shall be protected with corrosion resistant Epoxy
coating, Pre affixed to buried section of piping. Refer to Drawings for specific
buried piping locations.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.5 Welded joints underground to have epoxy coating applied to the joint to have a
monolithic corrosion protection covering.
.6 HDPE to Black steel adaptor to be pre-assembled as supplied. HDPE/METAL

shall be CSA/CGA approved adaptor fitting with welded joints.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS - HDPE
.1 Buried propane main piping shall be HDPE in compliance with CSA B137.4 and
ASTM B2513, DR 11 or less.
.2 Fittings shall be HDPE heat socket fusion type in compliance with CSA B137.4.
2.3 VALVES
.1 Provincial code approved, lubricated plug or ball type.
2.4 PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE
.1 CSA certified and Provincial Code approved.
.2 Vented type, spring-loaded self - operated design, tight closing, selected for site
gas pressure and piping pressure loss, and connected equipment load at full
firing rate plus 20% spare, suitable for outdoor application.
.3 1035 kPa (150psi) rated cast iron body finished with corrosive resistant epoxy
enamel.
.4 Aluminum diaphragm and spring case with Nitrile diaphragm, disc, and body o-
ring.
.5 Internal relief to protect equipment downstream of regulator in compliance with

CSA B149.1 5.2 and 5.3 and to ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22.
.6 Select regulator to suit Natural Gas.
2.5 CASINGS
.1 Under tracks gas carrier pipe casings shall be HDPE DR11 capable of
withstanding railway loading (Cooper E-80 Live Load).
.2 Ensure that casing pipe inside diameter accommodates pipe and spacers.
.3 Casing spacers shall be high density polyethylene segments, integrally molded

solid core runners and non-metallic or corrosion resistant assembly components
for field assembly with hand tools.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
2.6 TRACER WIRE
.1 Tracer wire shall be R.W.U. 90, number 12-gauge, single strand insulated copper
with cross-linked polyethylene insulation manufactured for direct burial
applications, 1000 V rating.
.2 Provide cathodic protection for tracer wire, one 5.4 kg zinc anode installed for
every maximum 1000 m of tracer wire.
.3 Securement: Fibre glass tape or plastic tie-wraps.
2.7 MARKER TAPE
.1 Marker tape shall be pre-printed yellow, 75 mm wide, four mil polyethylene,

marked “CAUTION BURIED NATURAL GASLINE BELOW”.
2.8 WARNING MARKER
.1 Warning marker post shall be pre-printed yellow with premium UV inhibitors,

75mm diameter, polyethylene covered, marked “CAUTION NATURAL GAS
PIPELINE BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
.1 Ensure that construction is in accordance with the requirements of applicable

standards referenced above and in the Contract Documents.
.2 Ensure that the construction of underground gas piping is in accordance with the
CSA Z662, CSA B149.1, work requirements of this Section and all other
applicable codes and regulations, including the requirements of the local
authority having jurisdiction.
.3 Perform piping work in accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA B149.1,

Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, as amended by TSSA.
.4 Ensure that the granular materials provided are in accordance with the contract
documents for Granular Materials.
.5 Excavate, cover and backfill in accordance with the contract documents relating
to Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
.6 Clean and flush before testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of
CSA Z662.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.8 Coordinate the work for installation of underground gas piping with the work
performed by the local authorized gas company.
3.2 PIPE LAYING
.1 Provide complete yellow jacket pipe system complete with heat shrink sleeves.
.2 Provide recesses on trench bottom for couplings, fittings, and valves to ensure
bearing will occur along barrel of pipe.
.3 Lay service line pipe on proper grade to drain from gas fired device to gas main.
.4 Lay gas pipe on trench bottom that are graded in accordance with Specifications
to prevent sags and low points in piping.
.5 Ensure minimum of 1000 mm distance between gas pipe and any underground
structure that runs parallel to the pipe unless noted otherwise.
.6 Ensure minimum of 100 mm distance between gas pipe and any underground
structure that crosses gas pipe unless noted otherwise.
.7 Field cut HDPE pipe using pipe and tubing cutting tools designed for plastic pipe.
.8 Ensure that the location and arrangement of pipe and connections provides
protection from mechanical damage. Ensure that all bends in tubing are smooth,
free of kinking and twisting, and free of flattening.
.9 Provide shut off valve above grade where shown and required by CSA B149.1.
.10 Provide HDPE casings where indicated on Drawings. Provide spacers in

accordance with HDPE pipe manufacturer’s recommendations, pipe spacer
manufacturer’s recommendations, and no less than 1200 mm centres for 100
mm HDPE pipe. Cap or plug all ends of casings, terminate maintaining required
depth under all tracks, backfill with sand and mark end of HDPE with stake or
approved equivalent. Indicate locations of casing terminations on As-Built
Drawings.
.11 Provide tracer wire on all non-metallic and uncased buried pipe. Extend up at
each riser with minimum 450 mm length above finished grade. Bring tracer wire
up to surface every 300 m and using 50 mm diameter valve boxes for locating
purposes. Connect tracer wires together using split bolt #10 connectors. Wrap
split bolts in electrical putty.
.12 Coordinate installation of cathodic protection anodes with other utility trades to
avoid interference. Identify locations of anodes on As-Built Drawings.
.13 Mark routing of piping with marker tape placed along centerline of the trench,
approximately 250 mm below finished grade or as indicated on the Drawings.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.14 Install prominent warning markers at the right-of-way edge on both sides of track
for propane pipeline under crossings and, along the right-of-way, for the propane
gas main running along the South side of the corridor at intervals that will permit
viewing from any direction, not exceeding 150 m.
.15 Provide a Workplan Methodology for Installation of Underground Propane Gas

Piping (including under railway tracks).
3.3 ANTI-CORROSION PROTECTION
.1 Remove all substances that will impede or otherwise be detrimental to the

performance of the coating prior to the coating application. This includes
removal of all loose or non-bonded material, rust scale, dirt, mill scale,
burrs, sharp edges and weld splatter. Remove excessive moisture prior to
applying anti-corrosion coating;
.2 Reference: Steel Structures Painting Council:
.1 SP-1 solvent cleaning;
.2 SP-2 hand tool cleaning; and
.3 SP-3 power tool cleaning.
.2 Primer Application:
.1 TC Color Coat Primer – Apply TC Color Coat Primer four mils thick with
gloved hand. Ensure to prime the total surface to be coated.
.3 Tape application:
.1 Tape shall be applied by hand with a 50% overlap.
.1 Preferred method: Apply tape in a spiral wrap; and
.2 Cigarette wrap tape strips when conditions do not allow for spiral
wrapping.
.2 As tape is applied use hand pressure to seal the overlap and smooth out
wrinkles, assuring that the tape has contact with the substrate and the
tape overlap has melded and sealed to the preceding layer. Ensure that:
.1 The tape wrap extends at least 4” over the existing coating;
.2 The tape wrap is free of gaps, voids and holes; and

GRADING & DRAINAGE
.3 For coating vertical or riser pipe: start wrapping at the low end of
the pipe segment, wrap in an upward direction from ground toward
sky.
.4 Outer wrap option for mechanical protection:
.1 Above or below grade application: Tape coat Rugged Wrap – a 30 mil,

open-weave, non-shielding fiberglass mesh, water activated urethane,
wrap used to reinforce wrap and increase the impact resistance; and
.2 Provide epoxy corrosion protection covering on steel piping to local gas

authority approval including welded joints.
.5 Handling of coated pipe: Take required measures to handle the coated pipe to
prevent exposure to abrasion or damage prior to, during and after installation.
3.4 TESTING
.1 Inspection of piping systems by TSSA. If required, schedule and pay for regular
general inspections with authority having jurisdiction at the regular intervals
throughout construction period including, but not limited to, the following:
.1 Pre-construction material inspection.
.2 Welding procedure.
.3 General installation inspections.
.4 Other inspections as requested by authorities having jurisdiction
.2 Certification of installed systems by the Contractor and TSSA.
.3 Test Medium: Air, or inert gas such as carbon dioxide or nitrogen.
.4 Ensure to fill piping with test medium for 24 hours prior to actual test.
.5 For polyethylene piping, Subject pipe to pressure of 350 kPa or 1.5 times
maximum operating pressure, whichever is greater, for 24 hours.
.6 Supply pumps, connections, gauges, test medium, and other necessary

apparatus required for test.
.7 Ensure that test consist of visual “soap bubble” inspection of the joints for leaks
and of measuring the pressure after 24 hours. No pipe installation will be
accepted if leaks are detected or if pressure at end of test is less than 95% of
original test pressure.
.8 If air or inert gas is used for testing, purge lines with propane before using.
GRADING & DRAINAGE
.9 Ensure to test the tracer wire at the time of pipe pressure testing.
3.5 RESTORATION
.1 Ensure that, upon completion of the Work of this Section, the Site is restored in
accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents. Ensure that any
previously existing areas that are disturbed as a result of the Works are restored
to its original condition.
.1 No Measurement or separate Payment will be made for this Work. All work under
Prices.

4.2 MLH - Technical Specifications - Phase 2A-1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4.2 MLH - Technical Specifications - Phase 2A-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TENDER DOCUMENTS FOR:

MILTON LOGISTICS HUB - PHASE 2A

SPEC. NUMBER: WS4169361118

AECOM FILE: 60579933

DATE: September 2023

ISSUED FOR TENDER

The reproduction of these tender documents in whole or in part without the

DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION

SECTION TITLE # OF PAGES

Annex "C" Instructions to Bidders ....................................................................................... 09

02631 Drainage Structures .................................................................................................................... 05

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL WORK

DIVISION 20 – MECHANICAL WORK

Annex “A” Form of Contract CN 3819 ...................................................................................... 12

1. Updated Consolidated Table of Mitigation Measures and Proponent Commitments

2. Final List of Approval Conditions

3. Water Well Decommissioning Plan

4. Draft Archaeological and Cultural Resources Protection Plan

5. Draft Wildlife Management and Connectivity Plan

6. Accident and Malfunction Response Plan Template

7. Draft Environmental Protection Plan

8. Draft Cultural Heritage Documentation: 5269 Tremaine Road, Milton, Ontario

9. AECOM Geotechnical and Hydrogeological Data Report

10. Designated Substances and Hazardous Building Materials Assessment Report

CN Milton Logistics Hub, Milton, Ontario

11. CN Fibre Optic Cable Conduits and Construction Guidelines

*** END OF INDEX***

.1 Canadian National Railway Company (“CN”) is planning to construct its Milton

.2 The Project has gone through an extensive federal environmental assessment

.3 Milton Logistics Hub construction is planned to be constructed in multiple

Time: September 21st @ 2PM (E.D.T)

Contact: Please confirm your intent to participate in the site visit by

Please submit your confirmation and personal name, e-mail, and

d) Before entering Railway property, the Contractor will be required to sign a CN

f) Upon submission of Tender documents, the Contractor acknowledges that they

7. Milestone 7: Demobilization and project closeout by November 30, 2025.

1 Pocket track - Track bed Two (2) Grading Crews

e) The schedule shall be based on the following restrictions:

d) Bonds so deposited will be returned to unsuccessful Tenderers after the Contract

c) CN Rail is working to obtain necessary approvals to ensure that project

It shall be a condition of the Acceptance of a Tender, whether so expressed in the

PERFORMANCE BOND and LABOUR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND

a) A Performance Bond of a Guarantee or Indemnity Company, approved by the

b) The acceptable form of a Performance Bond shall be Document Number CCDC

c) A Labour and Materials Payment Bond of a Guarantee or Indemnity Company,

i) Tenderers shall note that Certified Cheques, Government of Canada Bonds or

a) Preference in employment will be given to residents of Canada and preferably to

b) Any substitution of Sub-Contractors must be approved in writing by the Engineer.

i) Total Contract Price;

d) Qualifications of the Bidder may include consideration of the:

i) experience and present workload and capacity of the Bidders, their

g) Accepted alternates and equivalents may, at CN’s option, be considered in conjunction

i) Receipt of an invitation to bid by a Bidder or receipt and evaluation by CN of a Bid

Tenders submitted by faxmittal transmission will not be accepted.

a) All tenders must be submitted by Ariba. No other forms of submissions will be

a) If necessary, written instructions or explanations in the form of Addenda will be sent to

16 SAFETY PERFORMANCE RECORD IN THE EXECUTION OF CONSTRUCTION

b) No questions or requests for clarifications, changes or amendments to the Tender

c) All technical enquiries regarding clarification of drawings and specifications must

*** END OF SECTION ***

SPEC. NO. refers to the specifications listed in the index.

SCHEDULE OF PRICES by year

* END OF INDEX*

* END OF SECTION *

Yes _ No _

END OF FORM OF TENDER